Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

Authors Note: Instead of using authors notes in the middle of the chapter, I am going to be using footnotes. If you wish to read my thoughts or further explanation on things, then scroll down to the end of the chapter in order to read the footnotes.

Warning, this story will include everything from sexual abuse, assault, murder, inter species sex, incest and power abuse. My intention is to write the Naruto world as a much darker and rotten world, than in canon. There is also a ton of adultery and other shenanigans going on.

I won't mention the age of any anyone in the story as I prefer to have my readers use their imagination and decide on that themselves. They can be the same age as they would in the manga at the same timeline, or the academy age is raised to 18+. For safety though, everyone in this story, unless their age is specified to be something else, is 18 or older.

Chapter 1 - Prologue (Part 1)

Clan Days and Konoha's Founding

A little less than seventy years before Uzumaki Naruto started his ninja journey, one of the most powerful and respected ninja to have ever existed, was born. His name is Sarutobi Hiruzen. In history books, the re-telling of Sarutobi Hiruzen's life describes him as a very kind, respected and powerful ninja and leader of Konoha. Hiruzen's accomplishments on the battle field and his strategic and genius leadership, made him famous world wide, and it earned him the respectful nickname “The Ninja Professor”. While it's true that Hiruzen does deserve all the praise he receives written within Konoha's history books, not everything about Hiruzen's life is told in the history books. There are some things about his life that is not praise worthy and he would rather the history books not tell about that part of his life. To explain that, we have to take a look at Hiruzen's life, starting with how he grew up.

At a very young age, before he even started attending the ninja academy, Hiruzen started idolizing and looking up to two brothers who were members of the Senju clan. They were Senju Hashirama, the first hokage, and Senju Tobirama, who later on became the second hokage. Apart from Madara from the Uchiha clan, there were no ninja who came even close to them in terms of power and ninja skills. If you wanted to become the strongest ninja in the village, those two were the ones you had to surpass. The two Senju brothers must have seen something in Hiruzen as well, because after Hiruzen had nagged them both to train him for a while, they both agreed to become his teachers.

Hiruzen then became the apprentice of those two legendary ninja, before he even started attending the ninja school. As a result, he got to know the both of them a lot better, learning about some of their good sides, and some of their not so good sides. Their good sides were things that everyone already knew about, such as their incredible strength, Hashirama's kindheartedness, Tobirama's ability to get things done no matter what, and both being great and respected leaders.

When it came to their bad sides, most of those things were not common knowledge, with an exception for Tobirama's hatred of the Uchiha clan. That side of him was something that was even written about in the history books. What was not written in the history books, was the fact that both of them were incredibly popular with the women in Konoha. They were so popular with the ladies that they could have anyone they wanted, whenever they wanted, even if that woman was already the girlfriend or the wife of another man. Being popular with the ladies would normally not be something bad, but the reason why Hiruzen calls it one of their bad sides, is because they didn't hesitate when it came to taking advantage of their popularity.

It became a contest between the two Senju brothers, to see who could take the most lovers and who could sleep with the most women in one night, who could steal the most women from other men, and so on. The two of them were without a doubt degenerate sex addicts, who had little to no care about the consequences of what they did. All they cared about was getting stronger and getting laid, preferably with a new woman every night. The way they acted, wasn't common knowledge, but it if it were, it would be a night and day difference from their otherwise stain free reputation. In the history books, they are mainly told to be almost Godlike ninja, who did everything they could to protect the village.

If Hiruzen overlooked the part where they hooked up with women who were already with other men, Hiruzen wouldn't have counted their sex addiction as something negative. The problem was that there was a lot more to the story than just that. For starters, Hashirama was married to a woman by the name of Uzumaki Mito, during all that time. She was a part of this whole mess as well. That was not only because she was married to Hashirama, who constantly cheated on her, but also because she was just like the two Senju brothers. Uzumaki Mito was a very alluring and flirty woman, who Hiruzen would describe as a nymphomaniac, above all nymphomaniacs, who made other nymphomaniacs look like nuns in comparison.

Hashirama and Mito met long before they got married. They even met each other before Konoha was founded. Back then, during the clan days, Mito was married to a man who was the leader of the Uzumaki clan at that point, Uzumaki Ashina. She and Ashina had a child together, who would become the new Uzumaki clan leader, many years later. Mito's son then had a few children of his own, one of which was a very beautiful young girl, with long red hair, who also ended up in Konoha. Her name was Uzumaki Kushina. Kushina is someone who Hiruzen got to know very well later on in life.

Long before Mito's son became the new clan leader, and even longer before Kushina was born, Mito and Ashina would often have meetings with their closest allies, the Senju clan. Sometimes the Senju clan would travel with a party to an island, located south east of the Land of Fire, where the Uzumaki clan had it's own hidden ninja village, the Whirlpool Village (Village Hidden by Whirling Tides). Their hidden village was formed long before the hidden village of Konoha was formed. That means that the Uzumaki's, who had a whole ninja village and island for themselves, were considered a lot more powerful and dangerous back then, compared to clans in the Land of Fire, who operated alone.

The Uzumaki's were feared and envied for several reasons. It wasn't that the Uzumaki's were feared because they were powerful fighters, instead it was due to what Uzumaki's were able to do with their sealing techniques. The Uzumaki clan were the best seal users the Elemental Nations had ever seen, and they were able to do things with seals that other ninja could only dream of. Easily sealing away a powerful chakra monster, like the tailed beasts, is one of them. The source of envy came from the Uzumaki clan members all being born with incredibly large chakra reserves and greater stamina than other people. They were also born with self healing abilities, which would heal wounds that weren't life threatening, in a very short amount of time. This healing ability is the main reason why Uzumaki Mito and Kushina, later on became “Jinchuriki's” (Human Sacrifices), who had the nine tailed fox sealed inside of them. They would be able to survive an extraction of the tailed beast, unlike other humans.

Lastly, they also lived a much longer life than a normal human, and they aged much slower as well.

An Uzumaki who is in their thirties or forties, often doesn't look much older than he or she would if they were still in their early twenties, or someone in their late teens. By the time an Uzumaki is around 60-70 years of age, they will start appearing as if they are in their thirties. Once they reach the age of 100, they will start to look middle aged. By the time they reach the ages between 130 and 200, they finally start looking old, although still a lot younger than their actual age. Most Uzumaki live to be somewhere between 150-200 years old, unless they are killed in battle or as a result of a disease, or something along those lines.

When Mito first met Hashirama, she was in her fifties, but still had the appearance of someone who was in her mid twenties. Hashirama in turn, was still a young man, who was the same age as someone who would have been a senior in the ninja academy, in the Konoha of present times. Mito met Hashirama and his brother, Tobirama, during one of their clan meetings at the Whirlpool Village. It is Hiruzen's understanding of events, that Mito and Hashirama took a liking to one another very early on, and started sneaking out to see each other, in secret. Hiruzen were also told that Hashirama were no longer a virgin, by the time the meeting was over and the Senju clan left the Whirlpool Village to return to the Land of Fire.

The two of them had started an affair, which would continue every time they saw each other, which in turn, was about two times a year, for about a week each time. Most of the time it would be the Senju clan visiting the Uzumaki's, but a few times the Uzumaki's would come visit them in the Land of Fire as well. The latter scenario was mostly due to Mito nagging her husband for them to go on a trip to the Land of Fire. Her husband were always none the wiser, when it came to their affair. He didn't find out about it until Mito divorced him, a week after Konoha was formed, many years later. She then traveled to Konoha to marry Hashirama instead, leaving behind Ashina and their son back in the Whirlpool Village.

Ashina was obviously sad and heartbroken when he learned of it. He wasn't going to let this ruin their alliance and cooperation with the Senju clan though. They still needed them for protection, in case one of the other newly formed hidden ninja villages, decided to declare war against them. What Ashina did as a result, was that he came up with a lie, a lie that the public believed and is written in all the history books. His lie was that he and his wife divorced as a result of him meeting a younger Uzumaki woman. Mito was then offered to the Senju clan, to marry Hashirama, to strengthen the bonds between the two great ninja villages. He made it seem like it was just a political marriage, instead of a heartbreaking affair, in his case. Mito and Hashirama had no objections to Ashina's lies being spread, as they were just happy to be together. Especially Mito, who had more reasons than just being in love with Hashirama, to be in Konoha.

If Mito's story had ended there, then you could almost describe the way she and Hashirama got together to be romantic or poetic, as not even marriage could keep them away from each other. The story did not end there though, and a lot of important things are still left out of the story. For starters, Mito did not just fall in love with Hashirama when the Senju clan first visited them, she also fell in love with his brother, Tobirama. Whenever she wasn't sneaking around with Hashirama, she would be with Tobirama instead. In other words, she had been cheating on Hashirama from the start. That meant that she was hardly a victim, when Hashirama did the same thing to her, later on in their marriage.

When Konoha was formed, their affair continued, as Tobirama would sleep together with Mito whenever Hashirama was out on a mission, or was busy working in the hokage office. At this point, Hashirama already had a harem of willing women, who would satisfy his every need and do anything to please him. He also got to sleep with Mito whenever he wanted as well, so there wasn't really any reason to feel sorry for him either.

Hiruzen got caught up in their mess around the same time that he started his second year in the ninja academy. At this point, he had already been trained under Tobirama and Hashirama's guidance for a few years, and he idolized and looked up to them more than ever. He wanted to be just like them, in pretty much all regards. That includes having hordes of women as lovers, just like they did. He wanted to become the strongest ninja in Konoha and have a harem of beautiful women of his own some day. That was Hiruzen's dream when he was younger.

At the start of his second school year, Hiruzen could never guess just how similar to his teachers, that he would end up becoming. After leaving school that day, Tobirama asked him to go to Hashirama's home, to help Mito with some chores. Instead of doing chores, Hiruzen were dragged into the woman's bedroom. He lost his virginity that day and gained his first lover, out of many to come. The Uzumaki woman had made a man out of him, and given him a memory that he would never forget, and would always look back on fondly. That day was something Hiruzen could only describe as magical, or maybe extremely dirty, hot, passionate and erotic. The same goes for all the other times they hooked up, which was something they did a lot, especially whenever Tobirama or Hashirama wasn't around.

Mito remained as his lover for about a decade, which was around the time that Hiruzen became a jounin. Back then, Hiruzen didn't know why it had stopped so abruptly, especially since Hashirama had unfortunately passed away in battle a few years earlier, which meant that Mito only had Tobirama to cheat on now. All Mito told him when she put and end to their affair, was that he was “no longer her type”.

Hiruzen did not feel sad about it having ended for very long though, as he soon thereafter met his future wife, Biwako. It wasn't until many years later, when Mito was not only very old, she also appeared her age as well, that she told Hiruzen why she had ended their affair. She didn't have much time left, and she was about to let the nine tailed fox be sealed into another, much younger Uzumaki instead. Uzumaki Kushina was the young Uzumaki who would be burdened with becoming the new Jinchuriki. Before Mito had the fox removed, she told Hiruzen about her life, explaining all the strange things about her past.

She just wanted to clear the air, by telling someone who was around back then, what was really going on. That was how he found out about how she met and fell in love with the two Senju brothers. Hiruzen also learned that he was not her last lover, as she had invited countless genin aged young men into her bedroom, after the two of them stopped being lovers.

It all started making sense to Hiruzen after hearing her story. He now understood what she meant by “you are no longer my type”. The Uzumaki nymphomaniac was not only a cheater, she had a thing for younger guys as well. She was a sex addict who may have been worse than both the Senju brothers combined.

Hashirama never learned of his wife's affairs before he passed, but he probably wouldn't have cared so much about it anyway. He was a very carefree and positive individual, and he also had hundreds of lovers on the side. Tobirama most likely knew that she was sleeping with Hiruzen, but he may not have known about all the others. Tobirama passed away five years after Hiruzen was promoted to jounin. After Tobirama passed, it was time for Hiruzen to take up the mantle of being the hokage.

The First Great Ninja War

When Hiruzen became a jounin, his life changed a lot. One of the changes were the already established change of him and Mito having stopped being lovers. Another change was that he met and start dating a beautiful young brunette kunoichi, whose name was Biwako. Biwako was the complete opposite to Mito, as she would never commit adultery and partake in any immoral sex gatherings or sex acts, such as orgies, group sex or swinging.

She was a very loyal and kind woman, who Hiruzen loved very much. The one thing that she had in common with Mito, was that she was without a doubt a nymphomaniac as well. Although, she wasn't as wild and fun in bed as the older Uzumaki woman had been. Biwako being a sex loving nymphomaniac, was what sealed the deal for Hiruzen, when it came to his decision to ask her to marry him.

At this point in time, Hiruzen were stronger than ever and his popularity among jounin and chuunin kunoichi colleagues, was equal to that of Tobirama's and Hashirama's popularity with the female village population in the past. He was a very sought after man, who a lot of women wanted for themselves. Publicly, Biwako ended up being the one that Hiruzen choose to marry and he was now taken and was no longer on the dating market. Secretly, that was not the case at all. He still wished to be just like his teachers, in almost every single way. As a result, he took advantage of his popularity and slept with any attractive kunoichi that he would team up with while out missions.

Hiruzen was looking for women who were as wild and fun as Mito had been in bed. Even better if they were nymphomaniacs like her as well. When he went out missions, he started asking girls that were assigned to the same team as him, in which he was often the leader of, due to his excellency in the ninja arts, to have sex with him. It wasn't an order, it was just him asking. He did it the same way that Hashirama and Tobirama always invited their hordes of women to have sex. They never forced anyone, or ordered anyone, they only slept with those that did it willingly. The willing ones were the majority of the ones being invited to have sex them.

Hiruzen asked his colleagues the same way, as he as well wouldn't force someone or order them to have sex with him. There weren't many who said no, resulting in Hiruzen taking many lovers while out missions, during his years as a jounin. It was also during this time that Hiruzen learned that the things that happened in the past, involving his deceased teachers and his former lover, with their constant cheating and affairs, was not something that was unique just for them. It was so normal among the people active in the ninja force, that you could almost say that it was the norm to cheat. Especially when you are out on missions. There is an old saying in Konoha, which goes “what happens on a mission, stays on the mission”.

When Hiruzen was back in the village, his infidelity didn't stop, since when he didn't spend the night with his wife, making love to her, he would often be out all night, with the most common excuse to his wife back then being, that he was having important meetings with Tobirama Senju, who was the hokage at the time.

This continued when Hiruzen eventually became the hokage, a title which he held for several decades. He became the hokage five years after becoming a jounin, due to Tobirama passing away, after he had protected Hiruzen and his other teammates during the first great ninja war. Tobirama sacrificed himself, stalling their enemies, allowing Hiruzen and his teammates, Danzo, Koharu and Homura, to retreat back to the village. Tobirama's last action as their hokage, was to hand over the hokage hat to Hiruzen, making him the third hokage.

As the hokage, instead of being the leader of just his teammates and good friends, he now was the commanding officer to the whole ninja force. This meant that Hiruzen was now able to easily contact and get information about every single active kunoichi in the village. That in turn lead to Hiruzen asking any kunoichi, who he was attracted to, if they wanted to have sex with him. Considering that Konoha has always been full of beautiful kunoichi, Hiruzen had a very large pool to choose from. Just like when he was a jounin asking his teammates for sex, most of his subordinates accepted to have sex with him when he was the hokage as well. As the hokage, he also had a lot more believable excuses to tell his wife, such as emergencies and important meetings that would keep him in his office late into the nights.

There sure were a lot of “emergencies” that Hiruzen had to deal with during his time as the hokage, at least as far as his wife was concerned. As for if she actually knew what was going on? Hiruzen doesn't know for sure, but he suspects she may have known the truth all along. She never brought it up or complained about it though, and the love he had for her was real. He didn't leave her sexually unsatisfied either, as he took very good care of his wife, satisfying her every needs.

The years he and Mito had been lovers, Mito had taught Hiruzen so much about what women likes in bed, that he considered himself to be a master in the sexual arts. Since most the women he sleeps with always comes back for more, and they would also usually spread rumors about his excellency in bed to other women, Hiruzen knows that he is at least doing something right in bed. He is very confident in his ability to make a girl feel good, often giving them series of multiple orgasms, while he makes love to them. During the early years of Hiruzen's reign as the hokage, he had yet to find a woman who were even close to as wild and fun in bed, as Mito had been. He will search for a woman like that for as long as it takes though.

Other than finding women to have fun with in bed, Hiruzen had a few more goals which were a bit more respectable than that. For starters, he wants to avoid any further wars at all costs. During the first great ninja war, he had witnessed the worst kinds of atrocities that people could commit against other people. Pointless murder, sexual abuse, assaults and humiliating acts, Hiruzen had seen it all. It was the kind of things that Hiruzen didn't wish on any person, not even his worst enemies.

Ninja's who were defeated on the battle field, would be nothing short of lucky, if they were to be killed, especially if you were a kunoichi. Most of the times the the winners of the battles would take their time to have their way with their defeated enemies, before killing them. Kunoichi getting raped was a given, especially if they were attractive. That was not the worst part of it though, as defeated ninja would often be used for entertainment, by performing the most humiliating and vile acts, or get tortured in the most twisted ways you can imagine. Then if they were lucky, they would get killed. If they were not lucky, their enemies would take them captive, to be used as sex slaves or for future entertainment, by being humiliated and tortured over and over again.

Kunoichi had it worse, for several reasons. The first being that there are a lot more male shinobi then there are female kunoichi, who fight in wars. The second being that women are usually a lot more compassionate and forgiving, than men are. There does exist a good amount of evil and twisted kunoichi who are no different from the worst of men as well, though. Hiruzen had seen it for himself, and he had heard many stories which would give most people nightmares.

One of the worst things he had seen in his life, was something that happened to a former classmate of his. The classmate was a girl from the Uchiha clan, who had the most beautiful eyes that Hiruzen had ever seen at that point. Her name was Uchiha Temari, and she was Hiruzen's first crush. He never had a chance to confess his feelings for her, due to Mito snatching him up for herself, before he had a chance to tell her. After they graduated, Temari and her new genin team were assigned to head out on a simple C rank mission. That simple C rank mission couldn't have gone more wrong, as she and her team were ambushed by an unknown group of enemies. Her teammates and her jounin teacher were killed and left behind at the scene, while Temari went missing. This happened before the first great ninja war, when the Elemental Nations were still enjoying “peaceful” times.

No one heard anything about Temari after that, for over thirteen years. It was assumed that she had been killed as well, shortly after the others. Never could Hiruzen imagine what had actually happened to her. Thirteen years after she went missing, he found her in the cellar of a large palace within a compound in the middle of the desert of the Wind Country. That palace and compound belonged to one of the Wind country's daimyo's (lords). When he found her, some of the men working for the daimyo were in the middle of abusing her, in both a torturous and humiliating way. What he saw, and what he eventually heard from her, once she told him the full story, changed Hiruzen. She has had things done to her which Hiruzen didn't think people were capable of doing to another person. (1).

After freeing Temari and the other fifty or so girls and women, one of which was Temari's daughter, who she had given birth to while in captivity, Hiruzen took them all back to safety. With the help of nearby villages within The Land of River, he was able to get most of them back to their families. The others who they couldn't identify any family members of, was taken back to Konoha where they could live a safe and free life for as long as they wish. Temari and her daughter, who sadly had also been abused, were both brought to Konoha as well. Hiruzen brought Temari back to Konoha, even though she had begged him to leave her behind, so that she could end her own life.

Hiruzen refused to let her kill herself. After returning her to Konoha, Temari spent years at the Konoha's hospital, mainly being treated for mental health issues, caused by all the abuse she had to endure for all those years. A few years after her return to Konoha, she showed incredible strength that really impressed Hiruzen. She started living a normal life again, together with her daughter. She was able to live a peaceful life, living in a sizable house within the Uchiha clan compound. She lived long enough to see her daughter get married and later on give birth to Temari's grandson. Temari eventually passed away, of natural causes, a few years before the Uchiha massacre. Her grandson, Uchiha Obito, didn't have the easiest life either, but that is a story for another time.

The humiliation and torture which Temari had to endure, was among the worst things that Hiruzen had ever heard of back then, during the first great ninja war. The same could not be said about the kidnapping and sexual abuse that she also had to endure, due to that being something Hiruzen had gotten used to hearing about, or seeing for himself during the war. He had freed thousands of girls and women, who had been kidnapped or taken captive, just like Temari. The strong, powerful and wealthy, prayed on the weak. Even peaceful village people, who had nothing to do with these wars, were not safe from these horrors.

Other than the sexual crimes, kidnappings and torture, another obvious negative part of war is the many lives lost. All five great ninja villages had lost so many ninja after just one great ninja war, that Hiruzen couldn't help but think, just how many more lives are going to be lost the next time?

It's because of these hideous crimes, and all the lives lost, that Hiruzen wants to do everything in his power to prevent further wars from happening again. He is very aware that he will not be able to prevent wars from happening on his own, but he can at least do whatever is within his power, to better this rotten world a little. He would do so, starting with Konoha and his own ninja force, where there is a lot that can be done as well.

One of the first actions Hiruzen took when he became the hokage, was to outlaw torture and sexual abuse of their enemies. The only exception to that law was for the members of the torture and interrogation force, who still could use any means necessary, to interrogate their prisoners. What this law was meant to stop, was Konoha's own bad apples, disgusting men and women, who abused their defeated enemies for no other reason than their own pleasure and entertainment. Some of them even abused their own teammates as well, using the old saying “What happens on a mission, stays on the mission” as an excuse. Sadly, their teammates wouldn't even report them, due to them also living by that creed. This should have been a law which should have existed already, most would argue.

That was not the case due to Konoha not really being any better than the rest of the ninja villages, apart from a select few clans, who wouldn't let shit like that slide either. The Nara clan is one of them, and they even invented the world “Troublesome”, after hearing about all the degeneracy going on. Hashirama would have most likely wanted this law to exist, but most likely got push back from some of the clans that had just joined the newly formed village. Tobirama on the other hand, were a lot more ruthless than Hashirama. He couldn't care less about what happened to their enemies. He also had an unhealthy hatred for the Uchiha clan, and most likely wished all their clan members suffered similar fates as their enemies.

Hiruzen didn't create this new law to prevent his ninja force from killing, since that is something that will always be a part of wars, and even most ninja battles. It's the unnecessary abuse and humiliation before it, that he wanted to get rid of. Hiruzen got all clans of the village behind him, supporting him in his decision to create this new law. But just because every clan leader supported him, that didn't mean that some ninjas within their clans were completely against the new law. There were actually a large number of ninjas within the active ninja force, who Hiruzen would refer to as “bad apples” or “scum”. Those bad apples were the ones that gave Konoha a bad reputation, and made their enemies hate them even more.

Their enemies were no different though, they were just as bad, or even worse. After the first great ninja war, Hiruzen started removing the “bad apples” from the ninja force, by either throwing them in prison or just revoking their Konoha ninja status, whenever they were caught breaking the new law. While Hiruzen tried his best to clean up his ninja force, other ninja villages wanted revenge. They hated Konoha due to what happened during the war, where Konoha won major victories, mostly thanks to the two Senju brothers and Hiruzen. As a result, Konoha ninja always had a target on their back, especially Konoha kunoichi.

Ninja's from the other villages would pretty much always rape, kill or kidnap any Konoha ninja who they defeated. The only good thing that has come out of these awful circumstances, is that the overall strength of Konoha's ninja force has improved. The weak part of the ninja force would be taken out quickly, while only the strong with great potential remain. It's an awful way to look at things, but it is an awful reality that they live in. Due to these circumstances, Konoha's kunoichi had to become stronger in order to protect themselves. There was one kunoichi, who stood out from everyone else, as she showed the others that kunoichi could become just as, if not more, powerful than men. She happened to be one of Hiruzen's students.

A few years after Hiruzen became the third hokage of Konoha, he surprised the higher ups in the village when he told them that he wished to teach a genin team, consisting of three freshly graduated genin from the ninja academy. He told them that he saw a lot of potential in all three of them, and was convinced that all three of them could surpass even him, if he was allowed to train them. After hearing that, there were no complaints from the higher ups about him taking on a genin team, even if that meant that someone else would have to stand in for Hiruzen sometimes, to do his hokage work for him, while he is out on missions with his students.

While what Hiruzen had told them was part of the truth, it wasn't the full truth, as is often the case. He had selfish reasons to take on this team as well. Senju Tsunade is one of three students that he wants to teach. She is the granddaughter of Hashirama and Mito, meaning that not only is she related to Hiruzen's former lover, she is also part Uzumaki. After sleeping with countless women over the years, without finding anyone who resembled Mito in bed, Hiruzen had a theory about Uzumaki women being the ones who are special in bed. Maybe they are all as wild and fun as Mito had been? Hiruzen couldn't know for sure, but he sure as hell wouldn't mind finding out, as long as Tsunade was game. It didn't hurt that Tsunade was a rare beauty, who later became known as the princess of Konoha, either.

That was actually a nickname which she was first given by Hashirama and Tobirama, as the two of them would always call her that, while they also spoiled her to no end, giving her anything she wanted. Tsunade never understood the value of money due to that, and as a result started gambling with her money, later in life.

The Second Great Ninja War

The first day Hiruzen met his new genin team, they had introduced themselves before Hiruzen gave them their genin test, which was the good old bell test. Two of them passed with flying colors, while one of them had failed miserably, acting like a clown while doing so. Tsunade and Orochimaru were the ones that had passed, working together to steal a bell each from Hiruzen. They are also the reasons why the team had passed the genin test, since the two of them had showed amazing skills and good use of teamwork.

Jiraiya was the one that failed miserably, as he challenged Hiruzen to a one on one battle, which ended with Jiraiya losing in a humiliating and rather comical way, before being tied up to a wooden post. Hiruzen choose to pass him as well, mainly because he had high hopes for this team, but also because Jiraiya shared a certain personality trait with him. He is also a shameless pervert, and unlike Hiruzen, he does nothing to hide that from others. That's why he passed, because Hiruzen kinda digs his style. Jiraiya would later be the one who Hiruzen got along with the most, out of his three students. As for the other two, well..

Starting with Orochimaru, he may have been a ninja genius, who had the potential to become just as strong as Hiruzen one day, but he was also probably the weirdest guy that Hiruzen has ever spoken to. The guy didn't talk much, but when he did, he said the strangest and rudest things you could imagine. He was an anti-social weirdo, in Hiruzen's opinion. Often when he opened his mouth, it was to insult one of his teammates, telling them that they were lacking in skills or lacking in something else. The only times he didn't piss off his teammates, was whenever he kept his mouth shut.

Then lastly, there is Hiruzen's third student, Tsunade, who is the the main reason why he wanted to become their teacher in the first place. She had shown excellent skills during the test, and she had been very excited and energetic the whole day. She was also very polite for the bigger part of the day. But she showed another side of herself when Orochimaru out of nowhere, called her a “barbaric woman”, and Jiraiya started calling her “flat chest”, due to her having made fun of him for being tied up. That was a nickname that Tsunade hated more than anything, because she was very self aware of the fact that she had a very small chest. That was the first day that Hiruzen got to see just how violent Tsunade could be. The girl had a temper, that's for sure.

Seeing her stomp her two teammates into the ground, didn't scare Hiruzen enough not to ask her to stay behind, after Jiraiya and Orochimaru had left. He then proceeded to ask her if she wished to have sex with him, out here at the training grounds. A minute later, Hiruzen was on his way back to the village, to visit the hospital, in order to get his nose fixed. The beauty of the Senju clan had punched him in the face so hard, that she had broken his nose with one hit. She had then stomped off, leaving the training grounds, while voicing what she thought of Hiruzen.

“You ugly old lecher! Why would I ever want to do something like that with a disgusting old man like you? If you ever ask me something like that again, then I will..” she said in a threatening manner, clenching the same fist, which she had already broken his nose with. Hiruzen figured she was just playing hard to get, and thought that she might change her mind come tomorrow.

He found out the next day, that was not the case at all. Instead, he had to make another visit to the the hospital, this time to heal both a broken nose and several broken ribs. Still, Hiruzen didn't give up. He asked her the same thing every day he saw her, if he ever had a chance to speak with her alone, without Orochimaru and Jiraiya overhearing his shameless question. After a month, he made some progress, as Tsunade would stop attacking him in favor of completely ignoring him. A month after that, she started rolling her eyes at him, or look at him with a disgusted expression. Sadly for Hiruzen, he never made any further progress than that. Even today when he asks her the same question, the few times that they do run into each other, she will just roll her eyes at him, or show him her middle finger.

It later on became very apparent to him why Tsunade never accepted his invitations to have sex with him, which had a lot to do with him being “old and ugly”, which she often reminded him of. That's because Tsunade only had one guy on her mind from the start, meaning that Hiruzen never had a chance. This guy who had stolen her heart, was someone who Tsunade loved more than life itself. She would do anything for him, just like he would do anything for her. Unlike Hiruzen who is a lot older than Tsunade, the guy who she loves, is several years younger than her. The one in question is none other than her younger brother, Senju Nawaki.

When Tsunade had just graduated, which was when Hiruzen started bothering her with his constant invitations, Tsunade had not fallen in love with Nawaki yet. She still loved him, but just as any older sister would love a younger brother. It was pure innocent sibling love back then. Nawaki had just started his first year in the ninja academy as well, back then.

Tsunade's feelings for her brother changed about two years later. Tsunade suddenly had a ridiculous growth spurt, with her chest growing the most. She was now the owner of the biggest pair of knockers in all of Konoha, and most likely the Elemental Nations as well. That didn't go unnoticed by anyone, especially not her perverted teacher and teammate. Her younger brother didn't miss it either, as he would no longer keep eye contact with her whenever they spoke to each other, in favor of blatantly staring at her chest. It also just so happened, that Nawaki, being a Senju, was a bit of a pervert, just like his legendary ancestors.

The way he kept grinning perversely, while blatantly staring at her chest, melted her heart and she thought he was the cutest thing she had ever seen. Sometimes when she was working out at home, wearing tight and skimpy training clothes, she would notice him peeking on her, checking her out. At first she was annoyed, thinking she had to correct the little pervert's behavior, just like she corrected Jiraiya on a daily basis, with a hard punch to the nose. She never did though, as she didn't have it in her to actually strike her cute little brother. Instead she pretended that she never noticed him, and would instead just stop training for a while, until he lost interest. She would then resume her training when he had gotten bored and left her alone.

Then one day, Tsunade received some news from Nawaki, which was a big turning point. Nawaki had come home late that day, even later than Tsunade who had been training with her team all day. When asked what he had been up to, he showed her a cheeky smile, before telling her that he had been on a date with a female classmate. When Tsunade heard that, she completely froze.

“Nee-chan, what's wrong?” Nawaki asked in a worried tone, while rushing over to her. He saw her clench her fist, but otherwise didn't move.

“Nee-chan? Did I do something wrong?” Nawaki tried again, without getting any response.

While Tsunade stood there frozen, with her hand clenched into a fist, her mind was raising.

“Date.. Date.. Date..” she repeated in her mind “Is some little slut, trying to steal Nawaki-chan from me!? My cute younger brother!?” she thought, before finally moving.

“Nee-chan?” Nawaki said in a worried tone, watching her walk out to the backyard, in a robotic fashion. She then proceeded to punch her fist into a tree, completely decimating it.

“Crap!? I'm in trouble aren't I?” Nawaki said, shivering, while Tsunade turned around to face him. Surprisingly she did with a sweet smile, having returned somewhat to normal.

“A date huh? How wonderful” Tsunade said, with the same sweet smile, which unknowingly to Nawaki, was a very forced smile “What's your girlfriends name?”.

Nawaki breathed out in relief, realizing that he was safe for now “She is not my girlfriend, we have just been on one date so far”.

“And her name is?” Tsunade repeated, while still smiling the same way.

“Inuzuka Tsume-chan, she is a bit of a tomboy, but can be really sweet!” Nawaki said with a toothy grin.

“Inuzuka huh..” Tsunade said with an evil smirk “I would like to meet this wench sometime” she added, with a vein popping on her forehead.

“She's not a wench” Nawaki said with a frown “You're acting weird, Nee-chan. What's gotten into you?”.

“Hmpf!” Tsunade huffed, ignoring his question, favor of walking passed him, back into the house “Baka Nawaki!” she yelled, before rushing up the stairs, heading towards her bedroom. She left an even more confused Nawaki downstairs, while she laid down on her stomach on the bed, whining about her current misfortune.

“How did this happen!? Nawaki-chan belongs here with me! And now this stupid Inuzuka girl is taking him from me!” She sniffled out. After a while she calmed down, while sitting up in her bed. With a smirk on her pretty face, she said “You haven't won yet, I will prove to Nawaki-chan that I am the most suited to be his woman”.

From there on out, Tsunade's love for Nawaki changed from a sisterly love, to a love of the romantic kind. She had now realized that she was in fact in love with him, and that surprisingly, didn't bother her at all. Instead it just made her happy. The thought of being together with him like that, warmed her heart. But more importantly, she was now determined to gain his affection, and make sure that she doesn't lose him to Inuzuka Tsume. With that thought, she changed into a much skimpier outfit. She now only wore a pair of skin tight blue shorts, and a very skimpy and small white stomach shirt. Her white stomach shirt didn't do much to cover anything but half her breasts, and a tiny portion of her upper waist. In other words, she was showing a ton of cleavage.

Wearing her new outfit, she headed downstairs to begin a training session, in the living room. Soon enough, Nawaki was standing in the doorway, peeking on her like always, just like Tsunade had expected. This time, Tsunade did not stop training when he arrived, instead she got down on all fours, raising her butt up, before doing very slow push ups. Nawaki had a perfect view of her tight round ass, while she did her push ups, which Tsunade was very aware of. That was the whole point of this. What Tsunade did not expect to happen, was what Nawaki did after a minute of watching her. He had ran up to hair, then spanked her ass, while yelling “Nice ass, nee-chan!”. He then giggled as he ran upstairs to hide in his bedroom.

Tsunade lost her balance, falling down on the ground, landing on her stomach. She had a dumbfounded expression, while thinking “What just happened? Did that perverted little brat really spank my ass just now?”

While Tsunade had ventured down here to the first floor, with the intention of putting on a show for Nawaki, teasing him a little bit, she could never imagine that he had the balls to do something like that. Sure, he has always been a bit carefree, and somewhat of a knucklehead, but he of all people should know how Tsunade handles perverts. She thought it was her duty as his older sister, to teach him that he shouldn't be treating fine ladies like herself, that way.

With a smirk, Tsunade got up on her feet, before heading upstairs. She then entered Nawaki's bedroom, finding him laying in his bed, mostly hiding under his quilt, but his head was peeking out, looking at the door.

“GAH-AH!” Nawaki exclaimed in fear, before bouncing up, to stand on top of the bed. He struck a fighting pose, glaring at Tsunade “You begged for it, Nee-chan! Pointing your ass at me like that!”.

“You little pervert” Tsunade said with a playful smile. She wasn't fooling Nawaki though, he thought she was just acting, and was sure that she had come here just to punch him through the wall.

“Stand back, Nee-chan!” Nawaki yelled with his fists raised.

Tsunade giggled, while walking over to the bed “Don't worry, I am going to let that slide this time”.

“You are?” Nawaki asked with a very confused expression.

Tsunade nodded “Uh-huh. Your birthday is in a week, and it would be a shame if you had to spend your birthday with broken legs, arms and ribs, wouldn't it?” she said in a rather dangerous tone, while showing him that sweet smile again. Nawaki started to realize just what that smile meant. It was a bad sign, to see her smile like that, as she was most likely pissed off. That meant that she was probably pissed off earlier as well.

Nawaki gulped “Y-yeah, it would” he said nervously.

Tsunade smiled the same way, while crackling the knuckles on her fingers “Instead, I would like you to think of something that you want for your birthday. Think long and hard of what you want, because it might be the last thing you ever get” she spoke through gritted teeth “You perverted brat!” she added in anger, before surprising Nawaki with her next action. She leaned over and planted a kiss on his forehead, before leaving his room.

Nawaki was stunned, as he watched her close the door behind him. But he wouldn't let her fool him. He figured she was just playing tricks with his mind, as he shivered in fear, before going into hiding under his quilt again. He thanked the ninja Gods that he had gotten away with what he did, without her breaking any of his bones as a result. Even if she did, it would have been totally worth it. God damn, if she didn't have a nice ass. With those thoughts, Nawaki fell asleep, with a shit eating grin on his face.

Due to how Tsunade had just threatened him that night, Nawaki was certain that he only had one week left to live. As a result, he avoided Tsunade as much as he could, since he didn't want to do anything to piss her off again, which could shorten his young life even more. Normally this was something that Tsunade would think was unacceptable, for Nawaki to avoid her. But she had big plans for his birthday, so she waited patiently for that day to arrive.

Nawaki's birthday did eventually arrived, a week after that incident. It started out normally with Tsunade cooking breakfast for him in the morning. She made him waffles with jam and cream. Since Tsunade and Nawaki lives alone together, due to both their parents have suffered the same fate as most of the Senju clan, which was them passing away in battle, Tsunade is always the one cooking, if she has the time for it.

After breakfast, Nawaki's day continued like normal, starting with him going to school. Tsunade spent her day training with her teammates, who both noticed that something seemed off with Tsunade. She wasn't being her usual energetic and excited self, instead she seemed rather timid and nervous. Tsunade refused to tell them why, since the reason she acted that way, was that she was very nervous about what she had planned for tonight.

After training, Tsunade bought food at a sushi restaurant, which she brought back home. Sushi is Nawaki's favorite food, so she bought it for them to have as dinner, since it's his birthday. When she came back to the their house within the Senju clan, Nawaki was standing in the hall way. He was bowing his head, while holding up a letter “Nee-chan, here are all the reasons why you shouldn't kill me. Please read it!” he begged.

Tsunade rolled her eyes “Put that thing away, you won't escape your fate that easily” she said, before smacking the letter out of his hands. She then smiled brightly at him “Let's eat! I got you sushi!”.

“Sweet!! Thanks, nee-chan!!” Nawaki said, drooling at the sight of his favorite food, instantly having forgotten about his worries of his life soon ending.

While they were eating dinner, Nawaki couldn't help but notice that Tsunade was missing something.

“Am I not getting a present from you this year?” Nawaki asked, pouting while chewing a piece of sushi.

“You are getting two presents this year” Tsunade said with a mischievous smile.

“Oh?” Nawaki exclaimed in excitement “Usually you just get me one!”.

Tsunade nodded “I did get you one, but I also told you to think really hard about something you would like me to give you”.

“Oh yeah..” Nawaki said with a cheeky grin “I kinda forgot, because I was busy worrying all week, thinking you were gonna kill me today”

Tsunade sighed, then shook her head “I would never harm you, Nawaki-kun”.

“-kun?” Nawaki asked with a raised eyebrow.

Tsunade nodded with a bright smile “I think you are too old for me to still use the '-chan' suffix for you. '-kun' suits you a lot better”.

“Okay” Nawaki said with a raised eyebrow “I don't mind that, you can call me whatever you want as long as you don't beat me up for what I did to you last week”.

“Last week?” Tsunade said with that sweet smile of hers, which was now a smile that terrified Nawaki.

“I already forgot about that” Tsunade said, while nonchalantly throwing a piece of sushi into her mouth. Nawaki didn't know what to respond to that, he was just happy that she seemed to have forgiven him.

After dinner, Tsunade told Nawaki that she would take a bath, before she would give him his presents. She asked him to wait for him in his bedroom.

About fifteen minutes later, she came into his bedroom, only wearing a big over sized white t-shirt, which went down to her thighs, and a pair of black panties. Nawaki who sat on his bed, couldn't see her panties, and just assumed she was wearing shorts together with that t-shirt. What he did take notice of though, was the lack of a present, yet again.

“Ready for your presents?” Tsunade asked, grinning.

Nawaki nodded “Yeah..” he said, while wondering where she kept the presents. He feared that his two presents, were going to be two punches or something.

Tsunade sat down on his bed next to him, then said “First, let's start with the present you want me to give you. The one I asked you to think about”.

Nawaki laughed sheepishly, while scratching the back of his head “I told you earlier, didn't I? I kinda forgot about that..”.

“Think of something now then, I'm sure there is something I can give you, or” Tsunade tugged at the collar of her T-shirt, pulling it down a little bit “Show you” she said, staring intently at her younger brother.

“Hehehe” Nawaki giggled perversely “Since I know that your second present is most likely you punching me through the wall, I have nothing to lose”.

“Yeah?” Tsunade said licking her lips “Then tell me what you want, Nawaki-kun” she added, staring at him with an expression of pure lust.

“Nee-chan!” Nawaki said, standing up in the bed, before screaming at the top of his loungs “Can I touch your titties!?”.

Nawaki was completely red faced, keeping his eyes closed, awaiting the incoming inhumanly strong punches. But they never came. Instead, he heard his sister giggle “Okay, but I don't think you can touch them from up there. Sit down again”.

“Huh?” Nawaki asked, before flopping down on the bed again “Are you sure?” he asked.

“Thirty seconds” Tsunade said, while scooting closer to him “That's all you get, before I give you your second present. Make the most out of it, because what I will do to your afterwards, will change you forever” she said with an evil smile.

Nawaki gulped, while staring at the large melons in front of him. Even though she wore that T-shirt, he could see the shape of them, and the shape of her nipples. He figured this was a test or something, or her baiting him into doing something stupid, just so that she could punish him later on. He just didn't care. This was an opportunity that he may never get again in his life. He had his big sisters perfect titties in front of him, and within his grasp. Without hestitation, Nawaki grabbed her breasts, with his fingers digging into the soft flesh of her huge melons.

“Mmhm!” Tsunade moaned, while biting her lip. Nawaki avoided eye contact, while he focused on moving his hands to grab and play as much as he could with them, while he still had time. He really went at it, groping her aggressively.

“Time's up!” Tsunade said, while still biting her lip.

Nawaki didn't stop when he heard that, he continued to grope her chest, while looking as if he was in some kind of trance like state. Tsunade then scooted back, while lightly pushing Nawaki away, because he followed her, trying to dig his fingers into the soft flesh again

“Damn, those thirty seconds went by too fast” Nawaki said after having snapped out of it. He then laid down on his back and sighed “Okay, I can die happy now. It was totally worth it. You can kill me now, nee-chan”.

Nawaki then closed his eyes. Soon thereafter, he felt a pressure on his waist. He opened his eyes to find Tsunade on top of him, straddling him.

She stared at him with such an alluring and beautiful expression, that Nawaki found it hard not to blush. Tsunade then pulled her T-shirt over her head, exposing the twins that Nawaki had just groped, for his eyes to see.

“Nee-chan!?” Nawaki exclaimed in surprise.

“I told you I was going to change your life forever, didn't I?” Tsunade said, with a noticeable blush.

“Y-yeah” Nawaki responded nervously, while blushing “H-how are you going to do that?”.

Tsunade didn't respond for a while, before she leaned down, to stare into his eyes, with their faces close. She then whispered “By giving you your present..”.

“Is this my present?” Nawaki asked, while his hands returned to her chest, groping away at them.

“Ah..” Tsunade moaned “No, I am your present. I am giving myself to you, and I am going to change you forever by making love to you! From now on you're no longer my cute little brother, you are my man!” she exclaimed before she kissed him, wasting no time to get her tongue inside his mouth, for a hot and wet french kiss.

That evening was the start of Tsunade and Nawaki's secret incestuous relationship. In public they were still brother and sister, back home they were lovers, who had sex whenever they had free time. They did it all over the house when they were alone, and Tsunade allowed Nawaki to make all his perverted dreams come true. She did everything for him, and she loved it. Some of Nawaki's most perverted requests made Tsunade discover her love for two things. The first was her love of sucking cock, which was something she would do every chance she could, when she was alone with Nawaki. It didn't matter where they were, if she saw an opportunity to get his cock inside her mouth for a while, then she would do just that. The other thing that she enjoyed, was the taste of cum and drinking cum. She couldn't get enough of it, and always sucked up every single drop of Nawaki's cum.

Needless to say, Nawaki never went on any more dates with Tsume after he and Tsunade got together, or any other girl for that matter. The two of them had planned out how they would live together for the rest of their lives. First they would keep their relationship secret, while they continue their ninja work as they had been. Both of them still had dreams that they wanted to reach, such as both of them wanting becoming the next hokage. Tsunade also had aspirations to become the best possible medical ninja that she could be. She always thought it was a shame that Konoha never had any reliable medical ninja out on the battle fields, they could have saved so many lives during the first great ninja war.

They also shared a mutual dream of starting a family together. Tsunade wanted a lot of children, who would become the future of their clan. She also couldn't help but think that it would be very fun to have several little Tsunade's and Nawaki's running around. They both agreed that they would first try to reach their dreams as ninja, before they would start trying to get Tsunade pregnant. Nawaki wanted to earn himself a promotion to jounin first, at the very least.

A few years later, Tsunade and Nawaki were still together in their secret relationship. At this point in time, Nawaki had already graduated and was one of the genins who people looked forward to see fight in the next chuunin exams. He was at the top of his class, when he graduated. Tsunade on the other hand is already one of Konoha's most powerful and well respected jounin. The same goes for her two teammates, who may be even stronger fighters than herself. She was no pushover in a fight though, and her main skills as a ninja, was her medical skills. She was now regarded as the best medical ninja and doctor in all of Konoha, along with being the strongest kunoichi alive.

It was around this time that Tsunade and Nawaki had started getting a lot more daring with their relationship. They had almost been caught in the act several times, by Tsunade's teammates, or Nawaki's friends. In order to prevent any rumors spreading about them, Tsunade thought up a plan to prevent that. It involved her dating someone else, someone who she would be able to easily deceive, in order to make him believe that their relationship was real. Because it wouldn't be real at all, it was going to be a completely fake relationship, that served as front for Tsunade, hiding her real relationship.

During a jounin meeting, Tsunade met a man who she thought would be perfect for the role. It was a man by the name of Kato Dan. He was a very kind and somewhat old fashioned man. A kind man like that would be easy to deceive, and he probably wouldn't mind taking things slow. Tsunade had no intentions of doing anything other than holding hands, or kissing the man on the cheek in public, with hopes that others saw them together. The whole point of it all was for others to learn of the two dating, after all.

When Tsunade asked Dan out on a date, he was surprised at first, but obviously accepted to go on a date with her, as most straight men would. Tsunade had been correct about him, as he was a kind gentleman, who wouldn't even try to do anything with her on any of their dates. Instead she was the one who had to initiate it all, even asking for them to hold hands and such.

In public she was now dating Kato Dan, while secretly that relationship only served to spice up her and Nawaki's sex life. They would often get daring, secretly doing it whenever Dan is over at their house, or if they are out somewhere with him. He never caught on to them, and he never suspected a thing for as long as he was alive. He never complained to Tsunade about their relationship not going any further than holding hands either. He was just happy to be together with such a beautiful and “pure” woman.

About a year after she started her fake relationship with Dan, the second great ninja war began. That was the beginning of the end of everything for Tsunade, everything that made her happy and everything that she cared about. A few months into the war, she received the first bad news. Her fake lover, Kato Dan, had been killed in battle. Even though Tsunade didn't love him, and had been deceiving him all this time, she didn't wish any harm to befall him. The news saddened her, but she had to act a lot more sad then she actually was, in order to keep the lie safe.

Then just a week later, she received the news that completely shattered her. It was Jiraiya and her former teacher, Hiruzen, who brought her the bad news. Her brother and lover, Nawaki, had passed away on the battle field. It was Jiraiya and Orochimaru who had found his dead body and brought him back to Konoha, to get a proper burial.

When Tsunade heard the news, she cried her eyes out and broke down. Jiraiya and Hiruzen tried their best to comfort her, but she just kept crying. She just wanted to wake up and realize that this had just been a bad dream. Sadly, that wasn't the case, as she continued to cry for several hours, in the arms of Jiraiya who comforted her. After a few hours of Jiraiya and Hiruzen just sitting there with her, doing her best to calm her down and comfort her, she told them about her and Nawaki. She told them about their true relationship, and about the fake relationship with Dan.

Jiraiya was shocked to hear the news, as he couldn't believe his ears. He didn't judge her or anything, as he thought the relationship was kinda hot in a kinky way, he just had not expected it. He was also a bit jealous, since he had been in love with Tsunade ever since their team was formed. For the most part, he just felt bad for her though, putting his owns feelings to the side for now. Hiruzen on the other hand wasn't surprised at all. He just figured that Tsunade and Mito had a lot more in common than just sharing blood. He wouldn't be the least bit surprised if it turned out that Tsunade also had a thing for younger guys.

After spilling out the truth to her teacher and teammate, who were the only ones there, Jiraiya carried the grieving woman back to her home. Jiraiya would visit her every day for a week, just to see how she was doing. He had even completely stopped flirting with her and didn't even tell her any perverted jokes. He was just looking after her. Sadly, Tsunade turned to drinking and gambling as a way of dealing with her recent loss of her brother, her soulmate. Even though they were still in the middle of the second great war, she just kept gambling away all her money and she always drank a lot while doing so, passing out drunk every night.

About a month after Nawaki passed, Jiraiya was over at Tsunade's home, drinking with her. That night the two of them stopped being friends, as they became fuck buddies instead. Every night, during the second great ninja war, they would have drunken messy sex. The sex was great, especially for Jiraiya, as Tsunade was very experienced and knew what she was doing. Jiraiya had some experience as well, having slept with some single women he had teamed up with, and quite a bit of “ladies of the night” as well. Jiraiya knew that Tsunade was only sleeping with him as a way to help her stop thinking about Nawaki, though.

There were maybe one other big reason why she continued to sleep with after the first time. Jiraiya happens to be hung like a horse. At this point in time, there were no man alive who was even close to his size. It was huge, even compared to other men who were considered big. It was also the only part of, and anything about Jiraiya, which Tsunade loved. She still had no romantic feelings for him, and she had no intentions for the two of them to become a couple. Tsunade had also laid down some ground rules that Jiraiya had to follow whenever they did it. She wouldn't allow any talking during sex, unless it was the most vile dirty talk.

She also didn't allow any kissing or hugging, as she only allowed positions where they could avoid that. Even though she refused to kiss Jiraiya's lips, she had no problem kissing and sucking on Jiraiya's absurdly large cock. That was what she spent most of the nights doing, as she almost worshiped his cock. His cock and his sperm were also the only thing she complimented him about, as she would often tell him that the only good quality about him was his huge cock. (2)

Due to Tsunade being a total sucker when it came to gambling, and her love for sucking dick, Jiraiya started calling her “The legendary sucker”, in private. It was also a nickname she had earned, since no other woman was able to take Jiraiya's full size down her throat, not even the most experienced hookers, who Jiraiya had slept with in the past, could manage that.

Their daily rutting continued for another year, until the end of the war. During that year, Jiraiya lost a lot of respect that he had for his former jounin teacher. Since he was pretty much always spending the night at Tsunade's house, he was there in the mornings as well. One morning, about a week after Nawaki passed away, Hiruzen came to visit Tsunade. Jiraiya hid in the living room, but couldn't help but listen in on their conversation.

“Good morning, Tsunade-chan” Hiruzen said, smoking his pipe.

“Sarutobi-sensei..” Tsunade said with a tired and angry frown.

“How would you like to have sex with me on this fine morning?” Hiruzen asked, as casually as one could.

Tsunade them slammed the door in his face, before yelling “Burn in hell, you old pervert!”

Hiruzen then went on to find someone else that might sleep with him, with a lot more success. He had thought that the could take advantage of Tsunade grieving, and maybe get inside her pants that way. That obviously didn't work out for him. Although, Hiruzen was still certain that she was just playing hard to get.

Jiraiya got used to Hiruzen coming over in the mornings after that, to ask Tsunade the same questions. Tsunade then revealed to him that Hiruzen would ask any attractive konoha kunoichi to sleep with him, starting when they graduate from the academy. That didn't sit well with Jiraiya. He knew very well about the hooking up culture that exists among teammates, team leaders, jounin teachers, and genin students of the ninja force. It wasn't unusual at all for a jounin teacher to hook up with one or more of their genin students. Jiraiya never did things like that, he never slept with anyone who had a boyfriend or a husband either. Sleeping with someone much younger than him, was something he just couldn't do, even as a super pervert. There were just some lines he thought a man should never cross, no matter how tempting it could be.

He hated all the blatant cheating going on even more. He just didn't see the point of it. If you can't stay loyal to your partner, then just break up with him or her, or have an open relationship or become swingers or something like that. There was no need for the sneaking around, betrayal and heartbreak. That was just hurtful and unnecessary. Hiruzen was guilty of both things that Jiraiya didn't like, and that's the reason why he lost a lot of respect for him. Not to mention his disgusting sexual invitations to all good looking girls who are genin age or above. There just has to be some kind of limit to someone's degeneracy, in Jiraiya's opinion. And that's coming from the self proclaimed super pervert. A super pervert who might be one of few men in Konoha who is actually a pretty decent guy, with at least a hint of some form of moral standards and principles.

The second great ninja war ended soon after Tsunade, Jiraiya and Orochimaru had fought a long battle against Hanzo of the Salamander, the leader of the Rain Village. They had not been able to defeat the powerful shinobi, who was one of the strongest ninja alive at that time, but they had gained his respect. He dubbed them as Konoha's “sannin” or “The legendary three” after the battle. Soon after that battle, the war ended. It was also around that time that the three members of the legendary sannin started splitting up, going their own ways. Tsunade returned to the village, to focus on educating more medical ninja, while Orochimaru had some secretive experiments that he worked on, in an underground lab.

Jiraiya on the other hand, had run into three orphans in the Rain Country, who were orphans as a result of the second great ninja war. Most of the battles of that war had been fought within the Rain Country, and it was the people living there, that suffered the most. Jiraiya felt like he had to look after these three orphans, at least until he had taught them enough in order to defend themselves. He started living together with them, in a small house, somewhere in the Rain Country. He gave them a place to call home, and he also took them on as his ninja students. The name of those three orphans were Yahiko, Konan and Nagato.

Yahiko was a very confident and outspoken guy with spiky orange hair, who seemed to be the leader of their group. Konan was a beautiful young girl, with short blue hair, who was a bit shy, but also very kind and sweet. Nagato was a quiet young man, with dark red hair. He was also the owner of a pair of very strange set of eyes. His eyes had ring like patterns, which reminded Jiraiya of the “Rinnegan”, the powerful eyes that the legendary Sage of the Six Paths, were also the owner of. When he learned of that, he got really excited about training them. (3)

He ended up staying in the Rain country, training and looking after them, for three years, before returning to Konoha. He was sure that those three would be able to take care of themselves from now on, and expected them to grow up to become great shinobi. When Jiraiya returned to the village, his and Tsunade's drunken night adventures resumed. Although, now he was lucky if she and Tsunade hooked up more than once per month. Even though he wouldn't have minded if it happened a lot more often, the super pervert weren't exactly complaining about this outcome. A few years after that, Tsunade started showing signs of her old self again, after meeting a young Uzumaki woman. Jiraiya in turn, had started taking on yet another student, a blond brat who goes by the name of Namikaze Minato.

Pre-Third Great Ninja War

Both Namikaze Minato and Uzumaki Kushina grew up in Konoha as orphans. Minato never met his parents nor does he know who they were, if they were good people, or if they even wanted him in the first place. The very first years of his life, he was raised in one of Konoha's surprisingly many orphanages. There were a lot of orphans like him and Kushina in Konoha, as a consequence of the two great ninja wars, and regular dangerous high ranked missions, where shinobi always risked their lives. As an orphan Minato had no choice when it came to whether he would attend the ninja academy, or the regular civilian school. All orphans had to start attending the ninja academy, but could decide later on whether they wanted to their ninja education, or transfer to the civilian school.

Minato was glad that he wasn't given any choice, because at the ninja academy, Minato found a purpose for his life. He now knew that he was born to become a shinobi. He was a quick learner, who mastered every technique and fighting style his academy teachers taught him. In his third year of attending the ninja academy, he was unfortunate enough to run into Konoha's self proclaimed super pervert, Jiraiya. He did so while walking by an indoors, yet roofless, hot springs, where he spotted the perverted hermit sitting in a nearby tree, peeking into the hot springs with the help of binoculars.

For fun Minato threw a kunai at him, thinking it would serve such a shameless pervert right. Jiraiya didn't even bat an eye at the incoming kunai, while he casually caught it by sticking his finger through the hole at the back of the handle.

“That's not nice” Jiraiya said, while he spun the kunai around his finger for a few seconds, before throwing it right back at Minato.

Minato grabbed a new kunai, which he used to deflect the incoming kunai away from him. He then glared up at Jiraiya asking him “Are you looking for a fight, pervert?”.

“No” Jiraiya said while giggling “I'm busy looking at these five wonderful young ladies inside that bath house, you should see the figure on the brunette lady” he said, not knowing that the brunette in question was Inuzuka Tsume.

Minato shook his head in disgust “People like you should be put behind bars” he said, before he started walking away.

“Why do you say that?” Jiraiya said with a wide grin “Do you have something against beautiful women, kid?”

Minato halted when he heard that, then turned around to face Jiraiya again “How did you even come up with that assumption?” he asked.

“Well” Jiraiya said, before jumping down from the tree, landing in front of a startled Minato. Jiraiya crossed his arms in front of his chest, then said “You seem to have a problem with me appreciating and praising their naked bodies”.

Minato's eyebrows started twitching “That's..” he started to say, when Jiraiya interrupted him “Do you dislike beautiful young maidens so much that they don't even deserve praise from a mighty man such as myself?”.

Minato completely lost his composure, as he shouted “What are you even talking about, you freak!”.

“Freak!?” Jiraiya repeated with a high pitched voice, while making a funny expression “Now that's uncalled for, I'll have you know that I am no freak, I am the mighty Jiraiya, the toad sage, and Konoha's very own super pervert!”.

Jiraiya then proceeded to perform a little dance, while singing a short introduction song about himself, who hailed from Mt Myobuku.

“You're Jiraiya?” Minato asked, giving Jiraiya no reaction to his introudction and dance, causing the man to face fault. Minato, just like every other academy student, knew about the sannin. Everyone had heard about their impressive accomplishments during the second great ninja war.

“Indeed I am” Jiraiya said before laughing loudly “Although, that's Jiraiya-sama to you, brat!” he added, before he turned around to leave.

“How about that fight, Jiraiya-sama?” Minato asked with a confident smile, causing Jiraiya to glance back at him with a frown “Not interested, now shoo, shoo” he said, while swatting him away as if he was a fly. Jiraiya kept walking, but Minato wasn't done with him yet.

“Hey pervert!” Minato yelled out “Either you spar against me, or I tell those women in there what you did. One of those women in there happens to be Inuzuka Tsume, she is the current clan leader of the Inuzuka clan. She is not someone you want as an enemy!”.

“Oho!?” Jiraiya said with a huge smirk on his grin, as he turned around to face Minato again “And how do you know that, huh!?” he asked accusingly.

Minato started sweating a bit, as his eyebrows started twitching again “I.. I saw her earlier, walking in there!!” he tried. Truth was he had taken a peek over the walls earlier, before he had spotted Jiraiya. He was just a little curious is all.

“Bwahaha!” Jiraiya laughed out loud, pointing at Minato “I like your style, kid! I changed my mind, I'll spar against you!”.

Minato face palmed when he heard that, realizing that Jiraiya had approved of him, as a fellow pervert. That day Minato became Jiraiya's new apprentice. Later that same year, his class was getting a new student in the form of a transfer student, a girl who grew up in the Whirlpool Village. As soon as she entered the classroom and the teacher asked her to introduce herself to everyone, Minato had fallen in love. It was love at first sight, as he had never seen a girl more beautiful than that red headed angel. That girl was Uzumaki Kushina.

Kushina had arrived in Konoha only a few days before she started attending the ninja academy. She was going to live here in Konoha permanently from now on, with the goal of becoming a kunoichi. The main reason for her having moved from the Whirlpool Village to Konoha, was that she would replace Uzumaki Mito, as Konoha's jinchuriki. The nine tailed demon fox, the kyuubi, would soon be sealed inside of her.

Kushina had a verbal tic, which meant the she would add a strange phrase at the end of each sentence she spoke, whenever she felt embarrassed, excited or nervous. The phrase was “dattebane” or “tebane/ttebane”, the latter example, she often used when her phrase somehow combined with a word. Minato found her verbal tic to be lovely as well. In fact, there wasn't anything about Kushina that he didn't like. The more he learned about her, the more he liked her.

Kushina did not fall in love with Minato at first sight, she started paying attention to him for other reasons. The first thing that made Minato stick out from the others, were the fact that he was by far the strongest in their class. Unlike some of the other girls, who would praise Minato to no end as his loyal and loud fan girls, Kushina wanted to surpass Minato, so that she could take the title as the strongest ninja in their class. In other words, for Kushina, Minato was nothing but a rival who she wanted to surpass.

The second reason why she started noticing Minato more, had something to do with their class having a few bullies. As soon as Kushina joined their class, these bullies would start teasing her about anything they could. She was the new kid, so she needed to be messed with, for some reason. Often they would make fun of her unusual hair color, which was of a wine red color. Nicknames such as “Tomato” or “Tomato head” was something they would call her. When they started bullying her, calling her by those nicknames that she hated, she would often turn red faced in anger, before using wrestling moves such as the German suplex, to handle her bullies.

Kushina was stronger than them and had no problem at all to deliver some payback for all the teasing. She was quite the tomboy back then. She was also very mischievous herself, so she didn't hesitate to get her bullies back, either by opening a can of whoop ass, or by setting them up for pranks. Those pranks would often end up with her bullies either getting hurt, get their clothes wet or covered in paint, or anything else that the whole class could laugh at.

Due to the way that Kushina's face tuned red when she was angry, or when she felt embarrassed, such as when she messed up or let her verbal tic slip out, they also started calling her the “Red Hot Habanero”. That was a nickname she hated even more than the previous ones.

Whenever her bullies would go after her to mess with her or tease her, Minato would usually follow them secretly as well. He knew that Kushina would be able to defend himself, but he was there just in case she would somehow end up on the losing side. Then he would take action and step in. He also secretly helped her, whenever she pranked her bullies for some payback, by sneakily delivering things Kushina could use in the process of pranking them. Thing such as buckets filled with paint, baseball bats, birthday cakes, water bottles, old rotten food or anything else you could think of, that could be used for a prank, would show up out of nowhere next to Kushina. Minato loved her pranks and he had no problem with being a secret accomplice of hers.

Around the same time as her bullies started calling her the Red Hot Habanero, they had asked one of their older siblings to the help them deal with her. It was an older boy who had already become a genin. He threatened to beat up Kushina, for messing with his younger brother and his friends. At this point, Minato was ready to step in. But then Kushina surprised both him and her bullies, when she beat the living hell out of that older genin boy. After that day, they stopped bullying her. Instead they became her self proclaimed servants, her loyal subordinates. She had gotten herself her own set of fanboys.

While Kushina was beating up that genin, she had noticed Minato observing them. They had their first real interaction that day, as Kushina glared at him while walking away from the scene “What are you looking at?” she asked him, while huffing and puffing.

Minato started sweating and had a sudden urge to tell her “Nothing, dear”, instead he ended up just smiling at her warmly, before running away. He couldn't think of anything to say, due to how that beautiful girl made his heartbeat raise whenever she looked at him.

A year passed without Minato making any progress when it came to getting on Kushina's good side, or getting to know her at all for that matter. Kushina on the other hand, had managed to get herself a really good friend, her BFF (best friend forever), as she likes to call her. Her new friend is a girl from the Uchiha clan named Mikoto. The two of them have many things in common, one of which is their popularity. The two of them are the top two kunoichi of their class and there is really no one who is even close to taking the number two spots from them. They are also the prettiest girls in class, which makes them even more popular, especially among the guys in their class. They are less popular among their female peers though, as they are mostly jealous of both their beauty and their ninja skills. It's mostly the girls who teases Kushina nowadays, by using the nicknames that she hates, purely out of petty jealousy.

Another thing Kushina and Mikoto have in common is an interest for Namikaze Minato. Kushina's interest remains the same, as she just wants to surpass him. Mikoto on the other hand is very open to Kushina about the fact that she is in love with the young Namikaze prodigy. Kushina would almost call her a little bit obsessed about him, due to how she talks about him and swoons over him. Minato is well aware of her crush on him as well. It was impossible for him to not notice that, as Mikoto could sometimes get very obvious about it. She isn't as bad as the rest of the girls of the class, who mostly just acts like rabid fan girls, but she isn't hiding her feelings for him at all.

Mikoto liking Minato, was not something that made Kushina jealous or anything like that. It didn't bother her at all. At this point she didn't have any interest in boys or going on dates and things like that. She had more important things on her mind, such as the recent destruction of her home, the Whirlpool Village, and the fact that her new adopted grandma, Uzumaki Mito, is dying due to sickness. Kushina moved in with Mito as soon as she arrived in Konoha. The two of them immediately became good friends, and later on Kushina thought of her as her grandma, without knowing that she is her grandma.

Ashina, Kushina's grandfather, was so pissed at Mito after what she had done to him, back during the clan days, that he had removed all pictures of her, or anything mentioning her, from his home. Mito avoided talking with Kushina about the past as well, as she would rather keep that a secret from her. That's why Kushina didn't find out that they were related back then.

Mito often told Kushina not to repeat the same mistakes she did. She told her to be a proper lady, someone who always dresses classy and not too revealing. She told her not to give in to any temptations of lust, and instead try to find someone who she really loves, someone who she thinks of as her soulmate, who she should marry. Mito told her other things such as not having sex before marriage and not partaking in any indecent conversations about sex or boys with her friends. Mito wanted her to become a proper, friendly, trustworthy and respectable lady, which would kind of be the completely opposite of Mito, except for the friendly part.

What Mito told her seemed like common sense to Kushina, as she had been raised very conservatively back in the Whirlpool Village, and she never really had any interest in romance or things like that. Unlike the other girls in her class, she dressed very conservatively as well. While she was often regarded as a beautiful princess, sometimes referred to as the princess of the Uzumaki clan, she couldn't care less about that. Kushina had always been, and will most likely always be something of a tomboy. She was a lot more interested in improving herself as a ninja, pulling pranks, and beating up guys who said girls couldn't be as strong as them.

Kushina's and Tsunade's connection to Mito, was what brought them together. Mito is after all Tsunade's grandmother as well, and if someone suddenly starts living with her, Tsunade would have to meet her at some point. Tsunade and Mito had a rather strained relationship, where their conversations would be filled with snarky comments directed at one another. This started long before Kushina came to Konoha, due to Mito walking in on Tsunade one day, sitting on her knees in the living room of her house, slurping on her younger brothers cock.

Mito did nothing to prevent Tsunade and Nawaki from remaining together, but she did tell Tsunade that she was disappointed in her. She didn't want anyone in her family to become anything like her. Tsunade on the other hand, had learned of Mito's degeneracy early on in her life. She thought Mito was just being a hypocrite, when she told her that she was disappointed in her. The snarky comments they could direct at each other, while frowning at each other, during their family dinners with Kushina, would often involve them calling each other names such as “Slut”, “Bitch”, “Old cradle robber”, “Bad sister” and their all time favorite to call one another “Whore”.

Kushina never learned of why they called each other these things, but she understood that while they often insulted each other and it appeared as if they hated each other, they also loved each other very much. They could try to hide it with their insults, but it was just obvious that they still loved each other as grandparent and grandchild. Otherwise Tsunade wouldn't be over there so often, just to try new medical jutsu which she had invented, in an attempt to cure Mito of the sickness she was suffering from. Mito in turn, would always make a point of telling Kushina to “Go find that nasty whore” so that she could eat dinner with them, as a family.

Tsunade and Kushina hated each other at first. The two of them were just too similar personality wise, and their personalities clashed, due to that. Kushina would often tell Tsunade that she would surpass her some day, to take her spot as the number on kunoichi in the village. That was something Tsunade would just laugh at, while telling her that she would rather die before seeing the day that she lets a little harpy like her, overtake her position as the top kunoichi. Even though they fought a lot and started something of a one-sided rivalry, the two of them had something of a big sister and younger sister relationship as well. It was a sibling relationship where Kushina didn't get any of the benefits that her deceased younger sibling did, though. That was something Kushina couldn't be more thankful for.

Tsunade and Kushina were also very different when it came to their ninja specializations. Tsunade would often defeat her enemies with her brutishly overpowered hand to hand combat abilities, while Kushina preferred to use her sword skills, instead of hand to hand combat. She fought using a katana, rather than using her fists. Tsunade was a medical ninja specialist, while Kushina was a specialist in fuinjutsu, sealing techniques. Even at her current young age, only Uzumaki Mito was more prominent in fuinjutsu than Kushina. There were a few that had some knowledge of seals, such as Hiruzen and Jiraiya, but none of them were even close the Uzumaki's when it came to their skills in the sealing arts.

Even though they had different specializations and fighting styles, Tsunade forced Kushina to learn some basic hand to hand combat fighting, and some very easy and basic ninja techniques. She became her teacher for a short while, where the Senju woman taught the young Uzumaki how to punch and kick people through walls, and things like that. She also taught her how to deal with perverts, by using Jiraiya as a prop. That happened recently, at the end of the school year. It was the day when Kushina met Jiraiya, and Minato met Tsunade, for the first time.

Jiraiya had taken Minato out for a little adventure, which involved the two of them sneaking into the Senju clan compound. He had received information from Tsunade earlier, which implied that she may spend some time of her evening, relaxing in a natural hot spring, which was located on their property. Jiraiya told Minato to dress up in military styled, camouflage colored clothing, before the two of then headed over to a forest area within the Senju clan compund. From there, they crawled through the forest, towards the location of the hot springs. The hot springs itself had a fence around it, to give the ones using it at least some privacy.

While they crawled there, Minato thought it was a good time to finally ask why they are doing this “Why are we doing this, Jiraiya-sensei?”.

“Shh” Jiraiya shushed him “Just follow my lead and I'll let you see something amazing!”.

“Does that something involve peeking on one of the women living here?” Minato asked with a sweat drop.

“It might” Jiraiya answered quickly, as they kept crawling discreetly, making sure no one would see them as they approached the fence around the hot springs.

“Now keep quiet, her pervert senses will start tingling if you make any noise!” Jiraiya whispered. Minato just hook his head, but didn't question his teacher any further. Once they got up to the fence, Jiraiya stood up and then tried to peek inside through the gaps of the planks that made up the wooden fence. Minato followed his lead, but when he went up to the wooden fence, he caused a noise due to him stepping on a small branch.

Meanwhile inside that fence, within the hot springs, are Tsunade and Kushina, currently enjoying a relaxing bath. They are both completely nude, as you would be while bathing.

“Did you hear that!?” Tsunade whispered. Her pervert senses had kicked into gear.

“Hear what?” Kushina asked, as she had not heard anything.

“I think we might have a pervert within our premises” Tsunade said as she got up. She then went over to grab a towel, which she handed Kushina “Cover yourself, just in case. Then follow me”:

“Eh, okay?” Kushina responded, looking like a question mark.

Outside the fence, Jiraiya was gritting his teeth in annoyance “I can't see a damn thing!” he whispered.

“Can't you just create a small hole in the fence?” Minato suggested.

“No, she would notice that for sure” Jiraiya said, frowning in thought.

“Who are you talking about exactly?” Minato asked.

“Shh!” Jiraiya shushed him again, while placing his arms on Minato's shoulder. Minato noticed that something was wrong, due to how Jiraiya's expression changed. He looked really nervous for some reason. Minato didn't get a chance to say or do anything, before Jiraiya had thrown him back into the forest. He had done so in order to save Minato from getting struck, by a powerful fist that smashed the fence, before sending Jiraiya flying.

When Minato saw who had delivered that punch, he saw a completely naked Tsunade, looking mighty proud of herself, standing next to Kushina wearing nothing but a towel.

“Hahaha, take that you old pervert!” Tsunade laughed heartily.

“Who was that dirty old man, aunty?” Kushina asked, looking around in search of the pervert.

“That was my old teammate, Jiraiya. Stay away from him, he is nothing but a good for nothing pervert” Tsunade responded. Kushina nodded in agreement “I would say, I have never had someone try something so shameless as to spy on me while taking a bath”.

“I'm afraid he was here to spy on me, Kushina-chan” Tsunade said shaking her head.

“Damn right” Jiraiya yelled from the distance.

After hearing that, Tsunade and Kushina looked around to see if they could spot the pervert. That's when they saw Minato, laying there down a slope, staring up at them with wide eyes. He had a little trickle of blood coming out of his nose as well, due to seeing the beautiful and busty Senju woman standing there in the nude, without a care in the world.

“Minato?” Kushina asked in disbelief, before facing him with an expression of disgust “Pervert..” she said accusingly.

Tsunade immediately crossed her legs and covered her chest with her arms “JIRAIYA!?” she yelled in anger, silently asking him how she could bring such a young man along with him to spy on her. The super pervert then called out to Minato, in a panicked tone “RUN MINATO, RUN!”.

Minato saw how Tsunade and Kushina turned red in both anger and embarrassment, before he turned tail and took Jiraiya's advice, running away from there faster than he had ever ran before. While running, he thought it would be convenient to create a technique which would help him escape from situations like these faster than running. A few weeks later he found some information about the “Flying Thunder God Technique”, a technique that he would later on rely on in battle and make him famous as “Konoha's Yellow Flash”.

Before Minato learned the flying thunder god technique, he had to deal with the consequences of what he and Jiraiya had done that day. That very same day, Jiraiya had dragged Minato along with him again, back to the Senju clan compound. They weren't here for any nefarious reasons this time, as Jiraiya had taken Minato with him in order to apologize. He knew that if he didn't, then Tsunade wouldn't have sex with him again, for a very long time. They only did it once or twice a month nowadays, and that was bad enough as it is.

When they arrived at Tsunade's home, Kushina was still around, as she was going to spend the night at Tsunade's house for a little sleep over. That worked out perfectly for Minato, who wanted to apologize profusely to Kushina, due to what Jiraiya had made him do.

When Tsunade opened the door, she had Kushina with her. Both of them glared at the super pervert and his young apprentice, when they saw them.

Jiraiya bowed his head, while putting his hand on top of his Minato's head, forcing him bow his head as well “Forgive me Tsunade-hime, it won't happen again”.

“Yeah right, I have heard that one before..” Tsunade said rolling her eyes. Jiraiya then slapped Minato on top of his head “Your turn, apologize”:

“I'm sorry this old pervert made me peek on you, I would never do anything so shameless on my own accord” Minato said, bowing without Jiraiya's help. Jiraiya snorted in response, before turning to the side in order to pout. He wanted so badly to remind Minato that he is in fact a super pervert, but knew that would probably get him in more trouble.

“He made you do it?” Kushina asked, glaring at Minato “Do you think I'm gonna believe that!?”.

“It's the truth, I'm sorry Kushina-chan” Minato said apologetically, feeling really bad about the whole situation.

“Phee!” Kushina exclaimed in disgust “Now I have more reasons to beat you up, you pervert-tebane!!”.

“tebane?” Jiraiya repeated with a raised eyebrow, causing Kushina to glare at him. “Jiraiya, you never told me you had such a cute friend!” Tsunade said with a wide grin, she then walked over to Minato, placing her arm on his shoulder “What's your name?”.

“I'm Minato” Minato said, while he started sweating, as he was trying really hard not to stare at her cleavage, which was currently dangerously close to his eyes.

“He's looking at your cow tits, auntie” Kushina said with the same disgusted expression.

“Excuse me, Minato-kun” Tsunade said, smiling sweetly at Minato, before she turned around and yelled at the top of her lungs, with her fists raised “How many times do I have to tell you not to call me that, you red headed little hell rat!”.

“Shut up old hag!” Kushina yelled back, then added “Take that back, dattebane!”.

“Make me!” Tsunade challenged.

“Maybe I will” Kushina countered, as the two of them glared at each other.

Jiraiya then cleared his throat, in an attempt to break off their little squabble “Ehem, who is this young lady?”.

“Oh right, I haven't introduced her to you have I” Tsunade said, then nodded in Kushina's direction “This is Uzumaki Kushina, she started living with Granny Mito about a year ago”. She then sighed, before pointing at Jiraiya “And this old pervert is my old teammate, Jiraiya”.

Jiraiya nodded “I reckon the two of you already know each other?” he asked Minato and Kushina.

“Yes, she is a classmate” Minato answered, while Kushina added “Unfortunately”.

“Minato-kun, if you don't mind me asking, what is such a good looking young man like yourself doing with an old bum like him?” Tsunade asked, referring to Jiraiya. Jiraiya was also the one to answer the question, which Minato appreciated, because he was currently scared out of his mind, after finding out that he had peeked on Tsunade of all people. Her monstrous strength is well known in the village. You don't want her as your enemy.

“That annoying little brat is my new apprentice. I don't have high hopes for him, but I reckon I can turn him into a half decent ninja at the very least” Jiraiya said with a hearty laugh.

“It's true, I'm stuck with this old pervert as my sensei” Minato said, glaring at Jiraiya for calling him a brat and making fun of his ninja skills.

“If you don't stop calling me that, then maybe I should tell your little girlfriend over there, just how we met. Do you want that, huh!?” Jiraiya said with angry snarl directed at Minato.

“I'm not his girlfriend, dattebane!” Kushina shouted, getting red in the face due to anger. That caused both Jiraiya and Tsunade to burst out into laughter, while Minato continued to sweat, thinking what happened today wouldn't help his chances to get on Kushina's good side.

Since that day when Jiraiya and Tsunade met the others students, Jiraiya had started to question if Tsunade might have a thing for younger guys. She would always ask him about Minato, how his training is going, if he has any girlfriends or where he is currently at. One time, when they were over at her place, drinking in preparation for a long night of drunken and dirty sex, she had jokingly asked Jiraiya to invite Minato over to join them. “She would make a man out of him” she said, laughing. Unlike Hiruzen who was certain that Tsunade had similar tastes in men that Mito did, Jiraiya was not one hundred percent sure about that theory yet. He was very suspicious about that being the case, though.

About two years later, Minato and Kushina finally graduated from the academy, becoming genins. At this point in time, Kushina had been made the new jinchuriki, being the host for the kyuubi. Mito passed away about a year ago, which was obviously a very sad day for Kushina, Tsunade, Hiruzen and the few other Senju clan members who were still alive.

Kushina and Minato had become friends during these two years. It was almost unavoidable for the two of them not to meet each other often, due to Jiraiya and Tsunade's connection. The four of them would often eat lunches and dinners together. Kushina was grateful for that, as it made her dinners feel less lonely, now that she couldn't eat them with Mito any more. They have also been able to clear up some of the misunderstandings, which occurred that day when Jiraiya and Minato peeked on them. That was mainly due to Kushina getting to know Jiraiya better, which made it very obvious that he was the one that had put Minato up to it. The man has no shame, that self proclaimed super pervert.

Two days after graduating from the ninja academy, Kushina and her jounin teacher and her two teammates had just spent a whole day doing nothing but boring D rank missions. When they were done, they debriefed the hokage about the results of their so called missions, which were more like chores than ninja missions. After her jounin teacher had debriefed Hiruzen, Kushina was asked to stay behind.

Ever since Kushina first arrived here in Konoha, Hiruzen had always been something of a grand father figure to her. They may not have spent a lot of time together, but he made sure she always had what she needed, and she knew that he was looking out for her. Kushina had nothing bad to say about him, up until that day. Because when Hiruzen asked her to stay behind, he did so by asking her this question.

“Kushina-chan, how would you like to spend the night with me?” Hiruzen asked, smiling as he smoked his pipe.

“Eh?” Kushina responded in confusion “Do you want me to sleep over at yours and Biwako-baa's house?”.

Hiruzen laughed “No, Kushina-chan” he said. After he had stopped laughing, he continued with a serious expression “I am asking you if you would let me fuck you”.

“W-what?” Kushina asked with a shocked expression “Y-you can't be serious” she added with a slight stutter. She felt both disgusted and a little bit betrayed as well, after she heard Hiruzen's shameless request.

Hiruzen had longed for this day, the day she would finally graduate. There hasn't been anyone that he has wanted more than her, including even Tsunade. Not only is Kushina a full blooded Uzumaki, with a short temper and a mean attitude, she is also incredibly beautiful, and out right sexy, without even trying. Just her beauty alone would be enough reason, but the possibility of her being as wild and dirty in bed as Mito was, was the main reason he wanted to get her in bed with him.

“I'm perfectly serious” Hiruzen said with a chuckle “So, what will it be? I promise you that you won't regret it. No girl ever has, after spending a night with me” he added, with a proud smirk.

Kushina wasn't even interested in things such as going on dates or finding a boyfriend at this point, never mind having sex. And even if she did, Hiruzen would be one of the last people on earth, who she would ever think of that way. The answer was obviously a resounding, hell no. Kushina didn't care about whether it was an order or not either, as she proceeded to fly over the hokage desk, slamming her fist into his face. Both Hiruzen and his chair toppled over, falling down on the ground. Steam appeared out of Kushina's head, as she stomped out of the hokage office, gritting her teeth “Go to hell, you shameless disgusting pervert!”.

Hiruzen sighed, as he got up to put his chair back where it was. He had expected nothing less, but it was worth a shot, as it always was. He also couldn't help but think that Kushina was, just like Tsunade, just playing hard to get. Maybe she will say yes the next time, he thought with a perverted smirk. While Kushina rushed home to let Tsunade know about what had just happened, Hiruzen let in the next genin team and their teacher, to let them debrief him on how their important D rank missions had gone. While Hiruzen was talking to the jounin sensei of that team, he focused most of his attention on one of his students. The student in question was one of the other girls of the recently graduated class, who he had an interest in. That girl was Kushina's best friend, Uchiha Mikoto.

Just like Kushina previously, Hiruzen asked Mikoto to stay behind after she and her team had finished debriefing him on how their missions had went. Her male jounin teacher and her two teammates, had no idea why only she was asked to stay behind, since only his closest friends and the good looking part of the female ninja force, knew of his secret.

Once alone in his office, Hiruzen got straight to the point. He asked her if she wanted to have sex with him. It wasn't an order at all, as he had never actually ordered anyone to have sex with him, and this time were no different. He has never forced himself on anyone either, not even enemy kunoichi, as Hiruzen despises rapists more than anything.

Mikoto's response, was to hang her head dejectedly, before telling him “Yes, sir”.

“That was not an order by the way, it was an invitation” Hiruzen said, as he realized she had gotten the wrong idea.

“Then, I'll respectfully reject your offer” Mikoto said with a bow, before taking her leave.

Hiruzen wasn't surprised, most seemed to reject him now that he had gotten older. While getting older he had also gotten a lot pickier with which girls he chooses to give his shameless invitations to. A combination of getting older, the little hair he had left on his hair getting grayer and grayer, along with him getting pickier, was not a good combo. At least not when it came to him finding new, willing lovers. There were a few exceptions though, as there always was. Hiruzen still has a good amount of loyal lovers, some of which aren't much older than Kushina and Mikoto.

Hiruzen wasn't going to give up on Mikoto that easily though. He had somewhat of a trump card that he could play, in order to change her mind. After doing a little background check on her, he had learned what all of her classmates already know, which is that she is heads over heels in love with a certain blond Namikaze prodigy.

While Minato and Kushina may call each other just friends, that is not how others see them. They look more like a young couple than just two friends. That is mainly because of how Kushina acts with him. When she warms up to someone, she can get very clingy and cuddly with them. Minato is no different, as she considers him to be a very good friend. But from the outside, her innocent show of affection for her friend, looks more like something a girlfriend would do with her boyfriend. This was something that Mikoto, as Kushina's best friend, had not missed. She was pissed at Kushina and had started avoiding her, as a result.

"Hold up" Hiruzen said, causing Mikoto to turn around to face him again, as he sat there smirking "Yes?".

"If you hear me out, then maybe we can make a little deal, just between the two of us" Hiruzen said.

"What kind of deal?" Mikoto asked, staring at Hiruzen suspiciously.

"I know that you are in love with Namikaze Minato, I could help you get together with him." Hiruzen said, smirking at Mikoto's reaction "I'm listening.." she said, with a smirk of her own.

Hiruzen then told her about his somewhat evil scheme to ruin Kushina and Minato's chances to be together, so that the two of them could get them for themselves instead. It involved Mikoto flirting with Minato any chance she got, in front of Kushina. He assumed that would make her jealous since he believes that she has feelings for Minato, not knowing that they are nothing more than friends right now. While Mikoto is getting Kushina jealous, Hiruzen would step in to ease Kushina into the idea of having sex with him, to make Minato jealous instead.

Mikoto's thoughts about Hiruzen's twisted plot to ruin what could be a very nice young couple, was that it was the best idea ever. She would do anything to get Minato for herself. If she managed to win Minato's heart, while Kushina ended up having sex with this old man as well, that would only be an added bonus. Mikoto thought she deserves nothing better since she had tried to steal Minato from her.

“What do you say Mikoto-chan? The two of us can work together to get what we want by making sure those two never become a couple. That way you can have Minato-kun, while I can try my chances of getting inside the pants of that beautiful Uzumaki girl” Hiruzen said with his arms folded as he sat behind his desk.

Mikoto stood still, not responding for a short while, before she took a few steps closer to Hiruzen's desk, standing in front of it, facing him.

“If you get that tomato girl out of the way for me so that I can get Minato-kun” she said with a determined expression “Then you have yourself a deal, Hokage-sama!”.

Hiruzen nodded with a barely visible smile. This was going just like he planned it, so far.

“Good, If that's all, then I will take my leave now. Good bye, Hokage-sama” she said respectfully, then gave him a quick bow, before turning to leave again.

“Hold on” Hiruzen said as he got up from his chair and walked around the desk. Mikoto stopped walking and turned to face him again, seeing that he was now standing next to her, staring at her with a confident smirk.

“Did you need anything else, Hokage-sama?” Mikoto asked respectfully.

“I have cared for Minato for a long time, I have watched him grow up to become the skilled young man that he is today. He is like a grandson to me, so if I'm going to help you get him for yourself, by ruining his chances to be with the girl he loves, then you have to get me something else in return” Hiruzen said, his, as his smirk turned into a wide grin.

“Name it” Mikoto said without hesitation.

“I already did, earlier, after your teacher and teammates had left” Hiruzen said, taking a step closer to her. Mikoto stared at him with an open mouth “But.. But I said I would help you by keeping Minato-kun away from the tomato girl" she asked, while staring up at Hiruzen nervously. She had only started calling Kushina “Tomato” just recently, due to her being jealous of her close relationship with Minato.

“Yes and that's in exchange for me helping you get Minato-kun, but I want something else to seal this deal, otherwise I don't know if I can go through with it, since I don't want to risk hurting Minato-kun's feelings, without getting anything in return” Hiruzen said, taking another step closer to her as he stared down at her, into her eyes.

Then the two of them just stared at each other in silence, for what had to be around half a minute. During that time, Mikoto had remembered the reason why she had angrily tried to stomp out of the office earlier. She had forgotten all about that when Hiruzen told her that she may have a chance to be with Minato. She meant what she said when she said that she would do anything to be with Minato.

Mikoto finally nodded, which had Hiruzen ask "Is that a yes?"

Mikoto's response was, her standing on her tip toes, throwing her arms around Hiruzen's neck, before giving the hokage a long and wet kiss. Hiruzen took that as a yes, that she agreed to his offer to have sex. While they kissed Hiruzen's hands quickly found their place on her perfect tight little butt. After their kiss, Hiruzen carried her over to the desk and placed her on top of it, as the two of them started undressing. What happened next was something that forever changed both of their lives, as the two of them had sex inside the hokage tower until early morning hours.

Hiruzen could without a doubt say that Mikoto was the second best fuck he ever had, only second to Uzumaki Mito. This was just like he always imagined these beautiful, extraordinary skilled girls, who usually refused him, would be. The oh so serious, talented, rather quiet and very beautiful Mikoto, was so damn wild in bed and fun to have sex with. He knew that night, that Mikoto would be someone that he wouldn't be able to let go of. She would be his lover for life. Mikoto in turn was completely sold on sex with Hiruzen after that night. It was the most amazing thing she had ever experienced. She gladly had sex with him again after that, whenever he asked, which was very often after that night. She also approached him for sex, a lot more than he asked her. Hiruzen knew why, she was most likely a nymphomaniac, just like all other strong kunoichi, who all seemed to be nymphomaniacs.

Thirty minutes after Hiruzen started fucking the young Uchiha kunoichi prodigy in his office, they were caught in the middle of their erotic act, by a certain someone. Tsunade had gone over to the hokage office, after hearing Kushina tell her about what happened in the hokage office earlier. That didn't sit well with Tsunade at all, as she was very angry with her former teacher. Tsunade honestly thought he wouldn't stoop so low as to ask Kushina of all the girls available, a question like that. There were countless of young sluts he could have, he could just browse through his lists of genin and chuunin and pick one. Why did he have to ask Kushina, who is so innocent and pure, and is probably the last person who would ever do something like that. Then again, she wasn't all that surprised to hear about it either. He had done the same thing to her back in the day, and he continues to invite her to have sex with him, whenever they meet.

When Tsunade got to the hokage tower, she ran up the walls of the tower, intending to blast through the windows. She would then proceed to hang the man by his own ball sack, on top of that tower. When she had ran up to the windows of the hokage tower, she couldn't help but freeze in shock, as she saw what was going in there. She saw Hiruzen laying on his back on the desk, while Mikoto road him. She had her tongue out of her mouth, looking like she was really enjoying the ride she was currently on. Mikoto's hips rocked back and forth, as she ground her pussy into him, with his cock buried all the way inside of her.

Tsunade changed her mind about breaking into the hokage office after seeing that, in favor of returning to her home. She was completely dumbfounded at what she had seen. Why would a pretty girl like her, ever want to be with such a dirty and ugly old man? She just couldn't understand it. After seeing that, Tsunade finally decided on something she had been thinking about ever since Mito passed away. That was to leave the village, as she was completely sick of it. It's full of degenerates, and it's lead by one. The village has also taken everything from her, everyone that she cared for.

Tsunade had also found an interesting young girl who she intends to take with her. Her name is Kato Shizune, who happens to be her former fake boyfriends niece. Shizune had gone over to see Tsunade at the Senju clan compound one day, in order to ask her to train her to become a medical ninja. Her dream was to become a medical ninja, so that she could help save others. Just that dream of becoming a medical ninja, would have been enough of a reason for Tsunade to teach her a few things. When she found out that she was Dan's niece, she asked Shizune to become her new apprentice instead.

Tsunade honestly felt bad about what she did to Dan. Thinking back, she realized there was no need for her to get a fake boyfriend at all. She and Nawaki should have just been open with their relationship, and just not cared about what others thought of them. They are all just as fucked up anyway, if not more. The amount adultery going in this village, is sickening. While allowing Shizune to become her apprentice, wouldn't exactly mean that she had made things up to Dan, it at least made her feel a little bit better about herself, knowing that she was looking out for his niece.

Tsunade and Shizune left the village a few weeks after that. A week after Tsunade left, something happened to Kushina that she would never forget. It was an horrible experience. That evening, she was alone inside the house she had inherited from Mito, making herself dinner. She was then completely taken by surprise, as someone put a bag over her head, then carried her off. She wasn't even able to comprehend what happened to her, before it was too late. Three very tall men who are jounin ninja belonging to Kumo (The Cloud Village), had sneaked into her house, to kidnap her. They succeeded in getting her out of her house, and the village, mostly unnoticed. Mainly due to Kushina not having expected it, since if she had time to react, she would have put up a fight.

Once outside of the village, they let her down before taking the bag off of her head, then tied her hands together with a rope, which they used to drag her along with them, as she walked behind the person holding the rope. One of the men walked next to her, laughing as Kushina stared at him with an expression of pure disgust, anger and slight fear.

“Let me go, you jerks!” Kushina yelled.

“Sorry, no can do” The kumo man who stood next to her said “You are coming with us back to Kumo”.

“You think Konoha is going to let you just take me!? I bet the hokage has sent out several groups to find me already!” Kushina barked at him.

“I'm afraid they don't even know that you are missing. We didn't let anyone see us, as we executed this kidnapping perfectly. Our scouts in Konoha has had their eyes on you and your house for a long time, we knew exactly where and when it was best to grab you.” The man said, with a mocking laughter.

“Why me?” Kushina said, lowering her head “Is it because of that thing..”.

“Are you talking about the Kyuubi?” The man asked, causing Kushina to stare at him in surprise “Oh we know about that, don't you worry. It's not only because you are jinchuriki that we are taking you though. It has to do with your clan and your bloodline limits” he continued, as Kushina just glared at him.

“What are you gonna do to me!?” She yelled, angrily. The man then punched her cheek, hard, causing her head to snap to the side. Kushina couldn't hold back tears, as that punch really hurt and she was terrified right now.

“Don't use that tone with me, you don't have the right to talk to me that way. By the time you get to Kumo, you will no longer be treated as a human. You are going to become a breeding stock, with the sole purpose of giving birth to as many children as you can. Since you are such a pretty girl, the Raikage and the other higher ups will likely take you for themselves. You will get raped over and over again, even while you are pregnant. They will continue to rape you until you are too old to get pregnant. After that you will most likely get executed and dumped somewhere, as the trash you are. Your children will remain in Kumo, where they will suffer the same fate you did, until we have created a new Uzumaki clan, which is loyal only to Kumo” The man said, with a sinister and evil grin. Kushina didn't respond to that, she just sniffled, as she hung her dejectedly.

She was starting wonder if she should just bite her own tongue, to kill herself. That thought sounded even better, as the sick man continued to tell her what they had in store for her.

“Don't worry, we aren't heartless. We are not going to hand you over to the Raikage before we have prepared you for your future. As soon as we get out of the Land of Fire, all three of us are going to take turns fucking your tight young cunt, and your cute little butt!” He shouted, as he gave her butt a hard slap.

“Argh!!” Kushina cried out, causing the man to laugh “Yes, you will make many such sounds while we fuck you, you little whore!” he yelled, as all three of them laughed loudly.

“There is no time limit on our mission, we are going to take our time with you, before we hand you over to the Raikage. It would be waste not to” The one pulling the rope said.

“Yeah, we hit the jackpot with this one” The one next to Kushina said, with a nod of agreement.

Kushina started plucking off some strands of her long red hair, and let them fall to the ground. She hoped that someone would be looking for her, and that her strands of red hair, would help them find her. Kushina didn't have to worry about that much longer, as someone had been trailing them as soon as they got out of Konoha. Minato had gone over to the Senju clan compound that night. He was nervously pacing around outside the front door of Kushina's house. He was about to ask her out on a date, for the first time, which was why he has nervous. Then he heard a loud shriek coming from inside her house, sounding a lot like Kushina. By the time he had gotten inside the house, she was no longer there.

He then looked everywhere for her within the Senju clan compound. Since Minato was already a user of the the flying thunder god technique at this point, he was moving extremely fast, as he searched the compound. He didn't find anything, so he started searching for her outside the clan compound, in the area that is located outside the village. There he found the bag that they had put on her head, along with a single strand of red hair. He then caught up to them, before they were able to get very far away from Konoha.

Minato proceeded to kill all three of those men, while making it look as if he was toying with them, due to how easily he dealt with them. Even though they were all jounin, they were no match for a genin Namikaze Minato. To be fair to them, not many people that is currently alive, were a match for him. Kushina hadn't even noticed it, she was so depressed, as she just kept walking forward, plucking a strand of hair every now and then. Her expression was completely emotionless, as she had accepted the fact that she was going to bite her own tongue, as soon as she got close to the borders. She would rather die than to suffer a fate that they had described for her. It wasn't until Minato cut the ropes off her arms, then picked her up to carry her in bridal position, that she snapped out of it.

She stared at Minato's face, who looked so handsome to her at that moment, with the moonlight shining down on him. That evening Kushina fell in love with Minato, and their love became a mutual thing. They were inseparable from that day forward, although, they didn't officially become a couple until a few years later, when the the third great ninja war eventually began.

Footnotes:

1: I had originally written how Hiruzen found Uchiha Temari and freed her, along with her telling him her whole story, of what had happened to her. I decided to cut it from the story, as I didn't want to include it in the first chapter. Even though I am really trying to paint the picture of this version of the Naruto world being a “rotten world”, this scene I felt was too much. It involved sexual abuse, torture and humiliation involving human fecal matter. Later on in the story, Hiruzen is going to tell a future student of his, about Uchiha Temari's story. I may include the whole scene then. I figure it might not be as shocking then, since you might have gotten used to all the other crazy shit going on in this story by then.

2: If you are curious about the dick sizes of the characters that will be featured in this story, then I got just the right thing for you! I present to you, the crackverse's Dick-o-Meter: https://mega.nz/file/R3AkwKyI#lP-FV_eXsyTJGwGFzDl6M8muP4XhvAOiSb-Z5p0H0pk

(Note: the above link is completely safe for work. It's a very basic and ugly looking graph that I made).

3: I was thinking of writing a little side story of Jiraiya's time spent with Nagato, Yahiko and Konan. My idea was that Jiraiya would hook up with Konan, to create a naughty and interesting little twist to their back story. I changed my mind about though, as that would be out of character even for this version of Jiraiya. Konan is spared for now.

Authors Note: This story is all of my stories that I have published on this site, put together to create one big story. The stories in question are: Sarutobi and Uzumaki, Uzumaki and Yühi, Hyuuga Princess, Toad Sage and Cherry Blossom, Yamanaka and Namikaze and lastly, Tsunade and Udon. Along with telling the story of the lives of characters in those stories, this story is also going to focus on several other characters and pairings. Some of them have already been hinted at, mainly thanks to Moegi's voyeurism in “Sarutobi and Uzumaki”.

There is also going to be quite a lot of new scenes and additions to old scenes, which will hopefully make the re-used parts from the other stories, worth reading again. This chapter is an example of that, as it tells a lot of Konoha's history that was never told in any of the other stories.

I originally wanted this first chapter to cover the whole prologue, but since this chapter already has over 21,000 words written in it, I felt like I had no choice but to split the chapter up in two parts. There is going to be a second part, which focuses on the Third Great Ninja War, The Kyuubi attack on Konoha, and the early days of Naruto's life after he is born, along with the rest of the main characters. Speaking of main characters, this story is going to have a ton of them, along with a ton of different pairings as well.

I might add a “titty scale” in the next chapter, to compliment the Dick-o-Meter in this chapter. For now, here is a crappy looking map of this version of Konoha, that I created to give you readers a visual of where everything is located. This map shows what Konoha will look like after the prologue: https://imgur.com/trI5Qfu

More tags, mainly couple tags, will be added to the story information once those couples have been finalized or introduced. Basically, I don't want to spoil the couples for new readers. Some of the couples will become obvious pretty early on in the story though. The title of the story might change as well, I am still trying to come up with a solid title for this story. The summary will definitely change at some point, as I suck at writing summaries. I will try to improve the summary to make the story sound a little more interesting.

My old stories are put on hold indefinitely. They will likely get removed once this story has caught up to them, timeline wise. This story is going to replace all of those stories, so that I can focus on just writing one story, instead of six or seven stories. I hope you enjoyed reading the first chapter of this new fan fic, following the lives of all the degenerates in this crackverse of the Naruto world that I have created! If you have any questions, feel free to leave a comment or a review. Same goes if you want to tell me your thoughts on the chapter! Both good and bad critique is welcome as well, as long as it's constructive.

Chapter Text

In this chapter you might notice a distinct lack of detailed sex scenes, just like in the previous chapter. While I have never been very good at writing super detailed smut or sex scenes, there is going to be some more interesting sex scenes, once the story actually begins. This prologue is just a build up to all of that. I would also like to give a warning to those that doesn't want to read about any sexual abuse. There is a scene with Nohara Rin in this chapter, which you might want to avoid reading. I felt it was important to have this scene in here, since it will be referenced many times in future chapters, as the older generations tell the younger generations about the reality of this rotten world, and the horrors which war brings.

Chapter 2 – Prologue Part 2

Pre-Third Great Ninja War

After Namikaze Minato graduated from the ninja academy, he rose through the ninja ranks at a record speed. That was something that didn't surprise anyone, especially not Hiruzen. He had also had his eyes on him for a long time, for different reasons than Kushina and other attractive girls, though. Hiruzen was honestly impressed by how fast he improved, and how strong he was, even before he had graduated. Minato was also someone who Hiruzen had gotten to know, and he had become something of a grandparent figure for him as well. That's why he wasn't surprised by how quickly Minato climbed the ranks. Especially since he was the one who promoted him to chuunin, directly after hearing about how he had saved Kushina.

Having saved her innocence would be enough reason for Hiruzen to promote him, since he wanted to be the one to take her virginity himself, but mainly it was due to the impressive feat of having taken down three jounins on his own. Minato had done so before they could even get out of the Fire Country, and before they could cause any real harm to Kushina. Minato's impressive feats continued as a chuunin. He often got assigned to work together with team consisting of experienced jounin, and they would then often be handed missions that are only intended for the very best. B, A and even S rank missions, were the kind of missions which Minato were mostly assigned to.

Hiruzen knew that Minato was someone out of the ordinary and wanted him to get as much experience and knowledge about how it really is to be a ninja, in this rotten world, as early as possible. Hiruzen would often ask Minato to stay behind in his office, after he and his team had returned to the village, in order to talk with him about his missions. He wanted to find out what Minato thought about the things he may have seen, or done, during his missions. It was during those talks that Hiruzen became certain that Minato would be his choice as their next hokage. He shared his dreams of bringing peace to this world, by ending the unnecessary wars and skirmishes, and all the cruelties that came along with them. Hiruzen would end up promoting Minato to jounin only a year after he had become a chuunin.

The world around them had not stopped, during the year before Minato got promoted to jounin. His crush, Kushina, had also been promoted, by dominating one of the chuunin exams held in Konoha. She was now a chuunin, who was seen as something of a kunoichi prodigy. Her prodigy status also came from the fact that she, along with Minato, was being trained by one of the legendary sannin, Jiraiya.

When Minato graduated from the academy, he first belonged to a genin team, which Jiraiya was the jounin teacher of. Jiraiya's two other students, weren't noteworthy at all, and they aren't even relevant anymore, since they had both given up on being a ninja, only a week after graduating. Jiraiya's training regimen had been too much for them. They just couldn't handle it. Jiraiya was trying to raise his students to become actual ninja, he didn't want to watch over brats who were just playing at being a ninja. Those were the types who would die first in wars. In the end it was probably for the best that they both quit.

Minato was then apprenticed to Jiraiya, who continued to train him. After the incident with those Kumo ninja, who attempted to kidnap Kushina, which happened only a month after they graduated, Jiraiya and Minato's usual daily routine of inhuman training courses, got interfered with. That was due to Minato's promotion to chuunin, which in turn meant that he would be assigned to all those missions, without Jiraiya. That was when Jiraiya started training Kushina instead, who he was already very fond of. Unlike other men, who Jiraiya often referred to as closet perverts, he didn't have any nefarious reasons to do so. It was the complete opposite instead, as the super pervert had started thinking of both Minato and Kushina as his two younger siblings. They had become his family, something he had never really had before. While Jiraiya saw them as two younger siblings, but also as two annoying brats, Minato, Kushina and most others, thought of Jiraiya as a parent figure for them.

Now, just because Jiraiya didn't have any ulterior motives to train Kushina, that didn't mean that he didn't check her out every now and then or didn't have a lot of inappropriate compliments for her. That is just how the super pervert functioned. Jiraiya's antics wasn't something that bothered Kushina though, since that was something he did to literally any attractive woman. It was the Jiraiya that both she and Minato loved, as their overprotective and very perverted, adopted father. She knew that Jiraiya would never ask her something so shameless, such as what Hiruzen had asked her that day, and continues to do on a daily basis, whenever she is not out on a mission. It got so bad that Kushina would have her katana ready, in order to give Hiruzen dangerous threats of castration, whenever he asked her to have sex with him. Obviously that didn't stop him. That was still just her playing hard to get, in the old pervert's mind.

Both Minato and Kushina had also become summoners of toads,  thnaks to Jiraiya who had let them sign the toad summoning contract. That was something Jiraiya came to regret, almost immediately after they signed it. The toads took a liking to Minato and Kushina and were overjoyed with the fact that their new summoners weren't degenerate super perverts. In mount Myoboku, the toads started waving flags and signs, with words written on them such as “All hail Minato, down with the pervert!”, “Protect princess Kushina, shame the pervert!”. Unknowingly to Jiraiya, it was Gamabunta who had started that whole movement against him. (1).

All the toads knew that it was just a joke which they were playing on him, while in turn making Kushina and Minato feel welcomed and appreciated. The toads would always be loyal to Jiraiya, but they sure as hell didn't mind messing with him a little either. They are quite mischievous and as a result, aren't strangers to pulling pranks on people. As you could imagine, they and Kushina, had a blast pulling pranks on whoever they could in Konoha, who deserved it. Often Jiraiya would be the victim of one of those pranks. Even Minato wouldn't be safe from them, but he didn't really mind that.

Minato had made a few new friends while out missions, mostly consisting of chuunins who were a couple of years older than him. The Ino-Shika-Cho trio, consisting of Inoichi, Shikaku and Choza, were the ones he got along with the best. Out of those three, Inoichi were the one who he really hit it off with, as the two of them became very good friends. They were very similar and had similar goals and values. Inoichi also had a girl on his mind, just like Minato.

The girl who occupied Inoichi's thoughts, was a girl who happened to be one year younger than Minato and Kushina. Butao is her name. She was often teased for her name, which was a kind of word play of the word “buta”, which means pig. Inoichi, whose name in turn, was a word play on the word “inoshishi”, which means boar, could relate to her when it came to the teasing. Even though her name meant pig, she didn't look anything like a pig at all. Instead she was a very beautiful young woman, who had long blond hair, and light teal beautiful eyes. (2).

After Inoichi learned that she had been bullied and teased, due to her name, he started helping her with training, as a way to look out for her. The two of them has known each other for about a year now, and they had become great friends. Inoichi is also working up the courage to ask her out, as he is very interested in that young beauty. Butao in turn, is very much in love with him as well, and she is also struggling with finding the courage to confess to him.

Butao has also befriended another person, during her first year as a genin. She and Kushina had become great friends, after working together on a mission. They would later on befriend another girl, who is one year younger than Butao. Her name is Nara Yoshino, and she is a constant pain in the ass for Minato's other friend, Nara Shikaku.

Shikaku and Yoshino are both from the Nara clan, but they are not directly related to each other. Yoshino is obsessed with annoying Shikaku, as she is always following him around, whenever he is within the Nara clan compound. Yoshino is a very bossy young maiden, who has already declared that she is going to become Shikaku's wife in the future. Shikaku couldn't think of a more troublesome future than that.

Shikaku would much rather marry an older woman, who is a lot more experienced than her. That way he wouldn't have to put any effort into doing any research or learning about sex and such. That older woman could just teach him everything, or just handle it herself, while he just lays down and let the woman do her thing. But Shikaku had a feeling that he would wind up together with Yoshino anyway. Even though he finds her annoying, he can't help but think that she is the most wonderful girl in the village as well. If there is anything which he has learned from his father, then it's that his mom is troublesome and that is women are supposed to be troublesome. Shikaku might as well marry a troublesome woman of his own, he figures. It would also be a “drag” to find somebody else.

Shikaku is someone who Minato respects a lot for his intellect and strategic mind. The man has an insanely high IQ, and is capable of thinking up several strategies and plans, on the spot, when they are out on missions. He is also very chill and relaxed, which is sometimes annoying, but for the most part just means that he is very “chill” to hang out with. He is a good friend, in other words.

Choza is a bit different, however. At first Minato thought he was a rather shy, yet very kind young man. But he later on learned what Shikaku and Inoichi already knew about him, which is that he is just like Hiruzen, a sex addict. Choza would take any chance he could to participate in any out of the village sex activities with his female teammates. Since Choza is a man who is about as wide as he is tall, he is not exactly the most sought after young man.

There are a few women who are aware of certain a certain skill set, which the Akimichi clan are the users of. The Akimichi clan are able to extend and enlarge any part of their body, which is an ability they use to grow their body size in battle. These women, wants him for that exact reason, as they are interested him only because is able to enlarge his penis, to any size he wants. In other words, they are perverted women, who wants to get pounded by a gigantic Akimichi cock. Other than that, Choza has no faults really, other than eating too much. He is also a good friend, but Minato always got along the best with Inoichi and Shikaku.

While Kushina and Minato were training, going out missions and making new friends, Hiruzen and Mikoto took every chance they could to fulfill their evil plan of getting in the way of Minato and Kushina's relationship. They would end up failing horribly every time they tried, though. Hiruzen recalls one of those evenings, which occurred about a half a year after he promoted Minato to jounin. That evening Hiruzen had invited a lot of his friends, family and clan members to celebrate his own birthday. His birthday parties were parties which Hiruzen always hoped would turn into an orgy, with all the beautiful women participating. That never happened though, instead he would have to pretend to act like a decent human being, mingling with people, while making sure he didn't do or say anything that would piss off his wife.

Hiruzen also had two other reasons why he couldn't make too much of a fool of himself at home. During all his years of degeneracy, he had also managed to father two children. They are his daughter, Sarutobi Asuka and his son, Sarutobi Asuma. Asuka is ten years older than Asuma, and she is already a senior in the ninja academy, and is a classmate to Nara Yoshino. Asuma won't start attending the ninja academy for another six years though. Hiruzen didn't want them to learn of his degeneracy so soon, even though he knew it was only a matter of time until they found out about it. Asuka would most likely hear about it, as soon as she goes out on her first mission. (3)

Even though his friends and family were all present, he and Mikoto couldn't help but try their luck. They saw a chance when Minato went to the kitchen to get another serving of food, while Kushina waited for him in the hall way. Mikoto joined Minato in the kitchen, then proceeded to flirt with him immediately, asking him if he wanted to hang out after the party, and so on. Minato was just awkwardly trying to tell her as nicely as possible that he wasn't interested, while a jealous Kushina, glared daggers at Mikoto's back. Even though the two of them still weren't officially dating at this point, it still pissed Kushina off. She had fallen for the young Namikaze at this point, which made her really hate how Mikoto would always flirt with him. Had she seen Mikoto do something like this back during their academy days, then she most likely wouldn't have cared at all.

While Kushina stared into the kitchen in jealousy, as Mikoto got more and more forward with Minato, Hiruzen walked up next to her.

“Looks like they are getting along well” Hiruzen said chuckling.

“Mikoto-chan has always been like that. When will she ever learn that Minato-kun doesn't think of her in that way?” Kushina said, pouting.

“You like him, don't you?” Hiruzen said with a warm grandfatherly smile.

Kushina turned red “I-is it t-that obvious?” she stuttered in response.

Hiruzen nodded “You know, I could help you win him over. I could help you make him jealous of you instead”.

Kushina stared suspiciously at Hiruzen, before glancing back at Mikoto, who was now hugging Minato's arm to herself, while Minato started sweating, since he knew Kushina was watching. He also felt extremely awkward about the whole situation.

“How would we do that?” Kushina asked, them immediately regretting asking that, knowing something perverted was going to be suggested by Hiruzen.

“Well, I was thinking I could take you to my dojo next door, then I would take you into my private room, where I could make sweet love to you, which will hopefully result in you screaming out in pleasure, which Minato would hopefully hear” Hiruzen said with a perverted giggle.

“I figured you would say something along those lines..” Kushina said with a sweat drop “You are lucky this is your birthday party, otherwise I would have broken your nose again. You disgusting old pervert!” she barked at him, just before Minato used the Hiraishin to teleport himself next to her. He then put his arm around her back, escorting her back to the others. Mikoto came out to the kitchen, facing Hiruzen with a sigh “I tried..” she dejectedly. (4).

“Yes, I know” Hiruzen said with a sigh of his own “Guess it's just you and me later, like always”.

Mikoto stood on her tip toes, giving the third hokage a quick french kiss, before telling him “That doesn't sound too bad either, does it?”.

Hiruzen watched Mikoto walk back to the others with an extra sway in her hips “No, it certainly doesn't” he said, while checking her out.

Later that night, Hiruzen made love to his wife, as soon as their guests had left. Biwako fell asleep around 1 AM, which was when Hiruzen headed into his dojo. There he found Mikoto waiting for him, laying completely naked on a bed, inside a room in the back of the dojo. The two of them went at it until 5 in the morning, during which Mikoto had been acting extra naughty and slutty all night, since it was his birthday. The room they had done it in, was a room that he had used for decades, as he would bring his lovers there to have sex with him, while Biwako is sleeping in the house next doors. After their four hours long sex session, the two of them were cuddling, with Mikoto resting her head on his chest.

“Hiruzen, I don't think I want to do this any more” Mikoto said, causing Hiruzen to stare at her in shock “You don't? I thought we had a great thing going..”.

Mikoto giggled “I'm not talking about us, I'm talking about what we are doing to Kushina-chan and Minato-kun.”.

“Oh” Hiruzen said with a chuckle “You scared me for a second there..”.

“Baka, you have made me addicted to you. You're not going to get rid of me any time soon” Mikoto said, while she stared up at Hiruzen lovingly “I just don't want to interfere with Minato-kun and Kushina-chan any more. Those two are meant to be together, and I miss hanging out with my friend. I have been such a bitch towards her lately”.

Hiruzen nodded, he had no complaints about that. He knew that they were never going to succeed anyway. He had only made this deal with Mikoto as an attempt to get her in bed. He knew that she would remain his lover after that, since he was so confident in his skills in bed. As for Kushina, he is certain that she is never going to take him up on one of his invitations to have sex with him. There are some women, especially strong beautiful feisty women, like Tsunade and Kushina, who would always refuse him. He respects that about them. Even so, he is never going to stop asking them, because he wants them the most, just for that very reason.

“I agree, even though I'll probably never stop asking that beautiful Uzumaki princess to have sex with me” Hiruzen said with a chuckle.

“Do you like her that much?” Mikoto asked.

“Yes, I would do anything for a night together with her, even if it's just to confirm something” Hiruzen said, remembering his theory about Uzumaki women, and strong kunoichi with a bad temper. He thought those would be the most likely ones to resemble Mito in bed. He was certain they would all be extremely wild and fun in bed as well. He wasn't complaining about his current situation though. Mikoto wasn't a bad lover at all, and he still had plenty of other lovers as well.

“She is beautiful” Mikoto said shaking her head “But as her best friend, I'll do anything in my power to keep you away from her” Mikoto then got up, to straddle him “You will not touch her, you can use any fantasizes that you have about her, on me instead” she said, before she started riding him again. Mikoto had decided that she was gonna stay with Hiruzen, and let go of Minato. She also wished to apologize to Kushina, so that they could hopefully return to being best friends again.

A year and a half more passed like that, with Hiruzen doing his thing with Mikoto and his other lovers, while Kushina and Minato were glued to each other, like a couple, but not yet a couple. That changed when the third great ninja war broke out, as Minato and Kushina finally started dating officially. Hiruzen had dreaded this day, when yet another war would begin, which would bring so many more atrocities to this world. He had done anything in his power to prevent it, but didn't manage to anything more than to delay it

The Third Great Ninja War

The war started as a result of smaller ninja villages, such as the Kusa, Ame, Hoshi and Taki (Grass, Rain, Star and Waterfall) villages, trying to take advantage of the fact that the five great ninja villages was still suffering from all the losses of past wars. It was after Iwa (Stone) entered the war, and started marching towards the Land of Fire, when Hiruzen could no longer allow Konoha to sit on the sidelines. Before he officially declared war against Iwa, Hiruzen headed out to scout the army himself, only taking Minato with him. Minato was his ticket out of there, in case they were spotted or things went wrong. He could use the Hiraishin to get them out of there.

When they got to the borders of the Fire Country and Rain Country, they found the Iwa army of over five hundred men. They had taken over a peaceful village, using it as a temporary camp site or base, while doing whatever they want with the village population. There was a large pile of corpses, consisting of mostly adult men, outside the village. Hiruzen knew exactly who does deceased men had been, as he watched the Iwa army rape women and girls all over the village. They were the husbands, fathers and brothers of the women and girls currently being abused.

“This always happens during war.. Every single time” Hiruzen said in a disgusted tone, as he and Minato was standing on top of a hill, staring down at the village.

“Sometimes outside of war as well, I have seen it before” Minato said with a disgusted expression of his own.

Hiruzen nodded, closing his eyes “Minato-kun, I am going to give you a lesson about what it means to be a ninja of Konoha. Even though I have my shortcomings, as you are very well aware of, since I keep bothering your beautiful girlfriend, there are just some things I can't forgive and never accept. What you see in front of you is one of them” Hiruzen said before his face hardened “Minato, listen carefully!”

“Yes sir” Minato said, listening intently.

“Do you hear it?” Hiruzen asked, as a gust of wind blew past them.

“Only the awful sounds of what is happening before our eyes, sir” Minato responded.

“No listen, more carefully” Hiruzen said, as he finally opened his eyes, grinning “The leaves that are being carried away by the winds, are calling out for us”

Minato tried to concentrate his hearing, but couldn't hear anything. He ended up staring at Hiruzen in confusion instead.

“There are some things a man can never walk away from. It doesn't matter how many warriors you are up against, or how bad the odds are of you surviving. That's what the the leaves are telling me, it's the voice of Hashirama-sensei, calling out to me” Hiruzen then bit his thumb, drawing some blood, before using the summoning technique to summon an old monkey summon, by the name of “Enma”.

“War?” Enma asked with a sigh “Here we go again” he added, before transforming into a black battle staff, which Hiruzen grabbed.

Hiruzen then threw the hokage hat at Minato, who caught it, while staring at Hiruzen in confusion “Hold on to that Minato, you might just be the one who inherits it from me. Help me lead our armies, as I command them for another war, then I will let your surpass me as the hokage. Minato!”

“Yes!” Minato saluted, while he hid tears that had started falling from his eyes, due to how happy he was after hearing that Hiruzen wanted him to be next hokage.

“Let's go, let's show these whipper snappers what real Konoha men are made of. It's time I show you who I really am, and that I will never turn my back the on people residing in the country that I have promised to protect” Hiruzen announced, before leaping down the hill.

Minato grabbed a three-pronged kunai in each hand, before jumping after him “Yes, sir!” he said with a wide grin.

Hiruzen and Minato then proceeded to slaughter every single Iwa man in that army, saving the village women and children. After that skirmish, Konoha had of course entered themselves into the war. Soon thereafter, Kumo, Kiri and Suna, would enter the war as well. Suna would end up becoming Konoha's ally, which was something new, since they had been bitter enemies in the past two wars.

Minato would continue to make a name for himself through the war, sometimes by defeating whole armies by himself. The war would end up lasting almost six years, during which time Minato had the time to teach and lose a genin team, get married and become the new hokage. The war was the kind where it could take months between each major battle, meaning that they weren't constantly fighting with the other nations. Although, if you did run into an enemy ninja while out on a mission, you knew that you wouldn't get out of there without a fight.

Two years into the third great ninja war, was when Minato got assigned to become the jounin teacher for a team consisting of three freshly graduated genin. All three of them had graduated early, due to the war. It wasn't unusual at all for academy students to graduate early during war times. His three students were Hatake Kakashi, Nohara Rin and Uchiha Obito.

Kakashi back then, was a very serious and professional individual, who didn't joke around or mess about, while working as a ninja. He was, and still is, a ninja genius who made his teammates and his former classmates, look weak in comparison to him. Kakashi had a good reason to be the way he is, he had seen his father suffer from ridicule at a young age. His father, Hatake Sakumo, who was famous throughout the world as “Konoha's White Fang”, had broken the shinobi rules, by going against the objectives of the missions, in order to save a teammate. Kakashi wouldn't let himself end up becoming ridiculed like he had been, that's why does everything by the book. He didn't know that their hokage respected his father very much for his actions. His father was the type of ninja who Hiruzen loved to have working for him, in his ninja force.

Rin was also very professional, but she was a lot kinder and gentle than Kakashi. She was a medical ninja in training, who looked up to Tsunade. Rin was also something of a mediator between her two teammates Kakashi and Obito, who couldn't go five minutes without fighting or arguing. She kept them in line, in other words. Out of all three of Minato's students, Rin were the one who Kushina liked the most. She had started caring for her almost as a little sister.

Minato's third student, Obito, was a very happy go lucky young man, with big goals and dreams of becoming hokage. Even though he had big dreams, he didn't necessary have the skills or potential to reach those dreams. He was the weaker one of the team, while Kakashi was the genius. That's another reason why the two of them couldn't see eye to eye, as their difference in skill often resulted in Kakashi mocking Obito, or Obito insulting Kakashi any chance he got, since he saw him as a rival. The biggest reason for their one sided rivalry stemmed from the fact that Obito had a crush on Rin, who in turn had a crush on Kakashi.

Obito was a very kind and heard working young man, and that was something Minato liked about him. He may very well have been Minato's favorite student. Obito is the grandson to the Uchiha woman, Temari, who Hiruzen had saved all those decades ago. The tragedy that their family has had to suffer, would sadly not end with just that incident. Obito would be the first of Minato's students to get killed during the war, a year after their team had been formed. It was when his students were out on a mission, when they ran into a squad of Iwa ninja. During a skirmish with those Iwa ninja, Obito had sacrificed himself to save Rin, by throwing her out of the way of an incoming huge stone bolder. Sadly, he wasn't able to get himself out of the way in time, and that stone bolder would end up crushing his body.

Before he passed away, he offered Kakashi one of his sharingan eyes, which he wanted Kakashi to use in order to protect Rin. Kakashi had the eye transplanted, with the help of his medical ninja teammate Rin, soon after that. With the help of his new sharingan eye, he helped Konoha win many victories, earning himself nicknames such as Konoha's copy cat ninja, and Kakashi of the sharingan.

As far as Minato and his students were aware, Obito had passed away that day. That had actually not been the case, since Obito had been saved by a very old Uchiha Madara. It was due to Madara saving Obito, that something awful would happen to Minato's female student. A year later, while Obito's body was still being treated, Madara had come up with a way to make sure that Obito would start to hate this world, and Konoha, as much as he did. It involved him seeing his crush, Rin, getting killed and abused, right before his eyes.

During that year before Madara was able to put his plans in motions, by targeting Rin, Rin and Kakashi had also started climbing the ninja ranks, while fighting in the war. Rin had become a chuunin, while Kakashi had been promoted to jounin already.

Kushina had been a jounin for over a year, and she was one of Konoha's most powerful fighters at this point. She was famous for her ruthless killings of enemy men, who all had told her what they would do to her and her teammates if they were to lose to them. On the other hand, she was also famous for how forgiving and soft, she could be towards her enemies that does not scream how they are going to rape her and her friends during battle. She would often let the respectable enemy ninja, along with the younger ones who had been forced to partake into the war, escape her with their lives still intact. Because during that war, Kushina did not lose a single battle. Considering how much damage she had caused to the Kumo ninja force especially, she considered her revenge on that village, over and done with. Kushina's accomplishments in the war, has renewed her rivalry with Tsunade, as Kushina is often compared to the female sannin, and some even said she had surpassed her.

Tsunade in turn, had returned to the village temporary during this year, to participate in the war. It wasn't that she was hungry for war like some kind of warmonger, instead she felt that she had an obligation to participate in the war. She didn't want to abandon her two former teammates and let them fight in the war alone. She also wanted to make sure she could save as many lives as possible this time around, and make sure she wouldn't lose Kushina as well. She is the only family she has got left, after all.

Tsunade had heard people spreading rumors about Kushina having surpassed her, or the two of them being compared with each other. That only served to motivate her, as she would brutally destroy any enemy that dared cross her path. And if she ever had any trouble with an enemy, then she could always count on Jiraiya to have her back. The sannin were completely unstoppable during the war, which made them even more feared by their enemies, and more respected by their allies.

Minato was also unstoppable. The only really tough fight he has fought so far, was against a man called “A” from Kumo and his brother Killer Bee. Minato came out of that battle winning, but he wasn't able to kill those two. Neither did he want to kill them either, because they seemed a lot different from a lot of other Kumo ninja he had run into. He secretly hoped that those two would be the ones who would lead Kumo in the future, since that could help end these wars. Minato had recently invented a new technique, which he used a lot during the war. It was a technique that he named the “Rasengan”. (5).

During this year, all of Minato's friends had asked out the girls they were interested in, and was now dating them. Shikaku was dating Yoshino, Inoichi was dating Butao and even Choza had gotten himself a girlfriend. His girlfriend was about as wide as he was, and they both sure did love to eat. Somewhat surprisngly, Uchiha Mikoto, had gotten herself engaged with a young man from the Uchiha clan, Fugaku.

That was the result of an arranged marriage between Mikoto and Fugaku's parents. Since Fugaku is very likely to become the next clan head of the Uchiha clan, due to his father being the current clan head, that was not such a bad deal for Mikoto. Especially since that was exactly what she and Hiruzen wanted to happen. They both knew that their marriage would be a loveless marriage. All Mikoto would have to do was to make sure to give that man a few children, and act like a good housewife during the days. As long as she and Hiruzen uses pregnancy seals, there is no reason why their affair can't continue while it has been, as long as they make sure Fugaku doesn't find about it, and Mikoto keeps him happy.

Minato was thinking about proposing to Kushina as well. Both of them had agreed not to have sex until they are married, but if there is something that this war has taught Minato, it's that life could be very short for a ninja. He thought they shouldn't waste more time, and figured it was time to tie the knot with her. He also couldn't wait to actually find out what sex is all about, considering that's all his friends talks about nowadays. Minato would end up proposing to Kushina, who responded with a very happy yes and giving him a kiss, as an answer. His proposal to Kushina happened about a week before the bad news of Rin's disappearance reached his ears.

Rin's disappearance all started with an old and sick Madara, who got help moving around by the creature “Zetsu”, contacting a group of Kiri ninja. These ninja from Kirigakure were the kind of ninja who Hiruzen had no problems with killing during wars, as they were the ones that would always sexual abuse and kidnap their defeated kunoichi enemies. Madara used his sharingan eye powers to control their leader figure, a tall man with brown messy hair, which almost resembled an Afro hairstyle. His name was Sukamu (6).

With the help of Zetsu, they had found out Nohara Rin's location, where she was out on a mission during the war. She was just out on a patrol mission, together with two chuunin teammates. Madara let Sukamu know where he could find her, as he and his band of lowlifes would love to spend some time with Namikaze Minato's female student. Madara did not care what happened to her or what they would do to her, as long as they kept her alive to be used for the second part of his plan.

That was to turn her into the jinchuriki of one of the tailed beasts, the three tailed turtle, Isobu. Once she was turned into a jinchuriki, she would be forced to attack Konoha, taking a route where she would cross as many Konoha shinobi as possible. The goal was for her to battle against Konoha shinobi, and hopefully die while doing so. The whole point of it all, was that Madara would have Zetsu make sure that Obito would see her death, before his eyes. He wanted him to see her die, by the hands of another konoha ninja, so that he would start hating the world as well, especially Konoha, and start doing Madara's bidding.

Sukamu and the fifty or so men part of his squad, which is basically a group of the worst criminals that exists, were not hard to convince, when it came to kidnapping Rin. That's even without the mind control that Madara had used on Sukamu. The mind control was only used to make sure that he would never go back on their deal, and make sure everything happens the way that Madara wanted it to happen.

Sukamu and his men proceeded to kidnap Rin, after a short one sided battle against her and her teammates. Even if Rin was a very skilled fighter, and her two teammates were no pushovers either, they couldn't win against the over fifty jounins and chuunins, who were the ones that had ambushed them. They did take out around ten of those kiri men though. Sukamu and his men then humiliated Rin's temporary teammates, before hanging them with snares around their necks in a tree. They had done so before Rin's eyes, while keeping her pinned on the ground, unable to move. They left after that, taking Rin with them, but not before inscribing a message on the trunk of that tree, which they hoped would reach Minato. The message read “Thanks for the gift, we will take good care of Namikaze Minato's student. Kiri”.

This message, along with Rin's dead teammates were discovered that same day by a group of Konoha ninja. It was reported back to Hiruzen, who sent out search squads, looking for her. Minato, Kakashi, Kushina and even the three sannin, were part of the search squads, along with their best Inuzuka kunoichi and ninja dogs. Unfortunately they never found her, or any sign of where she could have been taken, other than that message they had found written on that tree. They couldn't know for sure that it was Kiri ninja who had done it either, since ninja from other villages could have tried to point them in Kiri's direction as a way to fool them.

Hiruzen even tried to contact the Mizukage, and have him answer to where Rin was. Surprisingly enough, he got an answer, even though they were in the middle of a war. The Mizukage had no knowledge of anyone named Rin, having been captured by them. He had not given the order either. What made this response from the Mizukage believable, was that he added “If I had one of Namikaze Minato's students here, you would be the first to learn of it. I would hang her on top of the Mizukage tower for the whole village to see. You Konoha scum!”.

What happened to Rin afterwards, was something that no one except her and her captors would know about, for about a year and half. During that year and a half, before Rin was found, there had been something of a ceasefire between the villages, for several months. There were no major battles for a very long time. During this time, Inoichi and Butao, Shikaku and Yoshino and Mikoto and Fugaku, had all gotten married. Kushina and Minato were still waiting, since they didn't want to get married before they had either found Rin, or before they had ended the war.

Hiruzen's life had also changed, except for his relationship with Mikoto, which had remained the same, even though she was now married. He even fucked her on her wedding day, while she was wearing her wedding dress. What had changed, was that he had gotten himself another notable lover, someone who had refused his invitations in the past. His new lover is none other than Senju Nawaki's old love interest, Inuzuka Tsume. The two of them had gotten into an argument in the hokage office, which was a silly argument, mainly caused by the two of them being very tired and sick of this war. It got so bad that Tsume went up to slap him in the face, which had Hiruzen grab her by her waist, glaring at her. Tsume then growled at him before putting her arms around his back, kissing him. She was angry and horny, and since Hiruzen had invited her to have sex with him so many times in the past, she intended to fuck his brains out.

The two of them then went at it like two feral animals, inside that hokage office. Tsume, just like Mikoto, became hooked on having sex with Hiruzen after that. A week after they first had sex, Tsume showed Hiruzen something that would forever change the way that he saw the Inuzuka clan. She had invited him over to her house within the Inuzuka clan compound. After being invited into her house, by Tsume and her ninja dog partner, Shidomaru, the three of them ventured into her living room.

In there she had undressed, in front of Hiruzen who sat on the couch, and Shidomaru who rested on the floor, while keeping his eyes on her as well. It was like she was giving them both a strip tease. Hiruzen had expected her to climb on top of him on the couch, which had him pull down his pants in preparation.

“Keep your pants on. I'm gonna show you something that I think you will enjoy, you old pervert” Tsume said with a dirty and naughty expression. She then got down on all fours, before patting her back “Come here baby, let's show this old pervert how to really fuck like animals” she purred, while staring at Shidomaru. Shidomaru let out a happy sounding bark, before running around her, then getting on top of her, mounting her. Hiruzen then watched with wide eyes, as the large ninja dog, pounded so damn fast and hard into Tsume for fifteen minutes straight, without slowing down. Tsume looked so damn small when she had that large ninja dog, resting it's whole body on her back, while it kept fucking her. The dog and the Inuzuka matriarch were licking each others tongues, during the whole ordeal, which Hiruzen figured was their way of kissing.

After Shidomaru had stopped moving, he was still stuck inside of her as he had “knotted” her. Regular dogs can stay knotted like that, which is their cocks expanding, causing them to get stuck inside the female's sex, without being able to pull out, for quite a while. As for ninja dogs, they only stayed knotted like that for about one minute. Ninja dogs in turn, are a lot larger than regular dogs, especially the strongest ninja dogs, who usually have very large bodies, and they also have very large dock cocks. Ninja dogs are also able to keep fucking their “bitch” without any breaks, for a much longer time than a regular dog. A regular dog might go at it for a minute at most, while a ninja dog usually went at it for a minimum of fifteen minutes, before knotting their bitch. They are also ready to go for another round, pretty much immediately after pulling out. They can keep that up for hours, before they get tired.

“Did you enjoy watching that, Hiruzen?” Tsume asked after the very large ninja dog, Shidomaru had gotten off of her.

Hiruzen nodded, with a perverted grin “I sure did. Good lord, he really fucked the shit out of you”.

Tsume laughed “Hahaha, yes he sure did, and he has been doing that for a long time. Don't feel bad though, sometimes a woman just wants to make love, and the feeling of pure pleasure which you are able to make me feel when I'm with you, is completely different to the hard and rough amazing poundings that I get from my wonderful dogs.”.

“Are you fucking more than dogs than this one?” Hiruzen asked with a raised eyebrow.

Tsume nodded “Shidomaru is hardly the other ninja dog around. They all want a piece of their clan leader” she said with an eye wink.

“Hahaha, that's fucking brilliant! It's so perverse and so wrong, but damn if it isn't one of the hottest things I have ever seen” Hiruzen said, grinning.

Tsume smirked “If you enjoyed it that much, why don't you bring your cock over here so that I can suck it, while Shidomaru gets back to pounding me? I'll take care of both of you, as you can share this bitch tonight”.

“I'll take you up on that offer” Hiruzen said, getting up from the couch, before pulling down his pants. Before Tsume let him his cock inside her mouth, she stared up at him with a serious expression “I trust you will keep this a secret?”.

Hiruzen nodded “Of course, but let me know if you want me to bring some of my other lovers over some time. Maybe we can let them try it as well” he said with a perverted grin, a grin that Tsume mirrored “Just make sure they can keep a secret”.

“Hehe, they are all keeping secrets, don't you worry about that” he said, smirking while Tsume took his cock inside her mouth.

While Tsume had let Hiruzen know about one of her, and the Inuzuka clan's, secrets, she had not told him about all of them. There were a lot more to this than just her fucking her ninja dogs. It was her duty to do so, as the clan leader of the Inuzuka clan. Just like her many predecessors Tsume has never had a human male partner. In fact, she has never even had a human male father.

The ninja dogs of the Inuzuka clan are special in the way that their sperm can impregnate human women. If a human woman gets pregnant with the sperm from a ninja dog, then she will have a 50% chance to give birth to a human child after nine months. She also have a 50% chance to give birth to a litter of puppies, after just 1-2 months of pregnancy. Female ninja dogs can give birth to puppies like every normal dog, but they won't be nearly as strong and big, as the ninja dogs born from a human woman. It doesn't work the other way around, with a female dog and human male. Of course, the humans born this way can still have children the normal way with another human as well.

The female clan leader of the Inuzuka clan has breed with their male ninja dogs for many generations, in order to insure that the clan stays strong. It is the duty of their clan leader, and her future human daughters, to make sure that strong ninja dogs are born, and can become the partners of the the human members of the ninja clan. This is a well kept secret, that only a few of the Inuzuka clan members know of. For a time, it was only Tsume that had this knowledge, but after a few of the female members of her clan, had played a little naughty with some of the ninja dogs, and gotten themselves pregnant, they had been let in on the secret as well. They all had to keep the secret safe as well, which they gladly did, since they didn't want to be ridiculed, for their perverted acts with their dogs.

With Tsume, Hiruzen had now gotten himself a new wild lover, and a new perverted hobby, which was to watch her and her ninja dogs go at it. Hiruzen had also managed to get himself a new friend in recent years. He had befriended a young man, who is about five years older than Minato, who had recently been promoted to jounin. His new friend is Hyuuga Hiashi, who is the son to the current, and ever lasting clan leader of the Hyuuga clan, Hyuuga Neji. Hyuuga Neji and his wife, Hyuuga Hanabi, are the same age as Hiruzen, and they are even his former classmates, from all the way back during ancient times when all three of them were attending the ninja academy.

Around the same time that Hiruzen became the hokage, Neji would become the Hyuuga clan leader. Hiruzen and Neji has known each other for a very long time. They had never really gotten along though, and that is mainly due to Neji thinking that Hiruzen is nothing but a degenerate scoundrel. Neji is very old fashioned and a no nonsense type of guy. He doesn't think very highly of all these things that Hiruzen is rumored to partake in, which is mainly adultery and indecent sex acts with lots of women. (7).

Hiashi is the complete opposite to Neji, as the young man was something of a wannabe Casanova. He is a wannabe because he would very much like to be like Hiruzen, who has a harem of lovers. Hiashi has had no luck so far, when it came to charming any women, even though he is older than Minato, Inoichi and the others, who are soon getting married. Hiruzen felt bad for him at first, as he saw him fail miserably when he had tried to put in the moves on Mikoto. Hiruzen had never seen Mikoto snarl like that at someone before, she must have really hated the idea of getting together with Hiashi, even if the young man was probably only looking for a one night stand.

After talking with Hiashi a little bit after that, he heard his story and his wishes to become a man similar to Hiruzen. Hiruzen was happy to hear that at least someone looked up to him, so he started giving Hiashi some advice, on how to approach women and such. That wasn't much help for the poor man, but at least they created a friendship out of all those meetings, when Hiashi would come to him, asking for advice. During the latter part of these one and a half years, Hiruzen has not seen that much of Hiashi. He has heard a rumor that he has met a young Hyuuga woman though.

The Death of Nohara Rin

The good times during the ceasefire, didn't last forever. They were soon reminded that they were still in the middle of a war. And that reminder would come in the worst possible way. First, Kumo attacked from northeast, while Iwa attacked from the northwest, at the same time. Then, Kiri decided to join in on the charge of the Land of Fire as well. They did so with one of their squads leading the charge, it was the same squad that had kidnapped Rin. As for Rin, she was leading their charge, killing anyone that came at them.

Kakashi happened to be nearby, and it didn't take long for him to hear that Rin was in the Land of Fire, attacking Konoha ninja together with a squad of Kiri shinobi. He started searching for her as soon as he heard that she was nearby. If he had known what would happen when he found her, he would have wished that he never went searching for her in the first place. Because what happened next, was the worst experience of Kakashi's life.

With the help of summoned ninja dogs, which are a different kind of ninja dog than the Inuzuka ninja dogs, Kakashi was able to intercept Rin and the Kiri squad.

At first, Rin seemed like she didn't recognize him, as she didn't hesitate to attack him. The men of that Kiri squad, followed up her attack, which Kakashi had no problem dealing with, as he was far more skilled than them, and was able to evade all of their attacks rather easily. Now Kakashi found himself surrounded by what had to be a squad of over forty men, while facing Rin. Kakashi pulled aside his headband, which covered the sharingan eye that Obito had given him. He did this in order for Rin to be able to recognize him, as well as him trying to get Rin back to her senses “Rin, it's me Kakashi!” he called out.

Rin's eyes widened for a second, and Kakashi was sure he could see her appear panicked for that short while as well. Then her expression changed back into an emotionless stare, as she stared back at Kakashi. There was one major change from before though, as tears had started falling from her eyes.

“NO!!” Rin cried out “GET AWAY FROM ME, KAKASHI-KUN! YOU SHOULDN'T SEE ME LIKE THIS!” she followed up with a pleading, very loud, yell.

Kakashi didn't know what to make of that, she still stared at him with the same emotionless expression, but the tears and her voice, was telling him a different story. It was almost as if she wanted to protect him from something, instead of asking him to save her.

The kiri men started laughing “No way!”

“It's her teammate, Kakashi of the sharingan!”

“I can't believe our luck!” some of them spoke as the group continued to laugh.

“Why don't we show him what type of a woman Rin-chan has become?”

Sukamu, the tall man who was the leader of the squad of lowlifes, was standing closest to Rin. He put his arm around her shoulder “What do you think, Rin-chan? There is about forty men here, all of which want to make you happy. Do you want that?” he said, while using his other hand to grope her chest. Rin stared up at him while drooling and she had her tongue out of her mouth.

“You!” Kakashi said with a fierce glare directed at Sukamu. He was angry about what he was insinuating and the fact that he was touching Rin like that. Kakashi had seen a lot of things during his short, but very eventful ninja career, especially during this ongoing war. But he was not prepared for what happened next.

“YES!” Rin yelled in delight, but tears still fell from her eyes “I want to be happy again, please take me back so that you can all make me happy!” she added, as her hand reached down to rub between Sukamu's legs.

“No, Rin-chan” The Sukamu said with an evil grin, before pulling down his pants, exposing his already hard cock “We can all be happy out here, in front of your old teammate”

His subordinates all laughed, as they watched a drooling and smiling Rin get down on her knees in an instant “Yes, master” she said in a delighted tone, but Kakashi thought it sounded like she said that on queue, almost like a programmed robot. Rin started licking Sukamu's balls, while the rest of his men surrounded them in a half circle, leaving the front open to let Kakashi see what they were going to do with Rin. Kakashi saw as all the men, pulled down their pants, and what Rin did next, shocked him. Her hands immediately found a cock to start jerking off, as she announced in a joyous tone “Let's all do it in front of Kakashi-kun!” she then squealed in delight, before she started giving Sukamu a blowjob, while Sukamu and the rest laughed, staring at Kakashi with twisted, evil smirks.

Kakashi stood there frozen in pure disbelief, as he couldn't believe he was actually seeing this. Rin was then pushed around in that half circle, taking every single cock inside her mouth for a few seconds, as they all face fucked her roughly. They were almost throwing her around, sharing her, as Rin moaned in delight at the sight of each new cock.

Kakashi felt like he was going to throw up. He even found it hard to keep his balance to stay standing up. After Rin had been tossed around between the men, for about a minute, the men started ripping off her clothes. Once her panties had been pulled down her legs, she was lifted by her waist by one of the men, who was easily the tallest and largest built there, even taller than Sukamu. That large man, forcefully entered her and started pumping her from behind. While her body was lifted in mid air, she kept, sucking on their dicks as they took their turns. She was being spit roasted, and they were anything but gentle with her, as when they got their turn, they would pull at her hair, slap her face with their dicks, while the one lifting her would continue to slam into her from behind. He also spanked her ass hard, really putting power into each slap to her ass cheeks. What made this whole thing so hard to watch, was that Rin was begging for more, even though she couldn't stop crying.

At this point, Kakashi had lost his balance, as he sat on his knees, staring at the scene with an emotionless and defeated expression. Since her clothes had been ripped off, he was now able to see some of what she had been forced to endure this past year and a half. Her body was full of scars and bruises. Her back had what looked like old scars caused by a whip, which had broken her skin, and caused bleeding. She had burn marks on her arms and shoulders, and large scar going across her torso. They had even marked her with a tattoo, above her crotch, with the symbol of the Kirigakure village. It seemed like the only places they had not caused any damage to, was her beautiful face and her breasts and thighs.

Rin continued to thank them in a delightful tone, for letting her suck their cocks, as the tall man fucking her from behind, slammed her down on the ground, hard. Then another man positioned himself on top of her, putting his whole weight over her, before he start thrusting into her, while pressing her face into the grassy ground underneath them.

“No fair!” One of the others said, as the new guy wasn't letting anyone use her mouth. That was when Kakashi finally snapped out of his frozen status. He couldn't watch this anymore, he had to do something to save her. Even if she had somehow been tortured and brainwashed, which had turned her in to this, she could still be saved.

“Shut it will ya? You will get your turn” The guy on top of Rin said with a loud laugh. The rest of them joined in, laughing as the guy slammed into Rin, hard and fast, while Rin moaned and begged for more. She continued to beg them to “make her happy”. The man on top of her, put his hands into her mouth, then pulled it wide open with his fingers forcefully, while the others laughed “She wants more cocks, get three more cocks inside this Konoha whores mouth!”.

“Yesh!” Rin said, as she wasn't able to speak clearer than with her mouth being pulled wide open.

He then forced her up to a sitting position, to sit in his lap. She started moving her hips immediately, riding him, while the man kept forcefully stretching out her mouth. Three men then started pointing their dicks towards Rin's face, ready to do what the man asked. At this point, Kakashi had charged up a Chidori in his right hand, and was looking at the scene with dark, murderous eyes. Kakashi's state of shock had changed into a state of pure and utter rage and hatred. Kakashi charged towards them, who were now doing exactly what the man had asked earlier as Rin's mouth now had three cocks in it.

“Oh shit!” The man who had Rin in his lap, said, when he saw Kakashi coming towards them, with murder written all over his face. Kakashi was going straight towards the men currently abusing Rin. but Sakumu, their leader, who had just been watching for a while, moved in between them, blocking his path. Kakashi didn't care, he wasn't intimidating to him in the least, as he kept charging them, but with the intention of taking out their leader first. Just as his lightning technique was about to connect with the man's chest, as he had aimed for his heart, Rin somehow got away from the men that had been humiliating her, before she had leaped forward towards Kakashi, getting in between him and the leader figure.

Kakashi wasn't able to react, before Rin had found herself in front of him, impaling herself on his chidori covered hand, as it went straight through her chest and her heart. Kakashi wondered, was she taking her chance to commit suicide? In a way to escape from her captors and also in a way to save Konoha, as their plans to unleash the tailed beast there would be thwarted? Or was she doing this because she had been brainwashed to do it?

Just a few days before this attack on Konoha, she had been turned into a Jinchüriki, just like Madara had planned it. The goal with this attack was to force their way close to Konoha, then release the three tailed turtle there in order to cause destruction in the village. Sukame would then take Rin back to their hideout in the mist village and continue to “make her happy”. But seeing Rin's current state, he and the rest of his men had given up on that plan. There was no saving their sex slave. Instead, they ran away, fleeing from the angry Kakashi, as the cowards they are.

Streams of tears flooded out of Rin's eyes now as she sobbed “Thank you, Kakashi-kun” she said, before coughing up blood, while blood continued to gush out of her chest.

“Rin..” Kakashi said in a somber tone, he didn't understand how she was still able to utter words, with that large wound in her chest.

“Please don't tell our friends what became of me, tell them that I died in battle, fighting for Konoha” Rin continued as she coughed up more blood. Kakashi could tell that she was speaking her final words, as she declared “I love you Kakashi-kun, I always have”.

His female teammate then closed her eyes for the last time, as she collapsed on the ground, face first. Kakashi's emotions took over completely, as he cried, he cried more than he had ever cried in his life, while yelling in frustration, as he sat down to hold his dead teammate. Why did this have to happen to her? What did she ever to do deserve this? And why wasn't he there to protect her? Those were some of the thoughts that went through his mind.

Kakashi then glared off into the distance, where he saw Sukamu and his men fleeing into different directions. He gently put Rin down on the ground, before charging up a new chidori in his right hand. Kakashi was going to kill every single Kiri ninja present, starting with that scum, their leader. When he had dealt with them, he intended to finish the job, by attacking Kirigakure by himself, with the intent of erasing the whole village. The world would not miss that shit hole anyway, he though, as he hunted them down.

As Kakashi got to work, brutally killing almost all of them, one after another, over the course of a few minutes, Konoha back up finally arrived. His back up was his rival and friend Maito Gai, and the jounins Yamanaka Inoichi and Nara Shikaku. They helped Kakashi taking out the rest of that squad, with only a few of them being able to escape. Kakashi still wanted to hunt them down, but his allies told him they needed to get Rin back to the village and report back to the Hokage. Kakashi was pretty much forced back to the village, by the combined effort of Maito Gai's strength and Nara Shikaku's shadow techniques, as he was raging the whole way back, trying to escape their holds and techniques, in order to go back and hunt down the rest of them.

Kakashi believes that at least three of them managed to escape, and he will never forget their faces, especially Sukamu. Sukamu had been able to escape him somehow, along with the tall man who first raped Rin, and the second man, who forced her mouth open, to be used by three cocks. Those three, who seemed like the worst of the bunch, had all survived and escaped. They may have escaped this time, but Kakashi made a vow to himself, that he was going to hunt them for the rest of his life. No matter how long it would take to find them, he would find them and kill them.

Obito had seen it all for himself as well, as Madara had planned. Zetsu had taken him to the scene, with the hopes of him witnessing Rin being killed by a Konoha shinobi. After seeing that, Madara got his wish, as Obito was now willing to do anything the man wanted. He wants everyone in this world to suffer, just like he and Rin had. And he had no love left for Konoha, that's for damn sure. As for Kiri, they were the ones he was going to start getting his payback on. He had already made plans to infiltrate their village, in order to get close to their Mizukage. He would then start controling him, using his new mangekyo sharingan eye, which he had activated after witnessing Rin's death and humiliation. Only a few days after Rin died, Madara had passed away with no mo worries, since he knew that his plan was going to be fulfilled by Obito. There was still a lot left that needed to be done, such as Madara's resurrection in the future.

When Kakashi got back to the village that day, he spoke to Hiruzen in his office, telling him everything he had seen after finding Rin, along with the way she had died. Hiruzen thought things couldn't have gone worse, starting with it being Kakashi that had to witness, what she had become. He knew that Kakashi would never be the same. What he had seen today would most likely mess up his mind for the rest of his life.

Hiruzen and Kakashi was alone in the office, for a few hours, as Hiruzen didn't want Kakashi to get out of his sight, fearing that he would do something stupid. That's when he got a surprise visit from Minato, who had come back to the village to give Hiruzen a status update on how the battles against Kumo had gone.

“The Kumo armies have been decimated, Hokage-sama” Minato said with a salute.

Hiruzen nodded “Good job, as expected of you Minato”.

Minato then glanced at Kakashi, who was sitting on a couch on the left side of the office, crying and looking depressed.

“Kakashi-kun?” Minato asked in a worried tone.

“Sensei..” Kakashi choked out, while the tears continued to fall.

“Sit down Minato, you are not going to like what I am about to tell you” Hiruzen said, with a hardened expression. Minato did as the hokage asked, knowing that whatever he was going to tell him, was not going to be good news. Once Hiruzen started re-telling the story that Kakashi had told him earlier, Minato slammed his hand through the hokage desk, completely destroying it.

“I'm going out there now! I'm gonna take out every single Kiri ninja I meet on the way towards Kirigakure, before I kill that old Mizukage cunt!” Minato yelled in anger, looking angrier than Hiruzen had ever seen him.

“Calm down, Minato. Don't do anything stupid now. My students and your fiancee are leading our forces who are battling against Iwa, and Kumo will most likely send more armies to our borders. We need you here, to help us end this war. We can deal with Kirigakure after the war is over” Hiruzen said.

“You're gonna let them get away with this!?” Minato yelled in a furious tone “To hell with that!”.

“Minato!” Hiruzen yelled back at him with a serious expression “I never said we would let them get away with it. I'm just telling you, no I am ordering you, not to do anything stupid. We will get them after the war is over, at which time you will be the one to decide how we go about it.” Hiruzen said, having calmed down a bit at the end. He took of his Hokage hat, holding up in front of him “After the war, you will be the hokage”.

Minato nursed his temple in thought. He knew that Hiruzen was right. This war had to end, it is the only reason why these things keep happening. It's also the reason why he and Kushina have yet to get married. They are waiting for the war to end, because they don't want to raise a family in the middle of a war. His fiancee, Kushina, won't stop fighting until the war has ended. It is her wish to become a housewife, who will raise their future children, while he protects the village, as their hokage.

“I know..” Minato choked out, as tears fell from his eyes “But Rin-chan.. She was like a daughter to me and Kushina”.

Hiruzen felt his eyes watering, as he put on his hat again, in order to cover his eyes with the edges of it “Take Kakashi-kun home, both of you need a few days off. Once you are ready, we will work together to finally end this war”.

Minato shook his head “Let Biwako-baa look after Kakashi tonight. I am heading North to help Jiraiya-sensei and Kushina take out Iwa. The war needs to end”.

Hiruzen nodded “Remember what I taught you, Minato. Don't let rage take over and change you, you are the future of this village. You can hear the voices now can't you? The leaves are calling out for you..”.

Minato nodded, wiping away his tears, as he heard a quiet echoing voice, along with a powerful gust of wind. Minato couldn't recognize the voice, but it was the voices of Hashirama and Tobirama calling out to him.

“Don't turn your back on your village, no matter what, young Konoha shinobi” Hashirama's voice told him “You are the future of this village”.

“Stop feeling sorry for yourself, get the fuck out there and do your duty, you little shit!” Tobirama's voice yelled, then added “You are an eyesore!”.

“Shut yer trap, brother!” Hashirama barked back at him.

“Go end this war, Minato” Hiruzen said staring at Minato proudly, as he sat down in his chair again.

“Yes, sir!” Minato said, with a salute, before disappearing using the Hiraishin.

A month later, the war was finally over. That very same day, Minato had taken out an Iwa army of over ten thousand men, all by himself. It helped their villages come to an agreement for a peace treaty. Kumo would fight longer, but also ended up giving up and accepted a peace treaty as well.

Post Third Great Ninja War

After the war, Konoha and the other ninja villages were finally able to enjoy a few somewhat peaceful years. Minato became the fourth hokage, succeeding Hiruzen, only a month after the war had ended. That was a decision that no one had a problem with, except for one person. That person was Orochimaru, Hiruzen's former student. Hiruzen had obviously considered his students for the position as well, but deemed that the only interested in the position, was not suited for it. Jiraiya and Tsunade weren't interested at all, they had made that perfectly clear to him, over a decade ago.

As for the reason why Orochimaru was not suited for the position, it has to do with him having changed a little bit, after the second great ninja war. He would use questionable methods to defeat his enemies, and the people who he defeated in battle, had a tendency of disappearing without a trace. Hiruzen would learn the reason why they had disappeared a year after the war, when he discovered Orochimaru's underground lab. He had a lab where he had been experimenting on people, including children, using them as lab rats. The place was a nightmare, filled with dead bodies inside large capsules filled with some kind of fluid. When Hiruzen found Orochimaru down there, Hiruzen had no choice but to try to capture Orochimaru, with the intent of putting him in prison. The two of them would face off for a short battle, which ended with Orochimaru, who is slippery like a snake, having escaped him. (8).

While Orochimaru was trying to get out of the Land of Fire, Jiraiya had managed to catch up to him, before he was able to do so. The two of them would battle, a battle that ended with neither of them winning. It only resulted in Orochimaru getting what he wanted, which was to get out of the Land of Fire. Jiraiya considered it a loss and he thought he was still too weak and had to get stronger in order to never loss against Orochimaru again, who he still considered his friend. He wanted him to man up and take responsibility for his crimes, but he also wanted to help him return to being the Orochimaru who he had grown up with. He figured it must have been the two latest ninja wars, that had somehow covered his mind in darkness. Those wars could really fuck up anyone's mind, no matter how strong and respected they are.

The worst part about Orochimaru's defection from the village, was that he had taken his very young female apprentice with him. His apprentice was a cheerful and very outspoken young girl, with the name of Mitarashi Anko.

The year before Orochimaru defected the village and became a “missing nin”, Hiruzen had been able to enjoy his new life as a retired hokage. He still helped Minato out, as his adviser, but for the most part he could just take it easy and enjoy the fruits that life has to offer. Two of those fruits are his lovers, Mikoto and Tsume, who had both managed to get themselves pregnant around the same time. Mikoto and Fugaku had been able to conceive a child after just having sex one time, which was the first time they ever did it.

They had done it when Mikoto was the most fertile, to up the chances of her getting pregnant. After a minute of Fugaku grunting and huffing behind her, the deed had been done, and Fugaku's duty as her husband had been fulfilled. Fugaku wasn't really interested in sex, and didn't seem to be very interested in romance either. He only had sex with Mikoto in order to get her pregnant, in order to keep his “bloodline” going. That worked perfectly for Mikoto, who couldn't be more happy with that outcome, as she had no love for that man. Their whole marriage was after just a front for her, to keep her long lasting affair with Hiruzen, a well kept secret. Her and Hiruzen's affair had come to a halt when she got pregnant though, and it wouldn't resume until the year after.

Hiruzen and Tsume's nights, along with her ninja dogs, were also put to a halt. She wouldn't let anyone near her while she was pregnant, as she had become very overprotective and careful of her unborn baby. Hiruzen never really found out who had impregnated him, but he was very sure that it wasn't him. Hiruzen would always make his lovers apply pregnancy seals on themselves, as he wasn't interested in fathering any bastard children. Those pregnancy seals are seals that has been around ever since Uzumaki Mito arrived at the village, all those decades ago.

Most pregnancy seals are drawn onto the woman's lower stomach, around her uterus, and will then stay active for as long as the users want them to stay active. They are very easy to remove though, if someone suddenly wants to conceive a child, for example. Mito also made a fortune selling “one time” pregnancy seals drawn on paper, which could be used for one night, before the seal would automatically disappear. The cheaters of the village, which there were many of, were the most frequent buyers of those seals, along with other loose “party” women, who loved sex, but just didn't want get pregnant.

That's why Hiruzen knew that he was not the father to Tsume's unborn child. He always had a stack of those “one time” pregnancy seals with him. The thing is, he has never seen any other man with her, nor will she let him meet him either. All she ever tells him is that he is not her husband, and they are not a couple. He is just someone who she hooked up with once and he lives outside of the village, and won't return for a very long time. The actual father to her unborn child, is Shidomaru, who has impregnated her several times in the past.

Those times, she was only pregnant between 1-2 months, before giving birth to a litter of puppies. She was able to hide those pregnancies, by avoiding people while hiding in the Inuzuka clan compound. This time it was obvious that her dog partner and lover had impregnated her with what would become a human child. Hiding her pregnancy for nine months, would be a lot harder, which is why she came up with that bull shit story, to tell Hiruzen and anyone else asking about the father.

While Mikoto and Tsume were off limits to Hiruzen, due to their pregnancies, he had re-connected with Hiashi again. Hiashi was trying to escape the young Hyuuga woman who he had been rumored to have started dating. She was trying to change him, by turning him into less of a scoundrel, so that he would become a man more suited to become the next clan leader of the Hyuuga clan. Hiruzen and Hiashi started partying and drinking together, often visiting strip clubs for some erotic shows, while enjoying their drinks. Some of those times, the young Hyuuga woman, who there was rumors of Hiashi having started dating, would come into the strip clubs, to drag Hiashi out of it, by his ears. That young woman would later on become Hiashi's wife, and her name is Hyuuga Hitomi. (9).

Hitomi was the type of woman that his father wished Hiashi would marry. She always put her duty as a Hyuuga clan member before anything else, and she was always taking her kunoichi work seriously. She had never dated before, and Neji had never heard of her ever having partaken in any indecent out of marriage sex with anyone either. She's a good old fashioned girl, who would be perfect for Hiashi, in Neji's opinion. Hiashi didn't agree at all, since he wanted to be like Hiruzen, as someone who had a harem of lovers. But the more he got to know that young Hyuuga woman, the more he started to like her. There was more to her than her than her just a prudish and serious Hyuuga woman.

Other than partying, he was also secretly spying on his daughter, who had started dating a man during the war. The man was a good man, from the Sarutobi clan, who wasn't related to him and his daughter in any way, other than belonging the same clan. The reason he spied on them, is because the man is almost two decades older than her. He is a respectable man, who loves to tell a joke, and is an experienced jounin. The problem is his age, he doesn't want his young daughter to be with a man that old. Even if that may be little hypocritical of him, considering that he starts asking girls to have sex with him, as soon as they graduate from the academy.

Asuka graduated several years ago, and she participated in the war. She is war experienced kunoichi, who is no longer his little girl. She is still as much of a tomboy and a prankster though. After spying on them for a while, he gave up, since he saw how happy that man made his daughter. If she wanted to be with him, then he wouldn't stop it, even if he didn't like it. Instead he befriended the man and gave him his blessing to marry his daughter, which was a rather scary ordeal for the Sarutobi man. The man had a name of course, which was Konoushi. (10).

When giving Konoushi his blessing to marry his daughter, he had stared him down, and promised that he would destroy every single bone in his body, if he ever hurt her or betrayed her. He had threatened many young men in the past, in a similar manner, as means to intimidate them and scare them away from the idea of dating his daughter. His intimidation didn't work on Konoushi at all, as he just laughed it off, before telling Hiruzen that he would break his own bones, before he even considered hurting her. Hiruzen grew quite fond of the man after that, and became more and more accepting of the two of them being together, and eventually marrying.

One evening, when Hiruzen and Konoushi was enjoying a bath together in one of the Sarutobi clan's own bath houses, Hiruzen almost had a heart attack. The man had the thickest damn cock he had ever seen in his life, which might as well have been as thick as Jiraiya's. Konoushi's tool was nowhere near as long as Jiraiya's freakishly long tool, though. Konoushi was still a lot longer than normal humans though, the none freaks, such as Jiraiya. The reason he got a heart attack, was that he started wondering if his daughter had married him for that very reason. Was she a pervert just like him? Even if that was the reason, he still wouldn't get in the way of their marriage. He also couldn't fault her, if her being a pervert was the case. She is his daughter after all, and it's probably his fault.

While Hiruzen spent the year worrying about his daughters fiancees tools and what not, one Uzumaki Kushina was getting accustomed to her new life, as a stay at home housewife. Kushina had retired from the shinobi forces, as soon as the war ended. Even though she and Minato had yet to get married, the two of them had already bought a house together, along with a huge backyard, which was bigger than several training grounds combined. They had pretty much bought themselves an area large enough to create the biggest clan compound in Konoha. They bought it together, using some of the tons of money which Minato had earned during the war, and some of Kushina's money, which was mostly taken from her former riches. Kushina had inherited all the riches and valuables from the former Whirlpool Village. She was so rich that she was practically shitting money.

While Kushina was getting accustomed to a life where she was no longer a ninja, Minato was getting accustomed to a life as Konoha's hokage. One thing that he learned when he first became the hokage, was that he couldn't fault Hiruzen all too much for the way he had become. Minato had been able to avoid most loose and slutty kunoichi during the war, and the years before that. But now that he was in charge of all of them, he had to interact with them. They would shamelessly flirt with him and even offer to give him massages and blowjobs, in his office, whenever they could. Some of them were so beautiful and sexy that it was very tempting for the still virgin Minato, to accept one of those offers. He never did though. Minato was a lot more understand as to why Hiruzen had turned out the way he did, even if it still pissed him off. Especially since Hiruzen would still shamelessly make invitations to Kushina to have sex with him, whenever he got a chance to.

Their friends had already gotten married, with Inoichi and Butao getting married first. They were soon followed by Yoshino and Shikaku, and even Choza got married to the girl who he had started dating during the war, who liked to eat as much as he did. Sadly for that girl, it's rumored that Choza has been cheating on her all this time, and has continued to do so after they got married. Whenever she hears about those rumors, she would demand that Choza buys her an expensive all you can dinner, in order to make up for his cheating. One short riding in the bedroom after their feast, would mean that everything was forgiven. That's how Choji would later be conceived.

A year after the war, around the same time that Orochimaru defected, and Mikoto and Tsume gave birth to their children, Itachi and Hana, Kushina and Minato would finally get married. They did so in a very luxurious village, located a few hours away by foot from Konoha. The wedding was very luxurious, with a lot of drinks and tasty food being served for their guests. They had kept the guest count low, only inviting their closest friends and family members. Hiruzen was not among them, as Jiraiya didn't want him to be there, since he didn't trust the man not to make a fool out of himself, by shamelessly asking the bride to be to have sex with him.

Among the guests were: Jiraiya, Tsunade, Shizune, Butao, Inoichi, Yoshino, Shikaku, Asuka, Konoushi, Biwako, Asuma and the ramen chef Teuchi, along with his wife and their infant daughter, Ayame.

After the wedding it was time for the wedding night, which was something both Minato and Kushina had been both nervous and excited about. They were finally going to have sex, for the first time. Even though Kushina had taken Mito's words to heart, when it came to her being a proper lady who shouldn't give in to things such as lust, she was only human, and couldn't help but having some naughty thoughts, involving Minato. Minato on the other hand, had been dreaming of this day for years. It would be the first time that he would see her naked as well. Having just become the hokage a year before, and now getting married to who he thinks is the most beautiful woman in the world, he couldn't be happier.

Their wedding night turned out to be a total disaster, which both of them almost hoped they would forget. Neither of them knew what they were doing, and the whole ordeal just felt awkward. Kushina kept giving him strange rules in the middle of it as well, which she only did since the thought that was what proper ladies would do. She wanted to be a proper lady, who deserved to be the hokage's wife. Her rules involved things such as; They can't use too much tongue when kissing, no doggy style or any other “indecent” position, no genitals or fluids from genitals anywhere near her face. They ended up doing it in a position resembling the missionary position in the end.

After their wedding night, which they had spent inside the honeymoon suite of a very luxurious and expensive resort hotel, they spent another week there, as their honeymoon. They ended up having sex a lot during that week, with both of them learning a lot more about sex and what made both themselves and the other feel good. Kushina's prudish rules, remained though. Once they got back to the village, sex became a daily thing for them, as they would always do it whenever Minato came back home from the office. They did it both because they enjoyed it, but also because they wanted Kushina to get pregnant, so that they can start a family.

During that year, Hiruzen's good old pal, Hyuuga Hiashi, has been whipped into an engagement by Hyuuga Hitomi. Hiruzen had been completely wrong about her, he thought she was some stuck up and boring broad, who didn't know how to have fun. That was not the case at all, however. He learned that about a month ago, when he was out drinking with her and Hiashi, along with Tsume. Hiruzen had already resumed his affair with Tsume during the past year, as she came to find him, in order to drag him back to her home, only a few months after giving birth.

After spending a few hours drinking and hanging out at a bar, Tsume suggested they head over to her house, for more drinks. It was there that Hiruzen would find out that Hitomi could be just as naughty and fun, as she was beautiful and sexy. The woman was a rare beauty, with long dark purple hair, large D sized breasts and a tight and sexy round butt. About two hours after arriving at Tsume's house, Hiruzen would get a lot more familiar with hear beautiful face, her large breasts and her sexy butt. That's because he fucked her that evening, while Tsume fucked Hiashi, next to them. The four of them went at it like animals, until early mornings hours. This started after a very horny and drunk Tsume suggested a foursome. Hiashi had been all for it, but didn't have the balls to say so, until Hitomi, surprised everyone, when she said “Sure, that sounds fun!”.

Hitomi had heard Hiashi's fan boy-like stories about Hiruzen for over two years. At first, when Hitomi had tried to approach Hiashi for a date, he had refused her, saying that he wanted to become like Hiruzen, a man who had lots of lovers. He wasn't interested in just staying loyal to one partner. Hiashi also told her that Hiruzen was rumored to be like a God in bed, which would make all his lovers come back for more. Now, the part about Hiashi wanting to have a lot of lovers, and not promising himself to just one woman, was something that he completely forget about, as soon as Hitomi showed him her tits. She seduced him and brought him back to her bed, where she was able to make him hers. Since that first time, Hiashi has pretty much done everything Hitomi has told him to do, which has improved his standing with his own father. His father was now willing to let Hiashi succeed him as the Hyuuga clan leader, since he had gotten his act together and got engaged to Hitomi.

What Hiashi had said about Hiruzen, and his former dreams of wanting to become like him, was what made a drunken and horny Hitomi agree to the foursome. She wanted to make her man happy for a night, by allowing him to sleep with Tsume, who was likely a lot wilder and fun in bed than she could ever be. Hitomi is otherwise a rather quiet and shy woman, who had surprised even herself, with the way she had seduced Hiashi, while making him her man. She is also secretly a pervert, who loves naughty things, especially if they involve Hiashi. She has no reason to let anyone other than Hiashi know about that though, until tonight. Because she was franky curious to find out if there was any truth to Hiashi's stories about Hiruzen. Was he really as good of a lover as he made him out to be. The answer to her question was no, he wasn't, since was a lot better than Hiashi made him out to be. She loved having sex with Hiashi and she loves him more than anything. But she loved having sex with Hiruzen as well, it was just such an amazing experience, as he made her feel so damn good.

Since that night, the four of them had started some kind of swinging relationship with each other. They would meet up at Tsume's house every weekend for a night of swinging, where Hitomi would have sex with Hiruzen, while Hiashi got ridden by a feral and horny Tsume. This swinging between the four of them would continue into Hiashi and Hitomi's marriage, as they got married about half a year after they had their first foursome. After Hiashi and Hitomi had returned from a one month long honeymoon, the four of them had met up at Tsume's place again. This time, Tsume thought it might be fun to bring some of her hairier lovers, into the mix.

It had been Shidomaru's idea, as he had asked her if he could join them sometime. He and the other ninja dogs felt a little bit left out, since they weren't able to participate in the fun swinging nights. But for the most part, they just wanted to fuck Hitomi. While Tsume is a very sexy and quite beautiful, she can't really be compared to Hitomi, whose beauty is something out of this world. The dogs all want her.

While Hiruzen and Hitomi were getting comfortable on the couch, making out, Tsume asked Hiashi to wait. She then went out an got Shidomaru and another male ninja dog, who was almost twice the size of Shidomaru. This large ninja dog had white fur and had a rather cute and goofy looking face. This dog would later on become the father to a certain ninja dog by the name of Akamaru. Hiruzen lifted Hitomi off of him, telling her and Hiashi that they didn't want to miss this, as they would get to see something amazing. Then Tsume got down on all floor, before Akamaru's father got on top of her, mounting her, before fucking the shit out of her.

Hitomi drooled at the sight, from the start. Both she and Hiashi had similar reactions to seeing this, as Hiruzen had the first time he saw it. About two minutes into it, while Tsume was still moaning and screaming, while getting fucked hard by that massive dog, Hiruzen nudged Hitomi.

“I think Shidomaru wouldn't mind having a partner either” He told her with a perverted grin, before nodding towards Shidomaru. He sat next to Tsume and the other dog, staring at Hitomi who sat on the couch, with his red dock cock visible.

Hitomi turned to Hiashi, giving him a look that silently asked him if she should. Hiashi just pointed at the dog and said “Want to try it, Hitomi-chan?”.

“W-would you mind?” Hitomi asked, blushing.

“Of course not!” Hiashi said with a laugh “Look at them go, this is the most amazing thing I have ever seen. If I saw you get fucked like that by a dog like that..” he said with a perverted giggle.

Hitomi didn't stay around to listen to what Hiashi had imagined, as she was already wet from the foreplay with Hiruzen, she was horny as hell, and couldn't wait to get down on all fours next to Tsume. The rest of that night, Tsume and Hitomi were fucked by a good majority of all male ninja dogs, who are part of the Inuzuka clan. After that night, they would start to see each other for more than just having foursomes. Usually they would have one night per week of “dog shows” where Hiruzen and Hiashi just watched. They also continued with their foursomes, at least once per week.

Around that same time, Mikoto had visited Hiruzen, letting him know that she wanted to resume their affair. She had gone over a year without any sex, and the last time she did it, was the first and only time she did it with Fugaku, which was something she didn't even count as sex. She was horny and was ready to get her lover back. After seeing Hitomi being so willing to get fucked by Tsume's ninja dogs, Hiruzen thought that Mikoto, who was very similar to Hitomi personality wise, might want to give that a go as well.

He brought Mikoto with him to Tsume's house, who was surprised to see Mikoto with Hiruzen, having no knowledge about their affair. Mikoto was also far down on the list of people she would ever expect to be one of his lovers. When Hiruzen told her that he wished to show Mikoto the “amazing show”, Tsume pulled Hiruzen to the side, before asking him if he was out of his mind. She could trust the Hyuuga couple with her secret, because the two of them had reasons to keep their swinging and other sex acts secret from their clan as well. None of them wanted others to find out about what they are doing. When Hiruzen told Tsume that Mikoto had been his lover since she first graduated, and that he had fucked her on her wedding day, Tsume smiled before letting them both inside her house. If she had managed to keep a secret like that for so long, then she would most likely be able to keep another secret, she figured.

When Mikoto saw Tsume getting fucked a by a dog, she watched it in awe for about five minutes, before turning to Hiruzen “Do you think Tsume will let me try that?”.

“Yes” Hiruzen said with a perverted giggle “I hoped you would ask that, and so did those guys” he said nodding at the door, where Shidomaru stood, along with four other ninja dogs. Mikoto would then get down next to Tsume, letting all those dogs take turns with her. Tsume had finished after fifteen minutes, once the first dog was done with her. She had then gone over to the couch, in order to bend over in front of Hiruzen instead. He would then take her from behind, while keeping eye contact with Mikoto, who had a raunchy expression of pure lust, adoring her beautiful face.

Mikoto never joined Hiruzen whenever he was with the Hyuuga's, because she didn't like them. She was sure that if she let Hiashi do anything with her, then he wouldn't be able to keep his mouth shut. Fugaku would find out, and it would ruin her life. She also didn't like Hiashi because he had constantly been asking her out, before he got together with Hitomi. Mikoto wasn't interested in him at all, because she already had Hiruzen and didn't want any more lovers, and frankly, she always found Hyuuga men to be incredibly ugly. She also would take a pause from those nights at the Inuzuka clan leaders house, and her affair with Hiruzen again, as she got pregnant with her second child.

A year later, Hiruzen's nights with Tsume, The Hyuuga couple, would also come to a halt. Mikoto had given birth to her second child, Sara, at this point. She had also managed to get herself pregnant for a third time, while Tsume was pregnant for the second time, and Hitomi had gotten pregnant with her first child. Several other couples were also expecting, as it seemed like almost every respectable couple in Konoha, decided to have child the same year. The Yamanaka's, The Nara's, The Akimichi's, The Aburame's clan head and their spouse, were all expecting as well. The Hokage and his wife, were also expecting. It was when Kushina was going into labor, that the peaceful and relaxing days, that Konoha had enjoyed for the past few years, would be interrupted.

The Kyuubi Attack On Konoha

The tenth October of that year, Kushina was going into labor. She would give birth in a building located in a safe location outside of the village, due to their being risks to her seal, which holds the nine tailed fox, being weakened while she gives birth. The whole building was guarded by Minato's ANBU agents, and as if that wasn't enough security, two of the sannin were present as well, as Kushina gave birth. Tsunade had returned to the village for a short visit, just to be there when Kushina would give birth to her first child. Even though she was there, she would let Biwako, who is a respected and skilled doctor, be the one to deliver the child.

Everything had gone well at first, as Kushina was able to give birth to an infant boy, their son Naruto, who had blond hair and whisker marks on his cheeks. The first thing Tsunade said when he saw him, was “Aww, look at those whisker marks. How cute!”. She said that, while walking with Biwako, who was heading to the front of the make shift hospital, to get a towel to clean and warm up Naruto with, before returning him to her mother. Kushina was extremely tired after the whole ordeal, she had spent hours trying to get him out. Minato and Jiraiya were tired just from watching her.

Then someone appeared out of nowhere, killing Biwako in an instant, before grabbing Naruto, pointing a kunai at him.

Kushina, Minato and the two sannin all stared at him in horror.

“Now don't do anything hasty!” Minato said, sweating, while trying to come up with any plan to get Naruto out of that strangers hands. The stranger in question, was wearing some kind of black robe, and a white mask with a black pattern on it.

“I could say the same thing to you, Namikaze Minato. One more step, and your son dies” The man threatened. This man was Uchiha Obito, who had disguised himself. After he had activated his ass pull mangekyo sharingan power up, he had now become very powerful. His mangekyo sharingan powers allows him to move himself and other things in and out of another dimension, making it seem like he can disappear and appear out of nowhere.

“Naruto!” Kushina cried out “Please don't hurt my son!” she pleaded to the man.

Tsunade who was the closest to the stranger, glared at him with a murderous look on her face “If you leave one mark on him, then I'll hunt you down wherever you go”.

Jiraiya nodded “Hand over the boy, stranger. You are only making the situation worse for yourself”.

While Jiraiya spoke, Tsunade had thrown a kunai at the man, screaming “Now, Minato!”.

While Obito sent part of his body to his ass pull dimension, Minato used that distraction to teleport himself over to him, to grab Naruto from him. Minato then teleported far away from there, leaving Naruto at a safe location, before returning. It took Minato a few minutes before he returned.

When he returned, he found Jiraiya and Tsunade, with panicked expressions.

“He took Kushina!” Jiraiya yelled “We have to find her, Minato, he can't have gotten very far!”.

Minato nodded, before the three of them set out in search for Kushina. They found her about a kilometer away, hanging in the air by her arms, which had ropes around them. The seal on her stomach had signs of having been destroyed. And when they heard a dark and loud roar, coming from the direction of Konoha, they all knew what had happened.

“He extracted the Kyuubi from me” Kushina said, breathing heavily “Minato, be careful. He is not a normal Uchiha”.

“I left Naruto at our old hideout, where we used to make out as teenagers” Minato told Kushina.

“Take us both there, I will be with Kushina and Naruto. And don't worry Minato, nothing is going to happen to Kushina. Uzumaki's won't die from something like this, even though she looks so exhausted right now. I'll heal her right away!” Tsunade said, trying to be positive.

“Get them out of here, I'll go fight that beast in the meantime. Sarutobi-sensei should already be on his way as well. Join us as soon as you have gotten to your family to safety” Jiraiya said with a grin, before disappearing in a gust of wind.

Minato then teleported both Tsunade and Kushina to the hideout, where he left them together with Naruto, before joining Jiraiya, fighting off the masked man and the kyuubi in the middle of the village. Minato had made short work of Obito, who couldn't even defeat him with his ass pull power up. All he managed to do was freeing the Kyuubi. The Kyuubi had then destroyed parts of the village and killed innocent villagers, before Minato was able to teleport the Kyuubi to another location. Obito had already retreated at that point, with his tail between his legs, after finding out that he was completely out matched, when facing Minato.

Hiruzen, Jiraiya and Minato was then able to restrain the nine tailed chakra monster, long enough for Tsunade to bring Kushna and Naruto over. They had made a decision to seal half of it's chakra back to Kushina, while the other half would be sealed into Naruto. They wished that the Kyuubi's chakra, would protect him in battle in the future, just like that chakra had protected and helped Kushina in some of her battles. They were also confident in the fact that if anyone was ever going to be able to control the Kyuubi's chakra, then it would be their son. Both his parents, his sannin God father and God mother, and an old perverted Sarutobi for a grandpa, were all going to guide him and teach him, in order to help him surpass all of them.

Footnotes:

1: Mount Myoboku is the home of the ninja toads. In the future I'll shorten it as “Mt Myoboku”.

2: Butao, or Yamanaka Butao, as she will be known as later on in the story, is Ino's mother. In filler episode of the anime, she has the design of an old middle aged brunette. This is how she looks in the anime filler episodes: https://vignette.wikia.nocookie.net/naruto/images/f/f2/Inos_mother.png/revision/latest/scale-to-width-down/300?cb=20120927231337

Other than giving her a name, I have also completely changed her appearance, basically turning her into an original character. In this picture you can see an anime character who is my inspiration for her design: https://mega.nz/file/syAD2DhZ#oOkgSdj6VNqDAJPZC4p-watEVfwPQ_D2bhnTY4RAcu0

The only differences in her looks to that picture above, is that she has the same eye and hair color that Ino does, and she often wears her long blond hair in a ponytail as well.

3: Sarutobi Asuka is an original character who is Sarutobi Konohamaru's mother. I don't have a design for her in mind, since she won't really play a big role in the story. But I picture her looking kinda like Ichiraku Ayame, without the chef's hat. Picture of Ayame: https://mega.nz/file/BuYggRjR#iL9nkLZKZZFiYXuLchZg7QktKnR5fCGEEEiNCvsfBM0

Sarutobi Asuma's age has been lowered, as I want him, Kurenai, Anko, Yugao and a few others of that age group, to be younger than they were in canon. Kakashi and his teammates, along with Maito Gai, are about five years older than them. Their future friendships and the way they intract with each other as jounins, will remain the same though.

4: Hiraishin is what the "The Flying Thunder God Technique" is called in Japanese. I am going to use japanese names for most techniques, once the technique is often being referred to. Rasengan is a technique that I will never use the english version of. I can't imagine that anyone who reads Naruto fan fics, doesn't know what a Rasengan means at this point.

5: I'm not gonna explain how the Rasengan works or looks. See footnote 4.

6: According to google translate, "Sukamu" is the japanese word for "scum". I figured it's a name that fits this character.

7: Hiashi's parents, Neji and Hanabi, are the ones who Hinata's future younger sister Hanabi, and their cousin, Neji, are named after. Hinata in turn is named after one of Hiashi's grandparents.

8: This scene is a bit different from the canon scene, where Hiruzen allowed Orochimaru to get out of the village, without even a fight. Hiruzen in this story is someone who will never accept something like that, and wouldn't even let one of his former students escape without a fight.

9: Hyuuga Hitomi is the name I have given Hinata and Hanabi's mother.

10: Konoushi is Konohamaru's father. Ushi means Ox, which I combined with the first four letters of Konohamaru's name, to name his father.

Authors Note: There is going to be a third prologue chapter. While I started writing about Naruto's, Konohamaru's and other characters life growing up, I realized that there are still so much left to write. If I didn't split up the chapters again, then this chapter would have probably been close to 30,000 words. That was without me even having started writing about the Uchiha massacre, an Hyuuga incident (Hyuuga Princess readers will know what I mean), Ino's relationship with Naruto's family, Ino, Sakura and Hinata's friendship, Hiruzen's continued degeneracy and much more. The next chapter is going to cover all of that. The forth chapter will then jump straight into the actual story. Hope you liked the chapter anyway and please leave a review or comment, to let me know what you thought about the chapter!

Chapter Text

Chapter 3 – Prologue Part 3

Yamanaka Ino

Yamanaka Ino is a beautiful blond young woman from the Yamanaka clan. She is currently on her way to the ninja academy, to attend her first day of school. Ino is all smiles today as she have been waiting for this day to come for years. It's the day that she and her best friend, and hopefully future boyfriend, is going to start their journey to become real ninja. The one who she sees as her best friend and as her future boyfriend, is none other than Uzumaki Naruto.

Ino and Naruto has always known each other, due to their parents being close friends. They have shared cribs as babies and they have played in sandboxes together as toddlers. They have been to all of their respective birthdays, and all of their parents birthday dinners and celebrations as well. When they got a little bit older, at the age of 4-5, the two of them were inseparable. Ino would ask her mom to take her over to the Uzumaki home every day, to play with Naruto and his mom.

Around the time that Naruto and Ino turned six, things started to change a little bit between them. That's due to Ino having learned about things such as marriage and that girls are supposed to marry the boys the love. Since Ino loves Naruto and he is by far the cutest boy she has ever seen, she would make an effort to let Naruto know that every single day. She had also started to chase him around, and try to give him smooches on his cheeks and lips. That started to become a bit annoying to Naruto and it resulted in him spending a lot more time with one of his guy friends instead, Konohamaru. Naruto and Ino remained very close friends though.

Even after Ino started chasing around, trying to kiss him and tell him that they would get married, they still saw each other several times a week to play. Ino got to know Konohamaru also, and he has become a very close friend of hers as well. Ino finds Konohamaru to be slightly annoying, since he can become a little bit crazy with his pranks. He will do literally anything that Naruto tells him to do, as if to do his bidding. Naruto and Konohamaru has only pranked Ino once, which was the first and last time they ever did it. They messed with one of her plants back at her home, which resulted in her chasing them both around the village, promising a world of pain. When Kushina heard of the news, she joined the chase, helping Ino catch them, before the two of them would give them their punishment. They learned not to mess with her plants after that, and that it was probably best to just not prank her at all.

Now Naruto and Ino are going to become classmates, and Ino intends to claim him in front of all the other girls of the class. He is hers and she is going to make sure that everyone knows about it. Other than Naruto, Ino has grown up getting to know two other boys. Those are Shikamaru and Choji, who are both the children of friends of her parents as well. Shikamaru is Nara Shikaku and Nara Yoshino's son, while Choji is Akimichi Choza and his wife's, son. While she didn't spend as much time with those two, it was impossible for her not to get to know them, due to their parents always getting them all together. Shikamaru and Choji ended up getting along a lot better with Naruto than her, but Ino would still consider them close friends.

Ino mostly had guy friends while growing up, with only a few exceptions. One is Hyuuga Hinata, who Ino has become very good friends with. The two of them are very different personality wise, since Ino is very outgoing and outspoken, while Hinata is very shy and quiet. Even so, they always got along well, and became great friends.

Even though Ino grew up surrounded with mostly male friends, she did not become a tomboy. In fact, she became the complete opposite of a tomboy, as she is into all the girly things. She never cared about wanting to become stronger than her male friends, instead she wanted to become a pretty princess, who would marry her strong handsome future hokage, Naruto, instead.

Speaking of hokage, Ino naturally knows the actual hokage and his wife, who are Naruto's parents, as well. Kushina is someone Ino looks up to, and she wants to become a ninja like her in the future. A ninja who is as powerful as she is beautiful. She is also something of an extra mom for Ino, as all of them are very close. Ino doesn't just look up to the Uzumaki woman, she absolutely adores and loves her. The same could be said about Minato, who is something of an extra dad for her as well. Ino prefers to think of him as her personal stuffed teddy bear, though.

She loves to sit in his lap and hug him to herself. Minato belongs to her as well, and Kushina is only allowed to borrow him sometimes. In recent years, Ino's fondness for Minato, has turned into something of a crush on him. She thinks he is very handsome and would love to marry someone like him in the future. But the most handsome guy to her is still Naruto, who basically looks like Minato, but with cute whisker marks on his cheek. Since she is attracted to both Naruto and Minato, she might have found her “type”, you could say.

Ino has also gotten to know Jiraiya, due to him often being around at the Uzumaki household. Naruto introduced him to her, by calling him “Ero-sennin”, which was something Ino also started calling him since then. One of Naruto's, Ino's and Konohamaru's most favorite ways to pass time, is to mess with Jiraiya in any way they could think of. Most of the time that involved pulling a prank on him, whenever he visits the Uzumaki home, or they would go attack him at the “pervert's lair”, which is Jiraiya's small house, which is located in the middle of Kushina's and Minato's huge backyard.

When Ino got to the ninja academy, she met up with Hinata, who she would end up entering their classroom together with. Naruto was nowhere to be seen at first, but he appeared as soon as the teacher entered the classroom. He had showed off a little bit, by teleporting himself to an open seat next to the window. Shikamaru and Choji were the lucky ones who got to sit next to him, as the students sat on rows shared by three desks and seats. They were lucky because every single girl in that classroom, squealed in delight as soon as Naruto appeared, wishing they could swap seats with Shikamaru and Choji.

Ino was no different to them, and her friend Hinata was certainly no different, as she looked as if she was going to faint any second, while staring at the Uzumaki with a visible blush. Then another boy entered the classroom, who got Ino's, and most of the girls attention. It was Uchiha Sasuke, who entered the classroom with an annoyed scowl on his face. As Sasuke made his way to a free seat, some of the girls in the class started whispering.

“That's Uchiha Sasuke, the last man of the Uchiha clan!”

“Wow he is so cool!”

“He looks so dark and mysterious!”

“I hear he is super strong, some call him a ninja genius..”

That comment got Naruto to chuckle as he stared out the window “Ninja genius huh?” he thought to himself, while remembering moments of his childhood, spent with the Uchiha family. The only ninja genius he met back then, was “big brother Itachi”, while Sasuke was nothing but a chump to Naruto. Naruto and Sasuke never got along, no matter how much their mothers tried to force them to become friends. Sasuke didn't really get along well with anyone though, except Itachi, who Sasuke used to look up to and idolize. Naruto on the other hand, got along well with all of Sasuke's siblings, especially Itachi. One of his favorite ways to pass times when he was younger, was to play “tag” with Itachi, which was a sight that would surprise most people.

Itachi was a ninja genius who had graduated early at the age of six years old. He got promoted to jounin only two years after becoming a genin, and would even end up joining the ANBU. Naruto in turn started getting training from his father, by the time he turned five years old. His training with his father has ended now that he is starting the ninja academy, as his mother, Kushina, is going to take over his training. Kushina and most other people believes that Minato has only been training Naruto for the past two years.

That is as a result of Minato having trained Naruto in secret all those years before that. What he used to tell Kushina back then, when taking Naruto out to train, usually on early morning hours, before Minato had to go to work at the hokage office, was that he was taking Naruto on fishing trips, so that they could have some father and son alone time. Naruto has always been a bit of a moma's boy, which is something that both Kushina and Minato is very well aware of, so Kushina had no objections to those fishing trips, as she only thought it would help her husband bond with their son. They never went on a single fishing trip though, instead Minato and Naruto would head down their ridiculously big backyard, getting far enough away from the house that Kushina wouldn't be able to see them or hear them, which is where Minato would train him.

Now, Kushina and everyone who knew Naruto well, had some suspicions that someone had been training him. It became very apparent to her and some others, when he would be able to escape them after pulling a prank on them, by using speed and moves of that of an elite ninja. When asked about it, Minato would just blame it on either Hiruzen or Jiraiya, saying that they had to be the ones who had been secretly giving him training.

Naruto being trained by his father in secret at such a young age, and the fact that Itachi was a jounin by the time he was eight, meant that their game of tag, could get a little bit out of hand. It usually involved Naruto teleporting himself around the village, using the “Hiraishin” when he was older, and a very fast “Shunshin”, when he was younger, while Itachi chased him around. Even though Naruto knew those techniques, he was never able to beat Itachi in a game of tag. Itachi was also able to move extraordinary fast. The two of them always had a blast playing tag though, and the two of them were really good friends. Naruto kinda looked up to him as his big brother figure even. But then something happened, which resulted in Itachi no longer living in the village. We will get back to that later.

After the girls were done fawning over Naruto and Sasuke, Ino included, as she had taken an interest in Sasuke as well, as she had to admit that he was really handsome as well, their teacher, Iruka, could get the class started. Later, when their class headed out to the school yard to enjoy their lunch break, Ino was the witness to one of the girls of her class getting bullied.

Haruno Sakura

Sakura is pretty young woman with long pink hair. She is a member of a very small clan in Konoha, named the Haruno clan. Her father, Haruno Kizashi, is the clan leader of that clan. Sakura, her father and her mom, Mebuki, are three of only ten members, of this new and small clan. It is her fathers wish that their clan grows both in size and power, as he wants their clan to become one of Konoha's great clans in the future. Her mom and her father get along really well, even though they look like they wouldn't get along at all. Her father looks very goofy and acts very goofy, and is always quick to tell a lame dad joke. Her mother on the other hand, looks almost like a female delinquent, but she is just as goofy as her father. Her mother loves her father's lame dad jokes, and it is most likely their poor taste in humor, in Sakura's opinion, which brought them together.

Even though Kizashi wants their clan to grow and become stronger, he never pressured Sakura into becoming a kunoichi. The man couldn't be more gentle and kind even if he tried. He let Sakura decide herself about her future, which she didn't have to think much about, as she had always wanted to become a kunoichi. She doesn't have any dreams of becoming a legendary kunoichi or something like that, but she wants to make her parents proud of her. Her goal is to become the strongest kunoichi of her clan, and to help make the clan more respected in the village.

Sakura had been having fun on her first day of school. She had gotten herself her first two crushes on boys as well, as she blushed at the mere sight of both Naruto and Sasuke. She couldn't decide between them, which one she thought was the most handsome. She did lean a bit more towards Sasuke though, since he seemed so dark and mysterious. Sakura's joy was stolen from her, when she went out to eat lunch on their lunch break. She had approached five girls of her class, with the intention of trying to make some new friends. She asked them if she could eat together with them. A girl with purple hair, by the name of Ami, laughed at her question.

“Of course you can't! Sasuke-kun and Naruto-kun would laugh at us if we let someone with such a huge and ugly forehead sit down and eat with us” Ami said, as her four friends joined in and laughed at her as well “Yeah, get lost forehead girl!” one of them said.

“Forehead?” Sakura thought to herself as she started sniffling “What's wrong with my forehead?” she wondered.

“We told you to get lost!” Ami said, throwing a rock at her.

“S-sorry!” Sakura stuttered, while raising her arms to try to guard herself from the incoming rock.

“HEY!” Ino yelled as she came running into the scene “Cut that out!” she added, as she stopped in front of Sakura, glaring at Ami.

“Tch!” Ami responded “Mind your own business, Ino!”.

“How does she know my name?” Ino wondered before barking back “You can take your own advice and mind your own business and leave this girl alone!”.

“She started it!” Ami said while laughing “She thought she could become friends with us, not knowing that we are your rivals of winning Naruto-kun's and Sasuke-kun's heart!”. The reason why Ami knows Ino's name, is because she is quite notorious among the female population of Konoha. Most of them seem to think that she has already won Naruto has heart, and thinks that the two of them are a couple.

“Rivals?” Ino sweat dropped, as she stared at Ami in disbelief. The girl and her friends were very basic looking, to put it kindly. But even if they were the most beautiful girls in school, they would still have no chance with Naruto. Ino knows that first hand, as she is very well aware of her good looks. There is just one thing she is lacking, one thing that Naruto always keep reminding her of. Unfortunately for Ino, Naruto happened to walk in on the scene, and would remind her of it yet again.

“Getting into a fight on your first day of school, Ino-chan? You're such a bad girl, dattebayo..” Naruto said in amusement, as he appeared next to Ino out of nowhere.

“Kyaaaa!” Ami and her friends squealed “Naruto-kun, marry me!”.

“Eh?” Naruto responded with a raised eyebrow, while staring at Ami and her friends, who acted like rabid fan girls. He never understood why girls would act like this around him. Ami and her friends, and even Ino and Sakura, were far from the only ones who acted like this around him. His popularity with the female population in the village, is absurd. There hasn't been anyone this popular with the females of the village, since days of Hashirama and Tobirama. But Naruto's popularity with the girls is even greater than that of the former hokage's. Even older women, teachers, married women, his friends mothers, and any girl that he has gotten to know, is attracted to him. This is a fact which Naruto is completely oblivious towards. He thinks the older women are just teasing him, or messing with him. While the girls his age, is just trying to annoy him, since he thinks it should be obvious to everyone that no great man such as himself, could be attracted to flat chests like them.

Naruto turned to Ino “Are they your friends?” he asked in confusion.

Ino glared at him “No, they aren't” she said through gritted teeth. She knew what Naruto was thinking, as he was most likely considering them to be just as annoying as her.

Ino then hugged Naruto's arm to herself “Back off, hussies! Naruto-kun belongs to me!”.

Naruto stared at Ino with a sweat drop, while Ami and her friends glared back at Ino “Everyone knows that you are together, but you haven't won him yet. Whoever ends up marrying him, wins!”.

Ino had a dumb smile adoring her pretty face, as she nodded “Yeah, everyone knows that we are together!” she said with hearts for eyes.

Naruto then shook his head “Ino-chan, how many times do I have to tell you that I don't want to be your boyfriend, on account of you having no tits..” he said in a bored tone.

Sakura gasped, while Ami and her friends looked down at their chests with worried expressions, while Ino glared at Naruto with a deathly expression “You're dead, Naruto-kun!!”.

Naruto knew what was coming next, as Ino launched herself on top of his back, hanging onto him, while hugging her arms around his neck. Her “punishing him” was mostly just her excuse to attach herself to him.

Naruto sighed, as he started walking away, with Ino hanging onto him. After taking a few steps, he glanced back at Sakura, then said “Are you coming?”.

Sakura looked at him with wide eyes at first, before blushing. She nodded shyly, before running up to Naruto and Ino, to join them for lunch. Naruto, Sakura and Ino, would then get more people joining them for lunch, as Kiba, Shikamaru, Choji and Hinata also came to sit with them. Even Sasuke sat at the edge of the group, looking mighty bored and annoyed. He sat with them because he thought everyone in school was beneath him, except Naruto, who he saw as his rival. Sasuke was very well aware of the fact that Naruto was a lot stronger than him, having seen Naruto and Itachi “play” together, growing up. It was because Naruto could keep up with Itachi, that Sasuke had made Naruto into his rival. If he could surpass Naruto, then he would have a higher chance to get his revenge on Itachi.

Sakura would make a lot of friends on her first day, consisting mainly of the people that she ate with. Sasuke was the only exception, as he didn't socialize with anyone. Sakura still thought he was very cool and handsome though, but she was leaning more towards Naruto now, especially after what he did earlier. Ino's interest in Sasuke disappeared after lunch, as she was all about Naruto again. She just thought Sasuke was weird by the end of the school day. Hinata never even glanced in Sasuke's direction, as she was totally sold on Naruto from the get go. She has had a crush on him for a few years already, as she has gotten to know him due to both being friends with Ino.

Hyuuga Hinata

Hinata has always been shy, but she has gotten a lot more shy and quieter in recent years. That's due to two incidents which completely changed Hinata and her family's lives. Before that, Hinata had a very happy childhood, as she and her one year younger sister, Hanabi, were being raised by two very loving parents. Her mom was the kindest and most beautiful woman Hinata has ever met. She did anything and everything for her and her sister. Hinata has gotten her looks, as she resembles Hitomi a lot, with the main difference in their appearance being their hair color. Hinata has dark blue hair, while Hitomi had dark purple hair. Even today, people will always remind Hinata of how much she resembles her mom.

Her father also used to be so kind and loving back then, before their family had to suffer two tragedies. Hiashi wouldn't admit it to anyone, but Hinata was his favorite daughter. He loved her more than anything. Back then he would always boost about her, telling everyone about his “little Hyuuga princess”. But the tragedies changed him completely. The happy go lucky, harem chasing and lovable Hiashi, is a thing of the past now. That's due to him losing both his brother and his wife just a few years apart, as both of them have now passed away.

The several years the married hyuuga couple got to enjoy together after Hinata was born, was the best years of Hiashi's and Hitomi's lives. They loved every single minute of it. A year after Hanabi was born, they would resume their swingers nights with Hiruzen and whatever lovers he would bring with him. They would also resume their “dog show” nights with Tsume and Hiruzen, but those evenings happened a lot less frequently than they used to before everyone got pregnant. That was mainly because of Tsume getting older and just not having the same sex drive as before. She was also tired all the time, as she was looking after her two young children, while still having to keep up with her duties of being the clan leader of the Inuzuka clan.

Hinata and her sister was used to having Hiruzen and one if his female friends, who they would refer to as “Onee-chan's”, around. Hiruzen would visit their home at least once per week, up until that faithful day when Hitomi would no longer be with them. Hiruzen would also call Hinata the “little Hyuuga princess”, while he often had more brash and funny nicknames for Hanabi, such as “Miss firecracker”, which Hanabi hated. Hiruzen just loved to tease her, and he loved the fact that she was such a tomboy as well. They are always the most fun to tease.

Around the time that Hinata turned five, Hinata and Hanabi would meet Hiruzen a lot more frequently. Hitomi and Hiashi had agreed to turn their marriage into something resembling an open marriage. Hiashi would be allowed to hook up with anyone while out on a mission, with the old saying “what happens on the mission, stays on the mission”, being in focus. In turn, Hitomi would get to fuck Hiruzen whenever Hiashi wasn't in the village. Before, she had only done so during their swingers nights.

Whenever Hiashi was on a mission, Hitomi would always invite Hiruzen over for “dinner”, or she would bring her daughters over to the Sarutobi clan compound, where she would let them play with Konohamaru in the backyard, while she plays with Hiruzen in his bedroom. Hitomi and Hiruzen were more than just lovers, as they had feelings for each other. That was something they were very open about, and Hiashi knows that Hitomi has feelings for Hiruzen as well. That never became a problem, because her love for her husband was far greater. She and Hiashi always had a great sex life as well, and neither of them would change a thing about their marriage. They were both very happy together. (1).

Since Hinata and Hanabi were often over at the Sarutobi clan compound, whenever Hiashi was out on a mission, they had both gotten to know Konohamaru well. Hinata adores Konohamaru, and thinks of him as her cute, yet rather rude, little brother. He kind of reminds her of Naruto a little bit, which is most likely why she finds him to be a bit cute. Hanabi on the other hand, doesn't get along with Konohamaru at all. Hanabi is the complete opposite to Hinata, as she is a very outspoken and energetic tomboy. She and Konohamaru are always at each others throats, fighting and insulting each other. Since Konohamaru is just as much of a prankster as Naruto, Kushina, and Konohamaru's mom, Asuka, are, Hanabi has been the target of his pranks, many a times. As a result, Konohamaru has gotten his ass beaten by her, many a times.

This summer, after Hitomi passed away, Hinata has yet to meet either Hiruzen or Konohamaru. That's not the only change in her life, as it seems as if everything and everyone around her has changed. Two years ago, before Hitomi passed away, Hinata's uncle, Hizashi, passed away as well. Hinata was directly connected to his passing, as Hizashi's death had a lot to do with a certain incident that Hinata wishes she would forget about. That incident was Hinata being the victim of a kidnapping attempt, by a jounin from Kumo. That jounin was Kumo's ambassador, who was in Konoha at the time.

It all started with that kumo ninja trying to kidnap Hinata. He didn't get far, as Hiashi had spotted him carrying Hinata, before he was able to leave the Hyuuga clan compound. If that disgusting man, posing as an ambassador of Kumo, trying to sign a peace treaty between Konoha and Kumo, could have just left his daughter alone, then Hiashi wouldn't have to intervene and kill him. It was Hiashi killing him that caused the troubles, as Kumo demanded repercussions for his act. They wanted Hiashi dead for what he did. Hiashi couldn't understand why, since he had not done anything wrong. He had just protected his daughter from a kidnapper. It was his damn right to kill that man for trying to take away his daughter.

Most people agreed with Hiashi, especially his father Neji, who basically told Hiashi that Kumo could go fuck themselves. If they wanted to start a war over this, then the Hyuuga would fight them alone if they had to, with Neji leading the Hyuuga forces. Hiashi's brother, Hizashi, most of the Hyuuga elders, the former hokage, Hiruzen, and the village elder advisers, Homura and Koharu, saw things differently. Hizashi, being part of the main branch, offered to give his life to protect Hiashi and avoid war. Since they are twins, Kumo wouldn't be able to tell the difference. They wouldn't be able to steal his Byakugan eyes either, due to the seal that all members of the branch family has placed on them.

Hiashi refused. If anyone was going to take the fall for this, then it would be him. But what he preferred the most was the other option, what his father suggested, which was to go to war against Kumo, if they decided to retaliate. Unfortunately for Hiashi, he ended up not having a say in the matter due to Hizashi taking the matter into his own hands. Neither did the hokage, Minato, as all of these decisions were made without his blessing. When Hiashi came to protest, saying if they had to do this, instead of going to war, at least let it be him that died. Hizashi answered by knocking Hiashi out, before going ahead with what he and the elders had decided upon. After Hizashi died, he was sent off to Kumo, where they wouldn't be able to get his eyes due to the branch family seal.

Even though Hiashi had tried to prevent this from happening, and even agreed with his father that going to war was a better option than agreeing to Kumo's terms, his father still blamed him for what happened. He called him a weak leader, who couldn't look after his clan. Hiashi's father also gave Hiruzen quite the lecture after the events, telling him to stay out of Hyuuga matters.

Neji was intentionally left out of all the talks where they talked about Hizashi and Hiashi swapping places. It was because Hizashi knew that his father wouldn't go along with it, he would rather die in war than let Kumo decide how one of his sons would die. Hiashi completely agreed with his father, dying in was was a more honorable way to die than to give your life away without fighting, to one of your worst enemies. Hizashi saw things differently, he saw it as a honorable deed to do his duty as a branch member. He protected the main family, the village, his brother and the new Hyuuga clan head, by doing so.

Hiashi tried to tell Neji the truth at first, but he didn't want to hear anything he had to say. All his father told him since that day, was that he wished that Hizashi had been born into the main family instead of him, and that Hiashi was not suited to lead the clan. Neji's comments has caused Hiashi to fear that his own father might be part of a group of Hyuuga ninja who are trying to take over the clan from him. Ever since Hiashi became the clan leader, he has had a feeling that there are a group of higher ups in the clan, who are against him. After Hizashi's death, Neji only visited Hiashi's home when one of his two grandchildren was celebrating their birthdays.

Neji's relationship with his grandchildren, and Hitomi, did not change at all. He still thought that Hitomi was the best thing to ever happen to Hiashi, since she had set him straight and turned him into less of a scoundrel. His grandchildren are the most important people to him now. He may not be as loving and give them as much compliments as their grandmother Hanabi does, or their other grandfather, Hiroshi, but he still loves them a lot. That's something that all of his grandchildren are aware of as well, even though they think he can be a bit scary sometimes, when he gets angry.

Another Neji, who was even more affected by the death of Hizashi, is Hinata's cousin, who is Kizashi's own son, is now fatherless. He knew the whole story as well, and it had caused him to blame the main branch of the Hyuuga clan for his fathers death. Hinata used to get along well with her cousin, but since that incident, he has become very cold towards her and her sister. Neji and Hiashi also interact differently than they used to, as Hiashi used to treat Neji almost like his own son before, but now Neji is acting like a trained solider around him. He would always bow and address him respectfully “Hiashi-sama” and never visited them unless he was told to do so. That's a big change from how he used to act, as he would often be running around at their home, begging “uncle Hiashi-chan” to either play with him or train him.

Hizashi's death caused grief for their whole family, but it wasn't this tragedy that changed Hiashi. It was when his wife died, two years later. Two months before present time, Hyuuga Hitomi passed away due to an unknown illness. No doctor in Konoha was able to determine which illness had taken her life, nor found any cure save her before it did. Hiashi had literally asked every single doctor in Konoha to take a look at her, without any of them being able to help. She had gotten sick a week before she passed away.

She came home one day, on the evening of a warm day of early June, looking upset. She had then locked herself in her bedroom, asking Hiashi to be left alone, without any explanations. The next day, she stayed inside that room, and it didn't seem like she was sick then, she was just upset. But she was at least allowing Hiashi, her sister Hinako, Hiruzen and Hiashi's parents to enter the bedroom and talk to her. The next day, she had lost all color in her face, as she looked deathly pale, and would throw up any food that she ate. She spent a total of six days like that, without getting any better, before she passed away. Other than doctors, she had a lot of her friends visiting, and her sister, Hiruzen and Hiashi's parents would come by daily, to see how she was doing.

Since no doctors were able to determine what illness had taken her life, and the fact that she started to get sick the day after she had allowed people to visit her, Hiashi was suspecting that one of the people who had been visiting her, had poisoned her. He had heard Hitomi scream once, when his father was alone with her in her bedroom. It was a loud yell of “Don't! Please, Neji-sama!”.

When Hiashi entered the room to see what was going on, he found his father sitting next to her bed, holding her hand gently, while crying. When Neji saw Hiashi, he wiped away his tears, before heading out of the bed room. He then turned back and said “You have my word, Hitomi-chan. You just focus on getting better now” he said in a kind tone. He then directed an angry scowl at Hiashi “I'm taking my leave now, scoundrel”.

“What did you do to Hitomi, you senile old cunt!” Hiashi said, glaring at his father.

“Hiashi! Don't call him that. Your father hasn't done anything to me” Hitomi said, as Neji left the bedroom without another word.

“Then what was that scream about earlier?” Hiashi asked, while closing the door so that they could be alone.

“I asked him for a favor, which he refused at first. I kind of overreacted” Hitomi said, forcing herself to smile, even though she was in pain.

Hiashi knew she was lying, she was keeping something from him. “Did my father have anything to do with why you were so upset a few days ago, when you locked yourself in here?” he asked.

“No” Hitomi said, as she closed her eyes “You shouldn't think of your father that way, he is the most honorable man in this clan. The reason I was upset, had nothing to do with him”.

“What happened? Why won't you tell me what happened!?” Hiashi asked in a desperate tone.

“I need to rest..” Hitomi said in a low tone “Please let me rest, my love..”.

“You go ahead and rest, in the meantime, I will send out every single Hyuuga man available, to find Tsunade-sama. She will be able to cure you!” Hiashi declared before leaving their bedroom, which had become Hitomi's sick bed.

Unfortunately those ninja he sent out, wasn't able to find Tsunade before Hitomi passed away. She was also buried before Tsunade even got a chance to perform an autopsy on her body. She might have been able to determine what illness she had, or if she had been poisoned.

The latter was what Hiashi suspected, and he was suspecting that his own father was the one that had poisoned her, or at least knew who had done it. Things couldn't be worse for Hiashi now, as he had lost his brother two years ago, and now he had lost his loving wife. His suspicions of his father, and the fact that the two of them didn't even talk to each other anymore, didn't help either. His mother even started to distance herself from him, mainly because of how much he had changed, in such a short amount of time. Hiashi became the type of man the he always hated. He became a stuck up and strict hard ass, who was all about business now. But the worst change about him, was the fact that he started treating the person he loved the most, badly.

He would start to treat his eldest daughter, Hinata, like shit, with the sole reason being that every time he looked at her, he would be reminded of his late wife, and his late brother. He had dark thoughts, where he blamed her for everything. He blamed her for the kidnapping attempt, arguing that she could have prevented that if she was stronger. If that didn't happen, then Hizashi would still be around, and then he and his father wouldn't have any reason to fight. With Hizashi around, he would have more help to deal with all the clan troubles as well, and it would lower the chance of anyone being able to get away with poisoning his wife. While Hiashi never told Hinata about these thoughts, he would often tell her things such as “You are a disappointment, you should train harder, you should be more like your sister”, rather than praising her, like he used to. He has never called her “Hyuuga Princess” since then either.

Not only did Hiashi start to treat his daughter like shit, he also lost all his friends who mattered. Hiruzen could accept Hiashi's changes at the start, thinking he was just grieving. But it was a decision that Hiashi made, that caused Hiruzen to stay away from Hiashi and the Hyuuga clan all together.

Sarutobi Hiruzen

Hiruzen had told Hiashi about a certain old man in the Hyuuga clan, who is a part of the main branch, who goes by the name Nagi. Hyuuga Nagi was rumored to be the type of man who Hiruzen wanted to get out of his ninja force, back when he was the hokage. There was rumors of him not only sexually abusing his enemies, but also his female teammates. Unfortunately, Hiruzen never got any proof of it, and couldn't remove him from the ninja force due to that. But there were so many rumors about it, and the way he would look at his female teammates, who in turn looked very uncomfortable, and sometimes pissed off, whenever Nagi and his teammates gave him a mission debrief, made those rumors even more believable.

Hiruzen was very happy to hear that he had retired when Minato became the hokage. Hiruzen had told Hiashi about these rumors, and warned him about Nagi. But only a week after Hitomi's funeral, Hiashi had decided to let Nagi become a Hyuuga elder, someone who serves to advise the clan leader. It was a respectable position within clans, where elder former ninja were given a lot of influence within their clan. The fact that Hiashi did that, even after Hiruzen's warning, and the way that he had started treating his own daughter, and his friends, made Hiruzen give up on him. Hiashi was no longer his friend, and he was dead to him now.

Hiruzen saw Hiashi as weak and had lost all respect for him. Hiruzen had dealt with the pain of loss, more than anyone else in this village. When his wife died, back during the Kyuubi attack, he had never felt worse. He felt so bad about the way he had lived his life, cheating on her during their whole marriage. It was the reason why he didn't resume their swingers nights with Hiashi and Hitomi sooner, as he was spending two years inside his house, hating himself. He had even told all his lovers that he was done seeing them, with the exception of Tsume, Hitomi and Mikoto, who he was on a break with, due to them giving birth and tending to their newborns. The turning point came when Mikoto was done having children, and demanded that their affair resumed. And it did resume, since Hiruzen knew that he wouldn't be able to turn either Mikoto or Hitomi away. Those two have always been special to him, and if he had not married Biwako, he wouldn't have minded marrying one of them.

Only a few years ago, Hiruzen would have to deal with the pain of loss, once again. This time, it was his own daughter, Asuka, and her husband, Konoushi, who had passed away. They had been killed on a mission, by an unknown enemy ninja. Hiruzen loved Asuka and respected her so much that he wanted her to surpass him as the clan leader of the Sarutobi clan. He had put all his hope on her, wishing her to be the future of their clan. Now he had lost her as well, and all he had left was his disappointment of a son, who lacked so much potential that he probably couldn't even spell the word if he tried to. He was also stuck with Asuka's son, Konohamaru, who has become Hiruzen's new hope.

Konohamaru reminds him so much of Asuka at that age, and he has grown up in an interesting way, befriending Naruto early on. That's a plus in Hiruzen's book, since Hiruzen is Naruto's number one fan. He loves everything about that blond little brat, everything from his impressive ninja skills at such a young age, to his popularity with the girls and women of the village. Now that is a man with a lot of potential. He knows that his old teachers, Hashirama and Tobirama, would agree with him. Naruto and Konohamaru are now Hiruzen's new pride and joys. Even though they prank him almost on a daily basis, he loves those two knuckleheads. He considers Naruto to be his own grandson as well, and has always been around when he grew up, to Kushina's ire.

Kushina doesn't mind Hiruzen for the most part, since when he acts like a normal person, he is a very warm and kind grandfather figure to her and her son.It's the fact that even after all these years, he still asks her to have sex with him, every time they meet. She has lost count how many times she has chased him down the street, outside of her house, down to the Sarutobi clan compound, which is located on the same street, while wielding her katana. Naruto didn't know why it happened back then, but he taught it was game of “chasing the old man”, so he would join in and spit fire and water techniques on Hiruzen for fun. Hiruzen is still certain of the fact that she is just playing hard to get. They will fuck one day, he is sure of it.

Kushina isn't the only one who Hiruzen keeps giving those sex invitations to. While Hiruzen has stopped asking every single attractive kunoichi to have sex with him, he still goes after the most beautiful ones. Butao, Yoshino, Mebuki and even Tsunade, if she ever makes a visit to the village, will also get the same question whenever Hiruzen runs into them. In recent years, he has added a few more to that list. Uzuki Yugao, Yuuhi Kurenai and Mitarashi Anko, all graduated from the ninja academy a few years ago. They were classmates to his own son, Asuma. As soon as they graduated, Hiruzen started inviting them to have sex with him, the same way that he had done with all the others, with the only difference being the location where he asked them. He asked all three of them, after attending Asuma's graduation ceremony at the ninja academy.

Then he would continue to ask them whenever he ran into them. All three of them refused him, which has become the standard in later years. He had a bigger chance with beauties like them, back when he was a jounin or when he just became the hokage. The three of them were very similar to Kushina and Tsunade in the way that they would refuse him, often threatening to hurt him, if he ever asked them something like that again. Anko could be really scary with her threats, as she would summon spiders from her arms, threatening to send them after him. But out of those three, Kurenai was by far the scariest. The way she would look at him, whenever he asked her if she wanted to have sex, both scared him, and made him wonder if she was a little bit snobby. It seemed to him like she was looking down on him a little, almost as if he was of lower standing than her, or as if they aren't even the same species. It kinda gave him the chills, whenever she looked at him like that.

While Hiruzen got along with most of these people, whenever he wasn't asking the females to have sex with him, he still got along the best with Uchiha Mikoto. Hiruzen and Mikoto will probably never get married, or become an official couple, but she is still his girl, always has been. She was the one who cheered him up and helped him with his depression, two years after his wife died. She was also the one who was there for him, when Asuka died. They didn't have sex for months after Asuka died, as Mikoto only came to Hiruzen's house with her youngest, to care for Hiruzen, while Satsuki played with Konohamaru outside.

When Hiruzen had returned to normal, as he was done grieving, their affair turned into more of a relationship than an affair. Mikoto would come visit him almost daily, always bringing Satsuki with her to let her play with Konohamaru, while Mikoto and Hiruzen plays adult games in Hiruzen's bedroom. She left Sasuke and Sara in the care of her parents during those visits, while Itachi didn't need anyone to look after him. She couldn't count on Fugaku to look after them, since he thought raising the kids was a woman's job.

Mikoto and Fugaku's marriage was only a marriage in name. Neither of them loved the other and they only had sex a total of five times, during their whole marriage. Those five times resulted in five minutes of sex, which in turn resulted in four children. Those four children are the main reason why Mikoto was happy that she married Fugaku. She might not give a fuck about him, but she loves her children more than anything. That's why she would do anything to protect them, even if that meant betraying her clan. She wasn't alone in thinking that, as her oldest son, Itachi, would also end up betraying their clan.

Her husband and the Uchiha clan was fed up with the village and the people leading it, even Minato, who had done nothing but defend the Uchiha clan. They were planning a coup, to take over the village. Mikoto and Itachi fed this information to Hiruzen and Minato, letting them know all about Fugaku's plans and when he planned to act and how. Somehow Danzo, Homura and Koharu got word of this as well, which had them demand that they kill every single person part of the Uchiha clan. At first Minato and Hiruzen were against it, saying there had to be another way. It wasn't until Mikoto convinced Hiruzen and Itachi convinced Minato, that there was no other way, that they agreed to it.

Fugaku and the Uchiha higher ups had made up their mind, they were going to take over the village no matter what. They were one of the founding clans of the village, and they were being treated like shit, in their opinion. The fact that no hokage has ever been an Uchiha, didn't help either. It was their turn to lead the village now. They intended to attack Minato directly, before moving onto killing his family and anyone loyal to him.

It wasn't until Minato heard about them planning to go after his wife and son, that he agreed to a plan to have the Uchiha clan massacred. It was a plan that Itachi had come up with himself, as he would be the one to do the deed. All Itachi asked in return, was that his siblings would be spared. That was something everyone agreed to, except Hiruzen who wouldn't let them go through with their plan unless Mikoto would be spared as well. He straight up told them that if anyone lays a finger on her, he will kill all of them. While Minato knew that he was not the intended target of Hiruzen's threat, he still sweated a little bit, as he was reminded of just how scary Hiruzen could be sometimes. There is a reason why he became the hokage before dinosaurs went extinct.

The Uchiha massacre happened this year, a month before Hyuuga Hitomi passed away. Itachi had been given two missions. His first mission was to wipe out the Uchiha clan, while the second mission was to infiltrate an organization, by the name of “The Akatsuki”. Jiraiya had gathered information on that organization, learning that it consists of powerful missing nin, who could become a danger for Konoha in the future. Before the night that he killed his clan, he had been contacted by a person who is believed to be a part of that organization. It was the same Uchiha who was behind the Kyuubi attack, Uchiha Obito. Itachi didn't know about those details, all he knew was that this mystery person had at least one sharingan eye. He offered to help Itachi, which Itachi kindly refused. But it was thanks to meeting Obito, that Itachi was able to join the Akatsuki, after that night.

That night while Itachi assassinated his father and the rest of his clan, scaring the living hell out of his little brother, Sasuke, who had witnessed some of it, her mother was riding Hiruzen in his bedroom, moaning and screaming his name. At the same time, Itachi's sisters was sleeping safely in the same house at the Sarutobi clan compound. Sasuke was the only one that had to see it, just as Itachi had planned it. He wanted Sasuke to hate him so much that he would become motivated enough to train his ass off, in order to come after Itachi and take his life some day. Itachi thought that he deserved to die for what he did, even if he just did it as an order, to protect the village that he loves. Itachi would end up getting his wish, as Sasuke's goal from that day on, was to become strong enough so that he could kill Itachi and get revenge for what he did to their clan.

Sasuke and everyone else, other than Minato, Hiruzen, Mikoto and the village elders, didn't know the full story. The story they knew was that Itachi had gone crazy and decided to kill his clan because was bored and wanted to “test his skills”. Itachi was branded an S-class criminal in public, while to those that knows better, he is one of the most loyal and skilled ninja that has ever been a apart of Konoha. It is Minato's wish that Itachi will return to the village after his mission as a spy is done. Even if some people in the village may never forgive him, even if they learn of the truth, he could still live here and continue as a ninja, working for the anbu.

Namikaze Minato and Uzumaki Kushina

While Naruto and his classmates are eating lunch at the ninja academy, the hokage, Namikaze Minato, has just finished his lunch. He is in his office, within the hokage tower, enjoying a cup of coffee, while reminiscing about recent years. He had given out all the missions he had available to different teams and now only had boring paperwork left to work on. Minato wasn't too upset about that though, he loves his job and he loves being the one that everyone relies on as the fourth Hokage of Konoha. Minato doesn't only love his job, he is satisfied with pretty much everything in his life. He has the most wonderful family, being his beautiful wife, Uzumaki Kushina and his extremely popular prodigy son, Uzumaki Naruto. Minato loves the two of them more than anything in this world.

Minato is so proud of his son, who has become a powerhouse in just a few years. Naruto was nowhere near the level of a normal academy student's level. He was far above that. Minato could have let him graduate early, just like Itachi did, but managed to convince Naruto to attend the ninja academy. He and Kushina wished for Naruto to attend the ninja academy to make some more friends and just being a student.

Naruto is most likely already stronger than every single chuunin in the village. Minato was a big reason why Naruto became so strong at a young age. He trained him the two years before Naruto started attending the ninja academy, along with secretly training him for several years before that, teaching him pretty much everything he knows. Minato was very surprised by how fast Naruto learned and how hard he worked.

The reason why Minato started training in secret, so early on, was because Minato feared that he wouldn't be able to do it in the future, knowing that something like a war could break out at any time, which would take up all of Minato's time. He figured it was best to teach him as soon as possible, because he wanted to make sure that he got to teach him something, before he became too busy with work. Another reason why he wanted to train Naruto so early on, was because he was such a big moma's boy, that Minato was actually a bit jealous of how close they were. During their training, they had really been able to bond though. Maybe it not in the way that Minato had expected or wanted to, but at least they had something of a father son bond now.

The reason why Minato thinks that the might not have bonded the way that he wished them to, is because Naruto has started seeing Minato as more of a rival than a teacher or a father. He is challenging Minato to fights, almost every single day, which is just the two them sparring against each other. If Minato doesn't agree to spar against him, Naruto will attack him with the most evil and annoying pranks, all day, until he agrees to “fight” him. It didn't surprise him at all that he become such a moma's boy, because he was a male copy of her. His son reminds him so much of Kushina in her younger days, that it's almost scary. Minato was able to teach Naruto for all those years, without any major incidents occurring.

Other than the Uchiha massacre, and the Hyuuga-Kumo kidnapping incident, Minato's time as the hokage had been relatively peaceful and uneventful, compared to the decades filled with wars before he became hokage. For the most part, things had been going smoothly. Minato was able to spend a lot more time with his family and friends than he had first expected, after accepting the position as the hokage.

He had time for dinners with his friends. Most of the time that meant that he and his family would visit the Yamanaka family, or vice versa, to eat dinner. He also found time for evenings for going out to “drink with the boys”, with the boys being, Jiraiya, Inoichi and Shikaku. They rarely went out though, as most of the time they would just go over to Jiraiya's little house and drink there.

Minato wished that he would spend a lot more time with his wife though, but he would often choose to spend his free time either with Naruto, or with his friends. Minato loves that woman so much, but damn if she is not the biggest prude in the village. Kushina is not only prudish, she is also very conservative when it comes to the way she dresses. You will never find her wearing any outfits showing any cleavage, when she is walking around in the village. At home she dresses pretty much the same. The only time Minato gets to see more is when they used to have sex more often, at least for a little while before she covered them with a blanket or the bed covers, as they go at it in the missionary position, which is one of the few position she allows.

Forget about doggy style, stand and carry or anything fun like that. Nothing “indecent” or “un-lady like” as Kushina calls it. The same could be said for foreplay. Blowjobs are out of the question and if his sperm went anywhere near her face, she would probably castrate him. She doesn't even seem to like tongue kissing. Just a few quick pecks every time they do the deed is enough. But mostly the only foreplay she wants is a quick fingering from Minato before they have slow, boring missionary sex, in a dark room with either the bed covers or a blanket covering them. Their sex life really took a turn after Naruto was born as that was the start of them doing it less and less.

Minato can't really understand why. His attraction for her hasn't changed, she is still the most beautiful woman he has ever put his eyes on. But he also can't understand why he never really wants to have sex with her anymore, and the few times he does, she is either too tired or not in the mood. It's not only Kushina's fault though as Minato often gives her the same excuses when she is the one who asks. Their sex life is the only thing that Minato isn't happy about with his marriage. He has never thought about leaving her or cheating on her or anything like that. Instead he wants to try to work on it. When Naruto graduates they will have more chances to be alone in the house for long amounts of time. Minato is hoping they will restore their sex life then. Nowadays, Minato is lucky if he gets laid two times a year. They usually only do the deed on their respective birthdays, or on their wedding anniversary.

Minato wasn't too worried about that though. Sex isn't everything in life. He still loves that woman more than life itself anyway. Someone who Minato is worried will overdose of sex, is his own son. Minato is very well aware of the fact that his son is very popular among the women folk in the village. It's actually one of the reasons why Minato is so proud of him, but at the same time he can't help but worry. He doesn't want Naruto to turn into some kind of sex addict, like Hiruzen. Luckily, it seems like Naruto has chosen to take the route of the super pervert instead, as he often talks about women in a similar manner that Jiraiya does. Since Jiraiya loathes Hiruzen, it's very unlikely that Naruto will turn out like him. Jiraiya may be a pervert, but other than peeking on women and giving them some spicy compliments, he at least respects women and treats all women well.

While Hiruzen may not abuse women or treat them badly, the way that he constantly asks women who wants nothing to do with him, to have sex with him, is really starting to piss Minato off. It's been almost two decades now, that the has been bugging Kushina for sex. Hiruzen should consider himself lucky that Minato considers him to be family, as an adoptive grandfather. And if it weren't for that fact, and the fact that Minato and everyone else knows that Hiruzen would never lay his hands on any girl, without their permission, Minato would have beaten the man close to death many times already, for bothering his wife like that. His sex addiction is honestly his only fault. If he could just stop with those invitations, then Hiruzen could become the most respectable man in Konoha.

Other than his wife and his son, there are two more people who Minato has grown very fond of. The first one is Mitarashi Anko, who returned to the village when Naruto was three years old. She is someone who Minato and Kushina has cared for almost like she is their own daughter. It started after Orochimaru abandoned her. She was found by Jiraiya in one of Orochimaru's abandoned underground laboratories. After she had been brought back to the village, she was left to fend for herself without any family to help her. The villagers were harsh on her due to her connection to the snake sannin. At this point, she wasn't even old enough to graduate yet, even though she was probably skilled enough to be a jounin, due to training with the snake sannin. Kushina couldn't stand that happening in front of her eyes, especially not to Anko who she had always liked since she had such a feisty happy go lucky attitude. Maybe it was because she reminded Kushina of her herself a little bit as well, she ended up invited Anko to stay with them for as long as she wanted.

Once Anko got comfortable around the house, her true mischievous nature awoke. She also seemed to have something of a crush on both of her caretakers. Minato actually thought she preferred Kushina over himself due to the way she looked at her sometimes. Kushina knew all about it also, and according to her Anko definitely preferred Minato over herself. Anko was also very playful with Naruto, acting like a mischievous and funny big sister around him. Around the same time that Naruto turned six, Anko's constant teasing and flirting directed at Minato and Kushina, had gotten so bad that Minato and Kushina had a talk with her. They decided to have that talk due to something that happened earlier that same day. Apparently she had been fondling Kushina's chest, feeling her up, in one of the natural hot springs of their backyard, and tried to make out with her. Later that same day she had sat down in Minato's lap, as he sat on the couch in the living room, before grinding her ass over Minato's groin, while Kushina was busy preparing dinner.

While they had their talk with her, Anko seemed a bit confused. She said that she loved them and just wanted to have some fun. Truth be told, Minato wouldn't really have minded that. A threesome with Anko and Kushina, or just having Anko as an extra lover, who would also be fooling around with his wife, didn't really seem like such a bad deal for him. Unsurprisingly, Kushina wasn't a fan of that though. Her being so conservative and prudish when it comes to sex, meant that she certainly wouldn't be interested in any threesomes or lesbian sex. She told Anko that she loved her like her own daughter and that she would always be welcome to stay with them, but she had to stop flirting with both her and Minato. If she didn't, she would have to move out.

Anko got the message and she did stop most of the flirting, at least the part that involves her feeling up Kushina or grinding on Minato. A year later she also found her own place, a nice apartment in one of the biggest apartment blocks in Konoha. That apartment block was very popular for ninja to live in, meaning that she didn't have to worry about civilian idiots harassing her over her connection to Orochimaru. She lived in the same apartment block as several very known ninja of Konoha. Famous ninja such as Kakashi, Maito Gai, Morino Ibiki and her two best friends, Uzuki Yugao and Yuuhi Kurenai also lives in that apartment block. That move worked out good for all parties in the end.

Once Naruto got older, Anko's infatuation with Minato and Kushina seemed to have vanished, or at least she showed no signs of being in love with them anymore. Instead, she was all about flirting with Naruto from then on. She had fallen for Naruto, just like most of the female village population had. And to Kushina's anger, she certainly didn't hold back her flirting. Minato was just happy that he was out of the crossfire now, as Anko was now Naruto and Kushina's worry.

The other person who Minato has come to care for a lot, is Naruto's oldest friend, Yamanaka Ino, who has grown into quite the beautiful young woman by now. Ino reminds Minato a bit of Anko. They have the same playful personality and they both adore Naruto. It's also obvious that Ino looks up to Anko similar to how she looks up to Kushina. She is a role model for her. Ino is also someone Minato has kind of thought of as an extra daughter, kinda like Anko. Unlike Anko she wasn't all alone since she had two great parents who are also very good friends with him and Kushina.

Another big difference between Ino and Anko is that Ino hasn't been flirting with him that way. At least not in the same obvious way, as she hasn't really given Minato or Kushina any reason to think that she likes him that way. The problem with Ino is that she keeps growing too damn fast for Minato's liking. The older she gets, the more beautiful she becomes. That would be fine, if it weren't for the fact that she still to this day, is very adamant about always sitting in his lap, whenever she visits their home, or if Minato and his family visits their home. It was fine when she was younger, as there was nothing strange about that. But now it was starting to get a little bit strange, since she is no longer a little girl. Kushina has never had a problem with Ino sitting in Minato's lap. Maybe that's because Kushina's favorite seat is in Naruto's lap.

Kushina says she she only sits in his lap to piss off all of Naruto's admirers, but sometimes it makes Minato wonder. Especially since she sits in his lap whenever she can, even if the three of them are alone together. That doesn't really add up with her story of just doing it do “piss off” Naruto's admirers. At the same time, Minato can kind of see where she is coming from. When Anko or God forbid, Yoshino or Butao is around, Kushina would almost grind her ass against him, while sittin in his lap, to make them jealous. Butao is no different from other women, when it comes to being attracted to Naruto. The same goes for Yoshino, and this a fact that both Inoichi and Shikaku are okay with. If wouldn't be, they would have to leave Konoha to find a new wife who isn't attracted to him, since they had not met him yet.

Although, it is pretty fun to tease Naruto about it. That moma's boy is so overly protective with Kushina and he can't handle any teasing about it. Minato has even seen Naruto kick someone ass for just looking at Kushina. Kushina is always dressed in very boring clothing that doesn't show much of her figure at all, so it isn't like they are leering at her ass or tits or anything, they are just mesmerized by her pretty face. Minato couldn't blame them, he is the first one to admit that Kushina is the most beautiful woman to walk this earth. Naruto being so overprotective of her has earned him a nickname, Moma's boy, which is something Minato likes to call Naruto to poke some fun at him.

Kushina shares a lot of Minato's thoughts about their marriage, as she is just as upset about the situation with their sex life, but still loves him a lot. This whole thing about Kushina dressing conservatively and being a bit prudish, is mainly due to Kushina thinking that she has to act that way to deserve to be the hokage's wife. She also wants to keep her promise to Mito, which was that she would always act and dress like “a proper lady”. Although, Mito also told her that if she ever found someone that she considers to be her soulmate, then she shouldn't hold back and act like a wild animal, while in bed with him.

That's a step that Kushina hasn't been willing to take yet, as just the thought of doing some of the things that she fantasizes about, makes her nervous. In truth, Kushina is a bit of a pervert, which is where Naruto gets his own perverseness from. Her worst nightmare is other people finding out about that, especially after all of these years that she has acted like this prudish proper lady. Obviously that's a very ridiculous worry on her part, as Minato would never go around telling other people about what they do and don't do in bed. That's just something that Kushina worries about for no reason.

The fact that she had never really enjoyed the sex she had with Minato, didn't help convince her to start getting more wild in bed either. The only time she could safely say that she had gotten an orgasm, was an evening when she and Minato had returned home drunk. Minato had fingered her on the kitchen table, moving so damn fast, as he was using his Hiraishin technique to speed up the movement of his fingers. He gave her an orgasm that made her scream out loud and it made her pussy squirt like a fountain as well. Unfortunately that never happened again after that. Kushina was to embarrassed to ask him to do it again, while Minato was feeling a bit ashamed of what he had done, as if he had done something wrong. They ended up never mentioning it, even though both had enjoyed it.

Other than their almost non-existent sex life, Kushina had nothing to complain about when it came to her marriage to Minato. Just like Minato, she also couldn't be more proud of Naruto, who has grown up to become the son she always wanted. She honestly can't remember having more fun than the times she has shared with Naruto and their shared friend, Konohamaru. While others, including Naruto and Minato, would describe Konohamaru as something of an adopted son to Kushina, she has never really seen him like that. Konohamaru is Asuka's son, not hers. She is fine with her being a younger brother to Naruto, but to her he is a friend, a friend who she loves and appreciates a lot.

If it were up to her, then Konohamaru would start living with them permanently. He is already sleeping over their place a few times every week, which makes Kushina think that he should just move in with them already. The only reason why that has not happened yet, is most likely since Konohamaru doesn't want his grandfather to be alone, not knowing that he has Mikoto to cure his loneliness. The reason why she wants him to stay here, is because he and Naruto are really close like brothers. Naruto and Konohamaru are also always able to make her laugh, and every moment she spends with them, are filled with joy and mischief. She has lost count on how many times they have pranked Minato, Jiraiya, Hiruzen and some of their other friends who could take a prank without making a big deal out of it. It would just make sense if he started living with him, and that way she could get him away from that disgusting grandfather of his, who she fears might become a bad influence on him.

Kushina just loves the way that Konohamaru started calling Naruto “big bro” when he was younger. She was also very proud of Naruto after he had consoled and cheered up Konohamaru, during the funeral of his parents. While Konohamaru was crying, sitting in front of the graves of his parents, Naruto had walked up to him and put one of his hands on his shoulder. He then told Konohamaru that he had been promoted to his underling, and he would always look after his underlings, and if he ever felt lonely, he could come stay at their place. Somehow that worked to get Konohamaru to stop crying, as he bolted up to salute Naruto, before stating “Yes boss!” before charging Naruto for a hug. That's probably the only time Kushina has seen Naruto hug Konohamaru, or seen the two of them cry together as well. The scene made her cry as well, especially when she started thinking about Asuka.

Asuka had been such a great friend, who just like Naruto and Konohamaru, was able to make Kushina laugh all the time, and was just a joy to be around. Konohamaru is so similar to Asuka personality wise, just like Naruto is similar to Kushina. It's not surprising at all that Naruto and Konohamaru became such good friends, because that's exactly what Kushina and Asuka was as well. After Naruto and Konohamaru left, Kushina said her final good byes to her “little sister”, who used to be a part of her squad during the war. She promised her that she would look after her son, and hopefully train him someday, to prepare him for the harsh life of being a shinobi, in this rotten world.

For now though, she is looking forward to training her own son. It's actually something she has been looking forward to ever since he was born. Minato has warned that Naruto is a bit of a training addict, and that it's pretty much impossible to get him tired with any form of regular training. That just made Kushina look forward to training him even more, as she was going to work his ass off, while teaching him everything she knows.

Uzumaki Naruto and Sarutobi Konhoamaru

At the end of Naruto's first school day, he had to literally flee the school grounds, to get away from Uchiha Sara and her new friend, Tenten. Naruto doesn't know much about Tenten, but he wasn't about to mess with Sara any time soon. That girl is like Ino but on steroids. She is just as annoying and love struck as she is, but she is a lot stronger and faster than Ino, making her a lot harder to get away from. The only other girl in school who scared him a bit, is Kiba's older sister, Hana. She is a fourth grader right now, who still has two attend the academy for two more years before she graduates. Whenever Naruto is over at Kiba's place, Hana and Tsume look at the same way that one of their ninja dogs looks at meat on a bone. Due to Naruto being so oblivious to the fact that all the girls and women are attracted to him, he thinks that they are actually thinking about eating him, or feeding him to their dogs. He is actually a bit scared to visit the Inuzuka clan due to that.

Another reason why Naruto is a bit wary of women, is due to Kushina having warned him about female spies. She has told him that the village is full of female spies who might try to get close to him, in order to get him to reveal secrets of the Uzumaki clan to them. Considering how girls and women keep coming after him wherever he goes, he has no reason to believe that his mom is not telling the truth. Obviously it is a complete lie, as Kushina only told him that as a way to delay the inevitable, which is Naruto hooking up with one of those ladies some day.

Even though Naruto is completely oblivious when it comes to all the girls being attracted to him, there is one girl who is different from others. His big sister figure, Anko, is the only one who Naruto can safely say that he has a crush on. Anko's flirting always makes him blush, and she is the only one who can turn an otherwise very confident Naruto, into a blushing and stuttering mess. Now, Naruto doesn't know that their attraction is very mutual, as Anko is completely obsessed about Naruto. He thinks her flirting is just her teasing him, to get that exact reaction out of him, so that she can make fun of him. He doesn't think he stands a chance with her.

Even though Naruto is very oblivious when it comes to girls and their attraction to him, he is oozing self confidence and isn't shy at all around girls. The only exceptions would be Anko and Kushina who has made him blush with their teasing and closeness. In Anko's case it's the constant teasing which has already been mentioned. In his mothers case it's similar, except she isn't teasing, she is just very touchy and cuddly with him. She sometimes even sits in his lap and hugs in front of their friends and family. She is also extremely protective of him, especially when other women tries anything with him, which they do often, to be fair.

Naruto doesn't mind Kushina's behavior, even though she is his mom, because quite frankly she is one of the hottest women around in his opinion. Although he is wondering sometimes if what she is doing is normal, if his friends mothers do that to them as well. Considering what his friends mom's sometimes try do with him, he has no reason to believe that it is not normal. The other girls and women who see it don't like it one bit. They think Kushina is just doing it to “mark her territory” or trying to make them jealous.

Other than problems with annoying girls, Naruto has nothing to complain about. Just like his parents are proud of him and loves him more than anything, he could say the very same thing about them. He might never tell it directly to his father, as he prefers to prank him and mess with him, but he is very proud of his father, who is a well respected ninja and considered to be the most powerful hokage ever, by many people. Naruto loved the time he spent training with him, especially whenever they would spar against each other. He really enjoyed testing his skills against someone so strong, and the fact that he never won against him, no matter what he tried, made him respect his father even more.

Just like Kushina is very overprotective of him, Naruto is also very overprotective of her. That is because he has always noticed how men of all ages will stare at her, as love struck fools, whenever she walks passed in the streets of Konoha. And that's even though Kushina never dresses in anything revealing or gives them any other reason to stare, other than the fact that she is very beautiful. In later years, Naruto has started bouncing between all the perverts, using the Hiraishin, to smack them on top of their heads, if he notices them leering at his mom. That has made everyone to stop doing that whenever Naruto is with her, as they will just smile at her and greet her in a friendly manner instead. Kushina is very thankful to Naruto for that, because she hates those kind of stares and getting such attention. She has never seen herself as some pretty princess, like most people seem to think she is.

In fact, she thinks that girls like Anko, Kurenai and Yugao, are a lot more beautiful than she is. The fact that one of Konoha's biggest newspapers will hold a yearly poll to decide whoever is the most beautiful woman in Konoha, which is a poll who Kushina has won almost every single year since Tsunade left the village, didn't help convince Kushina otherwise. She didn't read those tabloid like newspapers anyway. Tsunade won that poll for almost twenty straight years, before Kushina came along and started challenging her for the top spot. The only other girls who has won the poll in the last two decades, are Yamanaka Butao, Hyuuga Hitomi and Uchiha Mikoto. Kurenai is the second favorite to win this years poll, while Kushina remains the favorite.

Naruto enjoy spending time with his mom and Konohamaru, just as much as she does. The same goes for Konohamaru, who Naruto ran into on the street where both of their homes are located at. He had been out in his backyard, doing a little bit of training, when he saw Naruto walk passed his house.

Konohamaru also loves spending time with the members of the Uzumaki family. After his parents passed away, he visits them almost daily, even if its just a quick visit sometimes. Konohamaru really looks up to Naruto, and wants to be exactly like him. That's why he will do anything Naruto asks of him, even if those things can sometimes get Konohamaru in trouble. One of the reasons why Konohamaru looks up to Naruto so much, is because he is the son of Konohamaru's actual idol, Namikaze Minato. Konohamaru's dream is to become the hokage, and his grandfather, who is the former hokage, has told Konohamaru that Minato might be the strongest hokage that has ever existed. That's why Konohamaru looks up to him, and wants to surpass him some day.

The more Konohamaru got to know Naruto, Naruto would become more and more of a big brother and idol figure to him. Konohamaru did not want to surpass Naruto, because it wouldn't be right for an underling to surpass his boss. He is also sure that no one is going to be able surpass his boss, as it's obvious to him that Naruto is going to become the greatest ninja that has ever existed. So now he kinda has two idol figures, even though Naruto is more of a a big brother or his best friend, to Konohamaru.

Konohamaru likes the third member of the Uzumaki family as well. She is surprisingly fun for being “an old hag”, and her food is the best thing he has ever eaten. It doesn't hurt that she is pretty to look at either. Leave it to his boss, to have such a pretty mom.

Konohamaru chased him down and yelled out to him “Wait up, boss!”.

“Hey little shit!” Naruto greeted with a wide grin. “Little shit” is something of a pet name that Naruto has for Konohamaru, but he also calls him by his name, and his nickname “Kon”.

“Shouldn't you be training?” Naruto asked, as Konohamaru caught up to him. Konohamaru rested his arms behind his head, grinning as well “I have been training all day. I wanna prank someone now, kore!”

Naruto nodded “Yeah, let's ask my mom to cook us up some grub first, then we can go find Ero-sennin”.

“Sweet! Your mom's food is the best, kore!” Konohamaru said in an excited tone.

“I know right?” Naruto said with a wide grin, before the two of them ran down the street, to get to Naruto's home at the end of said street. After entering his home, they found Kushina together with Minato, and two friends in their living room. Anko had brought along her friend, Kurenai, to visit them today. When Naruto's eyes landed on Kurenai, he stared at her wide eyed for a second. He knew that moment, that he had just found his second crush. “Holy shit, what a babe, dattebayo!” Naruto thought as he smiled at her warmly, before he was jumped by Anko.

“Naruto-kun!!” Anko said as she pressed his head into her chest “Did you miss your onee-chan? Anko-nee is here to play with you, and I brought a friend!”.

“Stop that Anko-nee, I'm not a kid anymore!” Naruto growled, but he couldn't help but blush due to the fact that he had Anko's big juicy titties jiggling in front of his face. What made the experience even better was, that she wasn't wearing a shirt or even a bra. All she wore was a mesh transparent body armor. She did cover up her nipples with skin colored bandages though.

“I know, you are all man now aren't you?” Anko said licking her lips “Maybe we should head upstairs to your bedroom so that I can turn you into a real man!”.

“ANKO-CHAN!” Kushina yelled “Get away from my son!”.

“Anko..” Kurenai hissed “What are you doing to that poor boy!”.

Kushina smiled when she heard that “You tell her, Kurenai-san!”.

Minato just started sweating, because he was worried that Kushina was going to blame him for what Naruto and Anko is doing, for some reason. He fought back the urge, to give Naruto an encouraging comment of “atta boy” as well.

Kushina and Kurenai had just gotten to know each other. But Kushina had a feeling that the two of them would get along well, especially if she helps her keep women like Anko away from Naruto. Unfortunately for Kushina, she had gotten the wrong idea about why Kurenai had helped him get Anko away from Naruto. She was covering her view of him, as she would like to continue to check him out. Kurenai had just found her future mate, after all.

Yuuhi Kurenai and Mitarashi Anko

“Shut it, you old prude!” Anko barked back at Kushina, before releasing Naruto from her holds, to Naruto's disappointment.

“And what the hell Kurenai-chan? Why are you siding with her and not me, I thought were were friends” Anko said in fake hurt tone, causing Kurenai to sweat drop. At the same time, Kushina pouted, while turning to Minato “I'm not a prude am I?”.

Minato started sweating, before clearing his throat “Of course not, dear..” he said, while thinking “Yes you are, I wish I you would bury my face between your tits like that some day..”.

Now that Anko had let go of Naruto, Kurenai got back to checking him out. Kurenai is a little bit different personality wise, than the rest of the people inside that living room. Minato is a rather calm and collected and very professional individual, who has the kind of personality that Kurenai has tried to take on, but it isn't her true personality. The others, are all loudmouths and mischievous pranksters, who Kurenai loves to be around. That's why she gets along so well with Anko, even though she usually doesn't get along well with anyone. That's because Kurenai sees most people as lowly insects, instead of being a human like her. Even Anko is not worthy be to be called the same species as her, but she was higher up in the hierarchy than the others, the lowly insects, though.

A pyramid system can be used to describe the way that Kurenai sees other people. All her life, she has been at the top of the pyramid, as the queen of all the lowly insects around her. Today, she has added Naruto next to her on top of that pyramid. Second highest tier, on the pyramid scale, is where Anko and Yugao belongs, as Kurenai's best friends. Today she has added three more people on that tier, as the creators of Naruto, which is his parents, have been added there only for giving birth to him. Konohamaru was also added there, because of what he did next.

“You ugly old witch!” Konohamaru yelled at Anko “Stop attacking Naruto-nii, kore!”.

“What did you call me!?” Anko asked, glaring dangerously at Konohamaru, cracking her knuckles in a threatening manner “Want me to punch your head in again, you annoying little brat!?”.

“Fuck you, you fat cow!” Konohamaru said, while flipping her off, before bursting out of the living room, running for his life. Kushina and Kurenai couldn't help themselves as they both started giggling, causing Anko to get angrier and angrier. She glared at Kurenai and Kushina “I'm gonna kill him first, then I am returning for you two!” she yelled, before leaping out to the backyard, through the backdoor of the house, chasing after Konohamaru.

Naruto followed her, just to make sure she actually didn't kill him. This always happens whenever Konohamaru and Anko are in the same room. They can't go five minutes without insulting or teasing each other. Mainly it's because Anko hates that Konohamaru is always bothering them whenever she is trying to get some alone time with Naruto. Konohamaru on the other hand, thinks he is doing his duty as Naruto's underling, by protecting him from the evil witch, Anko.

Due what Kurenai had just seen, she added Konohamaru on the second tier as well. He thought what he just did was very entertaining, and he was a bit cute as well. Now that's actually a big deal, since before today Kurenai has never had any kind of attraction to any human of any gender. Today that changed, as she had found her future husband now in Naruto, while she thinks Konohamaru is a bit cute. She would later on learn that the reason why she finds Konohamaru to be a bit cute, is because he is basically a brown haired Naruto copy. She has fallen for Naruto so badly that anything that resembles him, has become a lot more attractive to her as well. Except Minato. That old fuck doesn't do anything for her. He is only good for having impregnated the birth giver of Naruto. Kurenai would see Kushina as more of a birth giver in the future as well, as the two of them would become very good friends. But this were her thoughts when she visited their house for the first time.

Below the second tier, you can find the people who Kurenai can get along with and work with, but doesn't really care for. People like Maito Gai, Hatake Kakashi belong to this tier. In the future, a lot more people will join this tier, once she gets to know people like Ino and her parents, and all of Naruto's other friends, who doesn't annoy her as much.

The fourth tier is where most people belongs. This is the insect tier. They are annoying insects who keep swarming around her, getting in her way, leering at her, or is otherwise annoying. She wishes someone would just tell the men belonging to this tier group, that they are not worthy to even look at her.

The lowest tier of them all, is the fifth tier. There are only three insects belonging to this tier, the worm tier. Those are Orochimaru, for hurting Anko. Sarutobi Asuma, for having a crush on her, and not leaving her alone. And lastly, Sarutobi Hiruzen, for daring to ask her to have sex with him, even though he is a wrinkly and disgusting old worm. (2).

Asuma is actually a very nice guy, and the reason why Kurenai can't stand him, is because he used to follow her while they attended the ninja academy, like a love struck fool. Kurenai wanted to tell the worm to leave her alone, but she had to keep her act going, as the professional and kind kunoichi that she wanted everyone to think she was. The worm has some uses though, as she has often told him to chase away other men who are trying to hit on her. That's why she will often bring him along with her, whenever she goes to a bar for a drink, or goes for a walk in the village. This has started some rumors of the two of them being a couple, which wasn't the case at all. Kurenai was just using him and his obsession with her, in order to make him get the other insects to disappear from her.

Naruto, Konohamaru and Anko, returned a few minutes later. During those minutes, Kurenai was able to talk a little bit with Kushina alone. She was already getting fond of her and saw her as more of a birth giver now. She decided to give her a new title as her “future mother in law” instead.

When Naruto and the others returned, Konohamaru held his head, which Anko had punched repeatedly before Naruto could intervene. He was currently carrying Anko bridal style, which had Kurenai glare at them in jealousy. No one noticed that, luckily for her, as she was able to keep up her appearances. That got harder for her a few minutes later though, when Naruto challenged Minato to a spar. Minato gladly accepted, since he just wanted to get away from Kushina and Anko, to avoid getting caught in the middle of one of their fights. He knew that Kushina would soon explode if Anko continued to flirt with Naruto like that in front of her.

Before they started, Naruto took off his T-shirt, which caused both Anko and Kurenai's faced to turn completely red. Kurenai even drooled a little, as she checked him out, which she wasn't able to hide from Kushina nor Konohamaru, who both sighed when they saw Anko and Kurenai's reaction to Naruto taking his shirt off.

Kushina and Konohamaru made eye contact, as Konohamaru shook his head, before shrugging “Don't blame too much, old hag. Boss has a way with the ladies, kore”.

“Is that so?” Kushina asked with a mischievous grin “How about you, do you have a way with ladies as well, dattebane?”, she asked as she got up on her feet, before walking over to Konohamaru.

Konohamaru rested his hands behind his head, grinning at her “I don't know, Hinata-nee is nice to me though, kore!”.

“I see” Kushina said with a sweet smile. She then kicked Konohamaru's feet, causing him to fall over. Kushina then sat down on his back, while Konohamaru yelled “What the hell!? Get off me you old hag!”.

“How many times do I have to tell you not to call me that!?” Kushina yelled back, before pressing her hands on the back of Konohamaru's head, pressing his face into the grass underneath them.

“Apologize, ttebane!”.

“NEVER!” Konohamaru yelled back, resulting in Kushina giving him more punishment.

Kushina put her little finger inside her mouth to wet it, before she said “I'm gonna give you a wet willy if you don't apologize right now!”.

“You know I'm gonna get you back for this right? You crazy old hag!” Konohamaru barked at her. Kushina's response was to put her little finger inside one of Konohamaru's earlobes, causing Konohamaru to shiver “Ewww, stop it!”.

“No dinner for you tonight, if you don't apologize” Kushina said while giggling.

“I'm sorry, Naruto's mom. It will never happen again” Konohamaru said in defeat. That was the only punishment Konohamaru could go without. Her food was just too tasty to pass up on. Kurenai and Anko had not even glanced at Konohamaru and Kushina, as they were busy watching a shirtless Naruto spar against his father. Anko has seen Naruto spar against Minato a lot of times, but for Kurenai this was a first. She was mesmerized by what she saw. Not only was he the most handsome stud she has ever laid her eyes on, he was also so damn strong, and was able to keep up with their hokage in a spar. The way they moved, using the Hiraishin combined with their hand to hand combat, looked almost like something out of a cartoon. If she wasn't sure before, she was now. That young man was going to become her future husband.

Anko had similar thoughts, but instead of husband, she wanted Naruto to become her future boyfriend to start with. She intends to confess her feelings to him once he graduates. Even Kushina won't be able to keep them away from each other then. He will be considered an adult when becomes a genin, and can do whatever he wants, including drinking and having sex. There is an old saying, old enough to kill? Then you are old enough to drink and fuck. That's an actual law in Konoha, although it's worded a bit fancier than that.

Both Anko and Kurenai are aware of all the competition. Especially Kurenai, whose only reason for coming along with Anko to visit the Uzumaki's today, was because Anko kept telling her about Naruto, and wouldn't stop talking about her “cute future boyfriend”. Kurenai had seen him around before, when he was much younger. She never caught her attention then, because he was far too young then. But now that he had gotten older, he had really become a handsome stud. Now she just had to figure out how to get Naruto all for herself, before Anko or anyone else gets him first. Because make no mistake, she is going to be the one that wins his heart, no matter what.

If only Anko and Kurenai knew that Naruto had a crush on them as well, then things would be much easier for them. Naruto wouldn't dare to let anyone know about his crushes, especially not those two, as he figured they were way out of his league, and the age difference didn't help either. Some people refer to Anko as the “Crazy” or “Scary” snake lady, and Kurenai is a little bit crazy, selfish, shallow and she is very much a yandere. Maybe Naruto has found his “type” as well, just like Ino has?

Jiraiya

Other than Naruto's parents, Konohamaru, Ino and Anko, the person who is the most important to Naruto is the legendary toad sage, Jiraiya. Jiraiya, or Ero-sennin, as Naruto calls him, has always been around. The reason why Naruto calls him Ero-sennin, is because Jiraiya was reading a chapter of Icha Icha to him, when he was three years old, as a night time story, to get him to fall asleep. Kushina had walked into Naruto's bedroom, to see Jiraiya next to the bed, reading out “And then little miss Mushina married the bratty Mr Kinato. Their wedding night was...” was all he managed to read out, before Kushina yelled “Jiraiya-sensei!! Are you reading your stupid smut to my son!?”.

“Yeah?” Jiraiya said in a confused manner “It's my best work yet, the brat loves it.”.

“You damn pervert!” Kushina barked at him “Just get out of here, I knew it was mistake to let you put him to bed. Go down and drink your stupid sake with Minato instead!”.

“Sounds good” Jiraiya said as he chuckled, before getting up. Before he was able to leave Naruto's bedroom, Naruto called out to him “iraiya-jiji!”.

“Yes, brat?” Jiraiya asked.

“You said you are a mighty toad sage from the mountains, right?” Naruto asked.

“Almost correct, I'm the mighty toad sage, who hails from Mt Myoboku!” Jiraiya said, as he struck a stupid looking pose.

“Mom” Naruto said, as he turned his focus to Kushina.

“Yes, sweety?” Kushina responded with a loving smile.

“Is Jiraiya-jiji a pervert?” Naruto asked, tilting his head.

“No, I think he likes to call himself a super pervert” Kushina said with a chuckle “Isn't that, right Jiraiya-sensei?”.

“Yeah but..” Jiraiya said with raised eyebrows “Is it necessary to tell him that? He is the only Uzumaki who respects me!”

Kushina sweat dropped “You usually boast about being a super pervert!”

“Hey hey!!” Naruto said, trying to get their attention “Isn't Jiraiya-jiji and Ero-sennin then?” he asked.

Naruto's question got Kushina to fall down on her back, laughing out loud. She held her stomach, due to how much she laughed “That's right Naruto, he is an Ero-sennin!”.

“GAH!” Jiraiya exclaimed, before turning to leave “Don't go teaching the brat weird things!”, he barked, before heading to the first floor.

“Good night, Ero-sennin!” Naruto called out to him.

Jiraiya chuckled “Good night, brat!”, while Kushina kept laughing together with Minato who had overheard them from downstairs.

Since that day Naruto has only referred to Jiraiya as “Ero-sennin”. Some of his friends, such as Ino and Konohamaru, are also using that nickname for the super pervert. It doesn't bother Jiraiya that much when Naruto does it, but he thinks that any other brat can go to hell for disrespecting him like that. There is nothing more annoying to him, than all of Naruto's annoying brat friends. He can accept Naruto being an annoying brat, because he is Minato's and Kushina's brat, but he wishes the others would just stay away from and leave him alone. Especially Ino and Konohamaru, who has teamed up with Naruto to form some kind of prank squad, who was always messing with him.

Jiraiya still lives in the small house that he had built on Minato's and Kushina's property. It's located in the middle of their huge backyard, about a fifteen minute walk away from their house by foot. From the outside, his house doesn't look like much. But the inside is very luxurious. The house consists of a kitchen, a small hall way, a living room, a bathroom, and Jiraiya's bedroom. It's a very small and simple house, but it's got everything that Jiraiya needs. The only improvement he could make to his house, would be Tsunade's presence. Jiraiya hasn't seen his former lover in years now, as she hasn't visited Konoha in a while. She is expected to come visit this year though, as she is likely going to come to Naruto's next birthday celebration.

He is also waiting for his turn to train Naruto, as he is going to take over Naruto's training once Kushina is done training him. There are so many things that Jiraiya wants to teach him and most of it has nothing to do with being a shinobi. Kushina and Minato were lost causes, they could never become as great as he is. But he has high hopes for Naruto, he has what it takes to become a fine man such as Jiraiya himself, as the second coming of the super pervert. He can't wait to take him out some “research gathering missions”, so that he will start to learn about the finer things in life.

Footnotes:

1: You will get to read more about Hiruzen and Hitomi's relationship later on in the story. He is going to tell a future student of his, all about his past sexcapades.

2. I realize that I am kind of writing Kurenai as a crazy sociopath or something. This is not be taken seriously, as I'm trying to write has a “yandere”, who is a type of woman who is obsessed with the man she loves, and will do anything to please him and destroy anyone who gets in the way of their love. I'm writing her this way mainly for comedic effect.

Character Appearances/Designs:

Hinata dresses the same way as part one of Naruto, but has the same hairstyle as she would later on in Shippuuden. A hime hair cut but much longer hair.

Hiruzen often wears a white and red robe, similar to his old Hokage robe, unless he is in his battle outfit.

Hanabi wears and looks the same as she does in the movie “Road to Ninja”. She is also older than in the manga. She is just one year younger than Hinata in this story. https://i.pinimg.com/originals/08/fa/de/08fade96c118212cd3119907dba8ef31.png

Tsunade usually wears her most common outfit: https://static.wikia.nocookie.net/horadeaventurafanon/images/9/9c/Tsunade.png/revision/latest/scale-to-width-down/700?cb=20191211023504&path-prefix=es

Udon wears his outfit in Part 1 of Naruto and his outfit in Shippuden.

Sakura dresses up the same was she does in part one of Naruto as well, a red dress and dark green, skin tight, biker shorts. Ino also wears her part one outfit has the same hairstyle. Sakura, Hinata and Ino will never cut their hair or get their hair cut by anyone during any future chuunin exams. They will always have long hair.

A visual of Hyuuga Hitomi: https://naruto.fandom.com/wiki/Hinata_and_Hanabi%27s_Mother

Jiraiya wears his usual outfit.

Naruto dresses very casually, he is often seen wearing a pair of blue pants and a white t-shirt with the Uzumaki swirl on it. When he eventually graduates he will wear an outfit similar to Minato's, without the jounin jacket and hokage jacket. His clothes is a darker blue than Minato's.

Kurenai wears a few different outfits, sometimes she wears red pants and a red shirt under a green jounin vest but most of the time she wears her standard white and red outfit with a black pattern on the white dress. Both outfits can be seen in this picture: https://images-wixmp-ed30a86b8c4ca887773594c2.wixmp.com/i/a969e494-a6a9-4e2e-b7b4-81479c752316/dddp5px-de81a955-8f17-42de-b7d7-4d5802698de9.png

Anko pretty much always wears her most common outfit as well, a tan trench coat, orange miniskirt and a transparent body armor that doesn't leave much to the imagination.

Konohamaru wears his part one outfit. A gray hat, blue scarf, yellow t-shirt and gray shorts.

Kushina always wears her green dress and white blouse unless specified otherwise. Other normal outfits for her would be an orange t-shirt, blue pants and a gray apron and lastly a tan dress and a light blue blouse similar to her first outfit.

Uchiha Satsuki is an original character. A one year younger sister to Sasuke. She dresses in dark Uchiha styled clothing and she looks like a younger version of her mother, Uchiha Mikoto.

Uchiha Sara is also an original character and an elder sister to Sasuke, one year older. She also dresses in dark Uchiha styled clothing, although slightly more revealing clothing than her younger sister. She is very popular and good looking, with a body frame that most women dream of. She also looks like a younger version of Mikoto.

Yamanaka Butao – This is her character design: https://mega.nz/file/syAD2DhZ#oOkgSdj6VNqDAJPZC4p-watEVfwPQ_D2bhnTY4RAcu0

Yui is the name I have given Moegi's mom, another original character. She has orange hair just like her daughter, although she has much longer her hair than her and a different hairstyle. She is a widow after her husband and Moegi's father passed away on a mission six years ago. She is currently single but is a very attractive and sought after MILF. She looks very similar to Inoue Orihime in Bleach: https://www.anime-planet.com/images/characters/orihime-inoue-101.jpg?t=1606368783

Akane and Maho are two more original characters, they are Udon's older sisters. Akane is the oldest of the two. Both have long brown hair, the same brown as Udon. They are known for being very slutty.

Everyone else wears their standard outfits during part one of the Naruto anime or whenever they were introduced in the manga, unless otherwise specified.

Authors Note: This chapter is the last prologue chapter. While some more backstory of the characters may be told later on, the next chapter is going to jump straight into the actual story. This chapter was really hard to write for some reason, as I re-wrote it several times. It almost made me regret writing these prologue at all, since I started writing at the start of this month, but would just continue to scarp whatever I had written, and keep re-writing it. Today I wrote this whole chapter in one sitting, as I have been on my ass for about twelve hours in total. Now that the prologues are finally done, I can't wait to get the actual story started. Expect a few time skips early on in the story, as most of the plot starts around the time when Naruto becomes a senior in the ninja academy.

Hope you liked the chapter, and please let me know your thoughts on the story so far by leaving a comment or a review.

Chapter Text

Chapter 4 – Birthdays and Pranks

Two years later...

It's currently summer, the summer before Naruto starts his third year in the ninja academy. Kushina has been training him for about two years now. She started training Naruto around the same time that Naruto started his first year in the academy. She finished her training with him earlier this summer, meaning at the end of his second year in the academy. Kushina had thought that she would need to train him for all the five years which Naruto would attend the ninja academy, in order to be able to teach him everything she wanted to teach him. She had been very wrong about that, as Naruto had mastered everything she wanted to teach him, about half a year ago. The months after that, their training together has basically only been sparring, which is what Kushina used as a way to prolong her training with him, since she didn't want their time training together to come to an end. Last month, she finally let him go, as Jiraiya offered to train Naruto whenever he had free time.

Naruto then started training with Jiraiya, at least one day per week, which was usually on Sundays. After Naruto started training with Jiraiya, or by himself which he does most often, Kushina found herself to be bored out of her mind. Kushina, who is very mischievous by nature and a notorious prankster, just like Naruto, started pranking Naruto, Jiraiya and sometimes even Naruto's friends, although mostly Konohamaru, to cure her boredom. Naruto in turn, wouldn't just take that without retaliating, and neither would Konohamaru. That resulted in the two of them often teaming up to get her back. Jiraiya on the other hand, always got the worst pranks aimed at him and he didn't have any interest in retaliating, unless giving Kushina inappropriate compliments counted as that. But then again, he did that to any good looking woman anyway.

Today, Naruto is out training at his new training spot, which is located at the edge of his parents backyard. He is currently shirtless, which is how he prefers to train, and he is the middle of doing push ups on the grassy ground. While doing his push ups, he has been pondering about how he could get his mom back, for yesterdays prank. Kushina had brought home ramen from Ichiraku's for her and Naruto to eat for lunch. The problem was that Naruto's ramen had no ramen noodles in it, instead his bowl was only filled with rice, which was drenched in the soup.

“It's the Ichiraku's new bestseller, I thought you would want to try it!” Kushina had said, while laughing at Naruto, who in turn stared in horror at his defiled ramen bowl.

“Nobody messes with my ramen!” Naruto thought angrily, as he glared at Kushina, vowing to get her back. This was even worse than the time that Kushina woke him up by throwing garden snakes into his bed, saying “I thought you would like this since you like having snakes in your bed so much, ttebane!”, while a scared Naruto would climb the walls of his bedroom, to get away from the snake. Her comment was Kushina referring to Naruto having Anko over a lot, watching movies or playing games in his room. Anko and Naruto has even had sleep overs. Anko has a tendency of sneaking into Naruto's bed during those sleepovers, which is the reason why Kushina thought her prank was funny.

In the past, Kushina has woken up Naruto in more ways than just placing snakes or spiders in his bed. She has covered him in all kinds of sticky goo, such as jelly and jam. She has tickled him unconscious. She has even drawn immature sexual genitals on Naruto's face, in his sleep. That was all fine, it was all part of the game. But this recent ramen prank, was her taking things too far, in Naruto's opinion. You don't fuck with someone's ramen like that. That's just cruel and evil. To get her back, he has ordered his underling, Konohamaru, to come meet up with him. He is going to use Konohamaru to get back at her, in a way that he wouldn't be comfortable doing it himself. He also has some news for Konohamaru, which he knows that he is going to be happy about.

Naruto stopped doing push ups, when he sensed someone approaching his training spot. Since he had ordered Konohamaru to come here, he figured it was just him.

“Took you long enough, you little shit!” Naruto said in a rather rude tone, while using his favorite pet name for Konohamaru.

“Ara ara?” he heard someone respond, before a very beautiful woman entered the clearing that is his training spot. This wasn't just some woman, this is the woman who Naruto regards as the most beautiful woman in the village. She is someone who Naruto would love to date, but believes her to be way out of his league, mainly due to their age difference. He is still very oblivious, when it comes to his own popularity.

“I believe that's the first time someone has called me that..” Kurenai said, smiling in amusement.

Naruto's eyes widened in shock. He realized that he had just insulted the woman he considers to be the best looking babe in the village, who is even hotter than the likes of Tsunade, Butao, Mikoto and the Uchiha sisters. Only Anko could give her a run for her money.

Naruto started chuckling, as he scratched the back of his head sheepishly “Sorry, I thought it was my friend” he said.

Kurenai smiled at him “Don't worry Naruto-kun, I figured as much” she then walked up to a large stone at the edge of the clearing. She sat down on it, in a very lady like fashion, as she crossed one leg over the other. She then grabbed a book from within her white and black blouse, before she casually started reading it, without saying another word. Naruto took his opportunity to check her out a bit. He got a good look of her long and slender beautiful legs, when she sat like that.

“Now that's a real woman!” Naruto thought with a perverted smile “Unlike those flat chests in school..”

Kurenai didn't notice Naruto checking her out, while smiling perversely, luckily for him. Naruto's admiration of Kurenai's legs, got interrupted a few seconds later, when Konohamaru came running up to Naruto while waving at him “Good morning, boss! Sorry for being late, kore!” he yelled in an excited tone.

“There you are, you little shit!” Naruto said, as he walked up to meet Konohamaru, while Kurenai chuckled at the way that they interacted with each other. She thought they were adorable. Naruto and Konohamaru then walked away, leaving Kurenai alone at the spot where Naruto usually trains. That meant that Kurenai would be leaving as well, since the only reason why she came out here, was to watch Naruto train, and maybe talk to him a bit. This was something Kurenai had been wanting to do for almost two years, ever since Anko first brought her over to the Uzumaki. The reason for that is that her attraction towards Naruto had not lessened during these past two years, instead her crush on Naruto had almost made her a little obsessed about him. Since pretty much every single girl in the village, academy students, married women, elder women, civilian super models and you name it, are also interested in Naruto.

Kurenai has got quite a bit of competition, when it comes to winning Naruto's heart. Kurenai has made up her mind about not losing Naruto to any of them under any circumstances. She has even come up with a plan, a plan that she calls her genius master plan, to ensure that she will be the one who prevails in the end. If other people heard about her plan they might refer to it more as evil, twisted and selfish, rather than genius. Kurenai on the other hand, thinks her plan is romantic and funny.

It all started during that afternoon when Anko brought Kurenai with her to visit the Uzumaki home. Kurenai has never had any attraction towards any human being, until that faithful day when she saw Naruto spar against his father, Minato. While the spar had been impressive for someone that hadn't even started the academy yet, it was his handsome smile that made her heart pound faster. Since then, Kurenai has not been able to get to know Naruto as much as she would have liked. Instead, she has gotten more familiar with his mom instead, who Kurenai now considers as one of her best friends.

While Kurenai is very fond of Kushina, she also sees that woman as the biggest obstacle and reason as to why she has not been able to approach Naruto as much as she would have liked. Kushina is very overprotective of Naruto, and she doesn't like when girls get too inappropriate while trying to flirt with him, especially if the girls are older than Naruto. During these two years when she has been training him, even Anko has had a hard time getting close to Naruto to tease him and flirt with him, as much as she would have liked. Although, Anko has told Kurenai about some sleepovers at Naruto's, where Anko has been able to tease Naruto and gotten comfortable with him in his bedroom. Every time Kurenai heard Anko telling her about this, Kurenai struggles not to attack the woman, who she considers to be her best friend, for daring to tempt “her man” like that.

Kurenai has a bit of an edge over these other women and girls, since she has been able to uphold her front, her fake personality of being this professional, slightly shy and kind kunoichi. That professional act is also the same kind of front that she puts on, whenever she is over at Naruto's house, to ensure that Kushina would never suspect her of also gunning for Naruto. Unlike Anko and Ino, she isn't checking Naruto out at every chance she get. Kurenai doesn't throw herself at him, and get all over him, teasing him and flirting with him, in front of Kushina either. She only compliments him and smiles at him when it's appropriate to do so. Frankly, she has given no one any reason to think that she is in love with him. And that is all just a part of her plan.

While Kushina may be the main obstacle, who is preventing her to be with her man, Anko and Ino are also obstacles. Anko is the bigger problem out of the two, since she is her best friend. Kurenai doesn't want to hurt her or make her sad. Anko has always been very open to Kurenai about her feelings towards Naruto, and has confessed to her that she is very much in love with the blond ninja prodigy. She fears that Anko is going to get her heart broken, once Kurenai has finalized her plan. While Kurenai doesn't want to hurt Anko, she also thinks that's unavoidable, and it's something she just have to accept, as long as that means that she is the one who ends up together with Naruto. Nothing else really matters to her.

Kurenai couldn't care less about Ino, however. The only reason why she sees that younger girl as an obstacle, is because of how she interacts with Naruto, having become something of a mini Anko. She really doesn't hold back on the flirting and teasing nowadays, and Kurenai has lost count of how many times that blond little skank has raised her skirt, to flash her behind for Naruto, or shown him her panties. The fact that the majority of the village already sees the two of them as a couple, since the two of them have pretty much always been friends and been seen together, only adds to the many reasons as to why Kurenai dislikes that “blond little skank”.

Due to Ino's friendship with Naruto, and the rumors of them already being a couple, Kurenai sees her as more of a threat than the thousands of other girls who are gunning for him. In the end, she is going to crush all of their hopes, to ever be with him in any romantic fashion. She may allow a few lucky ones to become his servants, or concubines, if that would be something that would please her, and her man, at that time. Insects like them doesn't deserve more than that anyway.

Another obstacle is the age difference between them, as Kurenai is a skilled chuunin, who is about to take on a test or an exams to become a jounin, while Naruto is just about to start his third year in the ninja academy. She doesn't even know if Naruto would ever look at her the same way, or if he is even into older girls at all. She isn't aware of his fondness of big breasted older beauties, and doesn't pay attention when he tells “the flat chest”, as in Ino, to get off of him, whenever she gets too clingy, or attaches herself on him, hugging her arms around him. During those moments, she is too busy glaring daggers at Ino, while imagining different kind of ways to end her life and getting rid of her, without anyone suspecting her. (1).

It's because of all of these obstacles, that she came up with this evil and twisted master plan of hers. The reason why it is evil and twisted, is because she is willing to hurt people who has nothing to do with this, as long as it helps her get what she wants. There is one person in particular, who Kurenai has never been fond of, who might suffer the most. That person is a bearded man of the Sarutobi clan, who has been following Kurenai around since the academy days, like a love struck fool. The unlucky person in question is the one who Kurenai regards as an insect lower than other insects, Sarutobi Asuma. (2).

All her friends, Anko included, always tells her that she should start dating, suggesting guys left and right to her. As already mentioned, Kurenai has no interest in any guy who isn't Naruto, so she finds that to be very annoying. What annoys her even more are all the guys who are constantly asking her out, in an attempt to get inside her pants whenever she is at a bar to enjoy a drink, or is enjoying a walk in the village. They seem to think that, just because she is currently single, that she might have an interest in dating them. They couldn't be more wrong about that, as she thinks of them all as annoying and disgusting insects.

Luckily for her, she still has Asuma following her around, pretty much wherever she goes.. Asuma is someone that used to be one of Kurenai and Anko's classmates in the academy. Asuma is most often the one who they suggest to her to go out with. We already know Kurenai's thoughts on Asuma, so that is about as likely to happen as Jiraiya putting on a dress and dancing on top of the hokage monument. The only reason why she lets him follow her around sometimes is because she can use him to get rid of all of the Casanovas who are trying to ask her out.

The mere thought of being together with him disgusts her to no end. The way he blushes and gets all fidgety just by Kurenai staring at him, or talking to him, annoys her more than anything. Unfortunately for Asuma, Kurenai's evil plan involves her using him and humiliating him even. She plans to ask him out for a date, knowing full well that he is going to say yes. She wants everyone to think that the two of them are going out, as boyfriend and girlfriend. She has no intentions of letting him have any benefits that a boyfriend usually would though. She would merely just bring him to dinners with family and friends, parties and maybe walk with him hand in hand in public on occasions. All just to sell the picture of the two of them being together. Holding hands is the only thing Kurenai is going to allow, even the thought of that makers her shiver in disgust. She will only allow it in public as well, since there is no point to if no one else can see them. (3).

Kurenai knows that Asuma is not going to complain, nor will he try to take it any further, since he simply doesn't have the balls for it. And even if he does try anything, Kurenai will play her part as the shy little princess, who isn't ready for such things. If everything goes according to Kurenai's plan, she can use this fake relationship to get to know her true love interest better. She figures that no one will suspect her of trying anything with Naruto, after just getting into a relationship with Asuma. At least she hopes so, knowing that even married women has flirted with Naruto after a glass of wine or two. Having a partner didn't really put you out of suspicion completely. Especially with all the adultery that is going in this village, according to the village gossiper, Ayame, and her rumors anyway.

What makes her plan so twisted and selfish, is the fact that she does not intend to break up with Asuma after she has won Naruto's heart. Instead, she wants to humiliate him and break his heart, by doing all kinds of things with Naruto, behind his back. Anything they will do behind Asuma's back will just be a fun bonus for Kurenai. She considers it to be payback for all the hand holding she will have to withstand, and the embarrassment of her having to endure the fact that people has been thinking that she has been dating that insect.

That sums up what her evil plan is currently. She wishes to set it in motion a few days before Naruto's birthday. She intends to show up to his birthday party with Asuma as her date. That's when Naruto, Naruto's parents, Naruto's friends, and all of his admirers, will learn about her and Asuma now being a couple. After that all of her friends will know about their relationship. Since it's July now and Naruto's birthday isn't until October 10^th, she will have a couple of months to plan out her plan better. She is also going to use this time to get to know Naruto better by spending time with him out at that training spot of his. Even if Kushina, Anko or anyone else finds out about that, they hopefully won't suspect her of trying anything with Naruto after she shows up with Asuma on that birthday party.

While Kurenai returned to the village, with an evil smirk on her face as she thought about her plan, Naruto and his underling had arrived at Jiraiya's house. Jiraiya's house is located in the middle of his parents huge backyard, about a fifteen minute walk away from his training spot. That's how big his parents backyard is. Naruto had called Konohamaru over for more reasons than pulling a prank on his mom. Today he is going to “introduce him” to the pervert. Jiraiya and Konohamaru already know each other, but this introduction is more to get Konohamaru to join Jiraiya and Naruto in their training and research missions. Only a true pervert is allowed to join their ranks, and start going on those important missions.

To become a true pervert, like Jiraiya and Naruto, Konohamaru must first take on a test. It's a test that Jiraiya is usually in charge of, but this time Naruto is going to suggest that he gets to be in charge of Konohamaru's test. They are a band of super perverts, who look down on closet perverts who aren't man enough to own their perverted nature. The only members so far are Jiraiya and Naruto, since Jiraiya doesn't let closet perverts or “posers” as he calls them into the club. The posers are the ones that pretend to be gentlemen, but in reality, at the mere sight of a half naked woman, will fly backwards with a nosebleed in true anime fashion. Kakashi, Minato and even the ramen chef Teuchi, would all fit into that category. A true pervert would just grin and compliment the woman on her fine assets or make a lewd invitation. They are posers because they are posing as professional gentlemen, while in reality they are just as perverted as anyone else.

Jiraiya has a keen eye to find people of his kind, and now Naruto has brought Konohamaru to him, in order to put him to the test. After arriving at Jiraiya's house, they found him sitting in the grass outside of the building, in what would be better be described as Jiraiya's front yard, even though his whole house and everything else, is a part of Naruto's parents backyard. He is currently scribbling down important notes in a notebook of his, while giggling in a perverse manner.

"Yes! Hihihi! This is brilliant" Jiraiya exclaimed, while admiring his work.

Naruto sneaked up on Jiraiya, getting behind him, before aiming a round house kick to his head. Jiraiya easily blocked it with one hand, though.

“What do you want, brat?” Jiraiya asked in a a casual tone, as if Naruto's attempt to kick him in the back of the head was nothing out of the ordinary.

Naruto retracted his legs, before responding “I think Kon has what it takes to join us, Ero-sennin!”

“Join us?” Jiraiya asked, narrowing his eyes at Naruto “Do you really think he is worthy?” he asked in a serious tone.

Naruto took on a very serious stance, as he crossed his arms in front of his chest, closing his eyes, and nodded “I am sure of it. There is no better candidate than him”.

“Hmm?” Jiraiya hummed as he glanced at Konohamaru “This brat?” he asked, shaking his head “I don't think so, Naruto..”.

“Fuck you, Ero-sennin!” Konohamaru retorted, while flipping him off “Stop calling me brat! I'll kick you in the nuts, kore!” he threatened.

Jiraiya's eyebrows started twitching in anger, as he focused his attention on Naruto again “See? What did I tell you!? There is no way this stupid little brat deserves to become one of us!”.

Naruto sighed, knowing that Jiraiya would say something like that.

“Can you at least let him take the test, since I vouched for him? If you don't, then I will stop going on those research missions with you..”

“Bheh!” Jiraiya whined childishly, before pocketing his notebook “Fine!” he said, as he got up. He made his way over to Naruto and Konohamaru, before glancing down at the latter “So you think you have what it takes to become one of us, huh?”.

“Yeah, I'll pass any test you give me, kore!” Konohamaru said with a confident grin. He didn't even know what he was signing up for, he just went with it since it was Naruto's idea. What kind of underling would he be if he didn't follow his boss's orders?

Jiraiya hummed in thought for a while, before telling Naruto “Use that transformation that you always use on all those posers to knock them out” he said, referring to a technique that Naruto has invented, called "The Sexy Jutsu" or "Oiroke No Jutsu".

"Nah" Naruto said, shaking his head "I have a better idea. This will be a test unlike no other. If he passes this one, you will have no choice but accept him as one of us" he said with a mischievous and rather foxy grin.

"Oho?" Jiraiya responded with a wide grin of his own. He had a feeling that Naruto had some crazy grand plans for Konohamaru, that involved a lot of sexy babes.

"Follow me, I will tell you about the test when we get there" Naruto said, before the three of them headed north, towards his house. About fifteen minutes later, they had arrived his house. All they saw inside, was a very bored looking Kushina cleaning the living room floor with a mop.

Since Naruto had stopped walking, Jiraiya turned to Naruto with a confused expression “Is the brat doing his test here?” he asked.

“Yeah!” Naruto said with the same mischievous smirk, as he turned towards Konohamaru. He stared at Konohamaru, while pointing towards Kushina who they saw through the large windows. “Your test is to get inside the house, then you are going to lift the skirt of my mom's dress and compliment her on her choice of underwear, dattebayo!”.

“What!?” Konohamaru yelled in disbelief, but couldn't hide a slight blush “No way, I'm not doing that, are you crazy?!” he questioning, as he wondered if his boss was trying to get him killed. Konohamaru loves to prank the "the old hag", which is what he often calls Kushina, but this was just too much for him. He knows perfectly well how much she hates perverts, and how she will beat them up and punish them, if they have the gall to do anything perverted within her presence. He has seen her kick the living shit out of Naruto, after she had found out that he had been going around spanking and grabbing ass of all the girls in school.

Konohamaru also has more reasons why he didn't like this idea. First of all, he has always had a something of a crush on her. He thinks that she is the most beautiful woman who has ever existed, and thinks that she looks like a Goddess, compared to the rest of the beautiful women. She really stands out from the others. He has also always enjoyed the time he has spent with her and Naruto, and regards her as one of his closest friends, even though she is Naruto's mom. Now, that doesn't mean that Konohamaru is stupid enough to believe that he has any chance with her. No, he is of the opinion that she is way out of his league.

He also regards her differently from other women, due to her status as Naruto's mom, and the hokage's wife. She isn't someone who guys should think of that way, or someone who should be a target of a perverted prank. It's disrespectful towards his boss, and the great fourth hokage.

Jiraiya stared at Naruto in pure disbelief, knowing better than anyone how Kushina treats perverts. He has lost counts how many times that woman has broken his nose, or kicked him in the head. He also knew full well that he deserved it every time, since he had been caught trying to peep on her, or given her a very inappropriate compliment. Then there is also the fact that he has been looking after Minato and Kushina ever since they graduated from the academy. That along with her prudish nature, just made this whole thing very uncomfortable for Jiraiya, and he didn't like the idea one bit. He also feared for Konohamaru's life.

Jiraiya nodded “I have to agree with the brat on this one. Even I can't protect him from a furious Kushina” Jiraiya said with a shiver “I don't think any man can..”.

Naruto shrugged “It's just a prank. She will get over it” he then stared at Konohamaru with a serious expression “This is a perfect test for you as well to see if you have what it takes to be one of us”. Naruto then focused his attention on his mom, who were still mopping away in the living room. He narrowed his eyes, as he stared at her “Besides, she has got it coming. It's time we get some payback on her for all the pranks she has made us suffer" he said, while for the most part, he was just angry about that ramen prank, and wanted to get her back for that.

"I don't mind getting her back" Konohamaru said, shaking in fear, since the thought of doing what Naruto suggested, really scared him "But can't we just throw water, slime or other stuff on her again?” Konohamaru asked while gulping. He then got down on his knees, pleading“Please, I don't want to die, big bro!

Jiraiya tried his best to help out Konohamaru, as told them his thoughts about this test “I have to side with Konohamaru here, what you are asking him is insane, Naruto. Besides, why do you even want someone to do that to your mom? You usually get upset by guys even staring at her” Jiraiya said, shaking his head.

He was referring to how overprotective Naruto is of his mom. He has even beat some guys up after he thought they leered at his mom perversely, after the two of them had walked passed them. That is a regular occurrence since Kushina is a very attractive woman, to say the least. She is also very prudish and doesn't like those stares. She has never even give them a reason to stare either, since she always dresses very conservatively, such as in her green housewife dress. Due to that, she doesn't mind when Naruto gives those perverts a piece of his mind. Now Jiraiya is pretty much exempt from Naruto's punishments, because everyone already knows that he is a lost cause. There is no point in trying to beat him up in order to get him to stop his perverted antics, since he won't stop no matter what. The Uzumaki/Namikaze family doesn't really mind though, they love him just the way he is.

“Yeah, boss!” Konohamaru whined “Why don't you do it yourself, kore!?”.

“I can't do it myself, because she is my mom” Naruto shivered “That would just be weird..”.

“It's weird if I do it too!” Konohamaru tried, in an attempt to get out of it “I have known her forever and more importantly, she is your damn mom, boss!” Konohamaru said said with a frown, staring at the ground in defeat. He tried to argue with Naruto, but he already knew that he wouldn't get himself out of doing this.

“Okay, I won't force ya to do it. But if you don't, then you will fail the test” Naruto said with an evil smirk.

“Damn it!” Konohamaru said through gritted teeth as he stared at the red head woman through the window. She had just noticed them, as she smiled at them warmly and waved at them, before going back to mopping the floor.

“I'm no bitch” Konohamaru thought, as he grinned.

“Okay I'll do it, kore!” Konohamaru said as he started walking towards the house. Jiraiya placed his hand on his shoulder, stopping him “Hold up, brat. I think I have a body armor from the war days that might fit you. I think it's best you use it, or you might actually die” he warned him.

Konohamaru gulped in fear, while Naruto chuckled “Don't listen to Ero-sennin, you will be fine Kon”.

Konohamaru nodded “Okay, here I go, boss!” he said, before he slowly creeped forward, towards the backdoor of the house.

“This is insane, Naruto” Jiraiya said, as she stared at Konohamaru in horror “If this somehow ends up with her blaming me for this, then I'll kick your ass for real”.

“Relax Ero-sennin, she won't be mad at anyone except me, trust me on that” Naruto said with an evil grin.

They then observed, as Konohamaru entered the house, leaving the backdoor, since he would need to escape out of it later.

“Hi” Konohamaru greeted, as Kushina smiled and greeted him back“Hi, Konohamaru-kun”. Konohamaru then walked down the hall way, towards her. Kushina didn't think much of it, she figured he was just going to head into the kitchen to get a glass of water or something. Instead, he got behind her, then quickly lifted the back of her skirt. He stared at her pantie covered ass, with wide eyes for a second, trying really hard to hold back a nosebleed, because he was staring at the sexiest ass he had ever seen in his life. He then shook his head, in attempt to compose himself and get back to business.

“Kyaaaa!” Kushina shrieked n a very uncharacteristic manner.

“Nice panties, old hag!” he yelled, before letting go of her dress.

“W-what?” a completely red faced Kushina stuttered, in both embarrassment and disbelief. She watched as Konohamaru ran out of the house, through the backdoor, faster than he had ever run before.

“Ghaah!” Konohamaru exclaimed “I did it boss, now save me!” he wailed, as he continued to run down south of the backyard, knowing that Kushina was going to come after him soon. Thankfully neither Jiraiya or Naruto was able to see her undergarments, as Kushina was facing them when Konohamaru lifted the back of her dress. Only he got to see the goodies.

“You're dead, Konohamaru-kun!” Kushina yelled, while her hair rose above her, taking the shapes of nine tails. She dropped the mop, before leaping out of the house. The first thing she saw outside, was a blue faced and shaking Jiraiya, looking terrified, next to Naruto, who was rolling around on the ground, laughing and pointing at her, while Konohamaru sprinted away like an Olympian.

“Serves you right, mom!” he said in laughter “That's what you get for ruining my ramen”.

Kushina's hair returned to normal, as she stared at Naruto with narrowed eyes “Did you put him up to this?” she asked in a dangerous tone.

“Of course I did, mom!” Naruto said as he jumped up to stand on his feet “Konohamaru is my loyal subordinate. He does whatever I tell him to do, dattebayo!” Naruto said with a bratty smirk.

Kushina pointed a finger at him angrily “If Konohamaru, you, or anyone else does that again, then I'm beating you all up” she then headed back towards the house, huffing and puffing "And I will get you back for this, dattebane!" She yelled as she grabbed the door handle, closing the door half way, as she added “And if you think that ramen prank was bad, just you wait. You don't even want to know what I am going to do to you next-ttebane!" she ended, as she closed the door behind her. She stared at Naruto with an evil and mischievous smile of her own, causing Naruto to gulp, fearing what she had in store for him next. Maybe Jiraiya and Konohamaru had been right about this having been a bad idea, after all.

“Fuck my life..” Naruto whined, while Jiraiya laughed and waved towards Kushina “I had nothing to do with this, Kushina!” he yelled, hoping she wasn't going to blame him for this. Jiraiya and Naruto then chased after the terrified Konohamaru. Needless to say, Konohamaru passed his test. Not only did he not fly backwards in a bloody nosebleed mess, he did something that actually impressed the both of them. It took balls to do that to Kushina of all people. The main reason Naruto had picked Konohamaru to do this, was because he knew that out of all Naruto's friends, Konohamaru is the one that Kushina would go the easiest on. Aside from Ino and Konohamaru, Kushina is always complaining about how annoying or rude his friends are. She is telling him things like, Shikamaru is too lazy to even greet people properly, Kiba is too loud and smells like a dog, Choji keeps ransacking their kitchen, eating all their snacks and so on. When it comes to Konohamaru and Ino, she always encourages him to invite them over or to just hang out with them instead of the others. So it was pretty easy for him to figure out that she favored those two over his other friends.

Konohamaru had now been accepted into Jiraiya's and Naruto's league of perverts. He had now been given the honorable title of being a “super pervert” like them. Since that day, Kushina would start to refer to the three of them as “the pervert trio”. Unknowingly to the pervert trio, Kushina had not hated the prank as much as she made them believe that she did. In fact, the thought that Konohamaru would start to prank her like that more often, kind of excited her. What the pervert trio also didn't know, is that if it had been anyone else, other than Konohamaru, who had done that to her, then they wouldn't have gotten away with it so easily.

That's due to Kushina having started to look at Konohamaru differently in recent months. She no longer sees him as her cute younger friend, instead she thinks that he is just as handsome and manly as Naruto is. She has gained a crush on him. She would never admit that to anyone, nor let anyone find out about that. She is also in complete denial about her crush, and has no intentions of ever letting it become anything more than a silly crush. She fears the day that he will start attending the ninja academy, since she expects him to become just as popular as Naruto did, with all the girls in school. She wants both Konohamaru and Naruto for herself, and wants those other girls to leave her guys alone. Even if she doesn'tt have any intentions of doing anything inappropriate with either two of them, she doesn't want anyone else to take her guys from her either.

That day the pervert trio had been formed, and Konohamaru would join Naruto and Jiraiya every Sunday to go out on research missions. That day also changed the way that Kushina acted around Konohamaru, as she would start to tease and prank him in ways that almost invited him to perform another naughty prank on her, whenever other people weren't paying attention. Konohamaru on the other hand, had gotten extremely nervous around her, and was not about to do anything like that again. He also kept having naughty dreams about her, almost every single night. She was just too damn beautiful and sexy for her own good. Konohamaru didn't like it, since he wasn't supposed to think of her that way, due to her being Naruto's mom and the hokage's wife, but he just couldn't help it. But he also knew that he had no chance in hell, to ever make one of those naughty dreams about her, a reality.

The following weeks until school started, Naruto spent his days doing pretty much the same thing he always does. Every day, except Sundays, he would train his ass off, out at his training spot in the backyard. He did not find Kurenai there again during those weeks. On Sunday's he and the rest of the pervert trio got up to no good, and on very rare occasions, also did some actual ninja training. The highlight of those Sunday's had to be when he was out alone “gathering research material” for Jiraiya. He found the Uchiha sisters and their mother bathing at one of those outdoor bathhouses. He got to see Uchiha Mikoto topless which was great, but unfortunately for him the two sisters had their chests covered by a towel. It's for moments like that, that Naruto even does these research missions. And who can blame him when Mikoto's big round bouncy titties is his reward?

When school started back up again in August, his daily routine changed a bit, other than school now being a part of it again. In the afternoon after school, he went straight to his backyard to train. That's due to Kurenai having shown up at his training spot, after school again. She sat on that same rock, her legs crossed in the same way, while reading a book.

“Hello” Naruto greeted, as he raised an eyebrow at her, wondering why she was here of all places. He didn't mind it one bit, but it just confused him a little bit.

Kurenai lowered her book from her face, before greeting him back“Hi” she said, in a bored tone, before covering her face with the book again.

“I usually train out here.. Do you mind?” Naruto asked, while scratching the back of his head.

Kurenai lowered the book again, facing him with a kind smile “Not at all, don't mind me, I am just here to read and enjoy the peace and quiet out here.”.

“Okay..” Naruto said scratching the back of his head, as he glanced at her in confusion. She had covered her face again with that book. He was wondering what he should do now. Usually he starts out with boring strength and stamina training. Naruto wondered if he should just perform a few of his most flashy techniques, which would hopefully impress her or something. Naruto smirked as he thought of something that sounded fun.

He created a rasengan in each hand, then spun the powerful technique around his index fingers, as if he was spinning a basketball “Hey, ever seen a guy with balls like these?” he asked with a stupid grin.

Kurenai smirked as she put down her book again“Yes, as a matter of fact I have. I believe I have seen your father play with balls like that before” she said casually, while chuckling.

“I don't know what my mom would say about that” Naruto said jokingly.

Kurenai shook her head at Naruto's antics “Shouldn't you be training?”

Naruto cleared his throat as the rasengans disappeared from his hands “Yeah, sorry” he said before turning around, then getting down on the ground to do some push ups. Kurenai giggled while the book covered her face which had one of Naruto's eyebrows twitch in annoyance. Kurenai spent the whole day there, reading or watching Naruto as he trained. Her favorite part was when he removed his shirt and trained shirtless. She didn't read anymore after that. Naruto didn't really mind her company, even though he didn't really understand why she had to read here of all places. Kurenai is after all one of the only women Naruto could safely say that he has a crush on. The other one being his very mischievous big sister figure, Anko

This would continue for almost two months, except that Kurenai would start to give him some pointers in genjutsu (illusion) training. Namely ways to detect and dispel genjutsu, since Naruto had no interest in actual genjutsu, but didn't want to be the victim of such a technique. Most of the time she just sat on that rock, pretending to read, while checking him out, though. When Naruto's birthday neared, he was considering if he should ask her out for lunch or dinner at Ichiraku ramen or something. His intentions was not to ask her out on a date or something like that, since he thinks he has no chance with such beautiful babe, instead it would be as a thanks for having helped him so much with his anti-genjutsu training. Treating her to ramen is the least he could do, in his opinion. He also wanted to get to know her better due to his crush on her. Those thoughts changed the day of his birthday, when Kurenai came to Naruto's birthday party with her date, Sarutobi Asuma...

Naruto's Birthday

October 10^th, Naruto's birthday. Today was a day that a lot of people have been looking forward to. Kurenai would usually be one of them as she enjoyed going to Naruto's birthday celebration these past two years. Today that would not be the case though, due to today being the day that she puts her evil master plan in motion. That was not something she was looking forward to at all, because it meant that she had to ask out Asuma. About two hours before everyone was expected to show up, at Naruto's house, Kurenai found herself standing outside Asuma's apartment. She had yet to ask him to date her, but now she couldn't prolong it any further or it would ruin her plans.

She knocked on the front door to his apartment, taking a deep breath as she was getting ready to put on another act. The door opened to reveal Asuma in casual clothes "H-Hi Kurenai" Asuma stuttered, blushing slightly at the mere sight of her.

"Hi" Kurenai said with a really forced smile. When she saw Asuma blushing, she was already starting to regret this.

Asuma cleared his throat, in an attempt to compose himself "What can I help you with?" he asked.

Kurenai couldn't help but roll her eyes at him. He was always ready to be there for her or to help her with something. He is such a dork, he thought.

"May I come in?" Kurenai asked. She wanted to get inside his apartment, because she really didn't want someone else overhear them.

Asuma's eyes widened in surprise due to that question. She had never been inside his home before, and she had never really smiled at him that way either. Asuma failed to notice how Kurenai obviously struggled to force that smile, as he stepped aside to let her in "Of course, please come in" he said with warm smile.

Once she was inside, and they had closed the door behind them, Asuma asked “Want something to drink?”.

"No thanks, I won't be here long" Kurenai said, while really trying to force out a kind smile.

“Okay..” Asuma said in a confused tone.

Kurenai sighed, as she readied herself to actually do this.

"Asuma-san" she said, while staring into his eyes

"Y-yes?" Asuma stuttered, due to the way she stared at him.

"I have wanted to tell you this for a long time but didn't have the courage to do it because of my shy nature" Kurenai said, while staring down at her feet, playing the part of being shy "Do you want to start dating?" she finally asked as both her lips and eyebrows started twitching as that smile got even more forced.

"Y-Y-You mean like y-you and m-me?" Asuma stuttered with a furious blush “L-Like dating dating?”.

Kurenai had to turn around and place her hand on her forehead, silently telling herself to remain calm, before she answered him. Asuma figured she was just being shy again, his oh so sweet and kind Kurenai, he thought while smiling at her while blushing.

"Yes, like boyfriend and girlfriend" Kurenai said, while she fought the urge to throw up.

Asuma's eyes widened for a second, then he smiled confidently "Of course Kurenai, that would be like a dream come true for me!”.

Kurenai nursed her temple, while chuckling awkwardly "How wonderful, Asuma-san. Want to go together to Naruto's birthday party tonight as my date?"

Asuma gulped "S-Sure" he said with that blush gaining more and more color by the second. Now that Kurenai had gotten what she came for, she was in a hurry to get out of here. Kurenai opened the door then said "I will meet you at you outside your fathers house in two hours then, 7 PM sharp". Kurenai the left without saying another word, hearing Asuma say "See you then!" as she left. Her whole body shivered due what she had just done. She knows that it will be worth it in the end though, since nothing is going to get in her way now. She was going to get Naruto no matter what, it didn't matter who she hurt during the process. Especially not Asuma, she is going to enjoy breaking that man.

The scheming Kurenai was far from the only innocent young maiden who was looking forward to Naruto's birthday party. In fact, Naruto's birthday parties had become occasions where every girl and woman attending, dresses up as if it is the most important day of the year. Every single person with a vagina, who would be attending, was going there with the hopes that Naruto's eyes would be on them all evening. Ino, Ino's mom, Shikamaru's mom, Kurenai, Anko, and you name it. All of them wanted the same thing, which was Naruto. The only one who didn't attend his birthday party with the hopes of either impressing him with their looks, or even better, getting some alone time with him in order to seduce him, was his mother, Kushina.

She wasn't going to dress up, and she obviously did not have any intentions of seducing her son. She just wants him for herself since she is one “her guys”, and more importantly, her one and only son. She isn't going to let one of these hussies get their way with him. The hussy who Kushina unknowingly had to worry about the most, made her way over to the Sarutobi clan compound, located on the same street as the Uzumaki household, two hours after she left Asuma's apartment.

Kurenai found Asuma, along with his father and nephew, Hiruzen and Konohamaru, waiting for her. Asuma was staring at his feet, blushing whiled she made her way over to them. Konohamaru was staring at her with a wide grin, just appreciating the fact that a nice babe was coming their way, while waving at her. Hiruzen wasted no time to check her out, smiling at her like a perverted sleaze. Even Kurenai couldn't fault the perverted former hokage for checking her out today, since she has gone out of her way to dress up to impress. That's something she hasn't done often in the past, since she has never had any reason to dress up to impress, before she fell for Naruto. She knew that it was safe for her to dress up, without making Kushina suspect anything, since everyone else does the same. Kurenai is wearing a rather skimpy, yet classy, red dress. (Kurenai's dress: https://mega.nz/file/lqg2kR4A#Ec-LX-v4GzIu6JjHiIcgLENGO83Hbfj0hpwiWNMk7o8 )

"Good day" Kurenai greeted politely, even though she was a bit upset with the way they were looking at her, including Asuma's awkward shy school girl like glances, as she stopped in front of the Sarutobi family members.

"Hey Kurenai-san right?" Konohamaru was fast to greet with a wide smile that hade Kurenai smile lightly in response. She didn't mind Konohamaru as much as the other two, since he is someone who Kurenai has nothing against. She thinks is a bit interesting, since she reminds him a bit of Naruto in many ways.

"That's right, I'm the friend of that scary snake lady who keeps bullying you" Kurenai said, smiling in amusment.

“Chee” Konhoamaru responded, while pouting “That old hag isn't bullying me, I'm gonna kick her ass today!”.

Asuma cleared his throat, to once again compose himself before addressing his new girlfriend "H-hello Kurenai" Asuma stuttered, moving his left foot in a circle in front of him in a shy manner, making both Kurenai and Hiruzen's eyebrows twitch in irritation

"Hi Asuma-sam" Kurenai said, with a forced smile. An awkward silence followed after that. That silence was broken by Hiruzen clearing his throat "Ehem, you look nice today Kurenai-chan"

Kurenai nodded, gritting her teeth slightly due the perverts compliment "Thanks, Lord Third".

“You know, if you want we can always skip the party and have a party of our own in my bedroom instead” Hiruzen said, with a dumb smile.

Kurenai's eyebrows twitched even more in irritation now. She has lost count how many times that old pervert has invited her to have sex with him. Kurenai has always refused him though, often by insulting him the worst possible way that she could come up. The reason for Kurenai's current irritation at this new invitation, is that she was just reminded that he never stops. He always asks her the same thing every time they meet. And she isn't the only one. All of her friends has been asked the same thing, being constantly invited to have sex with him. And to even suggest something so ridiculous on a day like this, when she is going over to celebrate the birthday of her man, is just ludicrous.

With an expression of pure disgust, Kurenai said “Lord Third, your indecent sexual invitation is even more inappropriate now that I am dating your son”.

“Ehhhhhh?” Hiruzen uttered in pure and utter disbelief “You are dating that thing?” he asked.

“Father please stop with your indecent chatter. Can't you see that you are making Kurenai-san very uncomfortable?” Asuma said, frowning.

Konohamaru started walking down the street towards Naruto's house, with his hands in his pockets while shaking his head, due to yet again witnessing how his grandfather is acting whenever he meets a nice looking babe “Can you even get it up at your old age? You disgusting old man!” he said, laughing in a mocking manner, before running down the street, towards Naruto's house.

Kurenai followed him “I think Konohamaru-kun has the right idea, let's go Asuma-san”

Asuma nodded as he caught up with her “Sorry about that, Kurenai-san” he said scratching the back of his head nervously.

Hiruzen caught up with them as well “You have nothing to apologize for, son. I'm the one she is mad at.” he said with a chuckle “And I'm not going to apologize either, I'm serious about that offer. But I will at least congratulate you both on becoming a couple”

“C-couple” Asuma said with a blush, while Kurenai frowned being reminded of the worst part of her evil plan. She ended up moving faster down the street, as she wanted to get to Naruto's as fast as possible to let everyone know about her and Asuma, so that she gets this part of her evil little plan finally done and over with. After that she can avoid him the whole evening, like she always does.

Once they arrived at Naruto's and his parents house, they found a little queue of people waiting to greet Naruto and be let inside. Every single woman and girl there was dressed to impress, just like Kurenai had thought. Currently at the front, standing in front of Naruto who stood in the doorway, looking extremely annoyed, was the Yamanaka family. Ino wore a cute purple dress, and she was currently hugging Naruto and wished him a happy birthday. Inoichi gave him a fist bump before he and his daughter headed inside. That left Butao, Ino's mom and Inoichi wife. She was dressed in a blue mini dress, showing off a lot of cleavage, and it almost looked as if her tits was going to slip out of her dress at every movement she made. Speaking of cleavage, that is where she planted Naruto's face, as she gave him a long hug, before she as well entered the house with the rest of her family. Naruto honestly wouldn't have mind remaining there a little longer, because he is a lot more attracted to Butao, than her daughter.

Next was the Nara family. Shikaku and Shikamaru waved lazily at Naruto, muttering troublesome before Naruto let them inside. Yoshino stayed behind as she was going to take her time to give Naruto a proper greeting like Butao did. She was also dressed in a very skimpy and revealing dress. She hugged Naruto and pressed his face in between her large breasts as well. She also tried to move Naruto's hands behind her, in order to have him place them on her bum. Naruto struggled though and managed to avoid that as he pulled back and welcomed her inside with a twitching eyebrow. He wouldn't have minded feeling her up either, he just didn't think it was appropriate to do such things with Shikamaru's mom, since Shikamaru is one of his best friends. Naruto welcomed a few more guests until it was time for Kurenai and the Sarutobi family.

“Yo, boss! I got you binoculars for our research missions kore!” Konohamaru said giving Naruto a high five before entering the house casually. They saw him run up to a couch where Jiraiya was sitting to greet him by trying to jump kick him in the face. He had went straight to Jiraiya in case Kushina was still angry at him for that prank Naruto made him pull on her. He had avoided coming here ever since then, due to fear of what prank she was going to pull on him as payback. That was something that Kushina wasn't a big fan of, since she really enjoyed spending time with Konohamaru, and was starting to miss having him around.

“Hey old perv, Asuma-san, Kurenai-san” Naruto greeted as held open the door, motioning for them to go inside. He was kinda annoyed to see Kurenai with them as he had hoped she would show up alone. How does she even know them? He wondered.

“Happy birthday, brat” Hiruzen said, handing Naruto a present before heading inside.

Asuma blushed, while fidgeted with his thumbs “Happy birthday Naruto, I hope you don't mind that I brought a date”

“A date?” Naruto asked, staring at Asuma in confusion “Who?” he asked.

Kurenai smiled awkwardly “Eheheh, that would be me, Naruto-kun”.

“Oooh” Naruto said with a forced smile, he then gave Asuma a thumbs up “Good for you, old man Asuma!” he said, even though he couldn't help but feel a little bit jealous. Then again, there are more fish in the sea. He should be happy for Asuma, rather than feeling jealous, he figured.

“Uhm, I'm not that old Naruto..” Asuma muttered depressingly, before making his way inside.

“What's this I hear about a date?” A smiling Mitarashi Anko asked as she came running up to the front door, having previously been with the other guests in the living room. Seeing Asuma blush, and Kurenai standing next to him, she grinned widely “No way! Did the two of you finally get together!?” she asked in an excited tone, happy that her best friend had finally gotten a boyfriend. Asuma nodded while blushing as always, while Kurenai continued to force herself to smile “Yes, that's right, Anko-chan. We started going out today..”

“That's great!” Anko said with a huge grin, which got Naruto really annoyed. “Well that has got to be all” Naruto muttered to himself as he was tired of greeting people at the door. He walked back towards the living room, where most of the people were seated or standing, chit chatting and eating snacks and what not. He was visibly annoyed, something most people there seemed to notice. Naruto found a seat on the couch, where he could sit down and frown, while hearing Anko excitedly tell everyone the news of Kurenai and Asuma. He sat down next to his father, who had Ino his lap, as she had quickly found her favorite seat.

The party then continued as it usually would. After a few drinks, Jiraiya would be the loudest one, entertaining everyone for the most of it, while every lady there tried to find a way to get Naruto upstairs to give him his “other present”. They never got further than the stairs before Ino, Anko or Kushina put a stop that though. Kurenai would be one of them if she weren't so sure that the three of them would get the done job just fine on their own. Kurenai left the party early after wishing Naruto a happy birthday again. She knew that Anko would help spread the news to everyone at the party as soon as she heard about it, meaning everything had gone as she had planned. Soon the whole village would have learned of it as well. Kurenai left without telling Asuma that she was leaving, since she didn't find that to be of importance. He had already served his purpose for today and now she didn't have any reason to see him for a while.

The next day was a Saturday, and like every other Saturday, Naruto had woken up early. During weekdays he had school and every Sunday he was always was up to no good with Jiraiya and Konohamaru. Saturdays were really the only days he could train the whole day, without anyone bothering him, for the most part. For a training maniac like Naruto, Saturdays were by far his favorite day of the week. At 7 AM he was already out that that training spot of his, doing push ups.

About an hour into his training, at 8 AM, Kurenai showed up. She faced Naruto with a warm smile, when she arrived “Good morning, Naruto-kun” she said in a happy tone.

“Morning” Naruto said, pouting as he remembered what he had learned about her and Asuma yesterday. Kurenai, who wore her usual outfit of a white battle dress, with black patterns on it, started stretching next to him “Do you mind if I train with you today?” she asked.

Naruto shook his head “Suit yourself” he responded, before taking off his shirt. He had already worked up a sweat, while doing push ups and sit ups earlier. Kurenai made no effort to hide the fact that she was blatantly checking him out, as she leered at his chiseled upper body. Kurenai bit her lip, before saying “Thanks. You see, I have been nominated by your father to become jounin. I want to be in the best shape of my life before I take on the test. And since I have never seen anyone train harder than you, I thought to myself, who better to train with?” Kushina said with a chuckle.

Naruto sighed “That's fine and all, lady. Just don't slow me down” he said, as he started doing some stretching exercises himself.

“I think I will be able to keep up with an academy student just fine, thank you very much” Kurenai said, shaking her head.

“Hmm?” Naruto hummed, as he started grinning mischievously “Is that so?” he said, in almost a challenging tone.

“Then why don't you join me for a few laps around my backyard?” Naruto asked, smiling in an almost evil way, which made Kurenai think that he looked more handsome than ever. While holding back a blush, she nodded “Sounds good, I'll follow your lead”.

On that note, Naruto took the lead as the two of them started running laps around his parents giant backyard. About an hour in, Kurenai was starting to have trouble to keep up with him. It wasn't that she couldn't run for longer than an hour, it was more so the high pace that Naruto ran at, which had her struggling. He didn't seem to be slowing down anytime soon either. After fifteen more minutes of running, she had fallen behind by a lot. She couldn't even see him ahead of him anymore. She started running at a pace she was more comfortable at after that, but at least she kept running for another two hours. During those two hours, Naruto passed her several times, poking fun at her every time he did. Some of it were along the lines of “Be careful, you might break the speed limit, Kurenai-san” and “You're not gonna make jounin at this rate!”.

After another hour of running, Kurenai made it back to the starting point at the edge of the backyard. There she found Naruto leaning his back on a tree, waiting for her.

“Took you long enough” Naruto said with a smug grin “So much for keeping up with a mere academy student, Kurenai-san..”.

Kurenai panted as she caught her breath. She really had ways to go if she planned on keeping up with Naruto and his training regime. She thought she had been training hard, her whole life. But seeing Naruto just doing his warm up, made her realize that she still had a long way to go.

“Isn't it time for lunch?” Kurenai said, trying to change the subject, as she was eager to change the subject.

Naruto nodded “For me it is” he then scratched the back of his head, as he stared at Kurenai with a look of disapproval “I don't know if you deserve lunch though, seeing as you are a chuunin who can't keep up with an academy student” he said, grinning at the end. Even though Naruto likes Kurenai, he isn't going to treat her any differently than anyone else. Especially not now when she is already dating someone else. Instead of being somewhat polite to her, he was now treating her more like he would Ino or Konohamaru.

“You really do run like a girl" Naruto said chuckling "I'm surprised you even made chuunin with such poor conditioning. My dad must have given you special treatment or something.."

Kurenai frowned “Your dad did no such thing. Me and my team crushed every single opponent in the chuunin exams. I deserve my title, and I am going to earn my right to become a jounin as well”.

Naruto shrugged “Whatever, you still suck. Even my mom can rum with me for a couple of hours, and she retired before I was born..” he said, trying to poke some more fun at her, which had Kurenai glare at him. Naruto forgot to mention that both he and his mom has inhuman stamina due to their Uzumaki genes, and also due to being the host to half of the nine tailed fox's chakra. One half is sealed inside Naruto while Kushina kept the other half sealed within her. Those Uzumaki genes gives them more advantages than just stamina, such as longevity and improved healing. Their longevity makes them live much longer than other humans. They also have accelerated healing abilities which is kinda nice to have in most cases.

Kurenai cursed at herself, for having shown such a weak and shameful side of herself to her one true love. She shouldn't be mad at him, she should be mad at herself, for not having trained hard enough to impress her love. Kurenai calmed herself, as she started smiling at Naruto again.

“Ninja specializes in all kinds of different fighting styles and techniques" Kurenai said as she did a series of hand sign with both of her hands. She put Naruto in a completely harmless illussion, where she and Naruto was sitting on throne like chairs, on top of some kind being carried through the streets of Konoha, on top of some kind of roofless palanquin. Ino, Yoshino, Butao and Asuma were the ones carrying their palanquin, while wearing nothing but brown rags.

"Mu-hahaha, isn't this scenery lovely, Naruto-kun?" Kurenai said as she grabbed a grape from a bowl.

"What the hell is going on?" Naruto said, looking around "Ino-chan, what are you doing?" he asked.

"I am nothing but a lowly insect, my only reason for existing, is to serve you, master Naruto" Ino responded in a cheerful tone.

"Uh?" Naruto uttered in confusion, before he glanced at Asuma. He knew very well that Kurenai had put him under the spell of an illusion, but why the fuck was her boyfriend one of the four carrying them?.

Kurenai canceled the illusion before Naruto got a chance to ask her about that. They were now back in the real world, at Naruto's training spot, as Kurenai smiled in delight, hoping the future would look something like that.

"I'm an illusion expert, Naruto-kun. I am not very prominent in the other ninja arts, which is why I am here to improve those. If you would allow me to train with you further" She said, with her usual kind smile, which never had to be forced when she was with Naruto.

Naruto gulped, thinking she looked so damn beautiful when she smiled at him like that. But he played it cool, as he shrugged and said "Do what you want".

Naruto then went and picked up his shirt from the ground, before putting it back on, causing Kurenai to pout for a second, as she would have preferred if he remained shirtless. "I am not going to slow down just to make training easier for you though. My goal is to surpass my dad, Ero-sennin and any kage level shinobi that has ever existed" Naruto stated with a confident grin. Kurenai felt her heartbeat raise, due to what Naruto had just said. He wanted to prove to everyone that he was better than them, just like she already knows. There is no mistaking it, Naruto and her are meant to be together. That was what Kurenai was thinking, while Naruto just wanted to become the best ninja to have ever existed. He would never think of himself as "better" or "above" anyone else.

As Kurenai stared at Naruto with hearts for eyes, Naruto eyebrows started twitching, since he was starting to think that Kurenai might be a little bit weird. "So.." he said in a bored tone "Would you like to join me for lunch? I'm sure my mom wouldn't mind if you ate with us" he said, thinking that his mom would just be happy to have one of her friends join them for lunch.

"I would love to, but unfortunately I already brought my own lunch" Kurenai lied. She had not brought lunch, she just didn't want to eat over at his house, since she didn't want Kushina to know that she was training with Naruto.

"Okay, maybe another time" Naruto said chuckling "See ya!" he added, before disappearing in a flash of yellow.

Their days continued like that, with Kurenai spending time with Naruto out there every day of the week except Sundays. She would go for walks with Asuma in the village, while holding hands, at least twice per month. They also went together to anything either of them were invited to, such as birthday parties or family dinners. Kurenai hated every single second of it and she even brought disinfectant to clean her hands after their hand holding. It was all an important part of her plan though, just so she could sell the image of the two of them being together. While they think she and Asuma is in a happy relationship, she is secretly getting to know Naruto better and better by every day that passes.

Almost a year later

After almost a year had passed, at the start of the next school year, the two of them had become pretty good friends. They had gotten used to their almost daily routine of meeting up at that training spot. During the year that passed, they started talking a bit more than they did before and Kurenai even trained with him a few more times, although she avoided going running with him. Most of the time it was just like before though, sometimes they would joke around a bit but most of the time Kurenai just sat there reading or checking him out.

Slow and steady wins the race, that's how Kurenai saw it. The end goal was still the same, which was making sure Naruto would be hers. And while that is the end goal, she doesn't mind taking it slow and getting to know him better. The more she got to know him, the more she would fall in love with him. By getting to know Naruto better, and while fake dating Asuma, she also gotten to know Konohamaru a lot better. Kurenai has gotten a slight interest in him as well, mainly because he is basically a brown haired Naruto. That makes him kinda cute in her opinion. She has toyed with the idea that if her master plan of getting Naruto were to somehow fail, she would get together with him instead, and do all the same things behind Asuma's back. But don't get confused, while it's not a bad idea to have a plan b, she has no intentions of losing Naruto to anyone. She was going to get her way, no matter what. But at least she now had the slightest of attraction for someone that weren't Naruto, which wasn't the case before.

Recently things have starting to get a bit problematic as Anko's flirting has gotten a lot more suggestive and aggressive. Not to mention that “the little blond skank”, otherwise known as Ino, has started showing up at his house a lot more frequently. While there are many more people to be worried about, those two are Kurenai's main rivals. Anko has even seen Kurenai and Naruto together out at the training spot. Anko didn't seem to mind that thoug,h as she had completely bought the whole fake relationship with Asuma thing. Kurenai also explained that she just happened to be out there reading those times, leaving out the fact that she has done so almost every day for a year.

There is still a problem with Anko seeing her at the training spot with Naruto, since Kurenai has no plans to stop going out there just to be with him. That means that it's very likely that Anko will run into them being together more often, and the more times she does it, the more she is going to question Kurenai's presence. That is something has already kind of happened when Kushina came out to the training spot once, to deliver lunch to Naruto. She was pretty much glaring at Kurenai the whole time, silently asking her “What the fuck are you doing here?”. Kurenai figured she didn't give two fucks about her being in a relationship with Asuma, and Kurenai couldn't really blame her for that, due to how even Kushina's married friends makes zero effort to hide the fact that they also want Naruto.

Her fake relationship with Asuma has gone well so far. Everyone seems to be convinced that the two of them are now together in a serious and steady relationship. Most of those men that kept asking her out has stopped that now that she is together with the strong jounin, Sarutobi Asuma, who they don't want to have as an enemy. It didn't really take much on her part to make that happen. All she had to do was as already mentioned, make sure she is seen with Asuma in public a few times every month. In private, they are never together and they still haven't gone further than holding hands.

While that is what is going on in camp Kurenai, at camp Naruto's things are not so great. Never mind that he has the sexiest girl in the village, a girl who he thinks he can't have since she is with Asuma, constantly being around him, flaunting her sexy body for him and showing off those beautiful legs of hers. He also has Anko constantly teasing him, who is the next best thing, walking around almost naked, if it weren't for that fishnet armor of hers, inside his room. He also has a very bored and kinda frustrated mom who is taking it out on him and his friend, Konohamaru, who she always tells him to invite over for some reason. Naruto thinks he knows exactly why she wants him over, other than the obvious reason which is that he is one of Naruto's friends that she doesn't hate, with the reason being that she can pay them back for that prank that happened last summer. It was one damn time where they crossed the line a bit, and now they have to pay for it all the time.

While the two of them always retaliated with a prank of their own, not involving raising any skirts or anything like that, Kushina doesn't seem to get the message. That is going to change today as Konohamaru will now start his first year in the academy. He is a big boy now, that means that he is ready to start pulling big boy pranks, like the ones Naruto pulls on girls in school, but on Kushina instead. Konohamaru just has to get a little more experience first, by pranking some of the girls in school, and Naruto is going to show him how. And what better way to start of school than by pulling a few harmless pranks on some unsuspecting girls?

With those thoughts, Naruto pulled Konohamaru away from what appeared to be two friends he had already made. One was a nerdy looking guy with glasses and the other was a short girl with orange hair. A short girl who blushed as soon as she saw Naruto, to Naruto's ire. Konohamaru's new friends are Udon and Moegi. He got to know them earlier today after seeing Udon being bullied by a few of their classmates. They were teasing him about the fact that he wore glasses, calling him nerd and four eyes, until Konohamaru came and told them off. Konohamaru already has quite the reputation in the village, as being a little bit wild and carefree. They didn't seem to want to get on Konohamaru's bad side, so they apologized to Udon before running off. Moegi had seen it all, and was about to step in to intervene herself, if Konohamaru had not beat her to it. Instead she gained a lot of respect for Konohamaru, who she introduced herself to after the bullies had ran off.

While Naruto dragged Konohamaru away from his friends, Konohamaru whined “What the hell boss, I was gonna eat lunch with my new pals kore!”.

“You can do that later. I need you to prank someone for me” Naruto said which had Konohamaru grin “Oh!? You can count on me boss!” Konohamaru said in an excited tone.

“That's great, Kon” Naruto said with an mischievous, yet evil, grin. He then pointed at Ino, who was currently eating her lunch on a bench, sitting next to her best friends, Hinata and Sakura.

“Go over there and pinch Ino-chan's ass!” Naruto said, while still grinning.

Konohamaru tilted his head, as he stared at Naruto in confusion “I don't mind doing that, but why Ino-chan? She is like the only nice girl around..”.

Naruto nodded “That's why I am choosing her. You don't want to get your face pummeled, do you?” he asked. While Konohamaru stared at his target with a thoughtful expression, Naruto thought with an evil grin “You idiot. Have you already forgotten about what happened when you pranked her the last time? She is the worst target you could possibly choose”.

Naruto expected more of an argument coming from Konohamaru, instead the only thing he got was a thumbs up and “Okay, I'll be right back!” before a giggling Konohamaru made his way over to the bench.

Naruto stared at his back with a raised eyebrow, wondering if there was something wrong with his so called underling. Maybe Hiruzen, himself and Jiraiya has caused some kind of brain damage on him with all the hits to his head. Something certainly wasn't right about him, that's for sure. That's why he is the perfect subordinate for him. Some missed irony on Naruto's part here is that pretty much everyone thinks Konohamaru is a copy of him. Jiraiya, Hiruzen and sometimes even his own father has had similar thoughts about him, and all of his crazy antics.

Naruto then laughed his ass off as he saw Konohamaru sneak up behind the bench to pinch Ino's butt. What followed after was Konohamaru running away, heading back towards Naruto, while Ino screeched loudly “You little pervert!” as her friends laughed at her. Sakura laughed the loudest, taking any chance to make fun of her friend and rival.

“Don't come here Kon!” Naruto yelled as Konohamaru was on his way over “Wah, why not?” a panicked Konohamaru asked, while Ino came chasing after him. Ino saw Naruto hiding at the side of the school building. Putting 1+1 together, she quickly figured out who put Konohamaru up to that.

“Naruto-kun..” Ino said in a dangerous tone, cracking her knuckles. Sakura arrived next to Ino, elbowing her gently “Don't get mad at Naruto-kun, Ino-pig. Go bother your little boyfriend instead!” she said, ending with a mocking laughter.

“Forehead girl!” Ino growled, before her eyes widened, due to seeing Konohamaru appearing behind Sakura, sitting down as he started fondling Sakura's ass, not being shy at all with his hands.

“I like this one better, boss!” Konohamaru said, while giggling perversely “Nice ass, Sakura-san”.

Sakura was too surprised to even react to what was happening, as she wondered if Konohamaru had a death wish. At the same time, Ino smirked now that Sakura was on the receiving end. Then she remembered what he had just said “What do you mean better?!” She yelled, glaring at Konohamaru.

Naruto took this chance to get out of there. He disappeared to safety in a gust of wind, only leaving behind his loud echoing laughter.

After getting a few good seconds of grabbing what had to be the second best butt he has ever laid eyes upon, Konohamaru realized the situation he was in, as he hastily removed his hands from Sakura's ass. He gulped as he looked around, searching for Naruto, hoping he would still be around to save him.“Boss?” he asked nervously, while he started sweating.

The next thing he saw was Ino and Sakura hovering above him with clenched fists “You are dead, you damn pervert!” they said before the two of them started smashing his head in. “Meh, still worth it” Konohamaru thought as the two beauties pummeled his face.

Konohamaru's little prank had gotten the attention of pretty much everyone in school. Everyone was surprised to see anyone else with those kinda balls, since normally it was just Naruto who had the balls to pull off pranks like that. Although some guys would argue that his pranks doesn't count as pranks, since most girls seemed to like his perverted surprise attacks. At least now they know what would happen to any one else if they did what Naruto did. They kinda all started hating Naruto a bit for that, at least the guys who were all jealous of his popularity. All of the guys except Sasuke, who didn't care about such things like girls and populairty. He hates Naruto for a different reason, being that he is obviously the strongest student in school.

Konohamaru had to spend the rest of the school day in the school infirmary, receiving medical attention from the school nurse. There didn't seem to be any hard feelings between him and Naruto though. The very next day, Naruto asked him what he thought of yesterdays prank. Konohamaru had given him two thumbs up, Jiraiya style, saying “It was worth it”.

After that day, Naruto started wondering if he had released some kind of monster upon their school. Konohamaru didn't stop his pranking, instead he got smarter about making his escape. The first few weeks he pranked every hot girl in school, any chance he got. He even went after Sasuke's big sister, Sara, one time. That resulted in him getting a crazy looking, murderous Sasuke chasing him around the village for two days afterwards. He didn't stop until Naruto sent him flying into a wall, threatening to make that a daily thing if he didn't stop “chasing after his underling”.

Sara was even there to witness Naruto's attack on Sasuke, and she took Naruto's side, telling Sasuke to stop overreacting over a little prank. Besides, even if she was a bit upset with Konohamaru, it was more important to get on Naruto's good side. Especially since she only had one more year left in the academy to have easy access to him. Sara, just like her younger sister or any other female at school for that matter, doesn't mind Naruto's pranks since they actually want him to go way further than he does when pranking them. If it were up to her, she would have Naruto drag her into a private room every day and let him do whatever he wants to her.

While Sara was the target of one of Konohamaru's pranks, along with most the other good looking chicks at school, no one was targeted more than one Haruno Sakura. Konohamaru just didn't leave her alone, he was always going after her, pinching her butt, fondling it in front of everyone and even lifting the skirt of her red dress. It was a good thing she wore those dark green bike shorts under it, otherwise Konohamaru would be exposing her underwear to everyone on a daily basis. “The little shit” has even learned to escape from Sakura afterwards, without ending up in the infirmary, which his underling unfortunately did every day during the first week of school.

About two months into the school year, on the day of Naruto's birthday, Naruto deemed Konohamaru to be ready to go after their real target, Naruto's mom. As much as Naruto loves that woman, she has it coming. This time, Naruto told Konohamaru to come over before any of the other guests would get there. About an hour before the birthday party would start, Naruto and Konohamaru were in Naruto's room, watching a recording of Konohamaru pulling pranks on girls at school, which someone had recorded for them.

That someone was Udon, who along with Moegi had formed the Konohamaru corps together with Konohamaru, the leader of said corps. The two of them have also become something of subordinates to Naruto, idolizing him as a God walking on earth. Moegi was also no different from other girls, as the young orange haired girl had gained a crush on Naruto. Naruto had asked Udon to start recording Konohamaru whenever he got up to no good, since they needed to review his practice.

“That there!” Naruto said pointing at the screen, where they saw Konohamaru spanking Sakura hard on the ass, before she chased him off while screeching loudly.

“That's what you are doing today Kon!” Naruto said with that evil grin returning.

“Sure thing boss, I'll spank that ass any day, kore!” Konohamaru said with a grin of his own. Grabbing or spanking Sakura's butt has become one of his favorites hobbies as of late.

“Oh no you aren't, you are going after a much bigger target this time” Naruto said with a devilish smirk.

Konohamaru stared at Naruto with an expression of disgust “Bigger target? It's not some fat chick I hope..”

Konohamaru gulped in fear, as he saw Naruto's expression change to pure anger “What the fuck did you say about my mom?”

“I haven't said anything about the old hag..” Konohamaru said, before his eyes widened in realization “Hell no, boss! I'm not doing that again, kore!”.

“Yes you are” Naruto said, while turning off the TV with a controller “You are doing it at the party later, in front of everyone, including my dad”

Konohamaru got up on his, before walking towards the door in haste “I'm going home, kore!”.

Naruto grabbed him by his scarf, holding him back “Okay dammit, you can do it now or after the party. The important thing is that you do it. She has got it coming!”

Konohamaru turned around, frowning “That's what you said last time! Do you know what she did to me!?” he said, remembering waking up next to some big hairy spiders, the first time he slept over at Naruto's, after that prank.

Naruto nodded “I know, she did the same thing to me. Don't you get it? That's why you are gonna get her back, dattebayo!”

“I'd rather stick my dick in a beehive, then ask Kiba's mom to blow it better, than do that again” Konohamaru said while shivering “Do it yourself, I'm out!” he said, as he really wanted to get himself out of this one.

“Bah, you wimp!” Naruto barked “How about this. I will do the same, you can pick anyone who will be at the party and I'll spank her butt in front of everyone even!” Naruto said in almost desperate yell.

“But no one is scarier than your mom when she gets angry!” Konohamaru shouted back at him. The door opened just as he did, to reveal Kushina who had a plate of cookies with her. Her eyebrows twitched as she entered the room “I'm not that scary am I, Konohamaru-kun?” she asked, with an all too sweet smile.

Konohamaru started shivering in fear, hoping that she had not overheard their conversation more than that. “No, you misheard me, I said it's scary how tasty your food is!” Konohamaru said, bowing his head. "Please buy it" he thought.

“I'm glad to hear that, because I just made cookies for the party and thought you and Naruto would like to have some before the others arrived” Kushina said with a mischievous smirk. She may or may not have tampered with those cookies a little bit. Kushina had forgiven Konohamaru for his prank a long time ago, she just used it as an excuse to allow her to continue pranking the two of them. She is after all the true prank master of Konoha.

“Sure, Naruto's mom!” Konohamaru said excitedly, using his nicer nickname for her. He then reached to grab a cookie, but just before he could grab one, Naruto grabbed the plate and threw it out of the window “Don't eat that, it's poisoned or something!” he yelled.

“What the hell?!” Konohamaru yelled, wondering if Naruto was crazy for throwing out something that Kushina has baked. Naruto ignored Konohamaru in favor of smirking at his mom “You'll have to do better than that, mom-tebayo!”.

Kushina smirked as well, as she left the room, closing the door behind her “Good on you for figuring it out. I'm just getting started!” she said, laughing, as before the door closed. Konohamaru and Naruto heard her head towards the stair while laughing loud, causing them both to shiver.

Naruto stared at Konohamaru with an annoyed expression, pointing at the door “See what I mean, she is asking for it! If I didn't throw that out you would have been on the toilet the whole party!”.

“You got a point” Konohamaru said with a thoughtful expression, resting his thumb on his chin “If I do it, then I will do it after the party, because I don't want to have to look behind my back the whole evening”.

Konohamaru had realized that his boss had got a good point. She really did deserve to get some proper payback. But the main reason why he was starting to consider doing it, is because while Sakura may have the second best ass he has ever laid his eyes upon, Kushina is easily his number once choice. He only saw her pantie covered ass for a split second, but that was enough to almost make him get a nosebleed. He has seen babes completely nude at bath houses, when the pervert trio goes out on research missions, without even coming close to having a nosebleed. If Naruto is going to give him his blessing to grab that beautiful goddes's butt, then he might as well do it. It will be worth a few ass beatings.

Naruto nodded sagely "Wise thinking, Kon. You can stay over tonight, that way you don't have to worry about running out of time".

Konohamaru was about to say fuck no, but then changed his mind due to thinking that he was probably safer here with Naruto, who could protect him from the old hag after the prank.

“Okay, I'll sleep over” Konohamaru said with a mischievous grin of his own “Did you say that I could pick anyone I want for you to spank?”.

“Yes, unlike you, I'm no pussy, dattebayo..” Naruto said with a confident grin.

“Then you can spank Anko-nee in front of everyone, kore!” Konohamaru said with a loud laugh. He thought it was a great choice since to him, Anko is the second scariest woman that exists, as only an angry Kushina is scarier. He didn't pay much attention to Anko's obvious flirting with Naruto, because if he did, he would probably realize that Anko is the worst choice he could have made. Konohamaru doesn't really see her flirting as flirting either, he sees it more like her trying to tease and annoy Naruto. That's why he will often come to Naruto's aide, to chase that evil witch away from him. That's something that has started to really bother Anko, as she used to think Konohamaru was kind of funny and overall just cool to have around, when she came over to visit Naruto. But due to him always getting in the way of her having some fun and intimate moments with Naruto, she has started to see Konohamaru as nothing more than an annoying brat, who is getting in the way of her and Naruto's alone time.

Choosing Anko might not be the worst choice depending on how you look at it. Naruto actually thought it was one of the worst ones he could have picked. Naruto would not be in any danger of getting beaten up by her, it had more to do with the reaction that she would have to it. He wouldn't be surprised if she either started spanking him back or ask him to spank her more. Either way, it was not something Naruto wanted to do in front of everyone.

While Naruto and Konohamaru went over their strategies for this evenings pranks, Kurenai was getting ready to head over to Naruto's home. This time she wouldn't arrive there in the company of Asuma, since she had no reason to keep selling the picture of the two of them being together anymore. He would be at the party anyway, and he would most likely follow her her around for the bigger part of it. Kurenai could just focus on trying to avoid him and put the second phase of her plan in motion. That is to win Naruto's heart without anyone else finding out about it. She dressed up nicely for the occasion again, wearing a small tight white blouse and a black sailor skirt, which was also on the small side and she wore it high up as it covered her midriff.

Half an hour later, Kurenai was standing outside the door to Naruto's parents house. She was one the first people to arrive this time. The only other guests to arrive before her was Jiraiya, Anko and Konohamaru. Instead of Naruto welcoming her and other guests at the door like last year, Kushina had given that chore to Minato this time. Kurenai had a pretty good idea why it was Minato greeting them this year, since Kushina wants to protect Naruto from getting his head buried in between the breasts of horny housewives and other admirers of Naruto, which happened last year.

“Welcome in Kurenai-san” Minato said with a kind smile “Where is Asuma-san?” he asked before Kurenai had the chance to sneak inside.

“Thank you Hokage-sama, he should be coming over later” Kurenai said with a kind smile of her own, smirking inwardly at the fact that Minato was trying to avert his eyes from her. He probably feared what Kushina would do to him if he was caught checking out any other woman. Kurenai couldn't blame the hokage for stealing a glance at her, since she knew that she looked really good today. She just hoped Naruto would take notice of that. While Kurenai had been right about Minato staring her up and down for a second, he had not really done that to check her out. He was mostly confused to as to why Kurenai and other women keeps dressing up in these skimpy and revealing outfits and dresses, for his sons birthday party. Minato is very well aware of the fact that Naruto is very popular, but he couldn't possibly imagine that Kurenai of all people, would be the same as all those other girls and women. Especially after she and Asuma started dating last year. But still, why is she dressed like that?

“Okay..” Minato said, scratching the back of his head “Well Anko-chan is here already, I'm sure you won't have any trouble finding her” Minato said as Kurenai chuckled “I'm sure I will” she said as she stepped inside the house, hearing the noise of Anko's loud laughter. Kurenai walked over to the couch where Anko, Konohamaru, Jiraiya and Naruto sat. Or rather used to sit at before Anko and Konohamaru ended up on the floor with Anko seated astride his torso. Like a pro jiu jitsu fighter, she had gotten on top for a full mount, before applying pressure to his neck, using her forearm.

“Say that again, you little shit!” Anko taunted him, while giggling.

“I'm sorry Anko-nee, please let me go!” Konohamaru managed to choke out.

“Not before you learn your lesson!” Anko said as she eased up the pressure on his neck a little bit. Konohamaru had called her a fat old witch earlier, after Anko had gotten comfortable on the couch with Naruto. She had plopped down behind him, hugging her arms and legs around him, while pressing her tits into the back of his head.

“You suck, Kon!” Naruto said with a chuckle “At least fight back!”.

“Why would he? I would love to be in that position” Jiraiya said as he giggled perversely, referring to the way Anko sat on top of Konohamaru's torso.

Anko frowned as she let go of Konohamaru, before moving over to sit down in Naruto's lap instead “Pervert” she muttered angrily at Jiraiya.

Jiraiya smirked at the snake summoner “You know it!” he said with an eye wink, causing Anko to glare at him.

Konohamaru got up and sat down next to Naruto, glaring at Anko who stuck out her tongue at him “Stupid old hag!” Konohamaru said, crossing his arms above his chest.

“Didn't you learn your lesson?” Anko asked in a threatening tone.

Konohamaru turned his face away from her, while pouting. He figured it was best to keep his mouth shut for now, since he has had enough of Anko's beatings for one day. That's when Kurenai, who had been standing at the hall way between the kitchen and the living room, made her presence known “Happy birthday Naruto-kun” Kurenai said, smiling at him lovingly.

“Thanks Kurenai-san” Naruto said, smiling back at her as Kurenai handed him a present. He couldn't help but think that she looked really good in that outfit. It was also hard to avert his eyes from her long, slender and sexy legs. Before he got caught checking her out, Naruto started unwrapping the present he had received, curiously wondering what it could be. He had already gotten condoms from Anko, the latest volume of Icha Icha from Jiraiya, a large pack of energy bars from Konohamaru, an absurd amount of clothes from Kushina and any kind of ninja tool or supply that you could think of from Minato.

After getting rid of the wrapping he was left with a box without any text or pictures on it. He opened it to find two cards within it. One card was a standard happy birthday card, while the other one was a picture of Ichiraku Ayame and Teuchi, taken of them standing inside their ramen shop. On the back of that picture, someone had written with large letters “Free all you can eat at Ichiraku Ramen for a whole year”. Naruto's eyes widened as he stared at it, that had to be the best thing he had ever gotten in his life. Kurenai was hoping for that reaction. She had observed him for a year, and this is what she thought would be the best present for him.

“Wow, is this real? I can eat free ramen for a year?” Naruto asked, drooling a little as he imagined all the bowls of ramen he would be eating.

Kurenai responded with a nod, as she smiled warmly at Naruto, happy that he liked his present.

“Damn, Kurenai-chan, how much did that cost?” Anko asked in a surprised tone.

“Not much, the Ichiraku's almost gave it to me for free” Kurenai said. It was somewhat true since the Ichiraku's pretty much lets Naruto eat for free there all the time anyway. His parents covered anything his meals would cost with their absurdly large tips. The reason for it being somewhat true is that Kurenai refused the discount. She wanted to pay the full amount since she was buying it for Naruto, her soulmate and future husband. There was no one else she would rather spend her money on. She saw no reason to let Anko and the others know about that though.

“It's a great gift either way, thanks a lot, Kurenai-san” Naruto said with a wide smile. If she weren't for the fact that he had Anko in his lap, or the fact that Kurenai already had a boyfriend, he would have hugged her.

“Asuma-san is a lucky man to have a kind girlfriend like you” Naruto added, grinning at Kurenai.

“Thanks” Kurenai said, before turning her head to the side to hide a the blush that was forming on her cheeks. Naruto figured now was a good time to get his part of his and Konohamaru's deal done. It was better to do it now, before more guests arrive. He then gently lifted Anko off of, as she got up on her feet, standing front of him. With a pout, Anko was about to ask “What's the deal, Naruto-kun?”, but before she could ask that, Naruto had given her butt a hard and quick slap, spanking her.

“Eep!!” Anko exclaimed uncharacteristically, and even jumped as she wasn't ready for that at all.

“Eep?” Kurenai repeated in an amused tone, before she started giggling. The three perverts on the couch started laughing at the same time.

A blushing Anko focused a glare at Kurenai for making fun of her, she then focused that glare on Konohamaru and Jiraiya, causing everyone except Naruto to stop laughing. Anko then leaned down and purred into Naruto's ear “All you had to do was ask, you can spank me anytime you want, handsome” she said then gave him an eye wink. Naruto froze as he stared at her in disbelief “I can?” he asked.

“Let's go upstairs if you wanna find out” Anko said in a flirty tone, before offering him his hand to help him up on his feet.

“Hell yeah” Naruto said as he took her hand in her own, before getting up “Let's go” he added in an excited tone. Anko grinned as the two of them made their way towards the stairs, hand in hand.

Kurenai then cleared her throat in an over exaggerated and loud way “Anko-chan, I don't think that's a good idea”.

Anko glanced back at her “Why not?” she asked.

“Well, for starters you are way too old for him. Also, you probably shouldn't start of the party by pissing off Kushina-sama the first thing you do” Kurenai said, pointing her thumb towards the kitchen where Kushina stood, glaring at them menacingly, while being armed with a frying pan in her hand.

Anko chuckled before getting back to the couch. The two of them sat down on the couch, as Anko said“”I was just joking, Kushina-chan. You can drop your weapon”.

“Damn tease” Naruto thought while frowning. He can't let this sexy babe keep getting away with teasing him like this. There has to be a limit to how much teasing one man can take from one woman. He is really starting to consider giving her the same treatment he does the girls in school.

“Yeah right” Kushina said rolling her eyes “As long as you keep the others in tact tonight, then I will pretend that never happened”. By others, she was referring to the other older women who might try to get Naruto upstairs for some spanking or along those lines.

Anko saluted her “You can count on me”.

Anko then frowned, as she turned to stare at Kurenai “Kurenai-chan”.

“Yes?”

“What do you mean by I'm too old?” she asked in a very sweet tone.

“Well.." Kurenai started, but she got interrupted by Kushina, who yelled from the kitchen “Your friend is right is Anko-chan, keep your hands off my son, dattebane!”

Anko frowned even more, as she thought she and Kushina had come to an agreement already. If she wants a fight, then she will give her one.

“Why don't you make me, Kushina-chan?” Anko yelled back, challenging her.

"What did you say!?" Kushina said, as she stomped out of the kitchen into the living room, with her hair raising above her head.

"GAAHAH!" Konohamaru uttered in fear before he jumped away to hide behind Jiraiya, who in turn was shaking in fear. Nothing good ever happens when Kushina takes on this form, as Jiraiya and Konohamaru would mostly just suffer pain and misery. Kushina calmed down when the Yamanaka family came walking down the hall way, towards her.

“Oh my, did we come at a bad time, Kushina-chan?” Butao asked with a chuckle, making her presence known.

Inoichi stood next to Minato, who was coming into the living room with them. Both of them were shaking in slight fear, both having similar thoughts that Jiraiya and Konohamaru had.

Ino ran up to Kushina and hugged her “Don't be mad, Kushina-sama! I won't let Naruto-kun out of my sight today!”.

“Aww!” Kushina responded, hugging her back lovingly “You're so sweet, Ino-chan. I can always count on you”. Kushina had no problem with Ino or any of Naruto's other classmates being interested in him. It was these older women, who she fears will just use Naruto as nothing more than a boy toy, that she had a problem with. She actually thinks Naruto and Ino would make a great couple.

Naruto sighed “Welp, that means my day is ruined..” he said in a bored tone.

“BAKA!” Ino yelled, before rushing over to the couch. Instead of hitting him, she jumped into his lap, putting her aroms around his neck, then pressing her cheek against his “You're all mine today, Naruto-kun”.

“Grrrr” Naruto growled like a feral dog, before Anko yanked Ino off of Naruto “I don't think so Ino-chan. I got here first” she said, before plopping down on Naruto's lap.

Ino glared at Anko for a second, before turning her head towards the hall way. She looked at Minato with the cutest puppy dog eyed expression that she could manage “Hokage-sama...” she whined.

Minato started sweating a little bit, seeing her like that. He already knew what she wanted to say with that look. She wants to sit in his lap, as he is always her go to whenever Naruto is occupied. This was something that started bothering him a few years ago, since she is no longer a little girl, since she is now a very beautiful young woman. That hasn't changed, since she has only grown even more beautiful during the years that has passed, and it's starting to get very uncomfortable for Minato to have her in her lap all the time. Because that is where she usually sits, whenever she visits their home, or Minato and his family visits the Yamanaka's. No one seems to be bothered by that, other than him. It's not that he hates having her in her lap or something like that. The reason why it bothers him, is because he enjoys having her there a lot more than he should.

Minato heard a knock coming from the front door, which saved him for now “Sorry Ino-chan, I gotta let in the other guests..” he said, scratching the back of his head, before heading towards the front door.

Ino pouted, as she turned to stare at the pervert trio on the couch, along with Anko in Naruto's lap. Since Naruto was occupied, and Minato was busy greeting the guests, she might as well mess with Jiraiya a little bit. Ino really enjoys pranking him, because she loves the reactions that she and the others gets out of him. Her previous pranks on him had often been ones she had done together with Konohamaru and Naruto, such as putting his hair on fire, or covering him in manure.

Lately, she has started pranking her on her own a little bit. Her pranks are usually a bit suggestive and naughty. That's something she only does because Jiraiya always calls her a brat, and says that brats like her doesn't interest the super pervert that way. Now that's just something Ino can't accept. She can't have Konoha's very own super pervert, not admitting that she is sexy and beautiful. Because she knows that she is, and so does all the men and boys who checks her out and leers at her on a daily basis, when she walks through the village.

“Ero-sennin!” Ino said as she walked up to the couch.

“Ino-chan..” Jiraiya said in a strangely serious tone, using the familiar -chan suffix when addressing her, since they have known each other for a long time. Ino was about to pretend to lift up the skirt of her purple dress, tricking him into thinking that she would be flashing him, to get a reaction out of him, but before she was able to do that, Jiraiya shouted “Get her!”.

“Yosh!” Konohamaru exclaimed, before jumping off the couch, towards Ino. He landed next to her, crouching down. He extended his left arm, as he was about to slap her ass. Before his hand connected with her buttocks, he was pulled away by someone who had grabbed him by his scarf. He didn't even have to look to find out who it was, as the person dragged him into the kitchen.

“Let me go, old hag!” Konhoamaru whined as the others in the living room laughed at his expense. Kushina who had been the culprit, let go of his scarf once they had reached the kitchen sink.

“No, you are helping me in the kitchen until the others get here. How dare you try to lay your hands on Ino-chan like that” Kushina said as she stared at Konohamaru with an angry expression “I don't want you to become a pervert like Jiraiya-sensei and Naruto. It's already bad enough that Jiraiya-sensei has corrupted him”.

Konohamaru pouted, which had Kushina almost squeal in delight due to how cute she thought he looked. Konohamaru ended up doing what she asked, since he didn't want to anger her any further, knowing what he was expected to do to her later, now that Naruto had fulfilled his part of the deal. The birthday party then continued as it normally would. Naruto's hungry friends would pig out on all the delicious food while their moms and other girls were more thirsty for some Naruto, rather than being hungry. Ino was the exception, as she had sat down on Minato's lap as soon as the poor hokage had gotten a chance to sit down. Her crush on the hokage had only grown as the years had passed. Lately she has even started to have naughty thoughts and dreams involving both the hokage and his son. It's because of those two that she has gotten an interest in sex, and she has even started reading Jiraiya's erotic novels, the Icha Icha series.

Later on, Naruto and his friends would escape out to the backyard to spar and play games again until the party ended as everyone went home. Everyone except Jiraiya and Konohamaru, who stuck around. Jiraiya was sitting on the couch in the living room, drinking sake and chatting away with Minato. Konohamaru was still around since he was going to sleep over, and still had to fulfill his part of the deal.

“It's time for you know what” Naruto said, staring at Konohamaru with a serious expression, as he and Konohamaru stood outside on the veranda, staring at Kushina who was cleaning up inside.

Konohamaru gulped “I know” he said before going inside. Konohamaru figured it was best to just get it over with. Naruto stayed back in the backyard, watching Konohamaru pull off the so called prank, at a safe distance. Now was the best time do it since Kushina was in the kitchen, cleaning up after the party, while Minato and Jiraiya sat on the couch in the living room. The living room and kitchen is separated by a hallway and two walls, but both the kitchen and living room have many large windows facing towards the backyard. In other words, Naruto could see all of them from where he is currently standing, and he would be able to see Konohamaru's prank, Kushina's reaction as well as Jiraiya and Minato's reaction, if they were to somehow see it as well.

He observed as Konohamaru ran into the kitchen, thinking “Here I go!”, before he lightly tapped his hand against Kushina's ass with an open palm. He then jolted out of the kitchen, heading back towards the veranda in haste.

“You can't call that a spanking” Naruto said, sweat dropping at that lame excuse for a spanking. Even his mom's reaction was delayed as she had just turned around and raised an eyebrow, when she saw Konohamaru running, she realized what had just touched her butt, again. The fact that Konohamaru had done something like that to Kushina again, didn't actually upset her. Instead it intrigued her, and she was kind of hoping that those pranks would become a regular thing. Especially if he does it when no one else is around, then she can turn the tables on him with a naughty prank of her own. Her crush on Konohamaru, which she is still in full denial about, is the reason for that. She wouldn't even let any of Naruto's other friends sneak up on her like that, it was only Konohamaru who she allowed that privilege.

Kushina also knows that she can never let anyone know that she actually doesn't mind Konohamaru's pranks. Not because of the obvious reasons, which would be her allowing Konohamaru to feel her up, spank her or raise her skirt, it's because she is of the belief that someone as “handsome and stunning” like him, wouldn't be interested in an old hag like her, in that way. That's a completely ludacrious thought on her part, because she still doesn't look a day older than 20, thanks to her Uzumaki genes. But alas, that was the way that she saw things, as she thought that Konohamaru was the one out of her league, and not the other way around. Instead of showing any sign of liking the prank, Kushina reacted the way that everyone expected her to do. It was also the way that she thought that Konohamaru and Naruto, the latter who Kushina knows set him up to prank her again, would want her to react. On that note, she chased after Konohamaru, while yelling “I'm gonna kick your ass this time, ttebane!” with a playful smile adorning her pretty face.

“Help me, boss!” Konohamaru whined in desperation, as he came bursting through the door to the backyard. A second later, Kushina threw herself over him, catching his neck in a leg and arm lock “Apologize you little perv!” she said in an angry tone, but kept her voice quiet enough so only the three outside could hear them.

“Let go of my underling, mom!” Naruto said, as he struck a fighting pose. He was ready to defend him, as he had promised.

“I'm sorry, Naruto's mom, please let me go!” Konohamaru wailed. Kushina giggled as she let go of Konohamaru, then walked back towards the house “It's a good thing you are sleeping over tonight, Konohamaru-kun. Now both you and Naruto-kun can sleep with your eyes open” she ended in a threatening tone.

As Kushina returned inside to continuing cleaning up after the party, Minato turned to Jiraiya “What was that about? What could they have done to piss her off that much?”

Jiraiya started sweating a little bit, having a pretty good idea what those two knuckleheads had done. The reason for his sweating, is that he believes that Minato would blame him for their actions, if he found out the truth.

“Eh, who knows?” Jiraiya said with a shrug, he then focused a glare directed at Naruto “Don't tell me you are putting him up to that again, you little brat!” he thought.

Back outside, Naruto helped Konohamaru back up on his feet.

“Not much of a spanking, but it will have to do this for this time” Naruto said, chuckling.

“Yeah, I'm gonna get that old hag next time, don't worry boss!” Konohamaru said with a frown. Now he had lost any thoughts of not going after her. If she going to go all “Anko-nee” on him, then he is going to get her back.

Naruto grinned “Next time?” he asked in an amused tone.

Konohamaru nodded “You were right, she has got it coming!” he stated confidently.

Naruto started laughing like a crazy sith lord who had just turned someone to the dark side “Good good!” he hissed.

“Boss, are you okay?” Konohamaru asked in a worried tone.

Naruto sweat dropped “Let's just go sleep” Naruto said, even though bot of them knew that they wouldn't be getting any rest tonight. They expected Kushina to make sure of that, knowing that she would get her revenge tonight.

"What do you think about these pranks I have ordered you to do lately?" Naruto said as the two of them made their way up the stairs, heading towards his bedroom.

"I understand now why you made me do it" Konohamaru said as he shined up, facing Naruto with a toothy grin "Boss! You truly are a scholar and gentleman!"

Footnotes

1: Once again, Kurenai's crazy personality is not something you should read too much into. It's all just for comedic effect, as she is something of a “crazy yandere”. She isn't going to hurt anyone, especially not Ino. She is just a little obsessed with “her man”.

2: I realize that Asuma, who both Hiruzen and Kurenai has already been shitting on, comes across as some kind of “butt monkey” character, who I'm bashing, and every character is bashing. That is not always going to be the case, as Asuma will have his own little side story of personal growth and change in this story. While he is never going to become the super prodigy that Hiruzen wants him to be, nor will he become a chick magnet and a harem king surpassing all other harem kings, he will at least have a happy end in the story. Even though this version of Asuma is going to be happy, readers who like the character might not. If you are an Asuma fan, or a Kurenai x Asuma fan, then this story is probably not for you.

While I'm on the subject of Asuma, I want to address some stories that some author is spamming on AO3. This author has created several accounts, spamming stories which all have the same basic plot. It starts with Asuma being jealous that Kurenai is banging Naruto in secret, then it ends with Asuma somehow getting ass fucked by Uchiha Madara, Obito or original characters. Now I wouldn't have a problem with these stories if it was just an author writing gay yaoi stories, as he can write about any fetish he wants. Whatever floats your boat, as they say.

The problem I have with these stories is that he has taken scenes from my stories, and is using all these crack couples I have in my stories, then implemented them into his story, as if they were a common part of the actual Naruto canon story. He's basically writing his fan fiction stories, based on scenes from my stories, instead of the original canon story.

He is often using the visit to the “Yamanaka's Summer home”, which is something that happens in my original iteration of this story “A Different Take on Naruto” and “Sarutobi and Uzumaki”. Anyway, I don't care if these stories stay up, and he can keep writing them as far as I am concerned. The reason why I am mentioning it, is because I want to make it perfectly clear that I have nothing to do with these stories. They are not written by me and Asuma is not going to take anything up the arse in this story.

3: Kurenai intends to start a fake relationship with Asuma, similar to how Tsunade started a fake relationship with Kato Dan in the past, to keep their true love interests a secret from others.

Authors Note: When it comes to links showing outfits that the characters are wearing, such as Kurenai's red dress, would you prefer to see them at the end of the chapter as a footnote, or in the middle of chapter such as in this chapter. I put the link there since I thought it would be tedious for you to have to scroll all the way down just to click/copy paste the link. Either way, I'm curious to know your opinions on it.

This chapter contained a few hints on some of the future couples of this story. The next chapter is going to give you even more hints, hopefully. The next chapter is also going to introduce a few more of the characters who will have something of a main character role in this story. Hinata and Sakura might appear again in the next chapter, for example. If you have any questions, feel free to leave a comment or a review. Same goes if you want to tell me your thoughts on the chapter! Both positive and negative critique is welcome as well, as long as it's constructive.

Chapter Text

Chapter 5 – The Prank War Ends

Naruto woke up early the morning after his birthday party. He left his room, without waking up Konohamaru who was still asleep on a futon on the floor, before heading into one of the upstairs bathrooms. Even though he and Konohamaru had been terrorized the whole night, getting woken up multiple times due to being the victims of one of Kushina's pranks, Naruto felt rested and refreshed. He really didn't need that many hours of sleep each night to feel well rested. That was another positive quirk of being an Uzumaki. Even though he would be just fine with just a few hours of sleep, he is still human and enjoys a long night of sleep just as much as anyone else. He just coped with going on a few hours of sleep better than most other people.

Naruto took a shower, while thinking about how he could get away from the house unnoticed. He wanted to escape his mother's wrath, as she would most likely still be angry about yesterday. The problem is that she is a full blooded Uzumaki, and she can cope with even less sleep than Naruto. She has likely already gotten up and started preparing breakfast, he thought. Naruto only saw one way to save himself from any further pranks. That was to offer up Konohamaru to her, as a peace offering, which would allow her to get her payback on him. It would only do Konohamaru good to get a few beatings or two, as that is the type of experiences which build character, Naruto thought.

Naruto also had something else on his mind, which also had to do with his mom. It had to do with something that made Kushina even angrier and upset than Konohamaru's pranks. Yesterday, Naruto had both seen and overheard Hiruzen give Kushina yet another invitation to have sex with him. This was actually the second time Naruto had seen that in less than a week. When he was younger, he never understood why Kushina was always furious with Hiruzen, or why the two of them would always chase Hiruzen down the street, back to his house, while throwing weapons and elemental techniques at him. Now he was starting to understand the reason why. It made him wonder, had that old pervert been doing that for all these years? And if that is the case, why haven't his father done anything about it?

Kushina wasn't the only one he had seen Hiruzen bother last night. Naruto even saw him go after Anko, asking her to have sex with him as well, which ended up with Anko chasing Hiruzen around the house, using summoned snakes as her weapons. Butao and Yoshino also seemed upset when Hiruzen talked to them, making Naruto think that he had asked them the same thing. Naruto doesn't know for sure, but he intends to figure out what is going on.

Meanwhile, downstairs on the first floor, Kushina, who Naruto wanted to escape from, was preparing yet another prank. She had gotten up even earlier than him, and had been waiting for Naruto to wake up, knowing that he would try to escape her, by heading out early to train. She wasn't going to let him off that easily, though. He needs to finally understand who is the actual master of pranks, in this village. When Kushina heard the shower getting turned on, as the water started running, she grinned mischievously, before she started preparing for her prank.

About ten minutes later, as Naruto was stepping out of the shower, Kushina opened the door the bathroom to take him by surprise. What she had not expected, was the she would be the one taken by complete surprise instead. Kushina had thought he would be drying himself up with a towel, meaning that his body would be at least partially covered. She was wrong about that, as Naruto was currently admiring his semi hard on. He had gotten that hard on due to thinking about Anko during the shower, remembering some of the times that she has teased him in the most suggestive of ways.

As soon as she had opened the door, her eyes was met by a very naked Naruto, who looked a lot different compared to the last time she had seen him completely naked. A certain part of him had grown the most, as Kushina's eyes was stuck on the thing in between Naruto's legs. To her, it looked almost like a third leg. Naruto had not really paid attention to her, until he heard her gasp. When he realized that his mom was standing at the doorway, seeing him completely naked, he did his best to cover as much of his unusually large penis. (1).

“Mom!?” Naruto said in a whiny tone, as he tried to cross his legs “Get out, dattebayo!” he yelled, comically.

“W-what?” Kushina stuttered, her cheeks had gotten redder than her hair. She didn't move as she was seemingly standing frozen at the door, staring at him. She bit her lip, while her eyes were glued to his large tool. “I didn't know they could get that big..” Kushina thought as she stared at it in awe.

“Get out!” Naruto yelled, before turning around “Can't you see that I'm naked?”.

Kushina snapped out of it when she heard that, as she hurriedly got out of the bathroom, bringing her bucket of ice cubes and sticky and gooey kitchen ingredients with her. She had forgotten about her prank after what she had just seen. “Lock the door next time, dattebane!” Kushina yelled, before rushing down the stairs, while being completely red faced. She went back to the kitchen, then sat down at the kitchen table.

She couldn't get the image of her son's dick out of her mind. She had never really paid much attention to her husband's penis, but she always thought it was normal in size, nothing odd or special about it. She didn't know that Minato was actually considered to be big, compared to most others, when it came to the actual length of it. Thickness wise, Minato's was very average, though. She couldn't help but wonder, is it Minato who is small, or is Naruto just very very big? She also couldn't help but think about what it would be like to have Naruto's thing all for herself. That was the first time in her life, that she had incestuous thoughts about Naruto, but it was far from the last time.

Naruto joined her at the kitchen a few minutes later. He found Kushina sitting at the kitchen table, blushing slightly as she appeared to be lost in her own thoughts. When Naruto entered the kitchen, she turned to look at him. First she stared into his eyes, then her eyes went further down as she glanced at his crotch, before she looked into his eyes again “G-Good morning” Kushina stuttered out uncharacteristically. "Where is he hiding that thing under his pants? He looks completely normal with clothes on" Kushina thought.

Naruto frowned, wondering if she had just stared at his groin again for just a second. He decided not to mention it, thinking it would just get weird. If he never mentioned anything about her walking in on him in the bathroom, she would probably forget about it. Or at least not bring up what she saw, which Naruto figured is the reason for her odd behavior. That would be Naruto's abnormally large penis. She had not seen him naked since the days when he was still a little kid. The current size of it must have shocked her. Even Naruto was a bit weirded out with how big it got at first. But since he had bathed with Minato and Jiraiya at hot springs and such, his whole life, he was at least used to seeing bigger than normal ones. Jiraiya always assured him that there was nothing weird about it as well, while Minato seemed to be annoyed with it having grown that much. Almost as if he was jealous of him, or felt inferior in a silly way. That greatly amused the young Uzumaki.

"Good morning, mom" Naruto said in a casual tone, as he walked up to the kitchen table. He grabbed two sandwiches that Kushina had prepared for him, then said "I'm gonna head out to train for a while". Naruto then began heading out of the kitchen, as Kushina asked "What about Konohamaru-kun, shouldn't you take him with you?".

Naruto showed her a toothy mischievous grin "I am leaving him here, as a peace offering to you, dattebayo!", he said, before rushing out of the house, hearing Kushina's evil cackles coming from the kitchen. She didn't have any complaints about that.

Instead of going to his usual training spot to train, Naruto headed down south of his backyard to get to Jiraiya's house instead. When he got there, he jumped through the open window of Jiraiya's bedroom, landing next to Jiraiya's bed.

"Ero-sennin!" Naruto yelled at the top of his lungs "It's morning, time to wake up, dattebayo!!" he yelled even louder.

"Fuck off" Jiraiya said as he rolled over to face away from Naruto, then covered his head with his pillow "Get out of my house, you damn brat!".

"I need gear, I'm going to war" Naruto said without any further explanations.

"I don't care, do you know how early it is!?" Jiraiya barked at him, before throwing his pillow at him "Who are you fighting this time? Minato again?".

Naruto shook his head "No, I'm gonna go beat up that old pervert, old man Hiruzen" he said with an angry frown.

"Oh?" Jiraiya said in amusement "How can I help?" he offered. If Naruto wanted to go mess with that disgrace of all perverts, then Jiraiya had no objections. He had often wanted to kick his ass himself, due to the way he invites Kushina, Tsunade and other women, to have sex with him.

"Get me everything I need to fight him. I am going to defeat him, and make him apologize to my mom and Anko-chan" Naruto said, gritting his teeth in anger "He did it again, at the party yesterday".

"I saw" Jiraiya said with a sigh "He bothered all the women at the party yesterday, not just Anko and your mom".

"Then you have no objections to me going over there to kick his old ass?" Naruto asked.

Jiraiya got up, stretching his arms above his head, while yawning "No, brat. I will get you everything you need" he said, before he and Naruto headed out of Jiraiya's bedroom, to the small hallway of his house. Jiraiya, who was still in his pajamas, then lead Naruto to a small storage room, where he got Naruto everything he thought he would need. Naruto was now armed with every single ninja tool you could imagine, and he was wearing an old fashioned armor, which Konoha ninja used during the second great ninja war.

"Keep your legs moving, use his old age to your advantage. If you tire him out, you might have a decent shot at winning" Jiraiya said with a chuckle. The two of them had moved outside now, as Naruto was ready to leave.

Naruto nodded "I will not fail, Ero-sennin. He has got it coming for asking my mom and Anko-chan such things for so long..".

"Indeed" Jiraiya said with a nod "I'm surprised no one has tried to kick his ass before now. I would have already done so, if Minato didn't give me strict orders not to start a fight with Sarutobi-sensei in the middle of the village, fearing for the safety of the villagers".

“Well, he is going to get it today. I'll be off now, Ero-sennin!” Naruto said with a salute.

“Make me proud, brat” Jiraiya said with a chuckle, before Naruto disappeared using a teleportation technique. He arrived outside the Sarutobi clan compound, a few minutes later. After knocking on the door to Konohamaru and Hiruzen's home, Hiruzen opened it a few seconds later. Hiruzen glanced at Naruto with a raised eyebrow, then chuckled as he said “Are you going out to fight in a war or something, brat?”.

Naruto nodded “If it comes to that” he said in a serious tone. He was serious about wanting to beat Hiruzen up. At the very least, he is not going to leave this place until he has made sure that Hiruzen stops asking his mom to have sex with him. He is so tired of it. Especially since his mom is the last person who would do something like that when she is already married. Some other married women in this village who are less loyal and less prudish might, but not her. She is probably the last person in Konoha who would accept a random sex invitation like that.

It's enough that she already has a bunch of perverted men leering at her wherever she goes, even though she never gives them a reason to do so. She always dresses very conservatively, such as with her usual green housewife dress. She is such a gentle soul in Naruto's mind, and she doesn't deserve having perverts like Hiruzen after her every time he gets a chance. Naruto is also very protective of his mom. He usually beats up those perverts who leer at her when she just walks down a road in the village or something.

Hiruzen couldn't help but continue to chuckle, as he stared at Naruto in amusement “Are you here to see Konohamaru?” he asked, since Naruto usually only visited them in order to see Konohamaru, or to prank Hiruzen.

“Did he already get back home?” Naruto asked.

Hiruzen nodded “Yes, he is resting on the couch. He just came back home from your place. He looked like he had been beaten black and blue”.

Naruto shivered slightly when he heard that, hoping that his mom at least held back on Konohamaru a little bit. "He probably deserved it" Naruto said.

Hiruzen nodded again "I have no doubts about that" he said, knowing that Konohamaru often deserved any beating he got. The same goes for Naruto. The two of them are really out of contorl.

Naruto then stepped inside, heading into Hiruzen's living room, where he found Konohamaru laying on his back in the couch.

"Stupid hag! I'm gonna get you back for this, kore!" Konohamaru whined, holding his forehead where he had a large bump.

"That's the spirit, Kon!" Naruto said with a grin, as he made his presence known "What did she do to you this time?".

Konohamaru pouted "She whooped my ass, boss!" he said hanging his head "But, I kinda deserved it, I guess..".

"You probably did" Naruto said a matter of factually, while nodding.

As if forgetting about his pain, Konohamaru jumped up on his feet, smiling at his big brother and leader figure “Hey, boss! Aren't you going out to train, kore?”

That was the last Hiruzen heard of their conversation since it seemed like Naruto was waiting for him to leave before talking again. Hiruzen knew what that meant. He was here to mess with him again. Naruto waited until Hiruzen was outside, before he leaned down and whispered to Konohamaru “I'm gonna kick that old man's ass. I need your help with something..”.

Konohamaru grinned "You can count on me, boss!" he said eagerly. He had wanted to beat up his grandpa for a long time, mainly due to him also not being a big fan of how he asks women to have sex with him all the time. Then there is also the fact that Hiruzen is a former hokage, which makes him even more of a worthy opponent, and someone Konohamaru wants to surpass.

Naruto then whispered to Konohamaru what he needed to do in order to help Naruto. A minute later, Konohamaru had made his way outside to the backyard. He went over to where Hiruzen sat, smoking his pipe. A few seconds later, Hiruzen started yelling, after Konohamaru had smacked the pipe away from his hands “What's wrong with you brat? Do you want me to punch your head in!?" Hiruzen yelled in anger.

"Fuck you, old perv!" Konohamaru yelled back, giving him the finger.

Naruto, who had placed a certain seal on Konohamaru when he walked up to whisper to him earlier, used his fathers signature technique, “The Flying Thunder God Technique”, to teleport himself out to them. In a flash of yellow, Naruto appeared and kicked Hiruzen in the head. Shocking Konohamaru who had not even been able to see him move. Hiruzen didn't know that Naruto was capable of using that technique, not knowing that Naruto had learned it during the years that he trained with Minato. Konohamaru's only role during this, was to be a distraction for Hiruzen, which might allow Naruto to catch Hiruzen off guard.

Hiruzen held his cheek where Naruto had kicked him “Naruto!” he said in angry tone “That's too much for a prank, don't you think?”

“Get out of here, Kon. Things are about to get wild!” Naruto said with a wide evil grin, while he channeled a rasengan in his right hand.

Konohamaru saluted him “Roger, boss!” he said, before taking cover inside the house. He would observe their battle/spar through the windows. He did not want to be around since his grandpa seemed really angry and Naruto was acting kind of scary as well.

Hiruzen got up “First that technique and now the rasengan. Minato sure has taught you some dangerous techniques, Naruto” he said in a rather angry tone. Even though he sounded angry, he was actually more impressed rather than angry. He actually couldn't believe it. He finished his training with Minato over four years ago. Since then he has been training with Kushina and Jiraiya. Just what else have they taught him? Naruto may very well become the strongest ninja this village has ever seen, if he keeps getting stronger.

“My mom and Ero-sennin taught me a few things as well. I plan to use all of them to kick your ass today, old man” Naruto spoke confidently, staring down the former hokage.

With raised eyebrows, Hiruzen said “And what reason do you have to attack an old man like myself?” in a rather fake innocent tone. He had a pretty good idea why Naruto was here and why he was angry with him.

A shadow clone appeared behind Hiruzen, grabbing him from behind as to keep him place. The real one yelled “I want you to stop bothering my mom and Anko-chan with your disgusting sex invitations!”.

“Bingo” Hiruzen thought. His assumptions were right once again. Also, he couldn't help but think that Naruto's shadow clone technique usage is also really impressive. A lesser ninja than himself would have more trouble to get away from this position, especially since the real Naruto is threatening him with a rasengan.

“Okay” Hiruzen said with a chuckle. He actually meant it as well. Minato had never told Hiruzen to stop asking Kushina for sex. He was probably worried it would hurt their friendship, which it wouldn't. Hiruzen respected what Naruto just did and it makes him look more like the man of that household, than Minato is.

Naruto almost did a spit take “Okay?” he asked in a confused tone. He had expected more of a fight from the old pervert, who had been bothering them for years about that.

“Okay, I'll stop” Hiruzen said with another chuckle.

“Really, just like that? I don't have to beat you half to death?” Naruto asked in a confused tone, with his head tilted.

Hiruzen shook his head “It's not like anyone else ever had the balls to tell me to stop, except the women in question of course. But they might just be playing hard to get, you never know with women” he ended with a hearty laugh. Some women really did only play hard to get. There has been plenty who has refused him at first, only to come see him later to give him what he wants. But Kushina, Anko and some of the other village beauties were not like them. They were simply just not interested.

Naruto dispelled his clone and canceled out the rasengan in his hand “So you won't bother my mom or Anko-chan anymore?”.

Hiruzen nodded calmly “Like I told you, I will stop, you have my word on that”.

“Good” Naruto said smiling “But if you don't keep your promise, I won't be asking questions next time. I'll come here with the intent to hurt you badly”.

Hiruzen laughed “Hahaha, I don't doubt you for a second, boy. You will probably succeed doing that as well with how strong you have gotten, and how old I'm getting..” Hiruzen ended his sentence with a sigh. If only he wasn't so damn old. It would have been fun to belong to this era, fighting wars together with Naruto. Maybe they could've truly made a difference then, to better this rotten world.

“If we have come to an understanding, then I will take my leave” Naruto said as he stepped towards the door.

Hiruzen held him back, by holding his shoulder with a very hard grip “Not so fast. While I will keep my word to you since I respect what you just did. I can't let you leave without showing you why I was the hokage and is not someone people normally threaten like that”

Naruto jumped back, further down the backyard and struck a fighting pose “I'm always ready for a fight, old man!”.

Hiruzen smiled at first, then his expression hardened before he with very impressive speed, jumped straight at Naruto

Hiruzen smiled at first, then his expression hardened before he with very impressive speed, jumped straight at Naruto. The two of them then started sparring, which was more of an actual fight than a spar. It was most fun Hiruzen had in years, if you don't count all the sex.

Three hours later, Naruto was laying on his back in the same backyard. He was holding his head that hurt so badly after all the hits to it. He had several open wounds, none of which cut very deep though. Next to him was Konohamaru, kicking Hiruzen who was also laying down, nursing all his wounds. The battle had ended in a draw after a very impressive and even fight. Although Hiruzen could've knocked Naruto out many times if he truly wanted to, but he enjoyed the fight far too much to do that. He wanted to see everything Naruto could, and he is pretty sure he got to see the most of it. Now he is even more sure that Naruto is the man that will change this world. Unlike the little brat, who is currently kicking him right now, while he lying down.

“Yeah, take that, hahaha!” Konohamaru exclaimed, kicking the side of his stomach “Stay down old man, kore!”

“Damnit you retarded brat, can't you see that I'm hurt here?” Hiruzen yelled out angrily in a rather comical fashion.

“Let him be, Kon” Naruto ordered, breathing hard which was very rare for him, considering his inhuman stamina.

“Yes, boss!” Konohamaru said with a salute before going over to Naruto. He sat down next to him “Are you okay boss? You're bleeding.” he said in a worried tone, looking over some of Naruto's wounds, none of which were serious.

“What about me?” Hiruzen muttered depressingly, nursing one of his bloody wounds.

Naruto sat up and said “Don't worry, wounds like these will heal in a few minutes”.

“Eh? It will take at least a few days, boss” Konohamaru said shaking his head “Maybe you have never gotten hurt before”.

“Of course I have gotten hurt. I spar against my parents and Ero-sennin regularly. I just heal faster than other people. Call it a trait of the Uzumaki clan” Naruto said.

Hiruzen got up, and walked passed them “That was a nice spar, well done, Naruto”.

Naruto frowned as he stared at him as he kept walking towards the house “Do we have an understanding then?” Naruto asked.

“I told you already, you have my word. But in return, please do come visit me more often. I found this fight to be amusing. I'd like to spar against you again once you have had a little more time to train. I haven't been this excited about a spar in years” Hiruzen said, as he grabbed his pipe and put it in his mouth. He grinned as he smoked his pipe, looking genuinely happy.

“You got a deal old man!” Naruto said with a grin of his own. He didn't mind putting that old man in his place every now and then, if that meant that he would stop bothering his mom.

Naruto then went back to his own backyard. He washed his bloodied clothes at Jiraiya's house since he didn't want to give Kushina a reason to worry. He then went back to training at his backyard, like usual. As for Hiruzen, he planned to keep his promise. He wouldn't bother Kushina and Anko any more, unless they for some strange reason changed their mind. He certainly wasn't going to say no to that.

A half an hour after Hiruzen and Naruto's spar, Hiruzen had taken a shower to get himself cleaned up. As soon as he got dressed again, he heard someone knocking on their front door. It would appear that both he and Konohamaru had visitors, as Uchiha Mikoto, Moegi and Udon were the ones that had been knocking. They obviously didn't come here together and just happened to arrive here at the same time. Konohamaru and his friends didn't bother to question Mikoto's visit, before running off to cause mayhem somewhere in the village. Not that Konohamaru had any reason to question it either, since he is used to having her around. She has always been visiting their home, after all. He still has no clue about Hiruzen and Mikoto's real relationship though.

When Mikoto saw some bruises on Hiruzen's moderately swollen cheeks, she chuckled “Did a husband of one of your lovers catch you?” she asked.

“Hah” Hiruzen exclaimed sarcastically “None of my current lovers are married. No these are the battle scars I received from a very enjoyable spar against my new favorite grandson, Uzumaki Naruto” Hiruzen said with a proud smile. Konohamaru is still his favorite, but Hiruzen was thinking that after Konohamaru had kicked him when he was down earlier, who can blame him for saying that today?

“Naruto-kun? When was he here?” Mikoto asked, her eyes going wide at the mention of her new favorite blond, as Naruto had taken that title from his father.

“He left about thirty minutes ago. You missed your chance to see your fantasy boy toy” Hiruzen said with a chuckle.

“That's a pity” Mikoto said with a giggle. She then paused for a few seconds as she stared at Hiruzen while biting her lips “Seems like you might need some healing after you took that beating from Konoha's most handsome stud”.

“I won the spar” Hiruzen said angrily, before his tone changed, as he smiled at her “What did you have in mind, Lady Uchiha?”.

“How does four hours of healing in your bed room sound, Lord Sarutobi?” Mikoto said in a sensual tone, while smiling sexily.

“Hehehe!” Hiruzen laughed in a rather childish way, before scooping Mikoto up, carrying her bridal style towards his bedroom. Mikoto wasted no time to put her arms around him, before giving him a long and passionate kiss.

Even though Hiruzen didn't have as many lovers nowadays, he still has, and always will have Mikoto, for as long as he is alive. He is also gunning for more lovers, he just has a harder time getting them, due to a combination of him getting older, and that he has gotten a lot pickier with the ones he asks to be his lovers. He only aims for the most beautiful and talented kunoichi these days.

For several months, what would be known as the “prank wars”, which was a war of pranks between Konohamaru and Naruto against Kushina, went on. Sometimes it would be Kushina going after the two of them, but most of the times it was either Naruto ordering Konohamaru to do something involving touching Kushina's butt, or lifting the skirt of her dress. Kushina always seemingly got angry, and chased Konohamaru down in order to give him either a beating, an intense tickling punishment, noogies or anything else she could think of as punishments. In reality she wasn't that angry. She just gave Konohamaru and Naruto what they wanted, by acting angry. The truth was, she was actually enjoying Konohamaru's “pranks”, and secretly hoped he would get a little bit more daring with his pranks. She did have other body parts than her butt, after all.

Konohamaru wasn't going to get more daring any time soon. He didn't do anything to Kushina unless Naruto or their shared friends, Moegi and Udon, were present to see it. If no one was there to witness the act, then there was no point in doing it, since he only did it in order to impress his boss. Even so, he would be lying if he said he wasn't enjoying every chance he got to feel up that beautiful red headed Goddess. This prank war played out every day during the months that had passed.

On a day in March, about half a year after Naruto's birthday party, the prank war between the two Uzumaki's and the young Sarutobi would come to an end. But earlier that morning, Naruto had a run with Kurenai out at his training spot. That wasn't something unusual at this point, since Kurenai had spent almost every day out there, either reading, watching Naruto train, or very rarely, joining in to train with him. Even though they don't really talk much about personal things, and wouldn't exactly call each other close friends yet, they have gotten quite familiar and comfortable around one another by now. Naruto's run in with Kurenai this morning was a bit different to the other times. That's because she looked very upset when he found her out at his training spot, waiting for him.

“Hey” Naruto greeted her.

“Hi, Naruto-kun” Kurenai said, smiling warmly at Naruto for a second, before going back to pouting.

“Is something wrong? Or are you just on your period or something?” Naruto asked with a raised eyebrow.

Kurenai snorted at that “No, I'm upset with a jounin by the name of Hatake Kakashi. Your father assigned him to be in charge of my jounin exams”.

Naruto then saw her wipe away a tear from her cheek before she continued “He failed me, and told me I don't have what it takes to be a jounin.”.

Naruto frowned when he heard that, he had never been a big fan of Hatake Kakashi. That man used to be a student of Naruto's father, along with two other people, Obito and Rin. Obito and Rin died at a young age, both while out on missions during war times. Naruto never learned how they died other than that. His parents never told him the details, especially not when it came to Rin, since what happened to her is a very sad, dark and a very depressing story.

What Naruto didn't like about Kakashi was how he wallowed in self pity, living in the past rather than looking to better the future. He was also kind of a jackass, always expecting his family to help him out and ask for favors the few times he needed it, but he didn't even show up to their birthday parties and things like that. Naruto can't even remember the last time Kakashi visited them, it must have been more than five years ago by now.

“He had me climb steep mountains without using chakra or my feet, for over twenty four hours. I can't do that, that is not the kind of ninja I am.” Kurenai continued as Naruto sighed “Yes, you fight using genjutsu, right?”.

Kurenai nodded “And my hand to hand combat and my weapon usage is not bad either. My lack of stamina would only really affect me if I fought someone for hours, but every single technique I know, genjutsu, hand to hand combat, weaponry, all of it, is designed to take out my opponent fast, rather than dragging out the fight”

Naruto frowned as he sat down in front of her “Do you want me to talk to Kakashi-san? Maybe he can give you a second chance?”

Kurenai shook her head “It's okay, it's not all bad. Hokage-sama, your father, disagrees with him. He told me he wants me to become a jounin since he thinks I would become a great jounin teacher.”.

Naruto breathed out in relief “Good, because I hate Kakashi-san, I would like to avoid him to the best of my ability”.

Kurenai chuckled “You're not the only one who thinks that” Kurenai said which had both of them grin.

“Did dad pass you then?” Naruto asked.

Kurenai shook her head again “No, not yet. He is giving me a second chance though. I'm going to be in charge of a team of three jounin. I will lead them for several high ranked missions. If I do a good enough job, he is going to make me a jounin” she said, still looking a bit sad.

“That's great, isn't it?” Naruto said being unsure due to how dejected she looked.

“It is, but that would mean that I could be out of the village for several months” Kurenai said while pouting. She didn't want to be away from Naruto for that long, especially not now when she had just started setting her “evil plan”, to make him hers, in motion.

Naruto was a bit confused on why she seemed unhappy about that. Shouldn't she instead be happy that his dad gave her another chance?

“I don't understand, isn't that what being a ninja is about? To go on thrilling and interesting highr anking missions like that and fight strong opponents? I would love to do something like that, I can't wait to graduate” Naruto said with a confident smirk.

“Yes, but it would mean that I won't be able to see you” Kurenai said, then her eyes widened as she realized what she had just said.

“Huh?” Naruto uttered, tilting his head in confusion.

“And Anko-chan and Asuma-san” a flushed Kurenai added quickly, in a way to recover her little slip“You, since I think we have become such good friends lately” she added with a warm smile.

Naruto scratched the back of his head, wondering what she meant by good friends. Sure she had been out here a lot, but it wasn't like they were hanging out other than that. He didn't want to be rude so he just ignored it, in favor of responding with “Oh yeah, I forgot about Asuma-san. The two of you have been together for like a year now right?”.

Kurenai chuckled “He is easy to overlook, isn't he?” she said, smiling for the first time this morning. She didn't want to answer the question since she didn't want to talk about Asuma at all when she is with Naruto.

Naruto tilted his head in confusion again, not knowing what to respond to that. Kurenai had to force herself not to squeal in delight when he did that. She thought he was so damn cute.

Kurenai cleared her throat “Yes, it's been a little over a year now”.

Naruto smiled “I'm happy for you guys, are you getting married soon?” he said, even though he was actually a bit jealous of the bearded Sarutobi. Then again, he didn't think he would have a chance with a jounin babe like Kurenai anyway, since he still very much oblivious about his popularity.

Kurenai could barely keep herself from frowning when she heard that, she tried really hard but that just gained her a tic mark on her forehead, making her look even more upset. With a very forced smile, she said “Not any time soon, no” she spoke through gritted teeth.

“Okay..” Naruto didn't know what else to say, considering how angry she sounded. She was acting a bit strange today. He was even more confused by her actions when she moved over to him and put her arms around him, hugging him tightly. He didn't mind it one bit though.

“I'm leaving today, in about an hour. I don't know when I will be back” She said, smiling to herself as she rested her head on Naruto's shoulder.

“I see, good luck on your mission, Kurenai-san” Naruto said, awkwardly hugging her back. He wasn't nervous or embarrassed at all about hugging Kurenai, which might be a normal reaction to your crush hugging you. He was just wondering, since when did they start hugging?

After a minute of the two of them hugging, well mostly Kurenai hugging Naruto, Naruto said “Uh, Kurenai-san?” while sweat dropping.

“I might be gone for months, please let me hold you a little longer” Kurenai whispered. She wouldn't let go just yet as she didn't want this moment to end. She didn't want to leave Konoha for all those missions. Couldn't she at least be allowed to bring him with her? She thought with a sad sigh. Kurenai let go of him, but she was still sitting next to him. She then leaned over and gave him a quick peck on the cheek.

She then got up. “That's for being such an awesome friend” Kurenai said with an eye wink, then walked off with an extra sway in her hip, knowing that Naruto was staring at her, most likely with a shocked expression. She was right about that as Naruto was wondering “What the hell is up with her?” and “Damn, she is getting sexier every time I see her” as he checked her out.

That morning, at the same time as Naruto had his run in with Kurenai, one Hyuuga Hinata was eating breakfast together with her father, her sister and a guest. That guest is a man by the name of Nagi, who has become an Hyuuga elder in recent years. This is the very same Nagi who Hiruzen has warned both Hiashi and the former clan leader, Neji, about. He has a reputation of being a rapist, who targets both enemy kunoichi and even his own team members. Nothing has been proven yet, but Hiruzen is sure that there is some truth to those rumors. Hiashi promoted him, because he has been very loyal and helpful to him after Hitomi passed away. He didn't think there was any truth to those rumors at all.

As for Hinata, she has never heard about those rumors, and she barely knows the man. All she knows about him is that he is a part of the main branch of the Hyuuga clan, and that he keeps looking at her in a way that makes her very uncomfortable. She figured he is just a strange old man. After breakfast, she would learn that he is not just a strange old man. He is also a shameless and disgusting old man. Hiashi had asked Hinata to escort Nagi out to the main street of the Hyuuga clan compound. As soon as they got out of the front door of Hinata's house, and had closed the door behind them, Nagi leaned down and whispered something to Hinata, that made her shiver and cry due to fear.

“Don't worry Hinata-chan, things are going to change soon. Me and my friends are going to take control of our clan some day. When that happens you will become my plaything, who I will let all my friends play with as well” he ended, as a whimpering Hinata was completely mute, almost shaking in fear. Then Nagi extended his tongue, dragging the tip against her cheek, licking it. Hinata was frozen in fear, as he licked her cheek while chuckling perversely. It wasn't until he put one of his hands on her butt, grabbing one ass cheek hard, letting his fingers really dig into the soft flesh of her round and tight little butt. That was the moment when Hinata realized that she had to get it together. She had to get away from there.

She did what any terrified girl would do in that situation, as she let out an ear piercing shreak of pure fear, before rushing back into her home. Meanwhile, Nagi just continued down the road, laughing, not at all worried about her telling Hiashi. Because that is exactly what Hinata did afterwards, as she ran inside to find her father. While crying and shaking, she told him what happened. Hinata really hoped that her father would hear her out. She really hoped that he would return to being the old Hiashi, who wouldn't let anyone treat his family that way. (2).

Sadly, she wasn't surprised at hearing Hiashi's response, as he just shook his head at her and said “Enough of that nonsense, Hinata. Nagi-san is one of my most important allies in this power struggle of our clan against my father. If Nagi-san frightens you, then become stronger so that you can defend yourself” Hiashi paused as he turned around, walking away from her “You're a disappointment, Hinata. Your mother would be so ashamed of you if she saw you like this”.

Hinata's tears continued to fall as she stared at her father in complete disbelief, sniffling. She didn't find any words to utter. She just felt so hopeless and worthless. It's because of how her father treats her, that a lot of other members of the Hyuuga clan has started to treat Hinata in a similar fashion. It's almost as if she is getting bullied by both adults and people close to her age, who thinks it's okay to belittle her just, just because Hiashi does so. It's because of this, that Hinata truly enjoys every single day that she gets to spend at one of her friends homes, especially when it is the home of her crush, Naruto. That's not only because she gets to be with her friends and enjoy herself, it's also due to her home situation. Her home, or more specifically, the Hyuuga clan compound, has become her least favorite place in Konoha.

A lot of it has to do with her father, who had not returned to the funny harem chasing goof ball that he used to be. Instead he just got more and more stuck up and down right rude. Especially towards Hinata. Her father almost treats her as if she is a stranger, who is not apart of their family. He barely talks to her, unless it is to belittle her few accomplishments or tell her that she is no good. "She isn't living up to the expectations of what it means to be a Hyuuga" is a statement she hears over and over again from her father when he is talking about her to other Hyuuga men. When her mother died four years ago, due to an illness, Hinata could have never imagined that her kind, loving and funny father, would turn into the man that he is today.

He seem to have lost most of his friends, or at least they don't visit the Hyuuga compound anymore. He is also always fighting with the elders of the Hyuuga clan, who she suspects has started to plot against Hiashi. Hinata was told today by one of the elders, Nagi, who is an evil and twisted old man, that her father is not going to be the head of the clan forever. It wasn't in a kind way that he told her that, it was more of a threat. Because his very next sentence was “Me and my friends are going to take control of our clan some day. When that happens you will become my plaything, and I will pass you around to all my friends as well” while laughing, menacingly at her. She then walked down the road, heading into the center of the Hyuuga clan compound, as if nothing had happened. That happened this morning, outside Hinata's front door, after that man had eaten breakfast with them at their home. The old Hiashi would never invite a man such as Nagi inside his home, due to the information and rumors about him, which Hiruzen has told him about many times.

It's due to all of this, that she wasn't surprised by Hiashi's response. She was just saddened by it. She couldn't help but think that his remark about that Hitomi would have been disappointed in her, if she saw her like this, couldn't be more wrong. It's more likely that her mother would have been very disappointed in him instead. But she didn't have the courage to voice her thoughts. The less could be said about her tomboy sister, though.

“Mom would be ashamed of you if she saw you like this, you fuck head!” Hinata heard her sister yell out, standing in the hall way behind Hinata, having walked in just when Hiashi started belitting Hinata. She had not heard Hinata's retelling of the events outside the front door with Nagi.

Hinata's tears continued to fall as she stared at her father in complete disbelief, sniffling. She didn't find any words to utter. She just felt so hopeless. Hiashi's eyes turned dark as he glared at his younger daughter “You get your ass inside that dojo now. It seems I need to teach you again about manners!”.

“H-Hanabi, please a-apologize to Lord f-father” Hinata said in a worried tone, as she didn't want her one year younger sister to get into trouble due to her.

“Fuck no! He should be the one apologizing!” Hanabi yelled, glaring at her father “Eat a dick, dad!” she added, while showing him the middle finger.

Hiashi was so enraged that he was about to do something that he would regret, as he stomped over to Hanabi, with the intent of giving her a hard slap. Before he reached the hall way, a voice coming from the front door, had him halt.

“Keep your tone down, will ya, scoundrel? It's early in the morning” Hiashi's father, Neji said, as he made his way towards Hanabi and Hinata, walking slowly. The man is the same age as Hiruzen, but he is far from as energetic as the former hokage still is. Neji is currently suffering from an incurable illness, and doesn't have much longer to live. That is something that he has kept a secret from everyone, except his wife, Hanabi. (3).

“Father?” Hiashi questioned, in a not friendly tone “What are you doing in my home?!” he demanded.

“Oh, I'm just here to ask you about a recent visitor to your home. As I was taking my morning stroll earlier, I saw Nagi coming down the road, coming from your house..” Neji said while frowning.

“Yes, Nagi-san joined us for breakfast this morning. I don't see how that is any of your business” Hiashi responded.

“Have you gone completely insane, son?” Neji asked, while Hinata and Hanabi took their chance to escape their father's anger, by fleeing to Hinata's room. As they closed the door, they heard their grandfather yell out “Have I not warned you about him? Have Hiruzen-dono not warned you about him!?”.

Hanabi and Hinata didn't hear more than that, because they snuck out of Hinata's window, with the intent of heading over to the Uchiha clan, to spend the day there with Sara and Satsuki. That was how Hinata spent her morning on that day. Sadly for her, Nagi's harassment was not just a one time thing. It was something she would have to get used to in the future.

Around the same time that Hinata fled to the Uchiha's, to get away from her father for a while, Konohamaru arrived in Naruto's backyard, to train with him for a few hours. It had actually been a while since he last trained with Konohamaru, or spent a full day with him. That's due to Naruto prefering to be alone out here with Kurenai, as often as he can.

He is also starting to get a bit annoyed with the two other little shits, who Konohamaru brings with him anywhere he goes. Moegi is annoying because she acts like every other girl. She started crushing on him as soon as she first laid eyes on him. Although Moegi is nowhere near as annoying to Naruto, as Konohamaru's other friend is.

Udon is the one who gets on Naruto's nerves the most. Not because he says or does anything to Naruto personally, it's due to him being completely obsessed with large breasts. He can't keep himself from blatantly staring at any busty woman's chest, whenever one of those are around. That includes his mom, Anko, Kurenai and anyone else who has a sizable bust. It's the fact that Udon stares at his mom like that, that has made Naruto, who is so very overprotective of his mom, very annoyed with Udon. Even so, he still kinda considered them both to be his underlings as well. Moegi is something of a little sister to him even, while he doesn't have much over for Udon. Udon will likely remain at underling status for a long time.

A few hours after Konohamaru arrived to train with Naruto, around lunch time, Naruto ordered his underling to go back to his home in order to bring them both lunch. Knowing his mom, she was most likely already working on lunches for the two of them. Just like expected, Konohamaru found her in the kitchen preparing lunches for them.

While Kushina prepared sandwiches for him and Naruto, a grinning Konohamaru snuck up on her like many times before. He did so even though neither Naruto, Moegi or Udon were present as witnesses. He just couldn't help himself this time, she just looked so inviting. That was because Kushina, who is wearing her blue pants, orange shirt and gray apron outfit today, had bent over and leaned down, to pick up something from a cabin under the sink. She didn't need anything from there though, this was her actually inviting his pranks. She wants him to go for it, when the others aren't around. When she sensed him approach her, she smiled to herself, before standing up straight. She then felt both Konohamaru's hands on top of her ass, and this time, instead of just pinching her butt or lightly spanking it, he really grabbed it, lightly groping her ass cheeks.

To Konohamaru's surprise, Kushina didn't do anything for the first few seconds. She just let him feel her up. Normally he would be running away with her chasing him as soon as he touched her, until she eventually caught up and opened a can of whoop-ass. Instead she just bit her lip and moaned quietly, without saying a word.

It was maybe thirty seconds after he started feeling her up, that Kushina turned her head and stared at him with the sexiest smile he had ever seen in his life, giggling as she did so. With a wide grin, Konohamaru let his perverted nature take over as he grabbed her ass cheeks with a firmer grip as he let his fingers dig into her butt cheeks. Kushina returned to preparing the sandwiches, as she let Konohamaru feel her up for another thirty seconds. What Konohamaru said after that, snapped Kushina back to reality, as she realized what she was actually doing.

“You like that, kore?” He said in an excited tone, a dumb perverted smile adoring his face.

“Okay that's enough, you pervert!” Kushina snapped, freeing herself from his hands as she turned around to face him. She then hastily grabbed Konohamaru by his blue scarf with her left hand, while her right hand was clenched into a fist, hovering threateningly in front of his face.

“Shit!” Konohamaru screamed, knowing he was in for a beating. Still, he couldn't help but think that it was worth it. But why had she not stopped it earlier? In an attempt to escape the beating he would eventually receive, He tried to pull himself backwards, but he couldn't move since Kushina had a firm grip on his scarf, and she overpowered him and easily keept him in place. With all of his might he pulled backwards, causing himself and a shocked Kushina, who couldn't believe his strength, to both fall down on the ground. Konohamaru fell backwards while Kushina fell on top of him.

They landed with Kushina laying on top of him, Konohamaru's hands were around her while their faces were close enough for their noses to touch. It was at this moment that everything changed as they stared into each others eyes, for what felt like minutes but in reality was just a few seconds. Konohamaru could no longer deny to himself tha the was crushing badly on Naruto's mom. As for Kushina? Well, she really liked being where she currently was, laying on top of Konohamaru. It didn't last long though, as it ended with both of them getting up, blushing furiously as both of them had turned completely red.

“I'm sorry Naruto's mom, really” Konohamaru stuttered, which was very unusual for the otherwise very confident Sarutobi. He also choose to use the less rude nickname that he had for the Uzumaki woman. Calling her old hag, probably wasn't going to help him much in this situation, after all.

“It's okay-ttebane!” A completely red faced Kushina said, not being able to look at him “T-The sandwiches will be r-ready in a minute..” she stuttered, which in turn was unusual for her as well.

“O-okay” Konohamaru said as he sat down, waiting for her to finish the sandwiches that he and Naruto would later share. They didn't say another word to each other after that and it only took a minute for Konohamaru to be out of the house and be on his way to Naruto's training spot. Kushina had to sit down on the couch to collect herself after that. Her heartbeat had raised and she was still blushing, while remembering what had happened. She couldn't help but think, why did he wait so long to “prank” her, when no one else was around? Because she wouldn't mind if they did more of that. It's pretty obvious that Kushina has romantic feelings for Konohamaru, she is in love with him even. She hasn't realized it yet, even though all the signs are there. She is still in complete denial about that fact, even though it is so obvious.

Konohamaru returned to Naruto's training spot, holding a basket filled with sandwiches and snacks. Naruto raised an eyebrow due to how weird he seemed to act. He looked like he was lost in thought, in his own little world, while blushing slightly. That was due to Konohamaru not being able to get what had just happened out of his mind. And damn, if she didn't have the best ass in the whole world. Even his favorite target in the academy, Sakura, couldn't compare to her. But Sakura was still Konohamaru's second choice, when it came to the best ass.

“Hey, stop acting weird” Naruto said as he grabbed the basket. Naruto sat down and began eating the sandwiches, while watching Konohamaru who just sat there, still seemingly out of it.

“Did something happen?” Naruto asked.

“No” Konohamaru said quickly, looking a bit nervous “Nothing happened, boss” he said in an awkward manner. He couldn't let him know what had just happened. Naruto would probably kill him if he found out. Konohamaru will just pretend that it never happened, and avoid Naruto's house as much as he can, to make sure that Kushina can't get the payback that he thinks she wants.

“Good” Naruto said with a raised eyebrow, he then handed Konohamaru a sandwich “Eat, you won't be able to train on an empty stomach”.

Konohamaru nodded as he accepted the sandwich and took a bite off it. As he ate, he once again appeared to get lost in his thoughts, while blushing slightly. He was thinking about Kushina's pretty eyes this time, as they had been really close after falling down on the ground, staring directly into each other's eyes. Naruto nursed his forehead in annoyance. “That little pervert must be thinking about doing something perverted to Sakura, I don't understand why he likes her so much” Naruto thought as he shook his head. Naruto's thoughts were interrupted by a very cheerful yell off “Hey Naruto-kun, look who is finally back!”

He turned around to see Anko coming towards them, looking directly at him, while smiling. Anko ran up to Naruto and sat next to him, leaning her head on his shoulder “Training with your annoying little friend?” she asked.

Naruto nodded “Yep”, his eyebrows twitching due to how fast Anko got over to him to start her daily teasing.

Konohamaru hissed at Anko “Get out of here, Anko-nee! No pesky girls are allowed here!”.

“What was that!?” Anko said in a threatening manner as she walked over to Konohamaru. Konohamaru gulped “I was joking, please don't hurt me, Anko-nee!”.

“How else will you learn!?” Anko yelled before she launched a couple of snake summons at him. They were completely harmless but Konohamaru didn't need to know that. Naruto laughed as he saw Anko and her snakes chase a screaming Konohamaru around. Happy to see that Konohamaru had returned to normal. While that was going, Kurenai sat down next to Naruto. She just sat there, watching them together with him, both chuckled at their antics. Those two always got in a fight somehow. After Anko gave Konohamaru the beating that Kushina likely should have given him, under normal circumstances, she ended up joing the two of them training for the rest of the day.

Footnootes:

1: Jiraiya, Naruto and Konohamaru are all three owners of unusually big penises. There aren't any other humans in this alternative Naruto universe who come even close. Check out the Dick-O-Meter again if you want to see how they differ from the others, and normal humans: https://mega.nz/file/R3AkwKyI#lP-FV_eXsyTJGwGFzDl6M8muP4XhvAOiSb-Z5p0H0pk 

 

2: I probably won't get very descriptive at the start whenever I write about an anything involving sexual abuse or along those lines, at the start. It's making me a bit uncomfortable to write about it. It's probably going to get worse later on though.

3: Here is a reminder that Hiashi's parents share the same names with Hanabi and Neji. It might be a bit confusing at times, if you don't keep that in mind. Hanabi and Neji are named after them.

Authors Note:

A rather “short” 10K word chapter this time. I believe the next chapter won't take as long for me to write. Hopefully you will get an update much sooner this time around. I added to some of the old scenes here, where you get to read more about the thoughts of certain characters, while the scenes happens. A lot has also changed when it comes to the Naruto and Kurenai scenes, compared to the old scenes in “Uzumaki and Yühi”. Things are progressing a lot slower in this story.

The next chapter is going to be a little bit different, unless I change my mind. It's going to focus solely on a character who has yet to be introduced. It's not an orginal character though, so don't worry about that. It's a rather popular Konoha kunoichi. Maybe you have a guess who will be in focus? Let me know your guesses in the comments/reviews.

* AFF currently does not allow uploads to the site. The chapter will be uploaded there as well once it's possible.

Chapter Text

Chapter 6 – Tenten

Things started to change for some people in Konoha the weeks following the latest series of events. Nagi would continue to verbally harass and threaten Hinata, every chance he got. He has yet to put his hands on her again, after that first time, though. For Hinata, who already hated being at home or even somewhere within the Hyuuga clan compound, it just became so much worse for her to be in their clan's compound. She isterrified of Nagi, and she always goes out of her way to try to avoid him, when walking through the compound. She will often peek out of her front door, to see if the roads are empty. She is also looking behind her back constantly, to make sure that he is not following her.

While Nagi does find some rare moments to keep harassing her, it's more common for Hinata to find her cousin, Neji, walking behind her those times that she is glancing behind her back. He doesn't greet her or anything, instead he just walks silently behind her, with his arms crossed, while either frowning or scowling. He'll often follow her until she has made her way out of the clan compound, into the main village, Or vice versa, as he will start following him once she enters the clan compound, heading back home. Even though Neji hasn't said anything to her, Hinata gets the feeling that he is looking out for her. Maybe her cousin has seen or overheard Nagi threaten her at some point? She wondered.

Another one who is feeling uncomfortable about going somewhere where he is used to going, is Konohamaru. After what happened with Kushina in the kitchen that day, he has been avoiding Naruto's house as if his life depends on it. Konohamaru doesn't think for one second that Kushina actually enjoyed what happened. He figures that she must have some ulterior motives to allow him to feel her up that much. He believes that she is setting him up for one huge prank, or maybe even a very harsh punishment. He didn't think anything else was possible, because to him, even the thought that the fourth hokage's wife, and his all mighty and great boss's mom, could be in love with him and enjoy what happened, sounds so damn unrealistic and unlikely, that it's almost laughable.

He doesn't think that is possible at all. Considering that he still has got that huge crush on her, he certainly wouldn't mind if that was the case. But then again, there is also the problem of who she is. Putting his hands on the hokage's wife, and Naruto's mom, like that, is something Konohamaru would never do, if Naruto had not ordered him to do it. He went too far that, and it made him feel a bit ashamed as well as being scared of any repercussions coming his way. That's why he avoids the Namikaze/Uzumaki home.

Konohamaru not visiting Naruto's home anymore, was something that had started affecting Kushina's mood. She didn't like it one bit. She wants Konohamaru to be over at their place all the time. She isn't angry about what happened at all, at most, she is maybe just a little bit embarrassed about it. Honestly, she wouldn't mind if they continued doing things like that, when no one else was around. Even though she knew she shouldn't be doing things like that with Konohamaru, or think about doing even more than that with him, she can't help herself. She finds it to be so right, and so thrilling and fun, at the same time. Even so, she still won't admit to herself that she has fallen for the younger Sarutobi.

Kushina's mood going sour is something that both Naruto and Minato has noticed. It was impossible not to, considering that the two of them would be the targets of her moody nagging and complaining. Both of them knows why she is upset as well. It was pretty damn obvious to them, since her mood started going sour a few days after not seeing Konohamaru at the house, and her constantly telling Naruto to “drag him over here”. Neither of them obviously doesn't know the real reason why she wants him around. They would never in their wildest dreams even suspect that Kushina could fall for Konohamaru like that. They just figured she missed her “extra son”, or something like that.

Other than his mother always being in a bad mood, Naruto has also started getting used to training without always having Kurenai around. She has been out on missions constantly, and hasn't even had time to get out to his training spot to say hello. Even Anko seems to be more busy than usual lately, as Naruto had not even got to see his beautiful “Anko-nee” in quite some time either. He misses Anko's teasing, and he misses Kurenai's sexy legs, and her beautiful eyes. He is getting a lot of training in now though, especially when Konohamaru and his two friends aren't bothering him all the time. Although, he still sees Konohamaru every Sunday, when they go out on “research missions”, with Jiraiya.

Minato has also noticed another change that seemed to happen rather suddenly. It involved another woman this time, one who is quite a bit younger than his beautiful wife. The change revolves around Ino, who has somehow managed to get even more suggestive with her flirting and teasing, than what had been before. What she did to Jiraiya, was nothing compared to what Minato had to endure. He wasn't complaining about it though. He secretly kinda enjoyed it, even though he would often just laugh off Ino's attempts to flirt at him, or play stupid in a way to not pretend that he is not understanding what she is doing.

The way she flirts with him now, is starting to remind him of how Anko used to flirt with him in the past. It is getting harder and harder for Minato not to respond to her flirting with some flirting of his own. Because he is starting to find her to be irresistible. She has truly grown into one hell of a bombshell, a stunning and beautiful young woman. It also doesn't help that he hasn't had sex with his wife, for over two years now..

Tenten

In early June that year, another person was in for a rather big change in her life. It had nothing to do with any romance, secret crushes or things like that. No, the person in for a big change, is none other than a young kunoichi by the name of Tenten. She has just graduated from the ninja academy, and is getting assigned to a new genin team today. She is finally going to be an actual ninja from today onward. That is something she has been looking forward to ever since she started attending the ninja academy. The only thing she will miss at school, is any chance to look at or interact with Naruto. Tenten, is just like every other girl, very infatuated with the young Uzumaki.

Tenten is the same age as Hyuuga Neji, as well as Mikoto's oldest daughter, Sara. They are all one year older than Naruto. Tenten has brown hair and brown eyes. She wears her hair in two Chinese-style buns on her head with short fringe-bangs framing her face. She often wears clothing which is also of Chinese-style. In this story, she starts out wearing her part 1 outfit. That consists of a pink blous-ish kind of shirt and dark green pants. (1).

Over the five years that Tenten has attended Konoha's ninja academy, she has made quite a lot of friends. She is familiar with Ino, Sakura and Hinata, with the first mentioned being the one who she gets along with the best, mainly because she is the most outgoing. Tenten and Sara are considered to be the “pretty” girls of their age group. They are also very popular with the boys in all classes, being the prettiest seniors. Even so, they are probably no match for that one year younger trio. Ino, Sakura and Hinata are very popular with everyone. Especially Ino and Sakura, who aren't the least bit shy, unlike Hinata. Popularity wise, Ino is probably the most popular girl in school, followed by Sakura, and then Sara. Hinata and Tenten would follow after that, tied at fourth place. If they were ranked by pure beauty, Tenten would probably be no match against Hinata though. She just has a more fun personality to most.

Tenten also knows Naruto, and would consider them to be friends at the very least. She has even attended a few of his birthday parties, in recent years. Then there is her best friend, who is none other than the kunoichi prodigy and her classmate, Uchiha Sara. It's not often that you would see either Tenten or Sara at the ninja academy, without the other being close by. They are just as good friends as Naruto and Konohamaru, or Ino, Sakura and Hinata.

Tenten's goal when she started attending the ninja academy, was to become the top student of her class, and graduate as the “Rookie of the year”. If that wasn't possible, then she wanted to at least graduated as the top kunoichi of her class. Unfortunately for Tenten, Sara made both of her goals kind of impossible. Sara is a ninja genius, who is only second to Naruto in the academy. Even Neji, the other person in their class who is above Tenten in strength and skills, doesn't stand a chance against Sara in a fair spar. Both the rookie of the year title, and the top kunoichi spot, did end up going to Sara.

Now even though Tenten couldn't reach her goals due to Sara being more skilled than her, she didn't hold any grudge against her best friend, or anything like that. Instead she is just happy to have her as a friend. Sara is not one to belittle others, or gloat about her accomplishments. She is actually very kind, and she is just like Ino, very outgoing. Sara is a bit different from her siblings and her mother. Mikoto, Sasuke and Satsuki are not the most outspoken and outgoing people. Mikoto may have been a bit of an exception at one point, back when she was an academy student. That was when she interacted with Minato, where she didn't show any shyness or restraint at all. She let everyone know that Minato was going to be hers.

Her personality, you could say, is a bit similar to how Mikoto acted back then, when approaching Minato. Since Sara is also a lot more outgoing than her mother, but just as obsessed with the one she likes, you can bet your ass that Naruto and her has had a few run ins in the ninja academy through out the years. In fact, Sara has even tried to seduce him, on multiple occasions. Unfortunately for her, she hasn't had any luck in doing so, just like most other girls. Mitarashi Anko is still the only exception, as she can pretty much get away with doing anything she wants with Naruto. If the girls in the academy knew what the two of them had done when alone together, they would all probably start placing curses on Anko, or at the very least, make her their biggest hate object.

Tenten is also very outgoing, although not as much as Ino and Sara. She also happens to be a bit of a “straight man”. A straight man is someone who tries to keep their composure while others acting strange or eccentric around them. She also very much likes to point out when they do so, by screaming out how ridiculous they are. Considering that there are quite a few odd personalities within Konoha, and especially at the ninja academy, she has had her work cut out for her, to say the least.

Now she is currently sitting in her old classroom, listening to her teacher read out the names which will be a part of the new genin teams. Sara was assigned a team first, as she would be a part of Team 5. She got a male Yamanaka and a female Sarutobi as her teammates, both of which Tenten are not very familiar with, even though they are her classmates. A jounin by the name of “Genma” was assigned as their jounin teacher.

Once her teacher reached team 10, Tenten would end up hearing her name be read out. She would be a part of team 10, together with Hyuuga Neji, and a male student by the name of “Rock Lee”. Their teacher would be a jounin called “Maito Gai”.

All Tenten knows about Lee, is that he is something of a special case, because he is unable to channel and use chakra. He fights solely using hand to hand combat. Another thing about Lee that sticks out, is the fact that he is the owner a set of ridiculously large eyebrows. They look almost like giant caterpillars on his face. Lee is also most likely the person who graduated with the lowest scores in their class, making him the “dead last”.

Tenten knows nothing about her jounin teacher though, other than thinking that his name was a bit absurd. Maito Gai? Is that supposed to be “Mighty Guy?” she thought with a sweat drop. As he entered their classroom, clad in a bright green spandex full body overall, yelling “Tenten, Rock Lee and Hyuuga Neji, you are my youthful students from today onwards. Come with me!” he yelled, showing them a thumbs up, eye winking at them, while also smiling toothily.

His white teeth even seemed to be sparkling, making him look even more absurd. This pose is what is commonly referred to as Maito Gai's “Nice Guy” pose. Somehow Gai had even larger eyebrows than Lee, which made him look even more goofy. His haircut was also a disaster. Honestly, Tenten thought that he looked like a clown. After just one look at her new jounin teacher, Tenten knew that she would have her hands full, acting as the straight man of her team. Because she knows very well that both Lee and Neji are also odd balls.

Tenten and her new teammates would end up leaving the classroom to the sound of the remaining students within that classroom laughing at their expense. It would seem that Tenten was not alone in thinking that Gai looked like a clown. Gai ended up leading them to an empty training grounds, where he asked them to sit down across from him.

“From this youthful day onward, I Maito Gai, will be your youthful jounin teacher!” Gai announced, while doing the nice guy pose again, causing Tenten to sweat drop. Neji looked at him in disgust, while shaking his head, while Rock Lee looked on in amazement and awe.

“Why don't we start by introducing ourselves” Gai said, then nodded towards Neji “Neji-san, you can start”.

Neji cleared his throat, as if to compose himself after the clown show “Very well, Gai-sensei. My name is Hyuuga Neji, and I am a part of the branch family of the Hyuuga clan. I don't have any interests other than improving myself as a shinobi, and my goal is to become stronger than our current clan head” Neji said rather confidently. Tenten honestly thought he sounded a bit cool when he said that. He is also rather easy on the eyes, which certainly isn't a bad thing, considering the appearance of her other two teammates. The caterpillar eyebrow duo.

Gai nodded “Okay, next up is Tenten-san”.

“Eh, yes.” Tenten started awkwardly, due to being busy looking at Gai with an expression of disbelief “I'm Tenten, no family name that I am aware of, because I grew up here alone, as an orphan” she started. She had no reason to hide the fact that she doesn't know who her parents are and the fact that she is an orphan. She is not ashamed of anything about herself.

“I specialize in weapon techniques, and it's my goal to master every ninja weapon that I can get my hands on. My idol is Tsunade Senju, I wish to become a great kunoichi like her one day” Tenten ended with a bright smile.

“That's a great goal” Gai said with a warm smile, before turning to Lee “Rock Lee, you are next!”.

“Yosh!” Lee said as he jumped up, standing on his feet. He continued to yell out in an enthusiastic tone “I'm Rock Lee, I am going to become the best ninja in the village, only using my fists and my legs. I'm a hand to hand combat specialist!” he then started blushing a bit before continuing in a much lower tone “And I will win Sakura-chan's heart!”.

“Oh, what a youthful goal, my youthful student!” Gai said looking almost as if he was close to tears “You can do it Lee! Just maximize your youthfulness and you can do anything you want!”.

“Yes, Gai-sensei!” Lee said with a salute.

In the meantime, Neji was face palming, hating everything about his new team. Tenten on the other hand was staring at Gai and Lee in disgust, her eyebrows twitching in annoyance due to how they acted.

“Listen up guys! Even though you already have your headbands, you still have to take a final test before you can actually call yourselves genin!” Gai announced which had Tenten yell out “What!? What kind of test?” she questioned.

Gai chuckled “It's a test where I will be the one to determine whether the three of you are actually youthfull enough to be Konoha ninja.” Gai then grabbed a key chain from one of the pockets of his green jounin vest. He held up the key chain in front of them, then said “The first one of you to grab this key chain from me will graduate. The other two will be sent back to the ninja academy for another year!”.

“What!? That's unfair!” Tenten yelled in disbelief. There is no way she is going back to the academy for another year now. And what is this test even about? This is the first time she has heard anything about another test.

Gai showed them a rather smug smile, as he chuckled “If you have any complaints with that, take them up with Hokage-sama”.

Neji and Tenten both frowned, while Lee just looked at the key chain with a determined expression. He was going to get it first, no matter what.

“We will use all of training grounds 10 during the test. You have six hours to take the key chain from me, and we start..” Gai paused for a second before yelling “Now!” he then disappeared from their view, having used a regular shunshin.

“YOSH! I'm gonna get it first!!” Lee said yelled, before sprinting off, searching for the spandex clad jounin.

“Hold up, mongrel” Neji said in an annoyed tone, causing Lee to actually halt, but he also directed an annoyed glare at Neji “What is it, Neji-san?”.

“Think about it” He said as he glanced at Tenten “There is no way a fresh graduate from the academy can hope to catch up to an experience jounin like him. There has to be something else about this test, otherwise it's foolish and doesn't make sense.” Neji said in a serious tone.

“Something else?” Tenten thought out loud. Lee didn't have anything to add, as he looked as if he was going to explode, due to thinking too hard.

“Why is there only one key chain?” Neji asked “Have you dofuses ever heard of a genin team with only one member?”.

“Dofus?” Tenten asked with a twitching eyebrow, while Lee continued to glare at Neji, not liking his stuck up attitude very much.

Neji sighed “It's your fate to be a dofus. Yet here I am, stuck with the two of you. I believe our best chance to steal that key chain from Gai-sensei, is to work together, as a team”.

“Thanks, but no thanks” Lee said in response, waiving him off while he started walking away.

“Wait, Lee-kun!” Tenten yelled, causing Lee to halt again “What now?” he asked.

“What Neji-san said actually makes sense when you think about it. I think we should work together for now, even though Neji-san is acting like a stuck up old bag” Tenten said, frowning at Neji.

“Okay, but only because you said so, Tenten!” Lee said as he walked up her while grinning “I won't take orders from Neji-san though!”.

“Yeah, me neither” Tenten said shaking her head.

“Yet, it's because of me that you dofuses are not running straight at Gai-sensei, making you look like even bigger fools than you are. Maybe it would be wise of you to listen to me more” Neji said with a smug smile.

“You're impossible” Tenten said shaking her head. Tenten and her two teammates may not have gotten along all too well from the get go. But they did manage to work together and pass their test. Neji had been right, the whole test was just a team work exercise, rather than an actual test. If they had not worked together, they would have failed. After passing their test, they were asked to meet up at the same training grounds, early tomorrow morning. The next morning, when Tenten arrived at their training grounds, she saw something that almost made her scream out in disbelief. Rock Lee was now wearing the same outfit as Maito Gai, minus the green jounin vest. He was also clad in a full body green spandex overall now, and he looked just as much of a clown as their teacher.

Tenten couldn't help but join her more annoying teammate, Neji, as the two of them face palmed at the same time. When Gai and Lee started shouting the other's name, while embracing, the of them were close to hand in their forehead protectors and quit being ninja all together. In the end, they didn't quit being ninja. But after training with her new team for the first day, Tenten almost wished she did. It wasn't just Gai's appearance that was ridiculous, so was the way that he trained. He had them to ridiculous training exercises, such as walking around the village on their hands, for a minimum of 1000 times. Just that made them look stupid, and the village people were laughing at them every time they saw them. The two green spandex wearing clowns, as Tenten referred to them, did not help to lessen the laughter of the villages. They were basically being made fun of by the whole village..

After training and doing D rank missions with her new team for about a month, in early July, Tenten has had enough. She was not going to keep training like that, and that was the first thing she voiced when she met up with her team in the morning at training grounds 10.

“Enough is enough, Gai-sensei! I'm not superwoman, and I'm tired of being made fun of by the whole village!” Tenten yelled.

Gai scratched the back of his head in confusion, wonder what all the fuzz was about. He was going easy on them, after all.

Neji nodded in agreement with Tenten “I agree. Doing that every day is not what fate has in store for me. You have made me look like a fool”.

“Fate this, fate that” Lee said shaking his head, while crossing his arms in front of his head “Just admit that you don't have what it takes to keep up with me and Gai-sensei!”.

“No one can keep up with you!!” Tenten yelled furiously, yet rather comically.

“I can do the training part just fine, I see no reason why I have to make a fool of myself while doing so though..” Neji said with scowling.

“The training part is just as bad!” Tenten continued through gritted teeth “Every bone in my body hurts! I need a break!”.

“A break?” All three of her male teammates questioned, while looking at her as if she was some kind of alien.

Tenten nursed her forehead, while whining out “Please ninja Gods, give me a new team..”.

Gai chuckled “Hehe, you are very youthful today Tenten! It's good that you expressed what you are feeling. I hear you, let's do something different for a while!”

“Really?” Tenten asked in excitement.

“Yeah, how about we go on a week long training trip instead?” Gai suggested, which had Lee cheer loudly, and raise his arm “Yosh!!!”.

Tenten ended up face palming again, as she questioned “Training trip? Doesn't that mean that we will train even more?”.

“Right you are, Tenten!” Gai yelled out while doing the nice guy pose “Train and relax. You can decide when you want to join us for training. When you are not training, you can relax in a warm natural hot spring. I know this great place in the northern parts of the Fire Country, which will be perfect for a relaxing training trip!”.

“Natural hot spring!?” Tenten asked with a wide grin. That didn't sound bad at all to her.

Gai nodded “We can leave right now, all I need to do is let Hokage-sama know that we are going!”.

“Gai-sensei, may I talk to you?” Neji said in a serious tone.

“Yes you may, my youthful student!” Gai said, before the two of them walked away from the others, as it seemed that Neji wanted to speak to Gai in private.

“What's on your mind, Neji?” Gai asked.

“May I stay here in the village and train alone? I have good reasons not to leave the village currently” Neji said while frowning.

“You want us to go on the training trip without you?” Gai asked.

Neji nodded “Tenten-san could really use a break. I have other reasons why I want to stay back in the village” he continued, while frowning the same way.

“What are those reasons?” Gai asked, having a feeling that something wasn't right. Something was bothering his youthful student.

“Nothing important. I will take care of it” Neji stated firmly. Gai is right about thinking that something is bothering Neji. It has to do with something that he has seen back his clan compound. He has actually seen for himself when Nagi approaches Hinata, then whispers or tells her something, before a terrified Hinata runs back home. He has distanced himself a little bit from Hiashi and her daughters ever since his father died. He still blames Hiashi for what happened, thinking that it was his fault. But he still can't help but worry about his cousins. Especially Hinata. She is so kind, yet so defenseless and weak.

It's his duty as her cousin to look after her. He fears that Nagi might take advantage of him not being around, and do something even worse to Hinata. That's his belief, because Nagi will often walk away or stay away from Hinata, whenever is Neji around. Even though he knows that Nagi is bothering Hinata in some way, he has still to overhear what he is actually telling her. All he knows is that he doesn't like the way that he leers at her all the time, and that he seems to terrify her.

“You won't mind if I take Lee and Tenten out on a short training trip then?” Gai asked.

Neji shook his head “Not at all. In fact, I think it might be better this way. I don't really get along well with those two dofuses”.

Gai sighed “Maybe you should try smiling more? Or why not call them by their names instead of calling them dofus or fool?”.

“I often find myself smiling when those two dofuses are making fools of themselves” Neji said, his frown ever so present.

“Just try to be nicer to them, and I'm sure they will be nice to you as well” Gai said with a chuckle, as he patted Neji on his shoulder “We will be back in a week. Take care of yourself, my youthful prodigy!”.

Neji groaned hearing that “Have a youthful trip, Gai-sensei..” he said with twitching eyebrows, almost puking as he heard himself utter those words.

While Neji returned home to train alone, while also looking after his cousin, the other three members of their team packed their things before heading out of the village. They were heading to the northern parts of the Fire Country, to train at a location where Gai had trained many times in the past. It's not close to any village or towns, it's basically an open grassy spot in the middle of a deep forest. The reason he likes the place so much, is because there is a natural hot springs nearby. It's a great place to camp out for a while and do some training.

Once they arrived there, they set up a large tent, which was more than big enough for all three of them to stay in. They could sleep comfortably in there, with much space for themselves. Even though Tenten was going to share a tent with two guys, she wasn't the least bit worried, due to who the two guys are. She knows about the hook up culture between teammates and teachers and students, but she wasn't interested in that. She also knew that Gai and Lee are not like that, and won't try anything with her. Then there is the fact that she finds all three of her teammates to be revolting. They are probably the last three people on earth, that she would ever think of that way. Even Neji, even though he is kinda handsome. That's due to his shitty personality, which is really off putting for Tenten.

Once they had raised the tent, the three of them started training. Tenten joined the green clowns, training the whole day, since she didn't want to slack off on the first day. When evening came, they ate dinner together, which consisted of a barbecued wild boar, which Gai had caught earlier. After dinner, Lee went straight back to training, while Gai disappeared somewhere. Tenten couldn't care less about where he went right now, because she is finally going to do what she came here for. She is going to take a relaxing and soaking warm bath in the natural hot spring. After changing into a swimsuit inside the tent, and covering herself with a towel, she made her way towards the natural hot springs. Gai had showed them earlier where it was located, which was about five minutes away on foot, if you walk like a normal person.

When Tenten arrived at the hot springs, she found herself staring wide eyed at her jounin teacher, as he was undressing, getting out of all of that green spandex. He had already removed the top part, meaning that his torso was completely naked. When Tenten saw his it, she literally began drooling. The thought she had earlier about her three teammates being the least sexy people on earth, completely changed, at least in regards to her jounin teacher. She continued to watch him, as he undressed, drooling at the sight of his very muscly, chiseled body. Her teacher may have a face of a clown, but his body is probably the most magnificent creation she has ever laid her eyes on.

Once Gai had gotten out of the lower parts of the overalls, he was only clad in a white loincloth, covering his privates. “What a youthful evening for a bath!” he said in an excited tone, while Tenten continued to check him out, admiring his magnificent physique.

She bit her lip, and found it hard to keep herself from not drooling, as she slowly started making his way over to Gai. Gai climbed into the open natural bath, when Tenten reached the edge of the bath, she removed the towel from her body, and let it fall down on the ground underneath her. She stared at Gai with a thirty looking, smiling sexily, while her jounin teacher just noticed her arrival. Without a word, she got into the bath as well, sitting close to Gai. She continued to smile at him, and bite her lips from time to time, as she stared directly into his eyes, with that thirsty expression.

“Hey there Tenten, nice evening for a warm bath, isn't it?” Gai said with a chuckle. The way Tenten looked at him, didn't make him uncomfortable at all. He didn't know what the signs meant, he just figured she was happy about something. Maybe about finally getting to take that bath.

Tenten's smiled even wider as she eye winked at him “It sure is, Gai-sensei” she said in a sensual tone, before scooting a little bit closer to him. They are sitting so close that the side of their bodies are only a mere centimeters apart.

“You seem happy. Did something good happen?” The clueless jounin asked.

“Oh yeah” Tenten said, licking her lips, but didn't expand any further on that. She had decided on two things after watching Gai undress earlier, revealing what she thought to be the sexiest male body she has ever seen. The first thing is that she now has a plan of how to get herself out of having to train in that ridiculous manner, all day long. The second thing is, that while Gai may look like a clown, mainly due to his choice of clothing, his eyebrows and his hair cute, she can't help but wanting him. She wants that magnificent muscly stud of a man for herself. When she checked out Gai earlier, she had never been hornier. That's why she is acting the way she is now. She wouldn't mind if she were to get to explore more of his body, and maybe even feel it against hers. In other words, Tenten has got the hots for Gai-sensei.

Tenten ended up closing the distance completely, as she leaned against him. She rested her head against his shoulder, while hugging his arm to herself.

“You aren't much for personal space, are you?” Gai asked with a raised eyebrow, but made no effort to create some distance between them.

Tenten bit her lip as she answered “Not with you I'm not, Gai-sensei” she said in an excited tone, before she leaned in even closer to him, staring intently into his eyes “Are you single, Gai-sensei?”.

“Uh..Yeah..” Gai answered awkwardly, as Tenten's closeness was now starting to affect him. Gai doesn't have any experience with women, none what so ever. He doesn't know how to flirt, and he doesn't know how they flirt. The man is a virgin. That is mainly because of the very same reasons why Tenten found him to be revolting earlier, before she got to see what all that spandex was hiding. She is most likely the first girl to ever see Gai in this state of undress. No other woman had ever wanted to see it, due the eyebrows, hairstyle, green spandex and everything else about him, that made him so unattractive to them.

“I haven't had much luck with the ladies” Gai said while chuckling awkwardly, while scratching the back of his head with his free hand.

“Did you ever have a girlfriend?” Tenten asked with an innocent smile.

Gai shook his head “I'm afraid not. I'm probably a bit too youthful for most women..”

“Gai-sensei..” Tenten whispered into his ear.

“Yes?” Gai asked, gulping.

“Your luck is about to change” She whispered sensually, before getting up, just to sit down in Gai's lap. She rested her legs astride of him, while staring intently into his eyes.

“Tenten..” Gai asked in confusion “What are you?” he continued when Tenten reached behind her back, to unclasp her bikini bra. She freed the twins, for Gai to take in their full naked glory. While her twins may not be as big as Hinata's or Sara's, they is at least still bigger than both Ino and Sakura. To Gai, they looked like the most amazing things he had ever put his eyes on. He stared at them wide eyed, his mouth opening even wider, while mumbling “T-tenten, what are you doing?”.

“I told you” She said in a low tone, before leaning on closer to him “Your luck is about to change, Gai-sensei” she then stared intently into his eyes, before reaching for his hands. She grabbed his hands gently, then guided them towards her chest. Once his hands were on top of her breasts, Gai couldn't help but squeeze them a little. Gai's body had reacted to her closeness, as he was now sporting a full hard on, which Tenten definitely felt pressing against her. Tenten moaned quietly due to Gai feeling up her chest, before slowly leaning in closer towards him, while putting her arms around him. Then with her arms around him, with his hands still on her breasts, she closed the distance completely, as she placed her lips against his. As soon as she did that, Gai let go of her breasts, in favor of putting his arms around her as well. They embraced tightly, as their lips parted, and they extended their tongues, exploring each others mouths. They joined for a long, wet and fiery kiss.

Gai was still a bit confused about what is going on, but he can't resist her. She has always been very attractive, and now that she is topless sitting in his lap, he can barely control himself. That's even though he normally thinks that a teacher and student shouldn't have relationships like this. He somewhat forgot all about that now though, as they continued to make out, while Tenten's breasts were pressed against his naked chest, as the two of them embraced tightly while doing so. After five minutes of making out, they finally took a break. They breathed heavily while looking at another for a few seconds, before a smirking Tenten stood up. She then reached for her bikini bottoms, which had Gai call out “Wait, Tenten. That's enough for tonight. We have already crossed the line of what is okay”.

Tenten pouted as she removed her hands from her bikini bottom, in favor of resting them underneath her tits “Crossed what line, Gai-sensei? We are both adults, and teacher and students do this all the time!”.

Gai nodded, as he averted his eyes from her for the first time since she took off her bikini top “I know, but that doesn't mean that it's okay. At least not for everyone”.

“I see..” Tenten said in a dejected tone, before she climbed out of the natural bath, going up to land again. She grabbed her bikini top and put it on again “I'm not pretty enough, is that it?”.

“What!?” Gai asked in disbelief “No, you are stunning, Tenten”.

That had Tenten smile again, even though she already knows that he finds her attractive. The way he looked at her earlier, along with that massive hard on pressing against her groin earlier, was proof of that.

“Then what is the problem, Gai-sensei?” Tenten asked.

The virgin jounin teacher gulped as he watched her bend over while grabbing her towel. He sure wouldn't mind not being a virgin anymore, especially if it's with such a rare beauty like Tenten. The problem is that Gai is man of moral standards. He is similar to Jiraiya in the way that he doesn't think that someone his age should be dating or fooling around with someone so much younger. It doesn't matter that she is also an adult by law. The age difference is just too big. Then again, the more he looks at her, the more he is starting to think that his moral standards could go fuck themselves.

“J-just what is it you want to do with me? I can't see someone like you wanting to date me” Gai said scratching the back of his head “Are you just interested in hooking up with your teacher or something? So you have something to tell your friends about?”.

“It's not like that! I'm not a slut!” Tenten barked at him angrily “I have never done things like this before, I'm only doing it because you..” she paused as she started to blush “I guess you could say that I find you to be very good looking, Gai-sensei!” she sputtered out.

That caused Gai to blush as he turned her face away from her. He had never heard those words being spoken to him before in his life.

“G-go back to the camp. We will talk more about this tomorrow” He said with a slight stutter, looking very embarrassed.

“Okay” A red faced Tenten said, before running off, heading back to their tent to put on her pyjamas.

The two of them, along with Lee, would meet up again inside the tent, about twenty minutes later. Gai had stayed in the bath up until now, thinking about what had just happened. He realized Tenten would probably just stop if he didn't do anything to invite her advances. He knows that there are more handsome and pretty men out there than him. She will likely chase after one of those pretty boys soon instead. At least he kinda hoped she would. But then again, he also didn't.

Tenten's pajamas was of the least sexy kind that you could imagine. Gai thanked the ninja Gods for that. He would have probably had a heart attack if she showed up in that tent wearing some kind a sexy lingerie or something.

“Lee, how about you take the futon in the middle?” Gai said, hoping that Lee could sleep in between him and Tenten.

“No thanks, Gai-sensei. I don't want Tenten cooties on me” He said rather childishly, with an expression of disgust. Normally Tenten would get a little bit upset by such a rude comment, but now she was only thankful.

“Why don't you sleep in the middle, Gai-sensei?” She said in a sweet tone, smiling cutely at him.

“I guess I have choice” Gai said with a twitching eyebrow, as he stared at the cause of his slight annoyance. He just knows she is going to do something as soon as they blow out the candles. Gai's assumptions proved to be right, but it happened a few minutes after they had laid down. After all three of them had laid down in their separate futons, Gai had made sure that his back was facing her, so that she wouldn't get the opportunity to do something like what happened in the pool, being the kissing and removing her top.

After five minutes, he turned around in order to see if she had fallen asleep. Then he saw her, staring straight at her with a mischievous and sexy smile. She waved him over with one her hands, biting her lips. Gai gulped, before obliging. They scooted over closer to each other as they met around where each of their futons ended. Then without a word, the two of them embraced and started making out again. Their heated tongues kisses were not soundless, as Lee heard what he thought was some strange sound.

“Hey, is someone dropping wet farts over there? Be quiet will ya!” He barked before putting pillow over his head, as a way to cancel out the noise.

Tenten giggled, while Gai awkwardly responded “Sorry, bad stomach..”.

With their foreheads touching, they stared at one another. Even Gai was smiling now, as he whispered “We will talk about this tomorrow. Now it's time for bed”.

“Okay, good night Gai-sensei” she whispered back, before scooting over to the middle of her futon, and getting the sleeping bag all around her.

“Good night, Tenten” Gai said, before doing the same. Both of them tried to sleep, but it would take them at least two hours to actually fall asleep, as they were both thinking about what had happened this evening. Gai was honestly confused about what to do. The right thing was to make sure nothing like this never happens again. But what he actually wants is for it continue, and go much further. She is starting to drive him crazy, due to how sexy she is.

The next morning, after all three had woken up and eaten breakfast outside the tent, Tenten and Gai was able to have a moment alone, due to Lee heading into the forest to take care of number two. Tenten has been sitting next to Gai all morning, so when Lee left, she just had to lean against him again for a close moment. She then giggled as she moved her head closer to him, going for a kiss. That kiss did not happen, due to Gai standing up.

“I have been thinking about what happened. What I wonder is, is the things we did last night.. Is that really something you want to continue?” Gai asked as he stared at her nervously.

Tenten nodded while smiling widely “Yes, Gai-sensei..” she said in a cute tone, she then walked over and whispered “I would have gone all the way with you in the bath yesterday, if you didn't stop me”.

She is now dead set on having sex with Gai. She wants him for herself, and she wants him before anyone else discovers what a stud he actually is. Then there is also the fact that she still wants to get out of that ridiculous training regime. And having sex with Gai, was a big part of that.

“I... D-dont” Gai stuttered before composing himself “I will give it a chance then, as long as you want this. But we shouldn't take things too fast. Let's start with a date first or something” he said, as he turned away from her embarrassingly.

“Name the time and place, Gai-sensei” Tenten said with a cute smile, with a faint blush adoring her face.

Gai cleared his throat, he really wants to kiss her again when she looks at him like that. “Let's talk more tonight. Lee could return any second now”.

Tenten nodded, before tip toeing in order to whisper into his ear “Let's talk in the bath again, nee?”.

“Mmh..” Gai responded as a very excited Lee came running towards them “YOSH! Let's work even harder today, Gai-sensei, Tenten-san!”.

That evening, after dinner, Tenten had to practically drag Gai along with her to the natural hot springs, after Lee had gone back for more training.

“Come on Gai-sensei, we're just going to talk, right?” Tenten said with a giggle, while dragging Gai along, who didn't resist at all.

“Yes, let's just talk..” Gai said while gulping. He had a feeling they might do a little bit more than talking. And this time he was more worried about himself being the most forward, because he has been thinking about Tenten the whole day, and for the first time in a very long time, he couldn't wait until they were done training. There was just one little problem. Tenten did not have time to put on her bikini, and Gai was not wearing his loincloth today, which he usually baths in. They are both in their usual underwear underneath their clothes. Once they arrived at the bath, Tenten started removing her pink shirt.

Gai turned around, then cleared his throat “I forgot my swimwear, I will be right back” he said, before taking a few steps back towards where they came from. Tenten's voice then had him turn around “Wait, Gai-sensei..” she said as Gai stared at her, removing her bra again “So did I..” she added, as her bra fell to the ground.

She walked up to Gai and grabbed his hands, then walked back with him towards the edge of the bath “You're not supposed to wear any clothes in a hot springs anyway” she said, while pulling down her pants. Gai gulped again, before nodding. He then started undressing as well. While only wearing panties, Tenten watched him undress. Just like yesterday, she wasn't able to keep herself from drooling, as she leered at his chiseled body.

That did not go unnoticed by Gai. Even though he is clueless when it comes to women, even he couldn't mistake that look for something other than pure lust. When Gai was down to only his underwear, which was a pair of old fashioned briefs, the two of them stopped to stare at each other for a while. Both of them were actually a bit nervous about taking the next step. Once their underwear are gone, they will be completely naked, which the other will be able to see up close. This would be a first for the two of them, as neither has had any kind of sexual relationship before.

Tenten does know a bit about sex though. That's mainly due to sex being a rather popular topic among girls in the ninja academy. Ino for example, even though she is very open about being a virgin, loves talking about sex and guys all the time. And by guys, she is mostly talking about Naruto, but sometimes she can't help but talk about her other crush as well, Minato. Hinata and Sakura doesn't like to talk about sex much, but Sara certainly doesn't mind. Especially if Naruto is somehow a part of the topic as well. Then there is other girls, who has some experience with sex already. It's actually quite rare for academy students to graduate as virgins. Tenten, Ino, Sakura, Sara, Hinata and a few others, are actually the odd ones out for once.

Now as Tenten pulled down her panties, along her legs, until they finally reached the ground. She knew that she no longer had to just talk about it with her friends. She was finally going to be able to try it herself. When Gai followed suit, by janking down his old briefs in one quick go, Tenten stared wide eyed at what he had presented for her. It was a rock hard, very big and thick cock, which was more than ready for some action. (2).

Surprisngly it was Gai who made the first move, as he closed the distance between them, putting his arms around her and kissing her. Tenten immediately responded by kissing back, and hugging him back. Then after a few french kisses, Gai whispered “I want you. I want to make love to you, Tenten-chan”.

“Then make love to me, Gai-sensei!” Tenten responded in an excited tone, before laying down on her back on the ground “Come get me, tiger!”.

Gai grinned before laying down on top of her, getting in between her legs while eagerly directing the tip of his dick against her opening.

“Are you ready, Tenten-chan?” he asked while looking at her with lusty lidded eyes.

“Yes!” she responded loudly while biting her lip. She knew it was going to hurt a bit the first time. Her more experienced classmates had told her that much. She also knew that it would not take that long until she will start feeling better, especially if her partner knows what he is doing. In this case, neither of them knows what they are doing. They are just horny and ready to fuck. And that is exactly what they intended to do, as Gai entered her with the tip and about half of his total length.

“Ahhn!!” Tenten whined out.

“Should I keep going?” Gai asked between kissing her neck.

“Yes, fuck me already, Gai-sensei!” Tenten screamed without a care in the world, even though Lee was just five minutes away, doing some youthful evening training. Gai did as he was told, as he entered her with his full size. He started moving his hips, moving his cock in and out of her slowly, to the sound of Tenten's quiet whimpers and even quieter moans. Gai tried his best to make her feel less pain, by kissing her neck and caressing her as much as could. He mostly just massaged her tits though.

After a while, Gai thought he was starting to get the hang of it, as he was moving his hips in a kind of rhythm. After yet another while, Tenten was starting to feel more pleasure than pain, as she moaned in delight, every time Gai's pressed his massive tool all the way inside of her. She wrapped her arms around him, as they continued to do it in the missionary position, on the ground next to the bath. Her back hurt a little, due to the hard surface that she is laying on, but she forgot about the pleasure and the thrill of having sex for the first time, easily won over the pain. She never thought she would share her first time with her jounin teacher. Especially not a jounin teacher who looks like Gai. But she did not regret it for one minute, as she came in an orgasm, screaming out her moans “Yes, yes!!!! It feels so good, Gai-sensei!”.

“I'm cumming, Tenten-chan!” Gai exclaimed as he came only a few seconds later. He at least had the sense of mind to pull out before doing so. He doesn't have any pregnancy seals with him, and he doesn't think Tenten would be overjoyed if he were to knock her up only a few weeks after she has graduated. That would basically put her ninja career on halt for several years.

The two of them breathed hard, staring at each other intently while doing so. Gai's now slack member, was resting on top of her stomach, dripping droplets of semen down on the larger pools of semen that he had released earlier.

Tenten started giggling, as she arched her back upwards to go in for a quick kiss “That was fun, Gai-sensei!”.

“Yeah, it was!” Gai agreed with a chuckle “Let's get you cleaned up now, Tenten-chan” he said as he got off of her, then helped her up to her feet.

“Let's continue in the bath?” Tenten asked wiggling her eyebrows.

“No, we better hurry up and wash ourselves, before Lee comes and finds us. He did take a bath yesterday, before going to bed. He could be on his way already” Gai said, as they sat down next to each other in the bath. Even though he just said that, he put one arm around her and started kissing her. They would end up making out in the bath for another ten minutes, before returning to to tent. Lee then went to take bath, not knowing that his teacher and teammate had soiled the water with their cooties. He was pretty much waiting for Tenten to come back, just like he had done yesterday, since he didn't want to bath with a girl. He just thought it was best that way for everyone involved, not knowing how much Gai and Tenten appreciated that.

Gai and Tenten would make out secretly in the tent, after Lee had fallen asleep. They did not go any further than that though, because they knew that it was likely that Lee would wake up if they did. They both thought it was a good idea to keep their relationship a secret for a while, since they didn't want to be judged by their students/teammates and friends. But one thing was now very certain, and that is that neither of them regrets what has happened between them. In fact, Gai has never been happier and Tenten might have found her new favorite ninja tool to play with.

The next day started similar to the previous day. When Lee went out to the woods to take care of number two again, Tenten threw herself into Gai's waiting arms, as the two of them started making out again, wasting no time when they were alone together. Later, about two hours into their training, Tenten pulled Gai with her away from Lee, stating loud enough for Lee to hear her “Gai-sensei, I need your help with a new technique I'm working on! Come with me!”.

“Okay, Tenten-chan!” Gai said grinning from ear to ear, while Lee smiled watching them “I'm glad to see Tenten-san so motivated..” he thought, before shouting “Yosh. I need to work harder myself, I'll do ten thousand push ups, then run fifty miles!!”.

Tenten did not drag Gai were very far away from their usual training spot, which was an open grassy clearing. She just dragged him behind a large bush, then sat down in front of him.

“Want to try my way of training, Gai-sensei?” she asked as she tugged on the hem of his pants.

“What did you have in mind?” Gai asked in a husky tone, having gained a new found confidence in himself.

“I'll suck your big dick, before I let you fuck me as long as you want, unless Lee comes ovoer and interrupt us!” Tenten said with a giggle, then pulled down his pants.

“Hehehe.. Don't tell anyone, but I think you might be my favorite student, Tenten-chan” he said as Tenten gobbled up his dick, taking it inside her mouth for the first time.

Footnotes:

1: Tenten's Part 1 outfit: https://static.wikia.nocookie.net/naruto/images/5/5c/Tenten_ep237.png/revision/latest/scale-to-width-down/1000?cb=20160425215024

2: Here is the link to the Dick-o-Meter again: https://mega.nz/file/R3AkwKyI#lP-FV_eXsyTJGwGFzDl6M8muP4XhvAOiSb-Z5p0H0pk

As you can see Gai's length is at 6, which is considered “Big” on the scale and well above average. His thickness is even higher at 7 on the scale, which is considered huge. Note that these numbers doesn't represent inches or centimeters. They are just numbers on the scale. Gai's tool is to be considered very very big for a normal human.

Authors Note: This is likely not the last time that you will hear from Tenten and Gai. They may get another chapter focusing on them. If not, you will at least get updates of how they are doing from a certain future voyeur. In the next chapter you will finally get to read a little bit about Sakura. She will have a run in with a certain white haired pervert. That chapter may also have a long timeskip midway through out it, depending on how long that chapter ends up being. Anyway, that's all for this time. Hope you enjoyed the new chapter and please leave a comment/review.

Chapter Text

Chapter 7 – It's Just A Greeting

Later on that summer, in late August, Konoha's very own super prodigy, Uzumaki Naruto, and his classmates, is about to return to school for their final year in the ninja academy, after enjoying a long summer break. Some of the students are happier than others to be back in school. Naruto isn't exactly thrilled about having to “waste” several hours in school five days a week again, but he is at least happy that this will be his final year in school.

Naruto is far from the only one who is less than enthusiastic to be back in school. One Nara Shikamaru couldn't think of anything more troublesome to be back in that noisy place. Then there are some students who may not be at the top of their class, who has a hard time to get motivated to be even be there. It's for them, and the rest of the class, that Minato got an idea to get all students of the new senior class motivated. That idea involved his old jounin teacher, the super pervert, Jiraiya.

Early that Monday morning, about half an hour before classes start, Jiraiya arrived at Minato's office.

“Good morning, Minato” Jiraiya greeted him as he climbed through an open window of the office, as he usually does, instead of taking the door like a normal person.

“Good morning, sensei” Minato said while casually taking a sip from his cup of coffee.

“You wished to talk to the great old me?” Jiraiya asked with a chuckle.

Minato nodded “I would like to ask you for a favor”.

“If it's babysitting Naruto, then hell no. I have had enough of that brat. Do you know how much he, Konohamaru and their other brat friends has bugged me this summer!?!” Jiraiya barked while pulling his hair “Stupid brats..” he muttered.

Minato sighed “Naruto says the same thing about babysitting you...” he said, causing Jiraiya to sweat drop. Minato chuckled at that. He was actually very amused by how Naruto and Jiraiya interacts. They are a lot alike in many ways.

“Jokes aside, what I want to talk to you about, actually does involve Naruto and some of his friends. I would like you to go to the ninja academy and hold a little speech for this years senior class. Tell them about your ninja career, your road from going from the dead last in the ninja academy, to being a member of the sannin, and arguably the strongest ninja in the village” Minato said.

“Eh!?” Jiraiya responded comically “I already told that brat that same story countless of times. I don't think he wants to hear it again”.

Minato sighed “This is not for Naruto. I believe hearing your story could serve to motivate some of the students that aren't doing so well, or are thinking of quitting. If not, your story will at least be an interesting tale to hear for most of the students. You have lived a very interesting life, Jiraiya-sensei”.

“The same goes for you” Jiraiya said with a bored expression “You can go hold a speech for those brats instead. That way I can go visit a bath house and explore the finer fruits of our village” he ended wiggling his eyebrows.

Before Minato got the chance to respond, the door to his office opened to reveal two shinobi who are a part of Minato's personal guard platoon. That guard platoon consists of three members, which are Shiranui Genma, Tatami Iwashi and Namiashi Raido. Its the latter two, Iwashi and Raido, who just entered the office. The third, Genma, is currently a jounin teacher for recently graduated genin team, the one with Uchiha Sara in it. Raido and Iwashi were carrying stacks of papers, and those stacks were about as tall as the two of them.

“Here is your paperwork, Hokage-sama” Raido said with a hint of amusement in his tone, seeing Minato frown as soon as he saw the mass of paperwork enter his office.

Minato turned to Jiraiya and said “Sure, I will hold a speech for the students, if you take care of this for me instead”.

Jiraiya nursed his forehead “Fine, I'll give a damn speech for those brats. When should I head over there, and do they know that I'm coming?”.

“You can head over there now, Iruka-san is expecting you” Minato said while taking another sip of his coffee, while smirking in victory. When Raido and Iwashi put the stacks of papers down on Minato's desk, Jiraiya looked at the stacks of papers in disgust, as if they were decease infested or somehing. He them jumped out of the window, laughing “Ohoho, have fun with all of that, Minato!”

Once Jiraiya was gone Minato turned to his guards and chuckled “Thanks for bringing those. I knew they would help Jiraiya-sensei change his mind. Where did you find all of that paperwork though?”.

“They are all empty papers, Hokage-sama” Iwashi said with a bow.

Raido nodded “There is no paperwork today. You can relax today, Hokage-sama”.

“Very well” Minato said before he dismissed them. Once they left the office, Minato smirked in a rather evil way, while tenting his fingers and rubbing his hands together in a very Mr Burns like way.

“Excellent..” He spoke to himself, happy that everything had gone according to plan.

When Jiraiya entered the academy grounds, he found most of the students outside, either eating or just running around. Just seeing them kinda pissed him off. He didn't like brats and would never go over to the academy to deliver a speech if it wasn't a favor for Minato. To make things worse for Jiraiya, his allies within the pervert trio turned on him. As soon as people started noticing him as he made his way towards the school building, Konohamaru and Naruto started messing with him. Konohamaru that little brat was trying to kick him in the balls while Naruto was throwing oil at him, probably in preparation to put him on fire using a fire technique afterwards.

“Get out of here you old pervert!” Konohamaru yelled.

“Yeah, fuck off Ero-sennin, you can't come here to perv on academy girls!” Naruto added.

“Shut up brats, I'm here on official matters. Your father wants me to give your stupid a class a stupid speech” Jiraiya yelled back “Besides I only like mature women with a real nice curvy figure!”

“Stupid pervert!” Naruto said as he grabbed Konohamaru and left Jiraiya alone, leaving Jiraiya with a frown as he stared at their backs. Konohamaru ran off from Naruto when he spotted a certain pinkette. Naruto watched as Konohamaru ran up to Sakura, for what had to be the third time this morning, then started spanking her butt, before being chased off by said girl, once again. Naruto couldn't help but laugh his ass off. Konohamaru was out of control this year, and it made it less boring for him to be back in school.

Jiraiya couldn't help but bark at Konohamaru, yelling at him to stop treating a young lady that way. After a while he ventured into the actual school building, while sighing and shaking head, thinking that those two could really get out of hand sometimes.

Jiraiya wasn't the least bit surprised by what he had just seen, he knew that Naruto was the one that egged Konohamaru on. Jiraiya has seen Naruto do similar things to all kinds of girls, both at parties and in public. Unlike Konohamaru, Naruto always got away with it due to him being the most popular guy in the village. He is probably the only one that can get away with something like that, with a few exceptions.

In Jiraiya's opinion, they should just hurry up and get girlfriends instead of going around harassing girls like that. Even he didn't do things like that to women, unless they wanted it and it was the appropriate time for it. The worst thing he does for the most part is to leer at a sexy babe or maybe offer them a few inappropriate compliments. Hey may peek on them when they bath as well, but nothing worse than that. Jiraiya also didn't want them to become like him, a man who is living alone in his fifties, due to being in love with a woman that doesn't love him back. Speaking of that woman, he has not seen Tsunade in quite some time now. It's been almost four years now. Maybe it's time to give her a visit soon.

With those thoughts, Jiraiya went looking for Naruto's teacher, a man named Iruka. After talking to Iruka for a while, Jiraiya eventually found himself standing at the front of their classroom, scratching the back of his head. He is wondering how to start his speech, and how much he should actually tell these brats. Then he spotted Naruto, making funny expressions and being a goof ball as always.

“Hey there half bat, how is it hanging?!” He greeted his Godson with a loud laugh.

“Shut up, Ero-sennin!” a very angry Naruto yelled back at him, causing the class to laugh. Half bat was a nickname Jiraiya had for Naruto, which Naruto hated. He called him half bat because Naruto and Jiraiya both had been very blessed with it came to penis size. Jiraiya was only slightly bigger than Naruto, but still bigger, which is why he is the half bat. Jiraiya is pretty sure that Naruto is going to outgrow him by the end of the year though. That's kinda sad news for him because he has always took pride in having the biggest dick in the village, and probably the elemental nations as a whole. They are that big.

Naruto actually hated being called that. He could only consider himself lucky that only he and Jiraiya knew the true meaning of that nickname, otherwise he would have had to kill that old perverted sage, for embarrassing him like that, in front of his whole class.

Jiraiya then began talking a bit about his past, about how he acted like a clown in the academy and was always the dead last. He then started working hard, his motivation being that he wanted to protect the village of Konoha. He then told them a little bit about his most famous battle with some strong opponents he has fought. Pretty much every student in there was in awe, very impressed by his story, except Naruto who just wished Jiraiya would leave. Unknowingly to Jiraiya, he had impressed three girls in that class so much that they decided to follow him in hopes to get them to train him, after he left school. He recognized all three of them somewhat.

The three in question are none other than Yamanaka Ino, Haruno Sakura and Hyuuga Hinata, the three popular girls of the new senior class in the academy. As we already know, Jiraiya knows Ino pretty well since she has been visiting the Uzumaki home alot since a young age. He used to think she was alot less annoying when she was younger though, because in recent years, she has become something of a tease.

The other two he has seen before, mostly at, once again, at Naruto's home, during his birthday parties and such. He knows that Hinata is Hiashi's daughter and that Sakura is Ino's friend, but he can't remember ever really having a conversation with them. Unless yelling "Get lost, stupid brats!" at them, counts as conversation. These three are mainly popular in school due to their good looks. That's something Jiraiya didn't care about at all since he considered them to be “brats”, just like Naruto. But he couldn't deny that they are pretty, and he could see why they are the most popular in the academy.

“Jiraiya-sama, please train us!” Sakura yelled, as she, Ino and Hinata chased after the man on one of the many streets within the village. She seemed to be the most vocal one out of the three.

“I don't know you people, leave me alone!” Jiraiya yelled out comically, as he ran away with a horrified expression.

The villagers laughed at the scene, finding it funny that Jiraiya out of all people, was running away from girls, instead of it being the other way around. After thirty minutes of chasing him, Ino and Hinata had enough and ended up giving up on chasing Konoha's very own super pervert. Since Jiraiya seemed dead set on not helping them out with their training for a few hours, the two of them decided to go to Ino's home instead, either to help Ino's mom in their flower shop, or just to hang out. Hinata would gladly help out Butao in the shop, free of charge, since she enjoys that a lot more than being at home. Her situation has not changed at all during this summer.

Sakura

After those two gave up the chase, Sakura was now alone, chasing after Jiraiya. It took her a full ten minutes to even notice that her friends were no longer running next to her, due to her being so dead set on convincing Jiraiya to train her. She really wants to catch up to Ino and Hinata, and maybe even become stronger than them. She knows that she is currently the weakest out of the three, but she wishes to change that. She also hoped that her becoming stronger could impress Naruto enough to score a date with him. Although, she knew that wish was not very likely to happen.

Sakura is no longer the shy girl, who got bullied by girls like Ami, like she was when she first started attending the ninja academy four years. She is now very popular instead, mainly due to her good looks and her confident personality. The only people who really messes with her nowadays are Ino, Naruto and Konohamaru. It's only really the last one that bothers her, since her squabbles with Ino is nothing serious, and is mostly just them poking fun at one another. Usually they just call each other names, such as “Forehead girl” or “Ino-pig”, or they argue about who will marry Naruto.

When it comes to Naruto and Konohamaru, they are as we learned this morning, usually a lot more “hands on”. Sakura doesn't mind it one bit when Naruto “pranks her”, by giving her ass a rubbing or a quick love tap, but sadly that does not happen all that often. On the other hand, Konohamaru does it to her every single day that day are in school. And he will most of then then not go a lot further than just tapping her ass. He will spank it, grab it and even pull up the skirt of her dress. She had never been happier with her decision to wear a pair of tight green shorts under her dress, due to that. He doesn't stop until Sakura starts yelling insults and threats at him, before chasing him away.

Another annoying part about Konohamaru's pranks on her, is that it gives Ino more ammunition to poke fun at her. She has lost count how many times her best friend had insinuated that she and Konohamaru were a thing. As if they were a couple or something already. It's not like that at all. On the other hand, Konohamaru always choosing to prank her, has helped boosted her confidence in herself. Konohamaru is far from unpopular in school, being the third hokage's grandson and something of Naruto's protege of sorts, and looking like a brown haired version of Naruto.

Most girls regards him as rather good looking even. Having a rather popular guy like him always giving you that kind of attention, for the whole school to see, wasn't all that bad. Even so, he is still an annoying little shit in her mind, and if she ever catches him again after doing something like that to her, she will break his nose. Unfortunately she hasn't caught him in a very long time. The little shit has gotten very good at running away.

Back when Sakura started attending the academy, she also had an interest in Uchiha Sasuke. That did not last long, however. She, like most other girls, were put off by his personality. Sasuke is anything but kind to his classmates, and is not pleasant to be around at all. He also pretty much told Sakura and a few other girls that he would never give them any time of his day since he was only interested in Uchiha girls.

Apparently he was hoping to rebuild his clan with the help of his sisters, or maybe even his mom. Another one of Sasuke's faults, is how petty he could get towards Naruto, simply due to Naruto being stronger than him. Due to that, Sakura didn't blame Naruto for beating Sasuke up sometimes, as she thought he definitely deserved it. In her mind, the only good quality about him is his looks. She has given up on him completely now, as she is now only gunning for Naruto's affection.

Sakura's friendship with Ino took a hit a few years ago when she revealed to Ino that she had given up on Sasuke and was now only gunning for Naruto. Ino took it so badly, that she told Sakura that they weren't friends anymore and that they were now rivals instead. As the years passed, Ino started warming up to Sakura again though. Maybe due to realizing that the whole female population of Konoha wants Naruto one way or another. Hell even Ino's mom is flirting with him and trying to get some alone time with him whenever they are over at Naruto's place.

Sakura knows for a fact that her own mom is the same way, as she definitely has an interest in Naruto. She has lost count how many times her mom, Mebuki, has told Sakura how handsome and cute Naruto is, and saying things such as “If I were not married..” with a dreamy expression.

Her, Ino, Ino's mom and her own mom, are just the tip of the iceberg. She knows that she has a lot more rivals than just Ino. Hell, every woman in Konoha could be considered her rival, without over exaggerating too much. Since she doesn't have an interest in anyone else and she happens to be quite stubborn, she isn't going to give up on Naruto any time soon.

Sakura continued to chase Jiraiya through out the village, all the way to the long street where the Sarutobi clan compound is located, which is the same street which leads to Naruto's house, at the end of said street. They had just passed the Sarutobi clan compound when Jiraiya suddenly stopped running. He turned around and stared at her with an annoyed expression. Sakura stopped in front of him “Please, Jiraiya-sama!” she pleaded, while bowing.

“Your friends seem to have already given up” Jiraiya said with a frown “Why are you still bugging me?”.

“Huh?” Sakura said in confusion, looking behind her “You guys?” she said wondering where they had gone, as she just realized that they were no longer with her.

“Hahaha” Jiraiya laughed out loudly, at her expense “You've been chasing me alone for at least ten minutes, baka!” he said in a mocking tone.

Sakura pouted cutely “I was busy trying to convince you to train me. Why do you have to be so stubborn, Jiraiya-sama?” she asked.

“If I'm stubborn, then what are you?” Jiraiya asked with a sweat drop “You've been chasing me for almost an hour!”.

Sakura just continued to pout the same way, while crossing her arms in front of her chest. Jiraiya sighed, realizing that this girl was not going to leave him alone, unless she got it her way. She kind of reminded him a little bit of a young Kushina. Maybe that is the reason why he said what he said next.

“Jeez.. I'll reward your stubbornness this time. If you want me to help you train for a while, we can go over to my house. It's not far from here, it's located on Minato's and Kushina's backyard” Jiraiya said.

“Really?” Sakura asked excitedly, with an equally excited and cute smile.

Jiraiya sighed, before nodding. That had Sakura cheer and raise on arm in victory “Chaa! Let's go, Jiraiya-sama!” she shouted out, before the two continued down the road, heading to Jiraiya's house. Jiraiya figured he could humor her for an hour or two, before she would most likely go home on her own accord, since he wasn't going to go easy on her. He hoped that would get rid of her for good and she would stop bothering him after that.

Later when they arrived at Jiraiya's house, Sakura, who had never been at his house, saw the view of a rather small and simple house. It looked almost like some kind of shack in the middle of a forest. He did have a rather large open grassy field in front of the house though, which you may call his front yard, located in someone else's backyard. That thought made Sakura sweat drop, as she wondered if he was just freeloading on Naruto's family. She found that to be a bit strange, considering that he is supposed to be very rich, according to Ino. Apparently he is an author of a very famous book series. Ino never specified which one though.

That open grassy area in front of Jiraiya's house, which looks very out of place in the middle of the forest, was something that Jiraiya had created by clearing out parts of the forest and evening out the ground. He did so in order to create a little training grounds for him and Naruto. Sakura is right about Jiraiya's house not looking very impressive from the outside, but the inside is very luxurious. Since Jiraiya is filthy rich, he can easily afford the most expensive furniture and household items. It doesn't hurt that he also saves a lot of money buy living in Minato's backyard, and often freeloading dinners at their place as well. The latter is mainly due to how great of a cook that Kushina is, though. Jiraiya has never eaten anything better than her food, Tsunade's pussy included.

“Welcome to my simple house” Jiraiya said in a bored tone “Usually girls avoid this place, since I am a known man of culture”.

“Because you are a pervert, right?” Sakura asked while snickering “Ino-chan keeps calling you Ero-sennin!”.

Jiraiya hissed at her when he heard that “That stupid brat! If you're gonna call me that as well, then I won't help you!” Jiraiya's whole demeanor then changed, as he grinned from ear to ear “Besides, I'm not just some regular pervert” He started wiggling his fingers in a way that Sakura thought looked disgusting “I'm a super pervert!” he added, with a hearty laugh “Ohohoh!!”.

Jiraiya hoped, and almost expected her to run away screaming after he told her that. But to his dismay, Instead she just giggled “Hehehe, you're funny, Jiraiya-sama” she said, even though she was a bit disgusted by what he had just said. She mostly said that because she didn't want to ruin her chances of getting him to train her.

Jiraiya hung his head in defeat, as he really hoped that would work to scare her off. After a while he asked “What kind of training do you want me to help you with, miss..?”

“It's Sakura, Haruno Sakura” Sakura said with a smile that Jiraiya couldn't help made her look incredibly pretty. She still just a brat, though.

“As for what training.. I don't know really” Sakura said in a meek tone, as she placed her hands behind her back, while placing one foot over the other in a cute shy way.

“You don't know? You have been chasing me for almost an hour begging me to train you, and you don't even know what you want me to help you with?” Jiraiya asked in disbelief.

Sakura blushed slightly, she didn't really think about that. All she wants is to get stronger “I want to become stronger, Jiraiya-sama. Please help me out!” Sakura said with the cutest puppy dog eyes expression he had ever seen.

Jiraiya nursed his forehead, before sighing again “I can't help you train if I don't know what you need help with. Why don't we spar, so that I can get an idea of what you are capable of. Try using every little trick you got down your sleeve against me”

Sakura nodded with a serious expression as she struck a fighting pose. It was the cutest fighting pose Jiraiya had ever seen, and it was not the least bit intimidating to him. After sparring against her for about an hour, or more like letting her try to punch, kick and throw ninja weapons at him, without hitting him once, Jiraiya was at a loss of words.

“Are the academy students really this week nowadays?” He thought with a twitching eyebrow. Obviously he did not include Naruto with the others, since Jiraiya knows better than most people how strong Naruto really is.

Jiraiya stood with his arms crossed in front her, while Sakura sat down. She is exhausted and is panting hard after that short little spar.

“Are you really in Naruto's class?” Jiraiya asked, not sounding very impressed with her, to say the least.

“Uh-huh” Sakura responded nervously. She could tell that Jiraiya wasn't very impressed with what she had shown.

Jiraiya closed his eyes, then spoke in a serious tone “Being a ninja is not a game. If you aren't going to take it seriously then you should quit before you get yourself hurt.”.

Sakura hung her head, due to hearing that “I'm trying my best, even though I don't have someone who helps me like Hinata-chan or Ino-chan, who trains with their parents. My parents are often out on mission, or are busy taking care of clan business...” She said in a dejected tone.

Jiraiya continued to talk in serious tone as he asked “Do you know what happens to kunoichi if they lose a battle and are captured by their enemies?”.

“They get killed” Sakura answered, with a frown of disgust.

Jiraiya shook his head “No, if only that was the case. It's more likely that they will first be raped for hours upon end, then if they are lucky they might killed. Depending on how good looking they are, they might get brought somewhere else to become a sex slave for their captors. Once they are done with them, or they get too old and lose their looks, then they are killed” Jiraiya sighed “A pretty girl like you, would most definitely not be given a quick and painless death. Do you understand what I'm saying here? Being a ninja is not a game!” he ended in a rather loud and harsh tone.

Jiraiya got angry as he spoke about this, knowing how close it had been for both Kushina and Hinata to have suffered something like that when Kumo tried to kidnap them. They would have become sex slaves for Kumo and been forced to give birth over and over again to give Kumo children with powers of Kushina's and Hinata's clans. Kumo was, and probably still is, the worst when it came to sexual war crimes and kidnappings of girls and women, but they were far from the only ones that did it. There was always that risk for a female ninja if they found themselves on the losing side of a battle, be it against enemy ninja, bandits or any other potential enemy. Jiraiya knows that Tsunade even went so far to create a technique that would to kill her instantly just in case she ever found herself in that situation.

Sakura shivered at Jiraiya's words, knowing that every word of it was true. She just didn't want to talk about it, or even think about it.

“I know Jiraiya-sama.. That's why I want to become a ninja, I want to fight to make this rotten world a better place, shannaro!” she said with a determined expression, raising a clenched fist in the air for effect.

Jiraiya smirked. He had to give it to her, she has the right motivation at least “Well said, Sakura.”.

“Will you train me then?” Sakura asked in a hopeful tone, before facing him with that puppy-dog eye expression again “Please!” she pleaded.

Jiraiya gulped, as he averted his eyes from her. Why the hell is that brat so god damn pretty? He is finding it very hard to say no to her. Jiraiya composed himself as he focused his eyes on her again “Tell you what, I'm not going to be your teacher or anything, but I will at least give you a little advice on things you can work on.”.

“Really!?” Sakura said excitedly, smiling brightly, which had Jiraiya have similar thoughts about how pretty she is.

Jiraiya nodded, causing Sakura to let out a cheer of victory “Fuck yeah, shannaro! I'm gonna catch up to Ino-pig in no time!”.

“Heh, not at the level that you are currently at. But let's try to work on that starting now. See that big tree over there?" Jiraiya said, pointing towards one of the larger trees.

“Yes” Sakura while nodding, she had gained more of a serious expression now that they were finally going to start training. She is going to take Jiraiya's advice, and start taking the ninja business a lot more seriously. Starting with her own training.

“Climb it without using your hands” Jiraiya said with a smirk.

Sakura turned to Jiraiya with a raised eyebrow “Is that even possible?" she asked.

“Of course. Look” Jiraiya said, before jumping over to the tree he had pointed towards earlier, with one leap. He then very casually started walking up that the tree by channeling chakra to his feet.

“Wow, how did you do that, Jiraiya-sama!?” Sakura yelled, standing on the ground underneath him, as she stared up at him in awe.

"Eh?" Jiraiya exclaimed comically "Don't you know that much even? This is the basics of basics. Every ninja knows it. It's a good exercise to start with. So start working on perfecting the tree walking technique, then you can come back and I'll help you out with something else”.

"Okay" Sakura said nodding eagerly "But I'm gonna practice here, shannaro!" she added stubbornly.

Jiraiya frowned at hearing that “No, I have important things to take care off. Now get lost!" he said, waving her off with an annoyed expression.

“Please!” Sakura pleaded again with those cute puppy dog eyes.

Jiraiya's left eyebrow started twitching due to getting even more annoyed. More so with himself than her. “Okay..” he said while thinking “Why the fuck can't I say no to her!?”.

Jiraiya sighed as he made his way to his little porch in front of his house. He sat down there, in hopes to see her fail and fall of the tree a couple of times, for some entertainment. He watched as she attempted to run up the tree, but she ended up slipping off of it after two steps.

"You suck!" Jiraiya said, as he laughed loudly at her. That had Sakura pout for a few seconds, before trying again “There has to be some kind of trick to it” Sakura thought. After trying again, using a little bit of chakra, Sakura was able to take a few more steps this time. “I think I have it figured out” Sakura thought with a smirk while trying for the third time. This time she casually walked up the tree, without any trouble at all. Jiraiya kept watching her, but he was staring at her ass this time, not even realizing that she had already learned the technique. He hadn't been looking at it before, since he was too annoyed to check her out.

“How does a brat like her have an ass like that?” Jiraiya thought with a perverted expression, admiring her lower back. Jiraiya is far from the only one who has noticed that she has got a very nice ass. Even Naruto thinks she is at least in the top 5 in the village, when it comes to having the best ass. As already mentioned, Konohamaru considers her to have the second best ass, only trailing behind a certain Uzumaki woman.

“I did it Jiraiya-sama!” Sakura said in a cheerful tone, while she sat on a tree branch far up in that tree, sticking out her tongue at him with closed eyes. That brought Jiraiya back to reality. When he saw her with that expression, he found himself gulping again. Could she stop being so damn cute all the time? He thought.

“Good, now practice it until you run out of chakra. It's a good way to practice your chakra control while also increasing your overall chakra pool”.

“Okay, Jiraiya-sama!” Sakura said cheerfully, running down the tree using the technique she had just learned. Jiraiya then went inside for a moment, wondering what was wrong with him. He didn't like that he was checking her out or having thoughts of her being pretty or cute. He had never been attracted to someone that much younger than him before. He is into women who is at least twenty five, but he considers them to be best and the most ripe at their mid thirties and even their forties. Maybe it wasn't attraction, maybe he just cared for her similar to how he has always cared for Kushina like a daughter? That's what Jiraiya decided was the case, as he went back out to watch her train while drinking sake.

Three hours later, Jiraiya found himself standing next to a passed out Sakura, laying on her back. Jiraiya didn't know if she passed out due to chakra exhaustion or just due to a lack of stamina. Either way, she was not in good shape for someone trying to be a ninja. He was thinking of taking her to her home, but considering that he only knows her as Ino's friend, and he doesn't know who her parents are, he couldn't know where to go.

Jiraiya sighed “Stupid brats, why can't you just leave me alone” he thought out loud. Sakura opened her eyes and pouted “That's not nice, Jiraiya-sama!” she said, sounding as if she was scolding him.

"Hmpf!" Jiraiya snorted childishly“I'm glad to see that you are okay, you should go home and get some rest now” Jiraiya continued, with the same annoyed tone he had been using for the most part since she got here.

Sakura took a deep breath before standing up. She brushed off some grass and dirt from her red dress, while she asked “Can I come back tomorrow?”.

“No” Jiraiya answered quickly, without hesitation.

“Okay, I will still come back tomorrow” Sakura said sticking out her tongue teasingly, the same way she did earlier “See ya tomorrow, Jiraiya-sama!” she said with a wave before running off.

Jiraiya just grunted in dismay, before face palming. He was wondering how he got himself in this mess. Was the ninja Gods punishing him for all his perverted actions in the past by sending all of the annoying brats to his house constantly?

Once Sakura got home, she enthusiastically told her parents that she had been training with one of the sannin, Jiraiya-sama. Her parents didn't believe her, thinking she was making the story up. Sakura was too tired to even try to convince them, instead she ate dinner, then went to bed early. She couldn't remember ever feeling this tired after training before.

After Sakura had left, Jiraiya was thinking about going over to Naruto's house to have dinner with them. He decided not to when he remembered that Naruto and Konohamaru seemed to be having some kind war with Kushina. A prank war which had really gotten out of hand. Little did he know, that prank war had ended several months ago. But due to thinking that whole mess is still going on, he ended up ordering in some food instead. After dinner, he enjoyed some sake, which he drank while scribbling down in his notebooks. He didn't feel the least bit ashamed, that he was now using Sakura as inspiration for a new chapter in one of his upcoming erotic novels.

Konohamaru, Udon, Moegi and Kushina

After school, while Sakura chased down Jiraiya in order to get herself a new legendary teacher, the members of the Konohamaru corps, chased after someone they thought were above that legendary ninja in status. The members of the Konohamaru corps, as we all know is, Konohamaru, Udon and Moegi. The one who they chased down is their big brother figure, and more importantly, their boss, Uzumaki Naruto. Naruto wasn't all too happy with that. They have already been following him around all day in school, whenever he had a break from classes. He has wasted almost seven hours at school day, and just wants to get to his backyard to get some actual and proper training done.

The three members of the Konohamaru corps caught up to Naruto in the middle of a street in Konoha, where he was walking with his hands in his pockets, looking mighty bored.

“Hey, boss! Let's play ninja!” Konohamaru yelled, grinning from ear to ear as he came running at him, together with his friends. That had had Naruto turn towards them with an annoyed expression "Not today, I have already wasted six hours in that damn school. I need to train".

"Please Naruto-kun, you never play with us anymore!" Moegi tried, as she even used the puppy dog eyes for effect. The puppy dog eye no jutsu had no effect on Naruto, though.

"Another time guys" Naruto said, before he disappeared using a teleportation technique, leaving the three members of the Konohamaru Corps behind. Naruto didn't exactly spend the rest of the day having a lot more fun than he would have if he had hanged out with those three, as he spent the day training alone like he does most of the time nowadays that Kurenai is always out on missions.

Naruto's self proclaimed subordinates, lowered their heads at another rejection from Naruto to even hang out with them. All three of them just wanted to play with their boss once in a while. They could even train with him if he preferred that.

"Boss has become such an asshole, always treating us like crap, kore!" Konohamaru yelled out in frustrated anger.

Kushina, who was heading back home after buying groceries, happened to walk down the same street with her groceries. She both saw and overheard their interaction with Naruto, and he was not happy to see that Naruto rejected to play with them once again. Especially since she has been constantly bugging Naruto to get Konohamaru over to their place again, so things can return to normal. She is tired of him avoiding their place, and she knows full well why he is doing so. Now she had to take matters into her own hands, to make sure that everything can return to normal.

“Hey, Konohamaru-kun” Kushina greeted him with a kind smile. Konohamaru and his friends had their back to her, but all three of them recognized the voice. They turned around to face her, before Konohamaru greeted her back, looking at Kushina with a suspicious expression “What's up, old hag?”.

Kushina gained a tic mark on her forehead, not only because Konohamaru called her that again, but also because Udon was blatantly staring at her chest, with a goofy smile. Konohamaru's lack of manners, caused Moegi to elbow Konohamaru's side “Hurry up and apologize, baka!” she yelled at him.

“Oh yeah” Konohamaru said scratching the back of his head “I'm sorry, I didn't mean to talk bad about boss like that. It's just that he never plays with us anymore, kore!”.

Moegi slapped her forehead with both of her hands, thinking “That wasn't what I wanted you to apologize for!”.

Kushina had already forgotten about the old hag comment. She was just happy to get this chance to see Konohamaru again. She smiled as she waved Konohamaru off “No, I completely understand why that would upset you. Naruto doesn't do much other than train nowadays. He is really focused on becoming stronger now, since he will soon graduate. Unfortunately that means that he doesn't have as much time over for his friends, and his family for that matter” Kushina ended hanging her shoulders “He should spend more time with his poor mom as well, dattebane!” she whined.

The three academy students couldn't help but nod sadly in agreement with what Kushina said.

"Hmm" Kushina said placing her thumb on her chin in thought "I could play with the three of you at our place if you want, our stupidly large backyard that Minato bought should be big enough for playing ninja".

She figured this was a win win sitatuon for all of them. They got to play, while she got to make things right with Konohamaru again. She would do so by making sure to let him know that she is not angry at him about what happened this spring. She will do so by just acting normal around him and not bring it up.

“What, really!?” Moegi exclaimed in excitement.

“Sure why not, I'm sure we'll have fun!” Kushina said with a bright smile. A bright smile that had Konohamaru avert his eyes from, as he was reminded of the reason why he had been avoiding her in the first place. “I can't believe I did all of that to her..” he thought with a frown. He was mostly disappointed in himself for crossing the line of what is okay. Even though he has a crush on her, and she looks like a beautiful Goddess to him, she is still the amazing fourth hokage's wife, and their great boss's mom. She is not to be treated like that. It's not right in his mind.

“Right, Konohamaru-kun?” Kushina said, as she ruffled the bangs of hair that stuck out of the top of his gray hay.

Konohamaru grinned “Alright then, old hag, we will be intruding on you then!”

"What did you call me!?" Kushina responded as she pulled Konohamaru's ear. She calmed down when Konohamaru offered to help carry her groceries. By help, he meant carrying all of them for her. Old hag is another nickname Konohamaru has for Kushina, and gets away with calling her that surprisingly often. He also calls Mitarashi Anko that, one of the scariest people Udon and Moegi has ever met.

Insulting Kushina like that was a way for Konohamaru to try to mask his crush on her a little bit as he still was a bit nervous around her due to his attraction to her. It was also an insult that didn't have any weight to it since Kushina may be in her early thirties, but she didn't appear to be a day older than twenty. Even so, Konohamaru gained a smack on top of his head from both Kushina and Moegi for that comment before the four of them started walking towards Kushina's house.

As they made their way there, Udon continued to blatantly stare at Kushina's jiggling chest. Even though she was wearing her green housewife dress and white blouse, that didn't really do much to show off her assests, he couldn't help himself.

Udon happens to be quite a fan of titties. The bigger the better is his motto. Being a fan is a bit of an understatement, as he in reality is almost obsessed with big boobs. He can't help himself as he constantly stares directly at them whenever a pretty and big breasted woman is around.

Udon has lost times how many times he has been reprimanded for it, but that didn't stop him. He couldn't stop. If he couldn't stare at them, then why are they always staring right back at him? Those big juicy melons are begging to be stared at. Grabbed, fondled and motor boated. Sucked on, licked on. All that good stuff. That is what Udon is imagining himself doing when he is staring at them. Not all big breasted women catches his attention, though. He is a man of some standards. The women can't be too old, or be too fat and they obviously can't be ugly. They have to be pretty, be in shape and he wouldn't look at anyone who didn't have at least large double C's. They aren't worth his time.

Even though the students in school didn't live up to his standards, he at least got a few big breasted female teachers to look at whenever they were in charge of his class. He is also around a quite lot of sexy big breasted women, thanks to being friends with Naruto and Konohamaru. Uzumaki Kushina, Mitarashi Anko, Ichiraku Ayame, Kurenai Yühi, Yamanaka Butao, Nara Yoshino and Moegi's mom, Yui. All those are some of his favorites to ogle. But none of them compare to his absolute favorite, Tsunade Senju. Unfortunately he has never met her in real life. He has only seen her picture in history books after reading about the history of the famous team that got the name "The sannin".

All those other women are nice to look at, but Udon wouldn't say he had a crush on them. With Tsunade he did, he had the worst crush for that big tittied babe of a sannin. Not only did she have the biggest set of boobs he has ever seen in his life, she is also the prettiest he has seen, and the rest of her body is just as perfect as her tits. His crush on Tsunade is based on pictures of her in her twenties, back when she was still in a team with Jiraiya and Orocihimaru. Udon is not an idiot, he knows that she must have aged alot by now. He also knows that even if she were still in her best years, in her twenties, he wouldn't have a realistic chance to ever be with her in any romantic fashion anyway.

He is regarded as a nerd by most in the academy, mostly due to him wearing glasses and because he likes to read and study. That wouldn't stop him from looking at her chest if he ever got the chance to though. And it didn't stop him from fantasizing about him being together with a young and sexy Tsunade Senju either.

Now in regards to staring at Kushina like that, Udon is actually feeling bad about it. He also thinks that it's wrong and disrespectful to do something like that to their boss's mom. The problem is that he just can't help himself. The worst part about that is that Naruto has beaten him up several times and even threatened to kill him, after catching him doing it. In the end, that is a price he must pay to do what he must. Because it's out of his control. He just has to look, when a big pair of titties like that is jiggling around in his line of sight.

Other than being something of a nerd and obsessed with boobs, Udon happens to be very smart and has something resembling a photographic memory. If he is shown something once, he will remember it detail, even if it's shown in the blink of an eye. That's has helped him a lot when it comes to reading and learning new techniques.

Udon is currently enjoying a peaceful life within Konoha, living with his parents and his two older sisters. His parents are both in their mid fifties and both are retired ninja. His parents are always kind and calm, he really gets along well with them. Less could be said about his two older sisters. Akane and Maho. Akane is the oldest out of the two, and she is four years older than Naruto. Maho, the middle child, is two years older than Naruto. Both of them have brown hair, which they wear in different hair styles. Akane has long hair, which she wears down, similar to Kushina and Mikoto. Maho also has long hair, but she will often wear it in a ponytail and sometimes twin tails. Those two are infamous among some people in Konoha as the two slut sisters. Those people are unfortunately all from families or clans that Udon get along the best with. All that gossiping is connected to one person, one female ramen chef at Ichiraku ramen, Ayame.

It was actually Moegi that was the one that told him about his sisters and what they had gotten up to. Moegi is big into gossip herself, often gossiping with Ayame. According to Moegi, they have been sleeping with all kinds of powerful people in the village. His sisters are most likely doing that to get ahead in their ninja careers. It makes sense because the two of them recently got promoted to chuunin while not being nearly enough to deserve that rank. Even Moegi fights evenly against them in spars, and she has just started her second year in the academy as she is in the same class with Udon.

That explains the reason why they sleep around with some of those men, but they don't just sleep with powerful men in the village. They sleep with pretty much anyone who they team up with for a mission, be it teammates or teachers and sometimes even their clients. There is no denying that they are just simply sluts. Udon has started avoiding them since he learned of those rumors. Not that he ever got along well with them before that anyway. They always made fun of him, calling him nerd and ugly and stuff like that, just because he happens to wear glasses and likes to study.

Udon has more of a sibling relationship with his two best friends, Moegi and Konohamaru. The three of them became great friends when they met on their first day of the ninja academy. They have been inseparable since then, always doing things together.

Other than looking up to Naruto as their boss, Udon also looks up to Konohamaru a bit. Other than being a pretty awesome friend, he also has balls of steel. He has pulled pranks on pretty much every pretty girl in school, pranks that involve him grabbing their butts, flipping their skirts and so on. He even used to do that to their boss's mom, Uzumaki Kushina. Now that takes balls. He seemed to have stopped that a few months ago, which may be for the best since Udon would like his friend to keep being alive.

It was scary how she would sometimes beat him up afterwards. Another target of Konohamaru's constant pranks, is Haruno Sakura. She is one of the popular girls in the senior class, a classmate to Naruto. Udon can't remember a day in school when Konohamaru didn't "prank" her. It was also funny to see Sakura's reactions to it as she was not a willing participant of it, to say the least. Seeing Sakura chase Konohamaru around or try to beat him up was a normal sight at school. Udon couldn't do things like that, he wasn't like Naruto and Konohamaru who seemed to be able to mess with girls without any trouble.

Udon's obsession with boobs is something that most people who knows him well is aware of. Kushina is one of them, and even though she isn't exactly thrilled to have him blatantly stare at her like that, she pretends that she is not noticing, because she knows that he doesn't have any bad intentions. He will get what's coming to him when Naruto catches him doing it again, anyway. Kushina can always count on her beloved son to keep perverts away from her.

Instead of getting angry at the boob obsessed sleaze, Kushina couldn't help but inwardly squeal in excitement as they made their way there. She had been looking for any reason to get Konohamaru back to their house, so that she could spend more time with him again. She still doesn't understand what her feelings for him means, all she knows is that she wants to be around him more, preferably every day.

Playing with them would also be a good substitute for her regular daily exercise. Her normal exercise is usually her dancing at home. She practices dancing all kinds of dance routines. Although mostly routines from western songs, Konoha-pop (K-pop) and various popular dancing groups. She still planned to dance a little later, but playing ninja with them for a few hours would make for a pretty decent exercise as well. Her dancing is something she has kept a secret from everyone, and she doesn't really intend to show anyone of her dances either. They are not the kind of dances that people would think that the “prudish” Kushina would practice. They are a bit suggestive, to say the least.

After arriving at Kushina's house, and after Kushina had stocked up the groceries where they belong, the four of them split up into two teams and began playing. After they had been “playing” ninja for a couple of hours, Kushina summarized that she had enjoyed it a lot more than she thought she would. The reason she invited them wasn't exactly because she wanted to play, it was only so that she could spend some time with Konohamaru. But now that she had played ninja with them, she definitely wanted to invite them over to play ninja with her again. After playing, Kushina invited them inside and treated them to lemonade and cinnamon buns.

They were sitting on a couch in the living room of Kushina and Minato's rather large house. Konohamaru was sitting at one end of the couch, with Kushina sitting next to him. Moegi sat between Kushina and Udon who sat at the other end of the couch. They were making small talk about how Konohamaru and the others thought of school and so on, while eating their buns. While they did so, Kushina was staring at Konohamaru while blushing the whole time. No one else, other than Konohamaru seemed to notice that.

When they had finished eating, Kushina finally realized that she had been staring at Konohamaru non stop. She turned her head and focused on the other two, not realizing that she had now placed her hand on top of Konohamaru's hat covered head. She ran her hand through the bangs of hair that stuck out from a hole in the hat and played with his hair while they continued making small talk. This time it was Konohamaru's turn to blush, something he had been trying really hard not to when Kushina was staring at him earlier. But at least she was acting somewhat normal again. She's always been touchy like this with him and Naruto. And better yet, she has not brought up what happened that day either.

After chit chatting for a few more minutes, they said their good byes as Konohamaru and the others took their leave. But not before Kushina invited them all to come over to play with her again if they wanted to. They all told her with wide grins that they would love to come over again tomorrow.

When they had left, Kushina sat down at the couch, wondering exactly what was going on. She knew that she wanted to get to know Konohamaru better and spend time with him. She knew that she had been dreaming about Konohamaru. Those dreams were mostly romantic dreams with the two of them going on dates, getting proposed to by him, but sometimes the dreams were are a bit naughtier than that as well. She has been in a really sour mood lately, mainly because she is upset that he has been avoiding her. But she couldn't possibly be in love with him, could she? She wondered. Whatever it meant, she decided she would take this chance and just enjoy spending more time with him.

A few minutes later, Konohamaru had returned to his home, a large house within the Sarutobi clan compound, where he lived together with his grandfather. The Sarutobi clan compound is located on the same street as Kushina's house, so it didn't take very long for him to get home. His relationship with his grandfather was anything but normal. The former hokage wishes to raise him strictly to become an outstanding villager and ninja that people can look up to. That hasn't worked out at all since Hiruzen himself is way too goofy and weird for that to work, not to mention that Konohamaru despises everything that has to do with that. Instead it had become more of a relationship similar to Naruto and Jiraiya's. An example of that would be how Konohamaru woke up Hiruzen this morning.

“Get up, kore!” Konohamaru yelled excitedly after he had snuck into Hiruzen's bedroom and then literally started jumping on him as he slept.

“Brat! Are you God damn retarded? Stop jumping on me!” Hiruzen yelled in anger, as he pushed Konohamaru away.

“No, you're the retard! Why haven't you made breakfast yet? You know school starts again today, kore!” Konohamaru countered as he sat on the floor, nursing his head which he hit lightly after being pushed off the bed.

Hiruzen chuckled. Konohamaru may not be the most well behaved or mannered, yet Hiruzen thinks he is perfect just the way he is. He knows that Konohamaru has goals of surpassing both him and Minato and an attitude of not taking any shit from anyone. He is the future of this clan, unlike his son, Sarutobi Asuma. While Asuma has gained a reputation as a respectable jounin, he was from what Hiruzen hoped him to be. The one that eventually inherits the clan leader position from him the day that he passes, should be at least powerful enough to always be a Hokage candidate. That's not something you could say about Asuma. If Minato was to give up his position tomorrow and the village were to decide on a new Hokage, Asuma wouldn't even be mentioned. Instead people like Jiraiya, Tsunade, Kushina, Kakashi, Gai or even himself or God forbid, Danzo, would all be brought up before anyone even thinks of Asuma.

While Hiruzen may not have any high expectations for his son, he does have very very high expectations of his grandson. He is the one that is going to be the future clan head. Hiruzen will make sure of it. After a little bit of something that would remind you of a drunken street fight, the two Sarutobi's had breakfast. It wasn't unusual for the two of them to act this way. Hiruzen even acts the same way with Naruto, especially after he came and challenged him to defend Kushina and Anko's honor. Naruto is like Konohamaru but ten times worse. Worst of all is that Konohamaru looks up to him and tries to copy everything he does. That wasn't such a bad thing since while Naruto may be a prankster and got a shitty attitude, he was still probably Konoha's biggest prodigy in decades. There is a lot worse people that Konohamaru could look up to. Therefore Hiruzen saw no reason to intervene with that.

Back to the present, Konohamaru had just made it back home where Hiruzen was, waiting for him in the living room.

“Where have you been? Have you been wasting time and slacking off?” Hiruzen asked.

“Shut it old man, I haven't been slacking off, I was playing ninja with Moegi and Udon at Naruto's” Konohamaru said in an annoyed tone.

Now that Hiruzen didn't mind. He knew very well the advantages of that game as he is the very person who taught the game to Naruto a few years ago.

“Atta boy” Hiruzen said, with a nod of approval “Do you want to train with me for a few hours before we get dinner or are you too tired?”

“Tired? Hah! Let's go old man!” Was Konohamaru's smug answer as the two of them headed towards a dojo next to their house. Konohamaru then trained with Hiruzen and studied it a bit for the rest of the evening until he went to bed.

Kushina's evening was even less interesting than that. She practiced some of her dance routines after Konohamaru and the others had left, until Naruto and Minato got home. She then prepared dinner for the three of them which they ate together. Naruto noticed that Kushina seemed to be in a very good mood this evening. It became obvious to him why she was in a good mood while they ate, because she told him and Minato how she had spent her afternoon. Apparently she had been playing with the three little shits all day, and planned on inviting them over again. Naruto had no problem with that, that meant that they would bother him less and as long as his mom was in a good mood again, then everything was fine in the world.

Afterwards, Naruto went back to training while Minato sat on the couch in the living room working on paperwork he had brought with him from his office. Kushina herself enjoyed a warm bubble bath before going to bed early.

Ino and Minato

The next day, the hokage of Konoha, Namikaze Minato, was enjoying a coffee in the afternoon in his office within the hokage tower. He had given out all the missions he had available to different teams and now only had boring paperwork left to work on. Minato wasn't too upset about that though, he loves his job and he loves being the one that everyone relies on as the fourth Hokage of Konoha. Minato doesn't only love his job, he is satisfied with pretty much everything in his life. He has the most wonderful family, being his beautiful wife, Uzumaki Kushina and his extremely popular prodigy son, Uzumaki Naruto. Minato loves the two of them more than anything in this world. The only thing he isn't happy about in his life, is his and Kushina's lack of a sex life. But to him, there is more important thing in the world than just sex. He still loves that woman, even if she is a bit prudish.

As Minato took another sip of his coffee, staring out the window at the village he is in charge of protecting, he heard the door to his office open.

“Hi Hokage-sama!” Minato heard the very cheerful and recognizable voice of Yamanaka Ino call out. He turned his chair around to face the desk, as he smiled at her“Hey Ino-chan, what can I help you with?”.

Ino smiled as she ran up to Minato, who didn't mind her visiting him at all. She is his favorite visitior other than his wife and son. Unless she is in a teasing mood, which is when things can get a bit uncomfortable and awkward for Minato. Even though she became a senior in the ninja academy yesterday, she still likes to sit in his lap whenever he is around. Today was no different as Ino sat down in his lap, facing away from him while holding up a letter. Minato gulped, he couldn't help but find this is a bit awkward nowadays, she was definitely too keep acting this way with him.

“Daddy asked me to give you this letter” Ino said as she placed it on the desk. She then turned to face the hokage and hugged him, while remaining in his lap. This was her teddy bear, her very handsome teddy bear, who had the most handsome son, who Ino plans to marry one day. She still wants to marry Naruto, even though she is mostly thinking about Minato nowadays. And those thoughts are anything but innocent, as they are often of sexual nature. Her crush on Minato has not lessened one bit. Instead, he is getting more and more attractive to her, every single day that she sees him.

The only reason why she has not done more than teasing him in the past, is because of who he is. He is the husband to the woman who Ino respects and looks up to the most. He is an old friend of her own parents. And he is the father of her other crush, her best friend who she has known her whole life. She couldn't just confess her love to him, and hope for the best. No she knows that she and Minato will never have a relationship like that. Even so, she can't help but wish that they could.

Ino smiled cutely as she stared into Minato's blue eyes as he reached for the letter. He opened and read it, while trying to ignore Ino's stare as she kept staring into his eyes intently.

“Looks to be work related this time. I wonder why he didn't come tell me this himself” Minato said with a chuckle.

“I offered to be his messenger, I wanted to visit you Hokage-sama” Ino said, she hugged him again.

“I certainly don't mind that, I enjoy your visits Ino-chan” Minato said, hugging her back. Minato let go of her as he placed the letter back on his desk, causing his body to lean forward a little bit. When he straightened up again, he saw Ino raise her head, moving closer to him.

Ino didn't know what was happening, it seemed almost as if her body was moving on it's own. She just closed her eyes, while she continued to lean in towards him. She then pressed her lips against his, as they met for a rather odd and quick peck. She couldn't stop it, and if she is perfectly honest with herself, she didn't want to stop it either. A second later, she was staring into Minato's very surprised wide eyes, as reality hit her. "What the hell am I doing!?" she thought, before she quickly got off of Minato and ran towards the door “Sorry Hokage-sama, I don't know what came over me!” she said, being close to tears.

She knew Minato would never be interested in her, he is married to the most beautiful woman in the village, after all. The very same woman who Ino looks up to and respects the most, she pretty much idolizes Kushina. Not surprisingly, Minato who is widely regarded as the fastest man in the world, caught up to her before she reached the door. He sat down on his knees and embraced her, allowing Ino to cry into his chest.

“What's the matter? What are you crying about?” Minato asked with a gentle voice as he comforted her by rubbing her back.

Ino sniffled out “I'm sorry, I didn't mean to do that” she said as she managed to stare up at him, even though she felt ashamed of herself.

“That? That was nothing. We have known each other since forever, don't let something like this make things weird between us. Besides, in some countries, a kiss is nothing more than a greeting” Minato said, smiling warmly at her. He knew that it wasn't okay, that she shouldn't have done that. But he just wants her to feel better, to show him that pretty smile of hers. He never wants to see her cry.

“A greeting?” Ino said with a giggle, as Minato's had seemingly helped cheering her up a little bit. She still felt so bad about what she had done, thogh. She knew her crush on Minato would never amount to anything since she thought she had no chance with him. How could she compete with Kushina? And even if she could, she wouldn't want to do that to her, the one she idolizes and adores. Minato surprised her as he brushed her tears aside and said "Yeah a greeting. I think in some countries they kiss when they say good bye as well".

Ino giggled again "Yeah, it was just a greeting Hokage-sama" she ended with a wide smirk.

"Are you going home now?" Minato asked.

"Uh-huh" Ino said with a nod "I was just going to.." she started when Minato pressed his lips against hers.

"Until next time" Minato said as he got up, turned around and held up his hand to wave at her. Leaving Ino to stare at him surprised wide eyes this time. Minato nursed his forehead as he walked back to his desk, wondering why he had done that. Ino then grinned as she ran out of the office, feeling like she had butterflies in her stomach. She had gotten away with kissing Namikaze Minato and he even kissed her back. If that was how they would greet each other from now on, she would have to visit him far more often.

Authors Note: In this chapter I used a lot of already written scenes, and added more to them. That is the way that it's going to continue for a while, until the story has caught up with “Sarutobi and Uzumaki” timeline wise, as that is the story that I had written the most about before. There will be more changes coming as well, which has to do with the timeline. One of those changes revolves around when Jiraiya, Naruto, Konohamaru, Kushina and Udon leaves the village in search for Tsunade. That will most likely happen a lot closer to graduation this time around, instead of a year before graduation.

Before I get to the next chapter, I'm going to proof read my earlier chapters and fix any mistakes. I noticed in the previous chapter, that I let more mistakes than usual slip through my proof reading. I will get to correcting that very soon, so that it will be a more pleasant read the next time you read it.

I hope you enjoyed this quick update, and please let me know in comments/reviews what you thought of the chapter!

Chapter Text

Chapter 8 – Kurenai Strikes

While Ino and Minato “greeted” each other in the hokage office, one Haruno Sakura was heading out to Jiraiya's house again, as she is walking through Naruto's parents huge backyard. When she arrived she found Jiraiya standing outside his front door. In front of of him stood Naruto's mom, Kushina.

“You have to stop teaching Naruto and Konohamaru-kun such improper and indecent things Jiraiya-sensei!” a very angry Kushina yelled at him, with her arms crossed.

“I'm innocent little Kushina-hime. Those two are out of control, they don't listen to a word I say!” Jiraiya said defensively.

“Then why do I hear about you taking the two of them with you to go spy on women in bathhouses?” Kushina said as she clenched her fist.

Jiraiya frowned “There is nothing indecent about that, they need to learn about the anatomy of the female body!”

“You lousy pervert!” Kushina yelled before pummeling Jiraiya, throwing a few hard punches to his face. Jiraiya took the punches like a man. Taking a beating like this was part of being a super pervert, you just had to get used to it.

Sakura was hiding as she watched Kushina stomping off after leaving a beaten Jiraiya laying on the ground, which was kind of a funny sight. Kushina was heading back home to meet up with the Konohamaru corps, so that they could play ninja all day again.

“Stupid perverts corrupting my sweet son and the innocent and cute Konohamaru-kun” Kushina muttered angrily as she left.

Sakura couldn't help but feel a bit bad for the super pervert. She knew that Naruto and Konohamaru were far from two innocent young men who had been corrupted by Jiraiya. If anything it was those two corrupting him. Especially Konohamaru. That damn pervert had spanked her butt again today in school. He did it once in the morning and once just before she left school. Luckily she managed to beat him up the second time, similar to how Kushina beat up Jiraiya just now. Then again if Sakura were in Kushina's shoes, she would probably do the same thing. Those perverts all deserved it.

Once Kushina had walked off far enough, Sakura walked up to Jiraiya who was now sitting on his porch, pouting.

“Are you okay, Jiraiya-sama?” Sakura asked.

“Yeah, I'm fine. I probably deserved that.” Jiraiya said in a bored tone, he then glanced at her “Why are you here?”.

Sakura smiled “I told you yesterday that I would come here again today.”.

“Right” Jiraiya said in a bored tone as he stood up “Well, why don't you continue practicing the tree walking technique? It will help you work on your poor stamina and overall chakra reserves.”.

Sakura nodded “I will try my best, Jiraiya-sama!” before going over to the same tree where she had practiced her tree walking yesterday.

Jiraiya sighed as he sat down again. He wasn't angry at Kushina, she had been the victim of perverted pranks similar to what Sakura has to endure at school, courtesy of Konohamaru. Konohamaru did it on Naruto's orders, something Jiraiya really tried to put a stop to. She also had the right to be angry at him for taking them on the research missions. Not that it would stop any of them. Jiraiya couldn't be upset with Kushina knowing all of that, she is like a daughter to him. She had even gone easy to him, especially if you compare it to the beatings he would receive from Tsunade in the past.

Jiraiya went inside in order to grab a water bottle, a notebook and a pen. Then he sat down on his porch again, scribbling down in his notebook while Sakura trained nearby. He didn't use Sakura for any inspiration this time as he didn't even look at her. He just let her do her thing. There was just one thing he took notice of, which was that she was getting pretty damn good at using the three walking technique. She probably have good chakra control or at least a good grasp of how to use her chakra correctly. She is probably ready to move on to the next step, which would be water walking.

After four hours, Sakura was exhausted. She was sitting down in the grass, a few meters in front of Jiraiya, panting as she caught her breath.

“I think I'm done for today Jiraiya-sama” Sakura said.

Jiraiya nodded “Good work, Sakura. Tomorrow you should start your training with some roadwork, then repeat what you did today.”.

“Can I bring a few friends tomorrow?” Sakura asked.

“No” Jiraiya answered quickly “You don't even have to come here, you already know what to work on” he added in an annoyed tone.

Sakura teasingly stuck out her tongue at him “I'll come anyway and I'll bring my friends too!”.

Jiraiya pouted “Just go home and get some rest!”.

Sakura laughed as she got up and waved good bye to him before leaving. It was fun to mess with him due to the way he reacted. She understood now why Jiraiya was a constant target of one of Naruto and Konohamaru's most brutal pranks.

The next day, Ino woke up at 7 to get ready for school. She had barely gotten any sleep during the night because she had been laying in bed, thinking about what happened yesterday. She just couldn't believe that she had actually done that. That she had kissed Namikaze Minato. Now it wasn't the most passionate or erotic kiss ever, but it was still a kiss on the mouth. Two to be exact, considering that Minato had given her a kiss as well. That second kiss wasn't something Ino put much thought to as she knew that was just Minato trying to make her feel better and not to make things awkward between them. Just like with that awful “A kiss is nothing more than a greeting in some countries” story.

It was her own actions that bothered her. Today she felt like someone waking up with a bad hang over and regret over what embarrassing things they had done while drunk yesterday. It wasn't kissing Minato that was the big problem. That was something she actually didn't mind doing. If it was up to her, she and Minato would be doing a lot more than just kissing. She finds him to be incredibly hot and handsome. Just like Naruto. The problem is that he is married to the sweetest woman Ino knows, Uzumaki Kushina, and is Naruto's father.

Ino felt like she had betrayed both Kushina and Naruto with her actions. It certainly wouldn't help her chances to get together with Naruto either, if he was to find out about it. Ino couldn't help but smile as she headed to school, thinking that what happened yesterday was Minato's own fault due to him looking to much like Naruto. At least Ino knew what type of guys she likes, powerful spiky haired blond men from the Namikaze/Uzumaki family.

While Ino went to school, Minato was in his office, going about with his usual business. In the morning before lunch time, he would assign all the available missions just like usual. Then the boring paper work started after lunch. It was while he worked on the boring paper work that he thought back on what had happened yesterday. Unlike Ino, he wasn't regretful or worried at all. While Minato has never allowed any other girl other than Kushina to kiss him before, Ino was hardly the first girl to try to flirt with him.

There was that episode with Mikoto going all fan girl over him in the past, then he had Anko living with them for a few years, where she flirted with him and Kushina both. Then there is the countless kunoichi who he is in charge of, most of which are very quick to jump into bed with any man they can seduce. Minato sometimes has to remind himself that he and Kushina, and some of their friends, are the unusual ones in this village. It's actually more normal to just sleep around at every chance you get. Minato, Kushina and most of their friends, have not participated in that, and has always been faithful towards their partners.

Now he finds himself with a bit of a problem though. That problem is that he is very attracted to Ino. He can't deny that she has grown up to become a very beautiful young woman. That didn't mean that he was okay with what happened yesterday. Just because he isn't getting any at home, doesn't mean that it's okay for him to start making out with Ino. Minato came to the conclusion that anything more than innocent pecks like yesterday would be taking things to far. More innocent pecks would certainly be welcomed though.

If Kushina has a problem with that, he can bring up the way she kinda humps Naruto whenever she sits in his lap. That's worse than an innocent peck. She says she only does that to piss off all of Naruto's admirers, but sometimes it makes Minato wonder. Unknowingly to him, he is right about wondering about that. Because Kushina doesn't only do that to annoy Naruto's admirers, she also does that because she has been fantasizing about having sex with Naruto, ever since she walked in on him in the shower. Her and Naruto having naughty sex, is actually her second most common dream, with her most common dream being her and Konohamaru being together in any romantic fashion.

While Minato doesn't know anything about Kushina's incestuous fantasies, he still thinks it is pretty fun to tease Naruto about the whole situation. That “moma's boy” is so overly protective of Kushina, and he can't handle any teasing about that fact. Minato has even seen Naruto kick someone's ass for just looking at Kushina. Kushina is always dressed in very boring clothing that doesn't show much of her figure at all, so it isn't like they are leering at her ass or tits or anything, they are just mesmerized by her pretty face. Minato honestly can't blame them for that, he is the first one to admit that Kushina is the most beautiful woman to walk this earth. Naruto being so overprotective of her has earned him a nickname, Moma's boy, which is something Minato likes to call Naruto to poke some fun at him.

While Minato continued to think away in his office while stamping papers, Yamanaka Ino's school day had ended. Not much happened in school at all, other than the usual boring lessons and Konohamaru running around spanking Sakura's butt. In Ino's opinion, those two should just hurry up and become a couple already. Not only would that get Sakura out of the picture when it comes to winning Naruto's heart, it would also allow Ino tease Sakura about her and Konohamaru more. That was something she already did because it was pretty damn obvious that Sakura didn't dislike Konohamaru's perverted pranks as much as she wants people to think she does.

Ino thinks Sakura secretly enjoys it. Especially she enjoys all the attention she gets from Konohamaru, which no other girl really gets from any other guys. Sure, Naruto has done similar pranks to Ino and most other hot chicks in the academy, but he didn't go after the same girl constantly. The same goes for Konohamaru, but he always comes back to Sakura for more. In Naruto's case, he would just spank or grab whatever ass he fancied that day. Konohamaru giving Sakura so much attention is a confidence booster to her. It pretty much confirms that she is good looking. Konohamaru isn't bad looking either, Ino, Hinata and Sakura's consensus thought of him is that he is very cute. His main problem is that he is three years younger and without counting Naruto who gets a free pass, he is the second biggest pervert the ninja academy has seen, after the super pervert Jiraiya.

Now that school ended, Konohamaru went after her again. Red faced, an angry Sakura walked over to Ino and Hinata, after she had given Konohamaru a good pummeling. She invited them to come with her to train at Jiraiya's. That was kind of weird, mainly due to it being Sakura inviting them to go to Jiraiya's place. How does she know him anyway? Did she actually manage to convince him to train her two days ago? Ino wondered.

Two days ago was was the first day of the new school year. Jiraiya had visited the school to give the senior class, which Ino is part of, a motivational speech. After school ended, an impressed or inspired Sakura, had convinced Ino and Hinata to join her as she chased after Jiraiya to ask him to train them. Jiraiya didn't seem very interested in that as he ran away from them, while screaming “Get away from me brats!”.

Ino knew from the start that Jiraiya or “Ero-sennin” as she and most of Naruto's friends calls him, wouldn't train them. He doesn't train anyone that isn't Naruto or Konohamaru. The latter was only included due to Naruto somehow convincing Jiraiya to let him train with them. The only reason he trained Naruto was because he is Minato and Kushina's son, otherwise he wouldn't. Jiraiya always barks about how annoying Naruto and all his friends are, while calling them brats.

He's also made several remarks of how “brats” like Ino had no sex appeal, unlike real women, which would be the ones he usually peeks on or leers at. Now that was just something Ino couldn't accept. The biggest pervert in the world was not allowed to not think that she, the sexiest girl in her class by far, in her opinion, was not sexy. Due to that, Ino has started teasing him a bit, mostly by making think that she is going to flash him. She have been lifting her skirt often when he is looking, but her waist and thighs are covered in bandages, she didn't show him anything more than you would see on a girl wearing skin tight shorts.

The point was that he was leering at her perversely whenever she did, and it was pretty damn obvious that he was hoping to see more than what she showed. That was exactly what Ino wanted, since that pretty much confirmed that the super pervert thought she was sexy. To Ino it's become a fun game to rile Jiraiya up that way, it was hilarious to mess with him. Another reason she is comfortable doing that to Jiraiya, is because even though he is a super pervert, he is pretty damn harmless. He would never actually try to do anything to her. At least she doesn't think he would.

Jiraiya seem to think that's something Ino does to a lot of guys, being a tease and what not. Jiraiya has said that he blames Anko for the way Ino behaves around him, since she is quite the tease herself and is something of a role model for Ino. He couldn't be more wrong about that, only he and the Namikaze/Uzumaki guys would ever see that much of her. As for Anko, Jiraiya would never get that treatment from her. Anko only teases Naruto that way nowadays, with Minato being her target back in the day. Ino has never seen her flirt suggestively with anyone else like that. It's pretty damn obvious that Naruto is getting that treatment from Anko because she is gunning for him, like every other girl.

Ino and Hinata gladly followed Sakura to Jiraiya's place, both curious to see if Sakura was telling the truth about her being allowed to train with him. Ino also couldn't help but think that it would be fun to mess with the perverted sannin as well, if she got the chance to do so. Hinata was also very excited to have a chance to train with her friends at Jiraiya's place. This time that had very little to do with the fact that she hated being at the Hyuuga clan compound. No, she was looking forward to training with her friends together with such a famous and respected legend of a ninja. But she also had one more reason to be excited, that reason was something she wouldn't admit to anyone, even if her life depended on it.

In recent years, some time after her father started treating her badly, but long before she had any real interaction with her new tormentor, Nagi, Hinata has started to get something of a complex for older guys. That does not include Nagi, who would be old enough to be a senior citizen if he were a civilian, or any other old men like that. No, the older men that she is into are mostly in their thirties, forties, with one exception as one of them is in his fifties. All those men are very respected and acts the way that Hinata thinks that a true man should act. Her best friends fathers, Inoichi and Kizashi are both very much included in that group of men that she has started to secretly lust for. Then there are some others like Nara Shikaku, Umino Iruka, Sarutobi Asuma and a few others, who Hinata looks at the same way.

But there are two that stands out from the others, the two who makes Hinata's fantasizes really go wild. They are everything that Hinata thinks that a real man should be, and they are also very handsome. Only Naruto can make Hinata blush more than them, and that's without them even trying. The two in question are none other than Namikaze Minato and Jiraiya. In her dreams, the three of them have gotten to know each other very well, and often share the same bed. In reality, she has never really had a conversation with any of them. And that's the other reason why Hinata is secretly very excited to train over at Jiraiya's place with her friends. (1).

“Think Ero-sennin is home?” Ino said after they had knocked on the front door to Jiraiya's house which was located in the middle of Naruto's parents huge backyard.

“I don't know, I hope so” Sakura said with a chuckle.

“Ano, i-is Jiraiya-sama o-okay with all of us being here?” Hinata stuttered.

Sakura shrugged “It's fine”.

Ino nodded “It's Ero-sennin, he is probably delighted that three pretty girls are coming over to his house”.

Jiraiya must have overheard them, because he opened the door “Pretty girls? Don't you mean three annoying brats, Ino-chan?” he said with a twitching eyebrow.

Ino giggled as she turned around and lifted her skirt “Is that so Ero-sennin?” she asked as she exposed her bandage covered thighs and ass. Jiraiya gladly checked out, as his expression changed into his signature perverted expression, as he leered at her ass. This is exactly the kind of reaction that she wanted from him. There is no way that old pervert doesn't find her attractive, she thought as she laughed at his perverted expression. When she lowered her skirt, Jiraiya started frowning again.

Sakura elbowed Ino lightly “Don't do that, he is gonna help us train” while Hinata was blushing, staring to the side. Sakura was worried that Ino's teasing would ruin her chances to get trained by Jiraiya, while Hinata was a little bit jealous of Ino. Hinata wished she had the courage to tease someone like Jiraiya like that as well, but she knew that would never happen. She is just too damn shy.

“Stupid brat, I guess I shouldn't be surprised that you do things that since you are part of Naruto's group of degenerate brats!” Jiraiya barked at her comically.

“Stop calling me brat, Ero-sennin!” Ino yelled, glaring at the old pervert.

“Then stop calling me Ero-sennin!” Jiraya yelled back.

With a huff Jiraiya asked “What do you brats want?”, while Ino continued to glare at him.

“We just want some help with our training, is that okay Jiraiya-sama?” Sakura asked, smiling cutely. Jiraiya's eyebrow twitched again since he knew he was going to let them stay, due to it being her asking. He couldn't say no to her for no reason. He was also starting to get a bit annoyed by the quiet one due to the way she kept glancing at him. She kept glancing at him while blushing slightly, then looking away. Just how damn shy is that girl? He wondered.

“Do as you like” Jiraiya relented with a frown “Hiashi's daughter, what is your name?” he asked.

Hinata stared at the ground, blushing, as she didn't think “the” Jiraiya-sama would be talking to her directly “I-It's Hinata, Hyuuga Hinata” she stuttered.

“Okay, then I know the names of all you brats” Jiraiya said with a sigh “Now, Hinata, Ino-chan and Sakura, go to the middle of my little front yard here” Jiraiya said, using the -chan suffix for Ino since they are familiar with each other.

“Okay” Sakura said as she and her friends walked out to the middle, then turned to face him as he stayed back at the porch.

“Now turn around” Jiraiya said, smirking. After the three of them had turned around, Jiraiya grinned as he said “Now without bending your legs, try to touch your toes”.

Sakura and Hinata did it without hesitation, giving Jiraiya quite a nice view of their rears. Sakura's was by far the most appealing sight for Jiraiya ,due to her wearing her tight dark green shorts, compared to Hinata's baggy blue pants. Ino on the other hand was staring at her friends in disbelief “Are you really gonna fall for that?” she asked while sweat dropping.

“What? It's a stretching exercise right?” Sakura said as she touched her toes with ease next to Hinata, who did the same.

Ino pointed at thumb at Jiraiya who was leering at them with his signature perverted grin. It was pretty damn obvious he was just telling them to do this so that he could get a nice view of their asses.

Both Sakura and Hinata stood up straight again as Hinata blushed even more now that she realized that Jiraiya had been checking out her ass out of all things. At the same time, Sakura glared at Jiraiya, while raising her fist in anger. Ino couldn't help but laugh at them “Well played, Ero-sennin!”.

“Jiraiya-sama, stop being a pervert!! Teach us something real!” Sakura ordered with a loud yell.

Jiraiya crossed his arms in front of his chest as he sighed “It's actually not a bad idea to stretch a little bit before you start training. Anyway let's see, Ino-chan and Hinata, do you know the three walking exercise?”.

Hinata nodded shyly while Ino said “Of course, my father taught me that years ago”. It was one of the first things her father, Inoichi, had taught her. Sakura felt a bit bad when she hard that, thinking she was further behind Ino and Hinata than she previously thought.

“That's good, what about water walking?” Jiraiya asked.

“Water walking?” Ino and Sakura asked at the same time while Hinata remained quiet. She already knew that technique as well, but she was too shy to tell Jiraiya and her friends that.

Jiraiya walked up to them “It's almost the same thing as tree walking, except you walk on water this time. Before you worry about that, the three of you should start with a little bit of running. Take advantage of this huge backyard, run a few laps around it, and if you come across the training maniac, then don't bother him”.

“Training maniac?” Sakura asked.

Ino knew exactly who he meant, it couldn't be anyone other than Naruto.

“It's Naruto-kun” Ino said with a giggle “He is probably training at his usual training spot. If we are lucky, we might catch him shirtless”.

“Let's fucking go!” Sakura said as she started running off, but got passed by Hinata, who seemed really eager to find out if Naruto was shirtless. Ino followed them soon after, but not before turning to Jiraiya and sticking out her tongue at him teasingly. Causing Jiraiya to mutter as his eyebrows started twitching again. Ino then ran past her friends as she was going to be the first one to get to Naruto.

Jiraiya scratched the back of his head “And they call me pervert..” he thought out loud. Hinata and Ino were going to be a problem. He didn't handle them well. Sakura on the other hand seemed a lot more easy to deal with. She didn't tease him at every chance like Ino did, or stare at him weirdly while blushing, which Jiraiya caught Hinata doing several times. If he didn't know any better, he would think that the shy one had a crush on him or something. He quickly shook that thought out of his head, as he figured she was just very shy. That could explain the way she acted as well, and it made much more sense.

The three girls found Naruto at his usual training spot, but they decided to leave him alone. He wasn't shirtless and he was currently training together with Konohamaru out there. All three of them agreed that it would be a bad idea to interrupt their training since neither of them wanted a perverted Konohamaru coming for them, or Naruto's anger directed at them. They were using his parents backyard after all.

They ran a few laps around the backyard, working up a sweat. After two hours of running, they stopped outside Jiraiya's house again. As they caught their breath, they saw Jiraiya sitting in his kitchen, eating snacks and drinking sake. Ino couldn't help but laugh at the sight, less could be said about Sakura.

Flustered and angry, Sakura walked over to the window and knocked on it “Jiraiya-sama, shouldn't you be helping us with training!?”.

“I never said I would, you decided that yourself” Jiraiya said as he downed the contents in his sake cup before going outside.

“Follow me then, you stupid brats, I'll show you the water walking technique” Jiraiya said as he walked into the forest of the backyard with three girls following him. He lead them to a natural hot springs, which was located about two hundred meters away from his home.

“This is a natural hot spring, one of two within this huge backyard. This natural luxury is the reason why I built my house out here” Jiraiya said with a smirk. While the girls paid attention to him, he walked on top of the water, showing how to perform the water walking technique “This is what the three of you should practice next. Every ninja should know about it. This is probably not the best place to do it since there are no waves and the water is shallow, it would be better if you find a lake or a river to train at”.

“Would it be easier for us to start here?” Sakura asked.

“It would, but it would also be pretty pointless. It's better to learn it properly at a real lake since in most situation where you will use the technique when out missions would be on a real lake or at the sea.” Jiraiya said.

“Isn't there a lake pretty close to here?” Ino asked “I remember Naruto-kun showing me one just outside his parents backyard”.

“There is, I can show the way. But first the three of you should probably go home and get your swimsuits, if you mess up you are are definitely gonna get wet” Jiraiya said with a loud laugh.

Ino smirked “You just want to see us in bikinis, don't you perv?” she said, as she couldn't help but mess with him some more.

Jiraiya sighed “I don't, besides, I don't plan to stay there after I have showed you the way.”.

Ino laughed “I'm just messing with you Ero-sennin, you can stay” she said which had Jiraiya's eyebrows twitch. She wasn't going to let him leave that easily, this was too good of an opportunity to mess with him a little to pass up.

Sakura leaned into Ino and whispered “What do you mean he can stay, isn't he like super perverted? We're gonna be in our swimsuits”.

“Don't worry, he is a super perv but he won't do anything to us, he is harmless. Ero-sennin is actually a very kind old man, I just like to mess with him because he acts so funny” Ino whispered causing the two of them to giggle. Ino meant what she said, and that's why she is comfortable teasing Jiraiya like this. Hinata continued to blush, but didn't say anything. She was actually looking forward to showing herself to Jiraiya in a swimsuit, and secretly hoped that he would be looking at her more.

“What's so funny? You are scheming something aren't you?” Jiraiya said with a frown “If you do something to me I'll send Naruto and Konohamaru after you”.

Ino started sweating a bit “Please don't, we aren't going to do anything” she knew very well that you didn't want to mess with those two. She has been the victim of their pranks many times. Sakura agreed with Ino, mostly because she didn't want Konohamaru chasing her around, trying to spank her butt or to feel her up. Something even Ino has been the victim of many times as well, mostly it's Naruto doing it to her but Konohamaru has done it a few times as well. Now that the three of them would be nearby, only wearing their swimsuits, that would be a golden opportunity for those two to mess with them.

Jiraiya laughed “That's right, put some respect on my name! This pervert has got some dangerous allies!”.

“Whatever” Ino said rolling her eyes due to him calling himself a pervert “Let's go get our swimsuits”.

Sakura nodded “We'll be back soon, Jiraiya-sama”.

Hinata waved while whispering in such a low tone that no one could hear what she said “W-w-w-e w-w-w-ill be b-b-back, Ero-sennin-sama!”.

“See ya pervert!” Ino added as the three of them turned to leave, lifting her skirt again for a couple of seconds, showing off her bandage covered behind as she left.

“Stupid brats..” Jiraiya muttered as he watched them leave, then he blew out some air “But damn if she hasn't grown up into one fine young lady. That ass is no joke..” he thought.

Twenty minutes later they returned, all three of them wearing t-shirts and shorts, which they wore over their swimsuits. Sakura wore her usual dark green tight shorts, Ino wore similar shorts but in a lighter orange color, while Hinata's shorts covered a lot more and was a lot more baggy. Jiraiya then took the lead as he lead them towards the lake.

Once they arrived near the shore, Jiraiya sat down and closed his eyes “Go ahead brats. If you need any advice you can ask the blue haired one. You know this technique already don't you?”

Hinata nodded shyly “Y-yes” she stuttered as usual.

“I thought so. I would be surprised if one of Hiashi's daughters didn't know about it already” Jiraiya said with a chuckle. His chuckle stopped when he saw Hinata almost wince at the mention of her fathers name. Jiraiya and Hiashi weren't good friends or anything, but they did talk every now and then. Especially back before Hiashi became the stuck up and boring guy that he has become today. Jiraiya, just like everyone else, couldn't help but notice how Hiashi had changed after his wife died. He became a stuck up hard ass who took everything way too seriously and couldn't even joke around a bit like he used to.

The reason he thought of Hiashi now is due to how he used to talk about his daughters. He used to always praise them and boost about their small accomplishments. His favorite back then seemed to be Hinata, maybe due to her getting her moms looks, as he often talked with joy about her. After his wife died, the way he spoke about Hinata changed. If he ever mentioned her, he would be stating that she was a disgrace to their clan, who didn't live up to his expectations. Hanabi didn't get any praise either, but at least she was “performing as would be expected of a Hyuuga in training”.

The way he talks about Hinata nowadays, and the way she reacted to his name, made Jiraiya wonder if this girl was being mistreated in any way. Other than what he can already guess, which is zero encouragement and constant reminders that she isn't good enough for him. It couldn't hurt to ask her about it, see if she wants to talk about it. If there is something going on, he would have Minato deal with it.

“When did you learn water walking?” Sakura asked Hinata “I don't remember, I learned it a very young age” Hinata answered. Meanwhile Ino bent over as she pulled down her shorts, exposing her bikini covered ass to Jiraiya who sat behind them. She glanced back at Jiraiya and eye winked at him. Jiraiya giggled as he stared at her wide eyed, his perverted nature took over for a second. Sakura and Hinata wasn't really paying attention to that as they started taking off their shorts as well. When Ino took off her T-shirt, she turned around and faced Jiraiya. Teasingly she lifted her T-shirt and stopped before she would expose her bikini top.

“Oops, I think I forgot my top” Ino said sticking out her tongue. She then pulled the T-shirt over her head as Jiraiya eagerly watched on. Obviously, she had not forgot her bikini top, but Jiraiya didn't know that, and he really hoped that was the case as well.

“Haha got ya!” Ino said with a loud laugh “Stupid pervert!” she added, pointing at him as she laughed.

“Stop messing with him, Ino-pig!” Sakura yelled.

“What was that, forehead girl!?” Ino countered as the two of them glared at each other.

Jiraiya sighed “As fun as your little show was Ino-chan, If you keep this up I'll have to talk with Inoichi about the way you have behaved today.”.

Ino frowned “Please don't do that Ero-sennin”. Her father would probably ground her for a month if he found out.

“Focus on your training then” Jiraiya said as he took a second to check out the three beauties from the current senior class in the ninja academy. There was no doubt in his mind that these three would be competing with Kushina, Tsunade, Kurenai, Anko and other village beauties for the title of Konoha's most beautiful woman in the future. Jiraiya would always rank Tsunade as the number one, but tabloid like newspapers which publish actual lists of beauty ranks yearly, most often then not, will rank Kushina as number one. Others has won as well, such as Kurenai, Tsunade, Anko and Uchiha Mikoto, but every other year its Kushina winning. (2).

After leering at them for a while, Jiraiya yelled “Get started, brats!” which had the three of them start their training. It was a good thing that they had brought their swimsuits, because both Sakura and Ino fell into the water the first thing they did. But after fifteen minutes both of them were walking on top of the water surface with ease. Jiraiya wasn't surprised, the water walking technique is not hard to learn when you already know the tree walking technique. And for some reason, kunoichi always seem to have a good grasp of chakra control. These three were certainly no exceptions.

“Seems like you got the hang of it, you should start sparring against each other, using only hand to hand combat. That way you will get used to fighting on a water surface. When you are done, go home!” Jiraiya said with a loud laugh as he turned to leave “Don't bother me more today, you lousy brats!”.

“See ya Ero-sennin!” Ino yelled cheerfully, as she jumped on top of the water surface.

“T-Thanks for training with us, Jiraiya-sama” Hinata said in a loud enough tone so that Jiraiya could hear her for once.

“See you tomorrow, Jiraiya-sama!” Sakura yelled as she waved which almost had Jiraiya fall over comically. He choose not to answer that, even though he wanted to yell back that she should stay away. At least she wasn't as annoying as the other two. Ino and her friends then did what Jiraiya suggested, which was to spar against each other on top of the water surface. They only allowed hand to hand combat and none of them went overboard. It was only to get used to fighting on top of the water.

At around 8 PM, the three of them headed back into the village. Or at least Ino and Hinata did as Sakura said she wanted to apologize to Jiraiya due to all of Ino's teasing today. Ino told her she didn't have to worry about that since he had enjoyed every second of her teasing. That's just the way it is. Sakura didn't listen to that, she was probably worried that Jiraiya wouldn't let her come over to train anymore after this, so she went over to apologize anyway. Ino didn't do much more that day, she just went home to have dinner with her parents, then doing her homework before going to bed.

When Sakura went over to Jiraiya's house to apologize, Jiraiya was heading out of his house again, this time to go freeload a dinner at the Uzumaki/Namikaze house. Jiraiya often did that, not because he was cheap and wanted to save money, it's because Kushina's food is the tastiest food he has ever eaten. There was just one problem though, which was as soon as he stepped out of his house, he found Sakura standing in his way.

“Hey Jiraiya-sama” Sakura said smiling widely.

“What now? I thought I told you people to go home” Jiraiya said with an annoyed sigh.

“You people?” Sakura asked with a raised eyebrow.

“Yeah, as in brats. Annoying little brats who never leaves me alone. That's you people” Jiraiya said with a twitching eyebrow.

“I just want to say sorry for how Ino-pig kept messing with you today. I didn't know she would do that, I hope you still want to train me after this” Sakura said.

Jiraiya snorted “She always does that, that's not your fault. I blame Mitarashi Anko who has been a bad influence on her, little Ino-chan takes after her. Also I don't train you, I'm not your teacher”.

Sakura hung her head which had Jiraiya sigh “I didn't say you can't come over any more to ask for training advice like you have been” Jiraiya said which had Sakura raise her head and smile.

“But please, don't bring those two over every time you come here” Jiraiya said with a twitching eyebrow “There is something wrong them!”.

Sakura laughed “I won't Jiraiya-sama. Just once in a while if that's okay”.

“Yes, once in a while” Jiraiya said with a nod “Now I need to leave, I'm going over to Minato's house to have dinner. Kushina will certainly let me eat a lot today after she gave me that beating yesterday. Knowing her she probably feels bad about it even though I definitely deserved it” Jiraiya said as he walked off, laughing loudly.

Sakura headed home after that, smiling the whole way. She had gotten to know Jiraiya a bit better now. She was happy that Jiraiya had pretty much told her that she weren't as annoying as the other two. At least that didn't mean that he hated having her around, even though he acts like it sometimes. With Jiraiya's help she was definitely going to get stronger, she already felt like she had learned a ton in just a few days.

The following day for Ino, was like any other day as she and Hinata did not go with Sakura to Jiraiya's place. She also didn't visit any of the Uzumaki/Namikaze family members. After school she just trained at home and helped out at her families flower shop. There was just one thing that was different about this day than usual. Normally she would always think of Naruto, just imagine his handsome face as he smiled. Not this day, the only thing she could think of was Minato. She was thinking about their two kisses, and instead of imagining Naruto's handsome face, it was Minato's face that seemed to get more and more handsome every day that passes.

The day after that, Friday, started out pretty much the same way. Until Ino decided to make a change to that. At 5 PM she told her mother, Butao, who she was helping in the flower shop, that she would be heading out a bit. Ino was going to Minato's office again, this time without any reason to do so other than to see him. She just wanted to “greet” him again.

Once she found herself outside his office door, her heart started pounding faster as she was starting to get really nervous. What if he would be annoyed by her showing up for no reason? What if he was angry at her for what happened last time? Those were some of the thoughts on Ino's mind before she took a deep breath and knocked on the door.

“Come in” She heard Minato's kind and gentle voice say from inside the office.

She opened the door to find Minato sitting behind his desk as usual, although it was a bit hard to see him due to the mountains of paperwork on his desk. Ino's worry of Minato being angry at her disappeared as soon as she saw him as Minato lighted up and smiled at her “Oh, Ino-chan? What are you doing here?” he said. He wasn't at all worried about what happened last time, he was very casual about the whole thing. And just seeing Ino made his day better as he had been buried in paperwork the whole day.

“Hi Hokage-sama, I just want to see how you are doing” Ino said as she walked towards him, then around the desk so that she could at least sit in his lap. She hoped she would get a greeting like last time as well though. Knowing where Ino wanted to sit, Minato turned his chair towards her to let her sit down in his lap. She did that, sitting with her back to him as Minato turned the chair back towards his desk.

“I'm glad you did because this paperwork is killing me. I don't mind the company” Minato said with a chuckle.

“You don't mind me visiting you, Hokage-sama?” Ino asked cutely as she glanced back at him.

“Of course not, why would I?” Minato asked in a confused tone.

“I was worried that you would be mad at me for what I did last time” Ino said, smiling.

Minato chuckled “You would have to do much worse things than greet me with a kiss for me to get upset with you, Ino-chan.” he said in kind tone.

Ino turned her body a bit so that she could more easily stare at him. She smirked as she said “I still haven't greeted you, have I? What kind of future ninja would I be if I can't even greet our hokage properly”.

Minato chuckled again “Well, you did say hi earlier”.

Ino leaned into him and stared into his eyes “That's not what I meant, Hokage-sama” she said in a cheerful tone before giving him a quick peck on the lips. She stayed close as she stared into his eyes while Minato smiled back at her.

“That's what I came here for. Good bye Hokage-sama” Ino said, then gave him another peck on the lips. She then got up on her feet and started walking towards the door.

Minato scratched the back of his head as he stared at her back “Are you leaving already?” he asked.

Ino nodded “I only came to greet you. I'll do that more often from now on if that is okay with you” Ino said eye winking at him.

Minato chuckled “You can visit me whenever you want, Ino-chan”.

Ino smirked as she thought now was a good time to give someone she actually likes the Jiraiya treatment. When she reached the door, she said lifted her skirt to expose her bandage covered ass for the hokage. She then stuck out her tongue and said “Bye!” before leaving.

Minato had been staring at her with wide eyes. He had been pretty damn chill about this whole thing before now. Now he wasn't so sure anymore. Ino visiting him more often could become a problem, since Minato isn't sure he would be able not to make a move on her. He couldn't deny anymore that he found Ino to be so incredibly hot. When Ino “greeted” him earlier, he was considering taking it to next step by giving her a real kiss. He even wondered if he could take her on his desk right here. Kushina isn't helping the situation either, if he had gotten any at home he wouldn't even be having these thoughts.

The question for Minato now was, where does he take it from here? Should he put a stop to it? Not make a big deal out of it and just call it an innocent greeting like he has been? Or should he risk everything by taking this to next level? Minato rested his hand against his forehead as he closed his eyes in thought. He already knew the answer.

As for Ino, unlike last time, she is the one that left the office without a worry in the world. She didn't have any thoughts about taking this further, she was just happy with what it was. And she was pretty damn sure about one thing, even though she is still in love with Naruto, she is also very much in love with Namikaze Minato. Who is to say that she can't have both?

That same day, while Ino visited Minato in his office, Minato's son was making his way to his usual training spot. When he got there, he found himself with some welcomed female company of his own, in the form of one Kurenai Yühi. Naruto has not seen her since March, and has kinda started to miss having her around. Not only for the conversations, but also for the eye candy. So he was happy to see her back.

“Naruto-kun!” Kurenai said in an excited tone, as she ran over to him. It's August now and she left the village to go out on those missions back in March. She has waited all these months to finally see her “beloved” once again. Needless to say, she couldn't wait.

“Hey, Kurenai-san. When did you get back?” Naruto asked, before she threw herself at him, jumping into a hug. Naruto awkwardly hugged her back after a second of surprise. After a quick hug, Kurenai answered his question.

“I returned this morning. I finally gained my promotion!” Kurenai said with a sexy smile. She left out the fact that she has been out here at his training spot since she had returned, just waiting for him. She had not even talked to her best friend, Anko, yet. Needless to say, she hasn't talked to her fake boyfriend, Asuma, either. Naruto was by far her highest priority, when it came to people she wanted to see first, after all these months.

“I'm a jounin now!” she added in excited tone.

Naruto rested his arms behind his head, showing her his signature toothy grin “Congratulations dattebayo!” he said, while thinking that Kurenai was a lot more cheerful today than he was used to.

“Would you like to celebrate my promotion with me, Naruto-kun?” she asked.

“Sure, why not? When and where?” Naruto asked casually.

“How about tonight, we can meet up at Ichiraku's at eight?” Kurenai said, feeling as if she had butterflies in her stomach. The location wasn't exactly randomly chosen, as she knew that ramen, and especially Ichiraku ramen, is one of Naruto's favorite foods. The only thing that beats Ichiraku's is ramen cooked by his mom.

Naruto grinned “Sure! Teuchi and Ayame will probably be delighted to get a lot of customers!” he said cheerfully, thinking that Kurenai would invite at least Anko and Asuma to celebrate with them as well. Kurenai had no such plans though. That's why she is here talking to Naruto alone, before she even announces her return to anyone else. She is going to take this chance to go out alone with him, to have what she sees as a date with him. Kurenai is not going to waste another second now. She is now going to set her plan in full motion, starting by making Naruto hers tonight.

“See you tonight” Kurenai told Naruto with a playful smile, while waving good bye to Naruto, as she left. Naruto continued to train until 7 PM, which was when Naruto headed home to get ready for Kurenai's celebration. When he arrived at Ichiraku's at 8, he saw Kurenai standing there, waving at him, while wearing a very sexy dress. Inside the ramen shop stood a very angry looking Ayame, who glared at Kurenai and a smirking Teuchi.

Naruto scratched the back of his head, wondering where everyone was as he walked up to Kurenai. He thought that Kurenai looked amazing, as she wore a skimpy and short black dress. (3).

“Hey Kurenai-san, am I early?” Naruto said in a slightly confused tone, still wondering where everyone else is. Naruto wasn't wearing anything other than his usual blue clothes. He wasn't aware that they were going on a date or anything like that, he just thought they were going to eat dinner with Anko, Asuma and maybe a few other of their friends.

“Hi Naruto-kun” Kurenai said with a smile “Not at all, you are just in time” she then motioned for him to sit down.

“Is Anko-chan and Asuma-san late then?” Naruto asked as he sweat dropped at the way Ayame was glaring at Kurenai. Ayame was like an overprotective big sister to him. Naruto figured she was getting the wrong idea about Kurenai and him, not knowing that Ayame had very much gotten the right idea. There was probably no one Ayame and Naruto's others admirers had to worry about more than Kurenai. Ayame is just like everyone else, very attracted to Naruto, and doesn't like to just stay as a big sister figure to him.

“They both had something else to do, they will join us later” Kurenai lied. She wanted to get Ayame to stop glaring at her, and she could let Naruto know that they weren't coming later, when Ayame wasn't around. Another pesky vermin in her way of her man, Kurenai thought, as she directed a fierce glare back at Ayame.

Naruto chuckled awkwardly “Okay.. Did you hear that Ayame-nee? You can stop glaring daggers at Kurenai-san now. Her boyfriend is joining us later”.

Ayame smiled when she heard that “Good, but if I hear anything about her trying something with you, then I'll send Kushina-sama after her!”.

Kurenai laughed nervously due to that threat, since she really didn't want an angry Uzumaki Kushina coming for her “You don't have anything to worry about, Ayame-san. Me and Naruto-kun are just friends, and like Naruto-kun just said, my boyfriend is joining us later.”.

Before Ayame could respond to that, Naruto yelled out “Hey old man! Get me ten bowls of beef ramen dattebayo!” as he figured he had waited long enough to get a taste of this heavenly meal.

“Coming right up!” Teuchi responded cheerfully.

“And for you, Kurenai-san?” Ayame asked, with a forced smile.

“One small bowl of chicken ramen, thank you” Kurenai said, with a forced fake smile of her own, which appeared a lot more natural, since Kurenai has had a whole lot of practice when it comes to fake smiling.

“Coming right up” Ayame said mimicking her father, before she started preparing Kurenai's order while Naruto stared at Kurenai in confusion.

“Is that all you're gonna eat?” he asked in disbelief.

“That's plenty” Kurenai said with a chuckle.

“Not everyone can eat the way you and your parents do Naruto-kun, a small bowl is enough for most people” Ayame said, shaking her head “At least for us women”.

“Maybe that's why you are all so weak” Naruto said shaking his head “If you ate like my mom, you might have a better chance to become strong like her”.

Ayame sweat dropped “I'm not even a ninja, I'm just trying not to get fat and keep a somewhat nice figure”.

“Let's hope you keep that figure, you look great Ayame-nee” Naruto said with an eye wink causing Ayame to blush “Thanks Naruto-kun”.

Kurenai frowned, not only because Naruto had just called her weak but also because he was flirting with Ayame in front of her. “Did you just call me weak, Naruto-kun?”.

Naruto glanced at her for a second as Teuchi placed a few of his ordered bowls in front of him. He stared at his ramen and said “Konohamaru can keep up with me longer than you can when he trains with me, what does that tell ya?” before he started shoving ramen into his mouth.

Steam started appearing from out of Kurenai's head as she boiled in anger, her face completely red “You think I'm worse than an academy student!?” she yelled comically. The funniest part of it being that she just became a jounin and the one who is looking down on her is also an academy student. The worlds strongest academy student, but even so.

Ayame couldn't help but giggle at their interaction, her earlier worries of Kurenai being out on a date with Naruto was now gone.

Naruto turned to her with a frown, after he had finished his first bowl “I'm not saying you are weaker than him, I'm saying you complain more than he does. Five years ago, whenever I complained to my dad about training being too hard or about some injury I received, he always told me to shut up and walk it off. Maybe you should learn to do that also” Naruto said as he started on his second bowl.

Kurenai glared at him with a tic mark on her forehead “I think you should consider who you are insulting like that, I didn't get promoted to jounin for no reason. Maybe I should show you why I'm a jounin sometime”.

Naruto grinned “You challenging me to a spar? I'm up for that any time dattebayo!”.

Kurenai nursed her forehead and sighed. This wasn't a good start to their date. “Another day, Naruto-kun. Tonight I just want to celebrate my promotion to jounin”.

Naruto nodded “Since we're celebrating I'll have two more bowls, old man!” he announced with a loud yell, causing both Kurenai and Ayame to sweat drop.

They spent another twenty minutes at Ichirakus, mostly to let Naruto eat his fill since Kurenai was ready to leave after she had finished her small bowl. The two of them were walking on a road in the middle of the village. Naruto was resting his arms behind his head, in a very carefree way, while Kurenai rested her arms below her chest, still looking a bit upset.

“Where are we going now, Kurenai-san?” Naruto asked cheerfully.

“The park” Kurenai said, smiling for the first time in a while.

“Are we meeting the others there?” Naruto asked.

Kurenai shook her head “No, the others aren't coming, tonight it's just you and me”.

Naruto stared at her in confusion “I thought we were celebrating, why isn't your friends and boyfriend coming?”.

Kurenai's frown returned “Because I want to celebrate with you” she said and Naruto couldn't help but think that she acted almost like a stubborn kid. It was kinda cute to see the jounin woman, act that way.

Naruto scratched the back of his head “I see, you are probably celebrating with them another time then. I guess you guys are gonna have drinks and stuff like that, is that why it's just you and me tonight since I can't drink yet?”.

They walked into the park as Kurenai leaned down and smiled at him “No Naruto-kun, this is the only celebration, and I'm celebrating it with the only person I want to celebrate it with”.

Naruto hummed as he started looking around the place, looking into all directions, he then pointed at himself in question.

Kurenai nodded “Figured it out yet?” she said with a giggle.

Naruto raised an eyebrow “I think you are talking about me, what I can't understand is, why?”.

Kurenai pouted cutely “What do you mean why? Aren't we good friends? At least that's what I thought. Maybe I'm the only one” she said before walking ahead of Naruto.

Naruto caught up to her “No I'm not saying that, damn it. I'm sorry Kurenai-san, let's just forget about what I said and have some fun instead”.

Kurenai smiled at him as she stared at him those large beautiful red eyes. She held his hand, then said “Let's just enjoy a walk in the park for now, it's beautiful place at nights”.

Naruto made a funny expression in reaction to Kurenai holding his hand, but only said “Okay” as the two of them took a walk in the park. Naruto wasn't nervous or embarrassed, he was just confused. Something didn't add up, he did not have all the information he needed to make sense of this.

Why was Asuma's woman walking hand in hand with him? And why did she want to “celebrate” alone with him? Maybe she was one of those girls his mom had warned him about. A girl who would try to get him to be alone with her, just to capture him later and interrogate him to force out all the secrets of the Uzumaki clan and his fathers abilities out of him. According to his mom, there were a lot of crazy girls like that out there. He had been warned that they could even be hiding among their friends, meaning that he wasn't safe even in his own home. He didn't think Kurenai would be one of them, but it wouldn't hurt to be a little bit extra cautious tonight, since she is acting a bit strange.

What Kushina had told Naruto was obviously complete bullshit. She only told him that because she didn't want Naruto to get seduced by the village women and girls. It wasn't fool proofed, but at least it would make things a bit harder for them to get their way. And it had worked out so far, since Naruto is still a virgin. Naruto believed her since he had no reason to doubt his mom's words, especially due to how so many girls always seemed to want something from him.

After leaving the park, Naruto asked “Are we done now?”.

Kurenai frowned as he held his hand a little bit tighter “No, we are just getting started. Is there something you would like to do?”.

“Train?” Naruto asked.

Kurenai sweat dropped “No, something fun”.

“Beat up one of the old perverts?” Naruto asked, referring to Jiraiya and Hiruzen, which Kurenai understood.

“That does sound fun, but I was thinking more of something fun we could do together that doesn't involve ninja training or fighting. Like watch a movie or something” Kurenai said, blushing slightly.

Naruto grimaced “Nah, fuck that. I know, let's go to this awesome arcade my mom always brings me to, lets go there and play some games dattebayo!”.

“Sounds good” Kurenai said with a kind smile. They went to that arcade and played games together and against each other for about two hours. It was all fun and games until Kurenai started sitting in Naruto's lap as he played a racing game. She was kinda awkwardly sitting on his left thigh, with her arms around him as he played. Naruto didn't really mind that since he was used to having girls in his lap. His own mom being one of them as she often sat in his lap whenever he and his parents were just chilling in their living room, playing board games or watching a movie. She also did it at parties, after a few too many women has been getting to close to him. Other girls that has sat in his lap are Anko, Ino and Moegi.

Anko doesn't just sit in his lap though, she likes to move her ass when she does that, jumping on him slightly or grind against him. Moegi just sits in his lap whenever she gets a chance to. Ino is another one who has sat in his lap, but she prefers to just hang herself over him, hugging him from behind. Thankfully Ino sits in Minato's lap most often, which wasn't strange at all for any of them, since she had done that since they were young. If anything it was Kushina sitting in his lap that Naruto found to be strange. Not that he didn't enjoy it. She might be his own mother, but she is also one of Konoha's hottest women. Unlike others, Naruto has seen Kushina half naked, most of the times by accident though. She is more than just a pretty face, to say the least.

What did bother Naruto about Kurenai sitting in his lap, was how all the teenagers in the arcade was staring at them in jealousy. Most likely jealous of Naruto having such a hot babe all over him. Those idiots probably didn't know that she already has a boyfriend and have nothing to be jealous of. They are just good friends.

“Let's go somewhere else” Naruto said with a frown.

Kurenai giggled as she got up “Okay”.

She wasn't worried about these people seeing her with Naruto like this. She didn't recognize any of them, most of them probably weren't even ninja. They probably don't even know who she is either. After leaving the arcade, Naruto once again asked “Where are we going now?” but this time he asked more excitedly since the two of them had really enjoyed their time in the arcade.

Kurenai smiled at him as she took his hand in her own again “You can walk me home, then you are free to go home and train since that's what you seem to rather do than celebrate with me”.

“That's not true, I had a fun tonight, Kurenai-san” Naruto said, showing her his toothy grin.

“Good, that was the point of it. I also had fun, I hope we can do this again sometime” Kurenai said, still smiling at him. The made their way over to the apartment block where Kurenai had her apartment. It was a large apartment block where a lot of chuunin and jounin lived. Anko and Kakashi to name a few other than Kurenai.

While they walked, Kurenai was thinking over what to do next. Their so called date, had not gone as she had planned at all. She figured they would eat at Ichiraku's then head to the park to make out. They mostly just argued in the park and ended up playing games in that arcade instead, and she had not even been close to be able to kiss him or tell him how she feels. It wasn't too late though, she still had a chance to give him that kiss now that they were going to end their date.

Once they closed in on the building where Kurenai lives, Naruto stopped, then said with a grin “Thanks for tonight Kurenai-san”.

“No thank you” Kurenai said as she was about to close the distance between them, closing her eyes and puckering her lips. Naruto must not have noticed that as he turned around and left “See ya!” causing Kurenai to kiss nothing but air.

“Bye..” Kurenai said, watching him leave. She then gasped in disbelief. Just what did she need to do in order to get him to realize that she liked him? Tonight certainly explained a lot of things, such as why none of the other girls has not been able to win his heart before. Naruto may be the hottest guy in the village, but he is also the most oblivious guy. With a pout she returned to her apartment. She grabbed a glass and a bottle wine, then sat down on her couch in her living room. With a sigh she took a sip of her wine as she started thinking about what she could have done differently tonight. And what she could do differently going forward.

She had to be more direct with him, not beat around the bush in any way, to make him understand her feelings for him. Kurenai knew she had to act sooner rather than later since the other girls, such as Anko and Ino, must be thinking along the same lines. Kurenai took a sip of her wine, as she wondered what she would do if the worst case situation happened. What if Ino or Anko managed to snatch Naruto away from her before she could tell Naruto how she feels? How would she steal him back from them then. Would Naruto even be able stay loyal to one woman considering how pretty much every single woman in the village would spreads their legs for him, no questions asked?

If Ino or Anko managed to get him, maybe she could use Naruto's insane popularity to her advantage somehow. It wouldn't hurt to have a plan b in case plan a, her evil master plan, were to somehow fail. She already have plan c in mind, in case it would be impossible for her to ever get with Naruto. That was to get Konohamaru instead since he is pretty much a Naruto copy with brown hair, and is kinda cute. This would make Konohamaru the second person that Kurenai has ever found to be attractive, other than Naruto. Not to mention that he has that personality that all the people have that Kurenai surround herself with. Naruto, Anko, Kushina and Konohamaru are all very happy go lucky people and very fun to be around. It would also make the whole “fooling around Asuma's back” thing just as interesting, since she could do it with his nephew instead then. Kurenai wasn't thinking much on that though.

That was just plan c, a plan she hoped she would never have to put in use. Her main goal is and will always be to get Naruto. She would like to get started again tomorrow but knew that Naruto would be busy the whole day as he would be training with Jiraiya and Konohamaru, like they do every Sunday. Instead she would go to his training spot on Monday again. After he is done training, she is going to try to get him out on another date with her again. And this time, she will not fail.

The day after, which was a Saturday, Ino did not visit Minato in his office as she spent both her Saturday and Sunday studying, training hand to hand combat on water, helping her mom in their flower shop and hanging out with Sakura and Hinata in the evenings. Naruto didn't see Kurenai again either today, but Jiraiya was not fortunate enough to avoid Sakura, as she spent most of the day at his place, training. That's something she has done every single day of this week.

Minato on the other hand, got out of the office early on Saturday so that he could go home and spend some time with his family. It was afternoon when he got home and found his wife and son out in the backyard, accompanied by Konohamaru, Moegi and Udon. Minato aren't sure if he should be referring to them as Naruto's friends or if Naruto's followers or subordinates is more appropriate. He was also pleasantly surprised to see that Naruto was actually at home for once since he is usually never home, spending most of his free time training out at his not so secret training spot in the backyard.

He walked out and joined them, finding Kushina, Moegi and Udon seated on the veranda while Naruto and Konohamaru were currently staring each other down, most likely about to start a fight for some stupid reason.

“Hey everyone” Minato said with a warm smile, gaining their attention.

“Hey dad” Naruto said nonchalantly before focusing on Konohamaru again “You will never defeat me you little shit!”.

“Hey Hokage-sama” Konohamaru said before focusing on Naruto, almost mimicking him “You were just lucky, boss! I will get you next time kore!”

“Hokage-sama” Udon and Moegi greeted respectfully with a slight bow while Kushina and Minato sweat dropped due to the way they acted. Kushina got up and gave Minato a quick hug and a kiss on the cheek “Welcome back, honey” she said with a warm smile of her own.

“Thanks, I decided to go home early today to spend some time with my favorite people” Minato said with a chuckle “I'm happy to see that Naruto is home for once”.

Kushina nodded, smiling as she stared at Naruto who was giving Konohamaru a noogie, which was him rubbing his knuckles on top of Konohamaru's head “He joined our game of ninja today”.

Minato smiled when he heard that and more so due to seeing Kushina smiling and seemingly being her normal self again. During summer and a few months before that, she seemed a little bit saddened by something and would get a lot angrier than usual if Naruto misbehaved or something like that. This week she has started acting like her normal happy go luck self, which may be due to her starting to play ninja with Konohamaru, Moegi and Udon. From what Minato has been told, they have been coming over to play ninja with her every other day since Monday. Maybe it was a sign that she missed being a ninja? Minato wondered.

“Can I join as well?” Minato asked.

Kushina nodded excitedly “Of course you can, now we can play with even teams!”.

The six of them then split into three teams with two people in each team. Minato got to team up with Udon, while Naruto teamed up with Moegi who wouldn't have it any other way. That left Kushina to team up with Konohamaru, who made for quite a scary team in Minato's opinion. Those two and Naruto are Konoha's biggest pranksters after all. It was probably best to take them out early, unless he wanted to risk being the victim of one of their pranks.

Each team got a paper tag which the younger teammate would wear on their back. Once the paper tag is taken by another team, you lose. Simple rules that Minato could easily abuse by using his speedy techniques, unfortunately for him, any use of chakra was banned. But that also made it easier for him to go after Naruto, because he couldn't escape using shadow clones like he always does during spars. With the help of Udon, Minato's team made quick work of Naruto and Moegi as Minato was able to overpower Naruto rather easily. After that Moegi came to Naruto's aide, completely forgetting about Udon who was able to snatch the paper tag off of Moegi's back.

With Naruto and Moegi out of the game, now they only had to worry about the two tricksters. They spotted Kushina alone, coming towards them while smiling mischievously. Both Minato and Udon expected some kind of a fight, but they didn't get that. Instead Kushina used questionable tactics as she pressed herself against Minato and hugged him tightly while giving him a quick peck on the mouth.

“Kushina?” Minato asked, wondering why she was doing this now and out here.

Kushina grinned “What's wrong?” she asked with that same mischievous smile.

Before Minato could answer, he saw Konohamaru running out from the forest, charging Udon. He couldn't do anything to stop him since Kushina was now holding him even tighter while giggling at him.

“Victory is ours!” Konohamaru and Kushina said at the same time as Konohamaru easily snatched the tag away from Udon who wasn't able to react in time to get away from Konohamaru.

Kushina then let go of Minato as she started laughing at him.

“You fight dirty!” Minato said jokingly.

“Everything is fair in a ninja battle, it's not my fault you can't resist me, honey” She said with an eye wink.

“Well, that's true” Minato said with a chuckle. What made this loss even worse, was that that was the most action he has gotten from Kushina in more than two years.

They continued to play for a few hours after that as they rotated team members around. Minato was having a lot of fun as he was able to relax and get a decent work out at the same time without having to think about work. He also noted again, how cheerful Kushina was the hours that they played. It made him really happy to see her back to her normal self again.

The next day, Naruto spent the day with Jiraiya and Konohamaru as he does every Sunday. They didn't get much training done though, as they were mostly just wasting time spying on women bathing in lakes and bathhouses. When Naruto returned home in the evening, he ate dinner with his parents and Anko who had let herself in to their house. The four of them then watched a movie together in the living room. Anko was sitting next to Naruto, glaring at Kushina who sat in Naruto's lap, probably just to piss Anko off. At least that's what Naruto thought.

On Monday, Naruto was heading out to train as usual after school. When he arrived at his usual training spot, he found a sweaty Kurenai practicing taijutsu moves. It was a sight Naruto gladly welcomed as a sweaty Kurenai, whose clothes seemed smaller somehow, was kicking her legs high up in the air. Naruto couldn't help but think that she looked incredibly hot and that it's too bad that she is Asuma's woman. When Kurenai noticed Naruto arriving, she stopped training taijutsu moves in favor of stretching. Naruto enjoyed that as well as a sweating, lightly clothed Kurenai bending in all kinds of ways as she stretched, was a sight he would never forget. If only he had asked her out before she started dating Asuma..

“Hey, Kurenai-san” Naruto greeted as he walked up to her.

Kurenai smiled as she walked up to meet him “Hi Naruto-kun, learned anything in school today?”

Naruto shook his head “No, my mom taught me everything they teach in school years ago"

Kurenai giggled “School must be boring for you then”

Naruto nodded while thinking “boring is an understatement”.

Kurenai blushed slightly as she said “I was gonna ask for a hug, but look at me I'm all sweaty”

Naruto walked up to her and hugged her “I don't mind”. He certainly didn't mind. Kurenai hugged him back, as the two of them enjoyed a rather long hug. After they let go of each other, Kurenai said “I won't be in your way while you train, I have a book to read”

Naruto smiled “Right” he said, before taking his shirt off, getting ready to train. Kurenai licked her lips as she sat down on a large stone and watched him with a longing expression. Tonight the wait would be over. He would be hers.

At around 8 PM, Naruto picked up his shirt again as he was ready to head home to get dinner. After putting his shirt on, Kurenai stood up, talking with him for the first time since he started training “Naruto-kun, are you going home for dinner?”.

“Yes, I have waited all day for my moms dinner. She is such a great cook dattebayo!” Naruto said with a toothy grin.

Kurenai smiled “What are you doing after dinner?”.

Naruto raised an eyebrow “Training obviously, I'll be back in a half an hour or so”.

Kurenai's smile got even sweeter as she leaned in closer to him, pressing her breasts together as she stared at Naruto with a sexy smile “You should relax sometimes too you know? Doesn't hurt to do have a little fun every once in a while”.

Naruto nodded “I know, but I haven't had much time to train this weekend”.

Kurenai raised an eyebrow “I thought you were training with Jiraiya-sama yesterday”.

Naruto sweat dropped “We actually didn't get much training done”.

Kurenai sighed “Well, I was gonna ask if you wanted to go see a movie with me, but I guess you can't if you're gonna be busy training”.

“Movie?” Naruto asked as he glanced at Kurenai's cleavage which was pretty much in front of his face, then he looked into her eyes again “I wouldn't say no that”.

“That's what I wanted to hear” Kurenai said with a bright smile “Let's meet up outside the cinema at 9 then?”.

“See you then” Naruto said, then disappeared using a teleportation technique. He couldn't trust himself not to feel up Kurenai's very large, inviting breasts which she had shoved in front of his face. He had fought the urge to “prank” her by fondling her fine assets, many times. The way she strutted around in front of him sometimes, she was practically begging him to do it. If only she wasn't Asuma's woman..

After dinner, Naruto changed his clothes. He put on a dark T-shirt with a red uzumaki swirl on the stomach and a pair of matching black shorts. This wasn't really Naruto “dressing up”, he always wore clothes like this. His usual training outfit consisted of a similar white t-shirt and a pair of dark blue pants. When he found Kurenai waiting for him, ten minutes before 9, outside the cinema. She wore an outfit that kinda matched his, almost. She wore a dark blue skirt, along with a white tank top, which had a red Uzumaki swirl on it, just like Naruto's clothes. (4).

This wasn't an outfit Kurenai had just picked out at random. She had put much thought into it. She was wearing Naruto's colors and his clan symbol. Secretly this was her telling others which man she truly belonged to. Her outfit was also sending Naruto's other admirers just who they were competing with, as her outfit really highlighted her long sexy legs and sizable bust. And the most important reason, she wanted to show herself off to Naruto.

Naruto's jaw almost dropped when he saw her, as she stood there smiling and waving at him. “Hey” Naruto said, wondering if he should compliment her on her looks. Jiraiya's teachings said that he should, but this was Asuma's woman. He decided not to.

“Hi Naruto-kun” Kurenai said, holding out her hand. The two of them then entered the cinema, walking hand in hand. Once they were seated inside and the advertisements started, Kurenai asked “Naruto-kun do you have a girlfriend or someone you like?”.

“What? No” Naruto said shaking his head. Obviously that wasn't the truth since he is interested in both Kurenai and Anko. He couldn't tell her that since she is already with Asuma and he thought that he had no chance with her anyway due to their age difference. He also did not want to tell her about Anko since he feared Kurenai could be spreading that around or tease him about it.

Naruto's answer made Kurenai both happy and irritated at the same time. She was happy because it meant that Naruto was single and wasn't interested in someone else. She was irritated because he didn't say that he liked her, even though she knew it was a long shot.

Kurenai wanted to know more about Naruto's interests, so she asked “What type of girls do you like? What do you like in a woman?”

Naruto didn't really think before he answered “A more mature girl than those flat chests in my class..”

Naruto quickly realized his mistake, which caused him to be slightly embarrassed. But when Kurenai showed him the widest smile he had ever seen from her and said “Is that so?” in happy tone, he returned to his normal confident self.

Not much happened while they watched the movie other than Kurenai being very adamant about them holding hands as they watched the movie. When the movie ended and they left the cinema, they still held hands. Naruto walked Kurenai back to her apartment, just like he did last time, except now they were holding hands. When they reached Kurenai's apartment, she bit her lip.

Now was the time, now that they neared the stairs to Kurenai's apartment complex.

"See ya, Kurenai-san!" Naruto said with another one of his toothy grin. Kurenai didn't let get of his hand though, he wasn't getting away this time. Instead she leaned down and asked “Naruto-kun, when you said you liked more mature girls earlier..”

“Yeah?” Naruto said in a bored tone, yawning.

“Does that mean that you like older girls, perhaps someone my age?” Kurenai asked while blushing, she felt her heartbeat raise as she waited for Naruto's response. Naruto blushed slightly when he heard the question, which surprised Kurenai a little, she rarely saw him embarrassed or blushing for that matter. Naruto composed himself to the best of his ability and cleared his throat before saying “Why do you ask dattebayo?

Naruto inwardly cursed at himself for letting his verbal tic slip out, people that knew him and his mom knew that their verbal tics mostly slipped out when they were excited or nervous.

“Because I.. uhm..” Kurenai had to pause due how nervous she was, this was uncharacteristic of her as well. She was now blushing an even deeper shade of red than earlier. Naruto was about to ask her if she was okay, fearing that she may be sick, when Kurena composed herself somewhat. She put her hands on Naruto's shoulder and leaned down to stare into his eyes “I'm in love with you Naruto-kun, I have been in love with you for a very long time!”.

Kurenai expected Naruto to be staring at her in surprise and with a dropped jaw, which he did for about a half second before his usual confidence returned. Naruto couldn't believe what he had just heard, he must be dreaming or something. Naruto wouldn't let a chance like this slip past him though.

He smiled at her as he rested his arms behind his head “When I said I liked older girls, I was actually thinking of you, Kurenai-chan” Naruto made sure to drag out the “chan” suffix for effect.

That was exactly what Kurenai wanted to hear, she wouldn't let Naruto get a chance to take that back as she leaned in and kissed him. Naruto kissed her back as Kurenai forced her tongue inside his mouth. They kissed for ten seconds before Kurenai pulled back. She was still blushing as she stared at Naruto with a lusty expression, she asked “You are okay with me being your girlfriend then?”

“Of course!” Naruto said happily, resting his arms behind his head “I can't believe my girlfriend is such a babe dattebayo!”

Kurenai moved in for another kiss when she heard that. They were kissing in the middle of the street outside of her apartment without a care in the world for about a minute. After the kiss, they said their good byes but not before promising to see each other tomorrow, out at Naruto's training spot.

Kurenai returned to her apartment and got herself a glass of wine again as she sat down on her couch. She was smirking victoriously as she took a sip of her wine this time. She couldn't help but laugh when she thought back on what Naruto had told her, that he had been into her all along. She had spent years planning this whole thing out when all she had to was to tell him that she liked him earlier. This was a good day for Kurenai and now she wouldn't have to ever think about plan b and c again.

Naruto was running home with a stupid grin of his face, overjoyed with the fact that he had just made out with Kurenai and that she was now his girlfriend. He had completely forgotten about the fact that Kurenai is still, supposedly, Asuma's girlfriend.

Earlier that same Monday, when Naruto was enjoying a date with his new older girlfriend, Minato was enduring another long and boring day in the hokage office, assigning missions to different teams and doing a lot of paperwork. Always paperwork..

It was boring until about an hour before he was going home, as he got another visit from a certain blond girl, who has been on his mind a lot lately. Ino smiled cutely after she had closed the door behind her, walking towards Minato “Hi, Hokage-sama”.

“Hey there Ino-chan, what can I help you with?” Minato greeted with his usual warm smile.

“Nothing, I'm just here to see you” Ino said with an eye wink as she made her way over to Minato's desk. She walked around it while Minato turned his office chair to desk her, to let her sit down in his lap. Instead of sitting down in his lap like usual, she stood in front of him.

“Uhm Hokage-sama, there is something you can do for me” Ino said, acting shy which was just acting on her part. She was going to tease the blond hokage a little before she gets her kisses this time.

“What's that?” Minato asked as Ino lifted her skirt, exposing her bandage covered thighs.

“Ino-chan?” Minato asked as he glanced at her thighs.

Ino smirked as she started pulling on the bandage “I think I got a bug bite on my thighs, would you mind taking a look for me?” she purred as she started unwrapping the bandage.

Minato stopped her by grabbing her by the wrist gently “Why don't you ask Butao-chan for help with that?” he asked with a chuckle.

Ino let go of the bandage as Minato let go of her wrist. She then got into his lap, whispering into his ear “Why? Don't you want to take a look, Mi-Na-To-kun” she purred his name slowly, calling him by his name instead of his title, which was what she always did when she fantasized about him

Minato's eyes widened for a second, but he didn't get a chance to say anything before Ino gave him a quick peck on the mouth. She stared him into the eyes while giggling as their noses touched “Ino-chan?” Minato asked. Ino answered him by giving him another quick peck on the mouth, before jumping off of him.

“See you tomorrow, Hokage-sama!” Ino said cheerfully as she waved good bye, while walking out of the office with an extra sway in her hips.

Minato was dumbfounded as he stared at her with an open mouth. This was not good. He didn't know how long he could keep himself from doing something with Ino that he knew he would regret later on. Her flirting certainly isn't helping him either.

Ino was smiling all the way home, happy with the reaction she got from Minato. What she did with Minato felt so wrong, yet so right at the same time. She was fully aware of their age difference, the fact that Minato is married, that he is Naruto's father and a close friend to her own parents. That didn't matter to her, she wanted her teddy bear. No, teddy bear was no longer the right thing to call him. She wanted her hunk, her handsome blond hunk of a man, all to herself. Those were Ino's thoughts as she headed home to have dinner with her parents.

Tuesday, the next day in the afternoon, Kurenai is currently heading to Naruto's usual training spot in hopes to pick up where they left things last night. As she is walking through his parents backyard to get there, she heard the voice of one of her good friends.

“Kurenai-chan, Hokage-sama wants to talk to you” Uzuki Yugao said as she stood on a tree branch high up in a tree, wearing her usual anbu outfit and mask.

“Got it, Yugao” Kurenai said. Yugao then disappeared using a teleportation technique. Kurenai was happy that Yugao left so quickly, so that she wouldn't interfere with her alone with Naruto. Even though Yugao is dating a man by the name of Hayate, Kurenai knows that Yugao wants Naruto just as much as any other girl.

“Damn it, I just got back!” Kurenai cursed, knowing that she was likely going to get sent out on a mission again. She couldn't turn down a mission from the Hokage either, not after everything he had done for her. Kurenai hurried over to Naruto's training spot, where she found him doing push ups while being shirtless.

Her eyes widened as she licked her lips. She then smacked herself on her forehead as she didn't have time to stand here to check out her handsome boyfriend.

“Naruto-kun” Kurenai said, gaining his attention.

“Hey Kurenai-chan” Naruto said jumping up to a standing position, grinning at her. He walked over to her and said “Wanna make out?”.

Kurenai nodded as she leaned down and frenched him. She pulled back after about half a minute of making out with him “I would love to stay here and make out with you for hours, but I can't. Your father just called me to his office. I just wanted to say good bye since I'm likely going out on another mission” Kurenai said in a dejected tone.

“That sucks” Naruto said with a frown “We haven't even been together a day yet and you're already leaving. I can go talk to dad, tell him to send out someone else”.

Kurenai shook her head “No, that wouldn't do us any good. That would just raise questions on why you are asking him for my sake. Also I can't refuse a mission from your father after everything he has done to me. He is pretty much the reason I'm a jounin now”.

Naruto raised an eyebrow “Raise questions? Who cares..”.

Kurenai chuckled “Are you ready to tell Kushina-sama and Anko-chan about us?” she asked.

Naruto scratched the back of his head in thought “I don't think Anko-chan would care, but my mom would probably kill us. You're right Kurenai-chan”.

Kurenai sighed when she heard that. Anko would be a much bigger problem than Kushina if they found out. Kushina would likely just get angry at them but get over it at some point, Anko on the other hand would probably never speak to Kurenai again if she found out. This was Naruto's obliviousness playing a part again. How could he not realize that Anko likes him at this point? Kurenai wondered.

“I just wanted to say good bye before I leave” Kurenai said.

Naruto nodded “Good bye, take care out there Kurenai-chan”.

Kurenai smiled “I will” she said as she leaned down and kissed him again. She then turned around to leave. After walking about ten meters away from Naruto, she almost walked into Anko who ran up towards them. She rain straight past Kurenai, towards Naruto, who had gone back to doing push ups, then threw herself at him. She hugged him as she laid on top of him.

“Hey handsome, wanna train with your favorite jounin babe?” she purred into his ear.

Kurenai stopped and glanced at them. She couldn't help but glare at Anko, not liking how she always flirted with Naruto like that. It was even worse now that she and Naruto are together. She wanted nothing more than to go over there and push her off of him, telling her to stay away from her man. She couldn't do that now, could she? She is supposedly together with Asuma as far as the others know. If they find about her and Naruto, how is she going to have fun sneaking around with Naruto behind Asuma's back? Asuma deserved what Kurenai had planned for him, in her mind. She had endured almost two years pretending to be his girlfriend. Two years where she had to pretend to be the girlfriend of a man she finds to be disgusting. She despises him. She doesn't even think he has the right to be called a man as he certainly doesn't act like one. Kurenai is going to let him know what a real man is like, and show it to him.

“Sure Anko-chan, but I can't train with you on top of me” Naruto said with a laugh.

“Sure you can, you should get used to me being on top of you” Anko said with a playful smile.

“If anyone's going to be on top, it'll be me, Anko-chan” Naruto said as he lifted his body off the ground and threw her off.

Anko just laid there on her back, smirking “Come get on top then, Naruto-kun”.

Kurenai gritted her teeth as she turned to leave. She didn't want to see another second of Anko's usual flirting and teasing. She would need to have a talk with Naruto about that when she gets back. When she arrived at Minato's office a few minutes later, she wasn't surprised at all when he told her that he had a mission for her. It would be another high ranking mission, an A rank mission, that she along with two chuunin, would take on. One of her teammates that she was in charge of during this mission was none other than her very good friend, Inuzuka Hana. Hana is a bit younger than Kurenai and hasn't been a chuunin for more than few years. Even so, she is one of the most talented chuunin that Konoha has to offer, and she will most definitely make jounin in the near future as well. She couldn't ask for a better teammate.

Unfortunately for Kurenai, this mission was just the first out of many. Since it's Kurenai's wish to become a jounin teacher, and has requested to get a team consisting of members from this year's senior class, Minato wants her to get as much experience leading a team as a jounin as possible, before she takes on a genin team. It looked like she would once again be out on missions for months to come.

While Kurenai left on her mission, Naruto and Anko were training in the backyard. After Anko had her few minutes of fun when she got there, she started training seriously as well. She knew Naruto wouldn't have it any other way. Even she would be the victim of one of his pranks if she got in the way of his training. You don't disturb his training for too long and get away with it after all. Just training with Naruto was enough for her, she just loved being around him. Naruto is her guy, her future boyfriend and hopefully future husband. She wasn't going to lose him to anyone, at least not without a fight.

She has many rivals, she is well aware of that fact. Anko considers every single female of the village to be her rival, except maybe Kurenai. She used to think that she didn't have to worry about Kurenai since she always figured she would end up with Asuma. When they eventually did get together on Naruto's birthday about two years ago, that's when Anko started having some seconds thoughts about that, weirdly enough. Anko has lost count on how many times she has come out here to where Naruto trains, only to find Kurenai nearby, reading or pretending to read while she is watching Naruto train. As far as Anko is aware, that seemed to start around when Kurenai and Asuma announced that they were a couple.

Kurenai has told Anko that she is out there with Naruto for two reasons. One reason being that she liked to read out there since its so peaceful and quiet. The second reason being that she wanted to do Kushina a favor by keeping women like Anko away from Naruto. Anko doesn't really have any reason not to believe her, but the fact that she is out here with Naruto so often, has added her into the mix of potential rivals when it comes to Naruto's love.

All other women in the village are included as potential rivals. Even Kushina, or especially Kushina if you ask Anko. In her opinion she doesn't look at him the way a mother should look at a son. It's also not normal how possessive she is of him, and how damn close she can get with him asa well. She has seen that gorgeous redhead grind her ass on Naruto when she sits in her lap. She would do it sneakily, when others were watching, so that she she could just say that she was only doing it to piss of all of his admirers. Anko didn't buy that though, she is pretty damn sure that Kushina wants Naruto all for herself, in every single way. Not that she blames her, she would probably act the same way if she was in her position. One big problem about Kushina is that she is so damn beautiful, and when she wants to be, she can be so damn sexy as well. Considering that Naruto is quite the momma's boy, she considers Kushina to be her biggest rival. Even though she is his mother.

Anko wouldn't blame Naruto either if Kushina managed to seduce him. If she were in his shoes, she would have most likely already made a move on her. Especially since she is pretty much asking for it. Anko has a little secret when it comes to Kushina, or both of Naruto's parents. She actually lived in their house for a few years after Naruto had just been born. That was a few years after Orochimaru had defected the village and abandoned Anko as she left her to fend for herself. She was found by Konoha ninja in one of Orochimaru's abandoned bases, then brought back to Konoha. When the people of Konoha found out that she used to be trained by Orochimaru, the traitor, some of them started to shun her. They would insult her and throw things at her. At this point Anko was still very young and she had no family left in Konoha as all of them had died a few years before she even met Orochimaru.

Even though the third hokage had offered to give Anko an apartment to stay in, she ended up living with the Namikaze/Uzumaki family. That was after Kushina witnessed someone throwing fruits at Anko and insulting her. Let's just say that person had to stay in the hospital for a few weeks after that, and never insulted someone in front of Kushina again. Kushina felt bad for Anko, knowing all about how it felt to be treated like an outsider in this village. So she was the one that took her in and became something a big sister figure to Anko. Minato also cared for her, he is probably the sweetest man she has ever met in her life. He is too damn kind for in his own good.

Kushina and Minato became two people Anko could rely on, they were her new family. And back then, their cute baby, Naruto, was her little brother that she would protect with her life. Of course when he later grew up to become the hottest stud in all of Konoha, he lost that title of little brother. Instead he got the title of future boyfriend. Anko wasn't surprised to see Naruto grow up to become so handsome. His parents were the best looking people in Konoha as well. Kushina is the most beautiful woman Anko has ever seen, she thinks she is nowhere near as pretty as her. A thought that many men might not fully agree with since most men find Anko to be incredibly beautiful as well. And Minato was the most handsome man, until his son took that title. It made sense to Anko that Naruto became so good looking, since he had Minato's hair and eyes and Kushina's facial structure.

It was Anko's admiration for Naruto's parents that eventually caused her to move out. You see the way she flirts with Naruto nowadays, is something she used to do with both Kushina and Minato in the past. She couldn't help herself, she was in love with both of them. Anko didn't consider herself to be bi-sexual, or well at least she didn't think she was one. Kushina is the only woman she has ever looked at that way. One of her favorite fantasies about those two, was to have a threesome with them.

After a year of constant flirting, and one day where Anko was fondling Kushina's breasts in one of the hot springs in their backyard, and later on that day she had gotten very friendly with Minato on the couch, Kushina had enough. She got Anko her own apartment after that, but let her know that she would always be part of their family and would always be welcomed in her home. She just wasn't allowed to come on to them like that anymore. Anko accepted that, and her moving out might have been for the best anyway, since Naruto grew up to be such as stud later on. It would be weird if she was still living in the house, like a stepsister or something. Now he was fair game.

Even though Anko had stopped flirting with Kushina and Minato many years ago, she never stopped thinking that the two of them are fucking sexy. That threesome is still one of her favorite fantasies, along with all of her fantasies with Naruto that could be anything from them just making out to “doing the nasty”.

Anko and Naruto ended their six hour long training session with a spar. A spar that Naruto won as he stood in front of Anko, pointing a kunai to her neck. He obviously wasn't going to use it, it was just to show that he could, and that he had won. Anko used to win the spars against Naruto all the time before, but nowadays Naruto could win against her about half the time they spar. That just motivated Anko to get stronger, she didn't want Naruto to surpass her just yet.

“I win Anko-chan” Naruto said with confident smirk as he lowered his hand and put the kunai back into his kunai and shuriken pouch.

“You sure about that?” Anko said.

“Didn't I?” Naruto asked in return.

“Did you?” Anko said as she opened her trench coat, flashing Naruto her tits of which he could easily see the whole shape of as they were only covered by an almost transparent skin tight body armor. Luckily or unluckily depending on how you see it, he couldn't see her nipples as she at least had those covered up.

Naruto blushed as he looked away from her “You shouldn't do that Anko-nee” he said, calling her “nee” instead of “chan” which he really only did when she got him embarrassed. While Naruto looked away, Anko grabbed him in a choke hold “See, I won” she said as she started licking his ear.

“That's cheating” Naruto said as he laughed due to Anko's licking of his ear.

“It's not” Anko said as she let go of him “One of your enemies could be a sexy girl like me, she could use seduction tactics like that as well. You can't let your guard down, especially you since you are so handsome. If they capture you, they will have their way with you for sure. I know I would” she ended with an eye wink.

Naruto blushed slightly “Stop teasing me Anko-nee, that would never happen tebayo”.

Naruto normally didn't blush or get embarrassed. Anko and maybe Kurenai, were the only people that could get him to act this way. But at least he recovered from it quickly and would regain his usual confidence.

Anko laughed “I'm telling you because it would. Anyway you should go home and eat before Kushina-chan comes over here and yells at us”.

Naruto nodded “It was fun training with you today Anko-chan, you should join me more often. You certainly need more training since you are losing to an academy student” Naruto said with a chuckle “See ya!” he said as he disappeared using a teleportation technique.

Good thing he did because Anko punched the air where he had just been standing, just after she heard that. With all the teasing he had to endure today, he was happy that he got to poke some fun at her as well. Anko never forgets anything so he knew that she would retaliate some day, most likely with some usual teasing.

Truth be told, Naruto welcomed that. There were few things in life he enjoyed more than having that sexy babe all over him. When Naruto got back to his house and ate dinner together with his parents, he couldn't help but feel a bit uneasy. It had to do with his new relationship with Kurenai, and how Anko would react to it. Now Naruto has yet to realize that Anko's teasing isn't just teasing, its her flirting and her literally throwing herself at him, to let him know that she likes her. Naruto thinks Anko sees him just as a little brother that she can tease, he doesn't think that she likes him that way at all. He would certainly welcome it, but he wasn't convinced. Yet when he thought about Kurenai becoming his girlfriend, he couldn't help but feel a bit uneasy about the whole thing. He felt almost as if he had betrayed Anko, even though they aren't together. Maybe it's because he has known her his whole life and Kurenai is Anko's best friend.

Naruto got something else to worry about as his father said something at the dinner table that reminded him of something.

“I had to send out Kurenai-san again today, I almost feel a bit bad about that since she just got back. She probably wanted to spend more time with Asuma-san” Minato told his wife, who was the one he conversed with as Naruto was lost in his thoughts earlier.

Kushina shrugged “Better she is out there than in our backyard, I have lost counts of how many times I have gone out there only to see that woman together with Naruto”.

Minato sighed “Honey, Kurenai has a boyfriend and Naruto is allowed to have friends..”

Kushina frowned “Do I need to remind you of how certain married women acts when they are out our house?”.

Naruto smiled innocently, while saying “Calm down mom, dad is right. She is with Asuma-san right?”.

Minato nodded “They have been together a long time now, is it two or three years?”

“Fine, I'll drop it. But I don't like all the women trying to steal my son from me. As far as I'm concerned the only woman he needs in his life is his mom” Kushina said, smiling as well.

Naruto grinned “You'll always be in my life mom, but I hope I can get a sexy jounin babe some day to..” he started when Minato covered his mouth “Hehehe, you shouldn't talk like Jiraiya-sensei. You need a sweet young lady to marry some day, isn't that right Naruto?” Minato said in a nervous tone, sweating a little bit even.

Kushina frowned as she watched them, as Naruto growled “I don't want any sweet lady, I want a mean sexy babe!”.

“Naruto!” Kushina said as her hair rose and took the shape of nine tails. Before things got out of hand, Minato held up his hands questioningly “Any young man thinks like that, most of them just doesn't say it out loud like our stupid son does. It isn't his fault that he is stupid”.

“A man? He is still my little boy..” Kushina said as her hair returned to normal.

Naruto elbowed Minato for that comment, then laughed as he got up and walked towards the door “There isn't anything little about me mom” he started, which had Kushina blush unknowingly to him “Even my goals are big. One day I'm going to be the most powerful ninja this world has ever seen, and I'll have all the sexy babes I want!” Naruto ended with a perverted laugh before running out of the house as fast he could. Even Minato couldn't stop Kushina now as she chased after him, intending to punish Naruto for his perverted antics. It was just another day in the Uzumaki//Namikaze household.

The next day, Wednesday, marked a week since Sakura had brought her friends over to Jiraiya's place for the first time. Today would be the second time however. Sakura has kept going over to Jiraiya's place to train for a few hours every day. The only exception was the Sunday, as Jiraiya weren't home due to him and the rest of the perverted trio doing their usual research missions. Jiraiya didn't really teach her anything as he continued to tell her to practice the basics. That was not only because Jiraiya was lazy and didn't have an interest in training her, it was actually what she needed to work on the most. She needed to improve everything, from conditioning her body to throwing and handling kunai and shuriken. He also didn't really mind having her around as she mostly just trained on her own and let him do his thing.

Sakura had gotten to know Jiraiya a bit better now and found out that he is much more than just a perverted old man. When he kept his perverted antics to a minimum, he is very likable as he is a very kind and gentle old man, just like Ino always described him.

Everything was going fine with their training set up, until today when Sakura let her friends tag along once again. The first thing Ino did was to tease Jiraiya in a similar way as last week. And Hinata kept giving him those weird glances while blushing. Ino stopped her teasing after Jiraiya threatened once again to bring Inoichi over and tell him how she is acting. He then instructed Ino and Sakura to practice their kunai and shuriken throwing, while asking Hinata if he could speak to her alone.

As Ino and Sakura walked off to a tree with drawn target markers on it, Ino said “Scream if he touches you, Hinata”.

“Get to work, brat!” Jiraiya yelled as Sakura and Ino laughed at his reaction while Hinata blushed, staring at the ground.

Once Ino and Sakura began training, Hinata said “Uhm, what did you n-need to talk w-with me about, Jiraiya-sama?”.

“Why don't we sit down” Jiraiya said as he sat down on his porch, patting the ground next to him. Hinata then sat down next to him, but kept looking away from him with that ever present blush adoring her cheeks. She was thinking that what Ino warned her about, might not be so bad if it actually happened.

“How is Hiashi doing?” Jiraiya asked as he stared at Hinata who flinched just like last time at the mention of her fathers name.

“G-Good” Hinata stuttered, while looking uncomfortable at the mere mention of her fathers name.

“I see” Jiraiya said, pausing for a while “Is he treating you well?”.

“Y-yes” Hinata stuttered, staring at the ground.

“Tell me the truth, Hinata. I know how he changed after your mother died. The way he talks about you and the way you react to just me saying his name, is getting me a little bit worried about you” Jiraiya said with a warm smile.

“Uhm..” Hinata paused as she fidgeted with her thumbs “He is a bit strict b-but he isn't mistreating me”.

“It still worries me due to how you react to his name and it seems that you can't even look me into the eyes. Are you afraid of men, Hinata?” Jiraiya asked in a worried tone.

“N-No” Hinata stuttered, her cheeks growing redder as she glanced at him again “It's not like that, Jiraiya-sama”. She certainly isn't afraid of men, especially not men like Jiraiya and Minato. She is terrified and disgusted by Nagi though. And she isn't the biggest fan of her father either. She knew that she couldn't tell Jiraiya about that, knowing that her father would most likely give her a harsh punishment for telling an outsider about their problems. She is honestly afraid of what he would do if he found out that she had told anyone about how he has been acting towards her.

Jiraiya laughed “Well, that's good to hear. Guess I worried over nothing. But do know that if you need to talk to someone, you can always come talk to me. And if you prefer to talk to a woman rather than an old pervert like myself, you should try talking to little miss Kushina. There is no sweeter and more caring woman in the village than her, she will definitely hear you out”.

“T-Thanks, I'll keep that in mind, J-Jiraiya-sama” Hinata stuttered. She had no intentions of talking to anyone though.

Jiraiya nodded, still smiling warmly at her “Now go join your friends. I have a novel to write”.

After that Hinata ran up to Ino and Sakura and trained with them. Jiraiya wasn't re-assured at all with Hinata's answers. There was definitely something going on with her and Hiashi. He has never seen a girl that shy before and the way she almost seemed afraid to just talk about Hiashi was not normal. He kinda wants to confront Hiashi about it to find out what is really going on. But it isn't really his place to do so. At least not until Hinata starts talking. Hopefully she takes his advice and talks to Kushina about it.

Sakura and her friends continued to train until 8 in the evening. After that Ino and Hinata returned home again as Sakura stayed behind as she wanted to talk to Jiraiya for a bit. Jiraiya was still sitting on his porch with his pens and notebooks next to him. For the past hour he has been snoring as he had fallen asleep, while sitting down.

Sakura sat down next to him and stared at him as he drooled in his sleep. She couldn't help but think that he is kinda handsome for an old guy. He also has a very well built body, which she could definitely tell as Jiraiya only wore shorts and a t-shirt in the summer heat of August. Sakura wondered what it would feel like to be held by those big strong arms. She blushed slightly as she imagined it at the same times as Jiraiya woke up.

“Huh, where am I”? Jiraiya said looking around. When he spotted Sakura next to him he yelled “What are you doing here, you brat!?”.

Sakura sweat dropped “We just finished training, Jiraiya-sama”.

“Then why are you still here?” Jiraiya asked while yawning “Go home!” he added in a yell.

Sakura was used to his comical outbursts by now, she just ignored it in favor of smiling at him “What did you talk to Hinata-chan about earlier?”.

“Nothing you have to worry about” Jiraiya said with a sigh “Is she always that shy?”.

Sakura shook her head “She has always been a little shy, but it seems she is a lot more shy when talking to you. She can be really shy sometimes, mostly when Naruto-kun is around. Can't really blame her for that though, most girls are shy around him. I think she is just shy around you because you are such a famous person”

“Or maybe she can't resist my manly charms?” Jiraiya said with a loud laugh, not knowing that he was right on the mark with that joke.

Sakura smirked “Hehehe, she would be the first then”.

Jiraiya frowned “I'll have you know there are plenty of women who find me irresistible”.

Sakura grinned “Is that before or after you have paid them?”.

“Go home” Jiraiya said with a scowl as he stood up.

Sakura stood up as well, then gave Jiraiya a quick hug “Thanks for helping me out so much, Jiraiya-sama” after she let go she waved before leaving “Bye Jiraiya-sama!”.

“Uh?” Jiraiya uttered as he stared at her in confusion. He never agreed to any hugging and frankly it made him a bit uncomfortable. Now was probably a good time to get out of the village for a while, before that becomes a regular thing. He barely knows her and has no interest getting to know her better. He already had enough friends and he certainly already had something he could call a family, which was the Uzumaki/Namikaze family. This girl didn't fit into that picture.

The next day, Naruto did not show up in school. He had been kidnapped in the middle of the night by a fifty year old perverted man. His parents caught the pervert in the act, and one of them even cheered him on. The other, gave chase to the pervert, and would follow the pervert and her son out of the village.

In reality nothing bad actually happened. It was just Jiraiya, who had snuck into Naruto's room at night, woke him up and told him that they are going on a training trip. Naruto didn't want to leave and made a fuss, which woke up his parents. When Jiraiya tied him up and started carrying him out of the house like a sack of potatoes, while Naruto screamed and struggled, Minato clapped his hands and cheered, while Kushina demanded that she would be allowed to come with them on their trip, fearing that Jiraiya would teach Naruto weird things, or allow him to do things that he shouldn't.

Just like that, Kushina, Naruto and Jiraiya ended up leaving the village on a week long training trip. All because Jiraiya wanted to get away from Sakura and her friends for a while. The only reason he decided to bring Naruto with him, was for his own entertainment. He loves having that brat around, to laugh at him or put him into situations where he could be used to gather reference material for his novels. That's not exactly a hard task, considering that he is the biggest chick magnet in the Elemental Nations. He had not counted on Kushina coming along, and her presence ruined his plans completely. They would end up spending the week actually training instead. But hey, Jiraiya wasn't complaining. At least he didn't have to deal with Sakura and her two freak friends.

Later that same day in the afternoon, about an hour after Ino's school day ended, Minato got another visit to his office. It was once again the young Yamanaka beauty who came to visit him again.

“Hi Minato-kun” Ino said as she closed the door behind her, facing Minato with an alluring smile. She made her way over to his desk as he smiled back at her “Hey Ino-chan” he said with a chuckle. Ino walked around the desk as Minato turned his chair, like always. Just as Ino was about to sit down on his lap, they both heard the office door open. The door opened to reveal a very angry looking Anko, in her usual attire. She marched up towards Minato's desk, glaring at the hokage who couldn't help but start sweating due to her glare. Ino created a bit of distance between herself and Minato as she stepped off to the side of the desk. Anko looked a bit confused as she glanced at Ino, then stared at Minato as she stopped in front of the desk.

Anko then returned her focus on Ino “Hey Ino-chan, what are you doing here?”

“My father sent me to deliver a message to hokage-sama” Ino said with a cute innocent smile.

Anko smiled warmly at her “I see” she then turned to Minato, as her expression changed back to a glare “Hokage-sama..”

“Hey there, Anko-chan” Minato said with a nervous smile. He didn't know what he had done to anger Anko, but he knew that she was angry at him for something.

“You know, Minato..” Anko started as she spoke through gritted teeth “Just because you are the most handsome hokage in history, doesn't give you the right to send out my best friend on mission after mission. She just came back damn it! I barely got to talk to her!” Anko yelled in angry tone.

Minato's sweating intensified, while Ino nodded in agreement to that “most handsome hokage in history” comment by Anko.

“I am helping Kurenai-san.. She needs experience of leading a team if she is going to become a jounin teacher. She asked me if she could become a jounin teacher for a team consisting of next years graduates..” Minato said in his defense.

Anko pouted, she knew that Minato was right. Kurenai had gone on an on about her wish to become a jounin teacher. Obviously she and Minato didn't know that she only wanted to become a jounin teacher because of the small chance that she might become Naruto's jounin teacher. That's why she is so adamant about leading a team from his class.

“What about Naruto-kun? I didn't find him in your backyard or at your home..” Anko asked.

“He left together with Kushina and Jiraiya-sensei for a week long training trip earlier today” Minato said with a chuckle “You can probably guess how that went..”.

Anko chuckled as well “I guess Jiraiya came to 'kidnap' him and Kushina-chan tagged along to keep them in line?”

“That pretty much sums it up” Minato said shaking his head.

“Aww, that sucks. I wanted to show Naruto-kun my new thong” Anko said with a playful smile, causing Minato to freeze.

“What?” Ino asked in surprise “What kind of a thong!?”.

“This one” Anko said as she opened her trench coat, then grabbed the hem of her orange skirt “Want to see, Minato-chan?”.

“No!” Minato uttered as he stared to the side.

“Yeah show it, Anko-nee! I want to get a sexier one and show it to Naruto-kun before you do!” Ino said in a challenging manner.

“How about neither of you show your thongs to anyone” Minato said with a twitch in his eyebrow. This was such a weird conversation for him, considering that both of these girls are girls who he kinda sees as his two extra daughters. Add in the fact that they are talking about flashing his son, that doesn't exactly make things better.

“Aww, are you jealous, Minato-chan?” Anko asked with a teasing smile. She turned Ino with a giggle “You know, I used to have a crush on Minato-chan when I was your age. I think I showed him more than just my thong back then..”.

“You did?” Ino asked with wide eyes “What did Kushina-sama say about that?”.

“I showed her a lot more than I did him. I crushed on her as well” Anko said with an eye wink.

“Eh?” Ino exclaimed in disbelief.

Minato scratched the back of his head “It's true, Anko-chan had a strange episode back when she used to live with us. Thankfully she grew out of it”.

“No I didn't” Anko said with a giggle “I just realized that Naruto-kun is much hotter than you, but I still wouldn't say no to a threesome with you and your feisty wife!”.

Ino stared at Anko in shock, coming to the conclusion that she was no match to Anko when it came to riling up the hokage. Because the hokage had turned beet red, and was pointing at the hokage office door “If that's all, you may leave, Anko-chan..”.

“Yeah yeah, I'll leave, you old prude!” Anko said with a huff, as she started heading out of the office “I just came to find out where Naruto-kun had ran off to anyway. See you later, stud! Ano you too, Ino-chan!”

“Bye, Anko-nee!” Ino said with a grin. She couldn't help but be impressed by Anko, and kinda hoped that she would be able to make Minato, Naruto or maybe even Jiraiya, act like that around her.

When Anko left, Minato shook his head, muttering “I regret every day that I didn't order her to become a nun back then.. I think only religion can save her”.

Ino smirked as she walked over to Minato, to sit down on her favorite seat again, now that Anko was gone. She sat down in his lap, then said “She is right though. You are a prude, aren't you?”

Minato smirked as he stared at her into the eyes, causing her to blush “Would a prude be greeting his best friends daughter with a kiss?”

“I thought there was nothing wrong with that?” Ino asked in an innocent tone, before leaning into whisper into his ear “It's just a greeting, right?”.

Minato shivered in delight. God damn, this girl is driving him crazy.

Ino pulled back her head, as she giggled at Minato's response “If Kushina-sama is away for a week, you wan't have anyone to cook for you. Want me to cook dinner for you tonight, Minato-kun?” Ino asked with a sexy smile.

“You don't have to go out of your way, I can eat at Ichiraku's” Minato said. He also thought it might be a bad idea to have Ino over at his house when they are alone. He fears they might do something they will regret later on. He is already having thoughts about her that he knows he shouldn't.

Ino bit her lip before she gave him a quick peck on the mouth “I want to go out of my way” she then leaned in and whispered “Please let me cook for you, Minato-kun” she purred into his ear which had Minato shiver in delight again. Ino returned to staring into his eyes, their faces almost close enough for their noses to touch.

“Okay, you can come over at eight” Minato said, gulping a little. This was a bad idea, he knew it was a bad idea. But it was also exciting.

Ino nodded before pressing her lips against his again. This time, it was more than just a quick peck as her lips remained on his for more than a couple of seconds. She then jumped off of him and left the office, giving him an eye wink and saying “See you tonight”.

Minato sighed as he nursed his forehead. How did he get himself in this situation, how is this going to end? He wondered. He couldn't control himself around Ino, she is too damn attractive and damn right sexy. He was starting to realize that he no longer saw her as an extra daughter, he saw her as an extremely attractive girl that he wanted so badly. It's also those thoughts that made Minato make up his mind about tonight. He had to make sure to stop things if they took things too far.

Later that evening, around 8 PM, Ino was walking through the village, carrying ingredients for a ramen dinner in a bag in her right hand. She is wearing a blue skirt and a white shirt.

She liked her outfit, even though it wasn't really more revealing than her usual ninja outfit. The thought of wearing something a lot more sexy and revealing did cross her mind though. She did also turn quite a few heads while walking through the village as some guys couldn't help but stare at her. Ino happened to run into Minato at the start of the long street which leads to his house. While the street is long, there really isn't much there other than the Uzumaki/Namikaze home at the end of the road and the Sarutobi clan compound which is at the start of the road.

Minato couldn't help but check her out as she came walking up to him, smiling as she waved at him with her free hand. He waved back at her, thinking that she looked good in blue, his favorite color. He knew that her favorite color was purple though, so he probably wasn't going to get her see her wear blue that often. The outfit itself was nice, she looked really good in it. Minato was pretty used to see Ino wearing nice “civilian clothes” like this, unlike with his wife Kushina, whose idea of dressing up was to put on a boring traditional kimono.

“Hi Hokage-sama” Ino greeted cheerfully, using his title this time since they were out in public.

“Hey Ino-chan, what do you have there?” Minato asked nodding towards the bag.

“It's ingredients for ramen, I'm gonna try my best to feed one of the ramen addicts some ramen but don't expect it to taste as good as Kushina-sama's or Ichiraku's ramen” Ino said.

Minato chuckled as the two of them made their way down the street towards his house “Kushina's ramen is the best and Ichiraku's is a close second. Those are hard to compete with. But I'm sure your ramen will taste great as well”.

“I hope so” Ino said with a cute smile. Moments later, the two of them had entered the empty house and made their way into the kitchen. Ino was unpacking the ingredients from the bag and putting on the stove while Minato sat down at the kitchen table.

“How are Inoichi and Butao doing?” Minato asked.

“They are doing great, when they heard that I was heading out, they started flirting and headed up to their bedroom” Ino said with a sweat drop “Like they always do when I go out for a while”.

Minato laughed “Those two are perfect for each other”.

Ino sighed “I suppose”.

“How about school? How do you rank against your classmates?” Minato asked, trying to keep the conversation normal as long as possible which had worked out so far.

“School is boring but at least I get to see Naruto-kun more often” Ino said dreamily which had Minato smile, happy to see that she was still heads over heels for Naruto.

“I'm confident in my skills, I only really see Hinata-chan as a rival for the top kunoichi of the class spot. Forehead girl still has a far way to go” Ino said shaking her head “Unfortunately the rookie of the year title will be impossible to get due to Naruto-kun”.

“Naruto has worked hard to get as strong as he is now, you should work harder as well and try to steal that title from him. Nothing is set in stone yet” Minato said encouragingly, even though he knew that no one in that class would surpass Naruto within a year. The level difference was too high.

Ino sweat dropped “That's not happening, but I will try my best to beat both Hinata and Sakura at least”.

Minato nodded “That's good, you should try to become the best ninja you can be”.

Ino smirked at him as she said “Will you let me get more than two kisses per day if I try my hardest, Hokage-sama?”.

Minato cleared his throat “No, that's just greetings”.

“I guess I will have to come visit you and greet you more than once every day then” Ino said biting her lip.

Minato couldn't help but chuckle as he closed his eyes “You are always welcome to visit me”.

Ino was enjoying this a lot but at the same time she had a strange feeling. She is standing in Kushina's kitchen, flirting with her husband. Maybe she was taking things too far? She thought as she focused on preparing the food.

About twenty minutes later, the two of them had finished eating while continuing their small talk. While the ramen didn't taste as good as Kushina's or the Ichiraku's, Minato had no complaints since it tasted better than instant ramen at least and he was just happy he got something eatable.

Minato got up and grabbed his and Ino's bowls, which he was going to bring to the sink “Thanks for cooking for me Ino-chan”.

“No problem, Minato-kun” Ino said with an eye wink.

Minato gulped, which Ino couldn't see as he headed over to the sink and put down the bowls “You should probably go home now before it gets too late”.

Ino frowned “I just got here, can't we watch a movie or something?” she asked. Whenever she slept over, they would always watch a movie in the living room before going to bed. Ino would be seated in Minato's lap, like always, while Kushina is seated in Naruto's lap. When that happens, Ino always gets a bit jealous of the way Naruto holds Kushina, embracing her from behind gently. She used to always wish Naruto would hold her like that. Tonight, she hopes Minato would hold her like that instead.

“Okay, one movie” Minato said, swallowing his saliva again. He knew this was a bad idea, he already had a hard time controlling herself with all her flirting.

“Great!” Ino said cheerfully as the two of them headed out into the living room. Minato sat down on their blue couch and said “I'll let you pick the movie”.

Instead of turning on the television and starting a movie, Ino sat down in Minato's lap, facing him “What's the rush?” Ino asked, with her face really close to his.

“Ino-chan?” Minato asked, swallowing his saliva again. Then Ino gave him a quick peck, before they went back to staring at each other. Then she gave him another, followed by at least ten more quick pecks. Minato wasn't telling her off, instead he was responding to the quick kisses, while holding her tightly. Ino's hands started roaming Minato's body as she felt up his muscly torso. At this point Minato wasn't thinking about Kushina at all, all he thought of was that he wanted Ino, badly. He placed his hands on her butt and fondled it, really digging into it aggressively as their pecks continued. Ino sneaked her hands into his shirt and felt up his chest and stomach without any clothes in the way.

“Mmh, I want you so badly, Minato-kun” Ino moaned, looking hotter than Minato had ever seen her as the horny blond girl lowered her hand and felt Minato up between the legs. Minato stopped groping Ino's ass as he was starting to realize where this was going. Ino continued to rub his groin outside his pants and bombard him with pecks as Minato was sitting completely still, wondering what to do. Then he lifted Ino off of him and walked over to the windows facing the backyard.

“Ino-chan, I think you should leave” Minato said in a stern tone.

Ino felt herself close to tears, not because she was rejected or anything, but because she also realized just what was about to happen. What people they would betray and hurt if it actually did happen. And it was mostly her fault.

“I'm sorry” Ino choked out before running towards the front door. Like last time when Ino was rushing out of the hokage office, after kissing Minato for the first time, Minato caught up to her and held her.

Ino wasn't crying, but she was close to it as Minato held her gently “It's not your fault, I should have put a stop to this before it even started.”

“It is my fault” Ino said as a tear drop escaped from her eyes “Damn, I'm such a bitch!” she muttered.

“No you aren't, you are the sweetest girl in the whole world” Minato said, rubbing her back “Like I said last time, there is very little things you can do that will actually make me angry with ya. And I didn't want things to become weird between us no matter what, especially not just for this. Why don't we just forget this ever happened and go back to normal?” Minato suggested. Truth was he was hating what he was saying. He said what was expecting of him as a faithful husband, a respectable father and a good hokage, not what he wanted. What he actually wanted was to bring Ino upstairs and have his way with her all night long.

Ino nodded as she wiped her tears away “I will stop, I promise”.

Minato felt very bad about making her cry, especially since he wanted the same things she did. He just couldn't, it could destroy his family if people found out.

“Promise me that you will still visit me and things won't get weird between us, I mean it Ino-chan, I would hate to lose you as a friend” Minato said with a warm smile.

Ino matched his smile with one of her own “I said I promise, baka”.

“Good” Minato said as he let go of her “Thanks again for dinner”.

“Any time” Ino said with an eye wink as she opened the door “Good night, Hokage-sama”.

“Good night”.

Footnotes:

1: Note that Hinata is still crushing on Naruto. She just has a thing for some older guys as well.

2: The three girls he is currently checking out as they are talking among each other, are wearing these swimsuits: https://mega.nz/file/l3IlwDZa#AP9Ie1jE2SRFVTNdbI-YkPC03HoEGG2pD-WMh5knse8

3: Kurenai's outfit: https://mega.nz/file/Fn4khAKK#930hcIEW0oQRm4vPx-bYWMQFfs7D84hYLro7vcxOleY

4: Reference of Kurenai's outfit, the color of the clothes are as mentioned in the story (dark blue): https://mega.nz/file/pvxVwaKK#GI7C9y-E3ij_ubjcE_FzcxpmtKTgqmRGFj7QF7ci6RE

5: Ino's outfit during her dinner date with Minato: https://mega.nz/file/Bqp0gaBI#_K5TdiLF4bfv5Bv2RCuU2W1N4K1KO30rezWUDQgVoO8

Authors Note: The next chapter is going to have a time skip. That will be the last time skip in a very long time, as we are getting into the real parts of the story. During this chapter I was considering writing more scenes of Hinata getting harassed by Nagi, but decided not to, due to it not making sense due to a certain someone who is watching over her. You will find out who that is soon.

I was also thinking about writing a scene of Moegi and Ayame gossiping about all the degeneracy and adultery going on in the village, but in the end I decided to leave that for future chapters. The Moegi and Ayame gossiping, and Moegi becoming something of a voyeur, is going to become a bigger part of the story after the time skip. I hope you enjoyed the chapter. Please leave a review/comment and let me know what you thought of it!

Chapter Text

Chapter 9 – Hinata's Horrible Day

Sakura and Jiraiya

About half a year has passed since Jiraiya brought Naruto out of the village for a short training trip, back in August. Now in early April of the next year, Jiraiya has just returned from another short trip out of the village. This short trip was one he took for the very same reason why he took Naruto out on that training trip back then. The reason is Sakura and her two annoying friends. All three of them are really started to get on Jiraiya's nerves.

When he returned from that week long training trip with Naruto and Kushina, Sakura continued to show up at his place to train every single day. To make matters worse, Ino and Hinata would show up more often than they did before. Those two would join them two or three times every week. The only day of the week when he can relax, is on Sundays, when he and the rest of the pervert trio heads out for their oh so important research missions. Now, if it were only him training the three of them, then he wouldn't complain all too much. But that is sadly not the case.

Hinata has continued to steal glances from him, which she may think appears to be innocent glances, but Jiraiya knows better. He knows that she is checking him out whenever she gets a chance to do so. Considering how quiet and shy she normally is, it is surprising that she seems to be checking him out so often. Jiraiya can't help but wonder what is going on inside her mind. But at least Hinata wasn't going around making advances or teasing him all the time, unlike Ino.

Ino's teasing has continued and almost spiraled out of control during the fall and winter. Before that, she at least teased Minato just as much. During most of those months that has passed, he hasn't seen her tease Minato like that at all, which really irks Jiraiya, since now that Ino has stopped teasing Minato, she would would target Jiraiya more often. Luckily for him, he isn't her only target since Naruto, like always, is also a target of Ino's teasing and flirting, which is a lot less subtle when she does it with him. When she teases Jiraiya on the other hand, it's very secretive, and she seems to only do it when they are alone, or if they are with Hinata and Sakura, or when others aren't looking. Unless it's the pretty innocent and usual teasing, such as lifting skirt in front of him, when she wears bandages to cover anything she flashes him. That seems to be something she is okay with doing with anyone around.

She still has yet to actually show him anything that would be worth his time seeing. She hasn't even flashed him her panties yet. Instead, she has started getting a little too comfortable in Jiraiya's house. Last week for example, she had snuck into his bedroom, laid down on her stomach on Jiraiya's bed, with her ass pointing up in the air, while reading one of Jiraiya's Icha Icha books. When Jiraiya found her in there, she read a line of the book out loud.

“Fingered her to the highest of heavens?” Ino said with a giggle “That's so dirty, Ero-sennin!” she added in a teasing tone.

Jiraiya wasn't going to humor her, as he frowned at her while summoning a medium sized toad. The toad already knew what to do, as it had been summoned several times already, just for this reason. The toad proceeded to pick Ino up, throw it on it's back, then leap out of Jiraiya's bedroom window. The toad then brought Ino back to her and her parents home. It was due to Ino's teasing, along with her and Sakura having started talking about “having a sleep over” at his place, that caused Jiraiya to leave on his latest trip out of the village. He didn't like how they have made themselves so damn comfortable at his place, and he sure as hell wasn't going to let them have a sleepover there any time soon.

Even though Ino is constantly teasing him, and Hinata is checking him out, they are actually not the main reason for why Jiraiya keeps escaping them. It's actually Sakura, who is the one bothering him the most, even though she has not really done anything to justify that. Sakura has even been trying to get Ino to stop teasing him, by telling her to cut it out, whenever she catches Ino doing it. She has also seen Hinata's glances at Jiraiya, which Sakura will usually lightheartedly make fun of, which worked better to get the shy girl to stop doing it rather than scolding her. The problem with Sakura is that she is a bigger tease and more annoying than her friends, in Jiraiya's mind, just by being around him.

About half a year ago, when Jiraiya decided to help out with her training without constantly complaining about it, Jiraiya thought that he could be something of a mentor to her. He thought that he could have a similar relationship with her that he always had with Kushina, which was something of a mentor and maybe even a father figure. With that comes Jiraiya's usual antics of course, which some could argue is a bit perverted and inappropriate. Jiraiya himself would argue that they are wrong, since he is not just some pervert, he is more of a super pervert. Therefore it's his right to act like that, and if they don't like it, they can run away from him screaming, like most girls and women do when they see him perving around in the bushes or trees, peeking on them while giggling perversely.

The more Jiraiya spent time with Sakura, especially when they were alone, the more he realized that he probably couldn't have that kind of relationship with her. He has started to get feelings for her, which he hasn't felt for anyone, except Tsunade. He can't help but check her out, look at her pretty face and her beautiful smile when she excitedly trains in his, or rather Kushina and Minato's backyard, which is where his house is located. And the part about her being a bigger tease than Ino in his mind, is that watching her strut around, bend over, kick, jump, climb and crawl around in front of him as she trains, is much more of a tease than Ino's skirt flips or suggestive mannerism.

The fact that Sakura always wears those very tight dark green shorts, which does nothing to hide the perfect shape of her ass, doesn't help either. There is no doubt in Jiraiya's mind that Sakura has the best ass in all of Konoha. He thinks that Konohamaru probably agrees with him, considering how many times Jiraiya has heard Sakura complain about Konohamaru grabbing, groping or spanking said ass. Obviously Jiraiya didn't know about Konohamaru's thoughts of Kushina, and that he actually prefers the Uzumaki woman's ass over the pretty Haruno. Sakura still gets a very solid second place from Konohamaru though.

Konohamaru going around spanking and grabbing Sakura's ass, wasn't something that bothered Jiraiya, even though he had secret feelings for her. Instead he thought it was hilarious and was very happy with Naruto's decision to let Konohamaru join their little, not so secret, group of perverts. Before, he thought it was kinda inappropriate and not very gentleman-like. But after she started invading his place every single day, he couldn't help but think that she deserved it. It's her punishment for annoying him so much, a punishment which she is given with a little help of Konohamaru. Konohamaru doing that is also a sign that he may like her, which would be great for Jiraiya, since if Konohamaru and Sakura somehow got together, that would solve most of his current problems.

He also knows for a fact that Sakura doesn't hate Konohamaru's pranks as much as she tries to make it sound she does. A pretty girl like her probably loves the attention she gets from him, especially since she is unofficially competing with her rivals for the “title” of the prettiest girl of the current senior class. Her rivals are none other than her two best friends, Ino and Hinata. Other than Naruto and Konohamaru, who targets everyone, they probably don't have anyone who is constantly giving them attention like that, which Konohamaru does for Sakura.

Those three, but mainly Sakura, are the reason he leaves the village for about a week or two very often. He still has no intentions of being anything other than a mentor for the three of them, and he will definitely not try to initiate some other kind of relationship with Sakura. The reason for that is the same that it's always been, the three of them are just brats to him. He wants more mature women, with more meat on them to grab onto. He doesn't want to put his hands on them or do anything inappropriate with them, unlike some of those disgusting jounins who always sleep with their genin, not to mention that disgusting perverted old man, Sarutobi Hiruzen, who is probably the record holder when it comes to having sex with genin kunoichi who has just graduated from the ninja academy.

Jiraiya just has to get better at avoiding the three of them while in the village instead. Today he just returned, at the start of a new week in early April, and he knows that Sakura will come find him after school later. She always does. Somehow she seems to always know exactly when he has returned.

Unknowingly to Jiraiya, rather than worrying about him doing something inappropriate with Sakura, he should be worried about her doing something to him. She has known for at least three months now that she is in love with the super pervert. Before that, even back when she just started going over to his home to train, she was already very much attracted to him and realized she had a “thing” for him. It wasn't until three months ago, when she started having very romantic and erotic dreams about him, that she admitted to herself that she was in love with him. Often her dreams about Jiraiya, involved Jiraiya getting on top of her with his huge body, then kissing her, feeling her up and spreading her legs, before ravishing her. The latter would often happen just before she wakes up. Every time when she wakes up, she would be so sweaty, hot and bothered and down right horny.

While Sakura has admitted to herself that she is in love with him, she hasn't told anyone else about that. Especially not her best friends. If they knew, they wouldn't let her hear the end of it, and most likely constantly tease her about it. But she has made up her mind to secretly go after him. Another reason why she was dead set on getting Jiraiya all for herself now, was that she didn't see herself getting anywhere with her other crush, which is every girls crush, Uzumaki Naruto. The problem for Sakura is that while Jiraiya has been friendlier and less whiny for the most part of the half a year that has passed, lately he has been going back to being the annoyed and angry old man he was before.

It's also obvious to her that he is trying to avoid her and her friends, and that being the main reason why he leaves the village for short missions so often. She doesn't understand why Jiraiya does that, other than maybe Ino's constant teasing or Hinata' weird glances, which she knows bothers him. All she knows is that she wants to give him a reason not to run away from her, by capturing his heart and gaining his love. That's easier said than done when they haven't gotten anywhere, except for Jiraiya allowing her to sit close to him and lean on him sometimes.

More often than not, he will just treat her like some annoyance, who he doesn't want around. That's especially been the case these last few weeks before he left. Even though Jiraiya has given Sakura no reasons to think that their feelings are mutual, and she believes that she doesn't have a good chance to get what she wants, she is stubborn and is not going to give up on her love, whether it be Jiraiya or Naruto. She is going to get one of them at least, one way or another.

While Jiraiya walked through the village, staring suspiciously at anyone he thought could be Sakura's spy or informant, who lets her know when he has returned, Sakura had just left the ninja academy, as her school day had ended. She was heading straight to Jiraiya's house, to see if he had come home from his “mission” yet.

When Sakura arrived outside Jiraiya's rather small house, Jiraiya who had arrived there first, was laying down on top of the roof of his house, watching her approaching his front door. Jiraiya's house is pretty small and doesn't look like much from the outside. The inside of his house is a completely different matter, as everything inside is expensive and luxurious. His house consists of his large bedroom, a large living room, a kitchen, one bathroom and a basement. Unlike Ino, Sakura has never been in his bedroom or in his basement, but she has seen the rest of his whenever she and her friends make themselves at home.

“There she is!” Jiraiya thought to himself while frowning at her. He knew that someone must have tipped her off again, how else would she always knows when he gets back? Unknowingly to him, she didn't have a clue if he was home or not, she just came over to see if he was home pretty much every single day.

At first Jiraiya thought that he could just hide up there on the roof until she leaves, but he changed his mind since it was just her this time. On the other hand, if she had she brought her two friends with her, then he would have already started running away.

Jiraiya then jumped down from the roof, landing behind Sakura who was facing his front door “Hah, got you!” Jiraiya said which scared Sakura enough as she shivered before jumping, squealing out a loud in surprise “Kyaaaa!”

“Who told you that I returned today? Who are you working with?” Jiraiya accused comically.

Sakura turned to him with a frown, putting her hands on her hips “Stop being silly” she then glared at him “Chaa! You scared me, you stupid pervert!!”

Jiraiya gulped as he held up his hands defensively, not wanting to get hit by one of Sakura's surprisingly powerful punches “Sorry, I'm just wondering how you always know when I get back”

Sakura blushed slightly, which Jiraiya did notice as she turned away from him to hide her slight embarrassment. She didn't want to tell him that she came over every day to see him “B-baka pervert!! I want to get stronger so I came over to see if you are home and can help me with my training again!”

Jiraiya sighed when he saw her cute pout, then he hung his head and said “Okay.. start with road work as always..”.

Sakura smiled “Okay, Jiraiya-sama!” she said before running off, as Jiraiya stared at her lower back with a perverse giggle, which she didn't notice. Sakura then continued to train under Jiraiya's lazy and not so enthusiastic guidance, for the rest of the day until evening. After doing some cardio and conditioning exercises the first two hours, Jiraiya had her work on some hand to hand combat moves. To end the day, he taught her a new chakra control practice exercise as well. At around 8, which was when they pretty much always stopped for the day, the two of them were sitting on Jiraiya's porch outside his front door.

“You did well today Sakura-chan. I'm honestly impressed by how good your chakra control has gotten already” Jiraiya said with a warm smile, staring at her as she blushed slightly. He was now using the familiar “-chan” suffix for all three of them, since he had unfortunately, in his opinion, gotten to know all three of them quite well.

“Thank you, Jiraiya-sama” she said with a cute smile. Then she leaned over and put her arms around him, hugging him. It was a quick hug that lasted less than two seconds and Jiraiya didn't respond to it as he was busy staring at the back of her head while grimacing, which made for a funny expression.

“I've missed you..” Sakura started but was interrupted due to Jiraiya standing up, pointing at her and yelling “Since when do we hug!?”

Sakura stood up and glared at him, which was a very cute glare in Jiraiya's opinion “Since now!” She yelled back.

“Go away!” Jiraiya yelled “Get out of here, you damn brat!” he added, pointing towards the village.

“BAKA!” Sakura yelled back at him, then punched him in the stomach.

“Ouch!” Jiraiya whined, holding his stomach that hurt a lot more than expected.

“You know, if you added chakra to your punches, similar to what Tsunade-hime does, you would be a force to be reckoned with” he said with a chuckle, while still nursing his stomach.

Sakura just snorted at him, before she turned to leave “Who says I don't?” she said confidently.

“Don't tell me you have learned that..” Jiraiya said with wide eyes. She could actually become pretty damn scary if she started fighting using Tsunade's fighting style. The ninja God's knows that she already has that woman's temper.

Sakura turned to face him, smiling at him cutely. She then stuck out her tongue at him teasingly, which was something that made Jiraiya want to kiss her, whenever she did that.

“I learned it from one of the scrolls you gave me, you created this monster, baka!” She said playfully before walking away.

Jiraiya's jaw dropped as he stared at her ass as she walked off “Did I give her Tsunade's old notes?!” he thought to himself in fear. He had asked Tsunade to give him some scrolls on very advanced chakra control, so that he would have something to teach Naruto, who had already mastered all the normal chakra control exercises before Jiraiya started training him. Jiraiya shivered as she imagined Sakura as a mini Tsunade, coming after him with powerful chakra enhanced punches. He then sighed before heading over to Naruto's home to freeload a dinner from them.

Ino and Minato

During the months that has passed, things had somewhat returned to normal between Ino and Minato. Somewhat because the feelings Ino has for Minato has not disappeared, just like the feelings and attraction Minato has for Ino hasn't disappeared either. Ino had kept her word though, as she had not been flirting with Minato in the same way she did previously. Their interaction has also been just like before, with Ino sitting in Minato's lap whenever she had a chance to. That was something Minato almost hoped she would stop doing since he very much regrets his action that night. After going several more months without anything close to having sex with Kushina, he almost wishes he did do more with Ino that evening.

The three previous Hokage were known to have been sleeping around a lot with various women. Especially Sarutobi Hiruzen, the third hokage, who used to ask attractive female ninja, be it genin, chuunin or jounin, to sleep with him all the time when he was the hokage. Some of them accepted it and a few of them rejected him. The ones that rejected him did not get any punishment since it wasn't an order, it was just him asking. Instead of giving them a punishment, Hiruzen saw it as a sign of them having some backbone, something worth his respect.

That didn't mean that Hiruzen stopped asking those that declined his invitations for sex though. Still to this day while being retired, he still asks various women to sleep with him. One of those that has refused his invitations to have sex with him is Minato's own wife, Kushina. Hiruzen has asked her countless of times to have sex with him, starting when she became a genin and as far as Minato knows, he still asks her that to this day. He didn't know that Naruto had made sure Hiruzen would stop doing that, about a year and half ago.

The three previous Hokage had a lot of lovers, yet Minato has stayed faithful to his wife. A wife who he hasn't slept with for about three years now. Although it's not only Kushina's fault, since truth be told, Minato is rarely in the mood to have sex with her either anymore. It's not because he doesn't want to have sex, since he is almost always horny nowadays. It's hard not to be when he has a bunch of sexy female ninja around him in his office all the time, and even more so whenever he sees Ino. It's Kushina he doesn't want to have sex with, most of the time anyway. That's because she is such a boring prude who only gets flirty with him once every full moon. Minato is pretty sure that although he doesn't ask her for sex often, she asks him for sex even less often.

Minato's can't help but think, why should he as the hokage, the most powerful ninja in the village and some even call him that strongest ninja in the world, not be able to have a lover? He is still young, why can't he have someone that actually wants him, someone that can give him something that Kushina won't? That someone would be Ino, who Minato wants more than ever nowadays. He fears that his chance to be with Ino like that way may have slipped away. Other than his sexual frustration, things were going well in Minato's life. Kushina is always in a great mood nowadays and Naruto is working hard as always.

In Ino's case, life has continued normally. As previously mentioned, she has continued going to Jiraiya's place with her friends, Sakura and Hinata, to train two or three times every week. That was fun as it let her tease Jiraiya as much as she wanted, now that she couldn't tease Minato at all. Another way to forget and distract herself of her crush on Minato, was to chase after Naruto even more. That backfired badly as Naruto has started getting very annoyed with her. Ino did not like her chances to become the one that eventually captures Naruto's heart. No, the one closest to doing that had to be Mitarashi Anko, or Anko-nee as Ino calls her. She gets away with teasing and flirting with Naruto as much as she wants and Ino has seen her make Naruto blush. That's kind of a big deal since she has never seen Naruto blush any other times, no matter how much girls and women flirts with him. Those were Ino's thoughts on who is in the lead, when it comes to getting Naruto, not knowing that he and Kurenai are already secretly together.

Even so, she wasn't going to give up on Naruto any time soon. And everything hasn't just been bad lately, especially not today as her father asked her to deliver a message to the hokage again. Now she got to see her other favorite blond again. While Ino has seen Minato a lot of times and even slept over at the Uzumaki home during the months that has passed, she has not visited him alone at his office since that evening. She was excited to head over there to see him, since they would be all alone for the first time since then.

Just before she arrived, Minato sat in his office doing boring paperwork. He just waited for time to pass so that he could go home and eat his wife's delicious cooking and mess with his son. While he sighed due to boredom, he heard someone knocking on the door to his office.

"Come in" Minato said in a cheerful tone, he didn't even care who it was, as he was just happy that someone came to interrupt the oh so boring paper work. His smile remained when he saw who it was, as the beautiful form of Yamanaka Ino entered his office, smiling at him as she greeted him "Hi Hokage-sama, I'm just here to deliver a message for my father again" she said as she closed the door behind her.

"I see" Minato said, staring intently at Ino as she made her way over, smiling at her the whole time. He turned his office chair to let her get up in his lap like she always used to do when she visited more often. Ino did sit down in his lap, with her back against him instead of facing him like she would when she was being flirty.

"It's probably boring work stuff again" Ino said holding up the letter.

"Why don't you put that on my desk, then give me a greeting like you used to, Ino-chan?" Minato whispered in a husky tone. Minato wasn't going to let this chance slip away from him again.

"W-what?" Ino stuttered in slight surprise, as she turned her head to stare at him with wide eyes. She saw Minato's handsome face confidently smile back at her, before he placed his hands on her waist and gently had her turn around to face him. If this was what Minato wanted, then that is what he would get, as Ino wouldn't shy away from it. Ino licked her lips as she placed the letter on the desk, then she stared into Minato's eyes. This time he was the one that initiated it, and this time, he is not going to get away with it.

"Hi, Minato-kun" she purred sensually, before going in for a quick peck on the lips. She remained close to his face as she smiled seductively at him. "Hi beautiful" Minato responded in a husky tone. He hugged her tightly, as their bodies pressed against each other. He then gently bit her lower lip. Ino giggled as she responded by licking his lip then biting down gently on his lower lip. Minato then closed his eyes as he went in for another kiss, this time showing his tongue inside her mouth. Ino's eyes widened for a second until she responded to the kiss while hugging him back. They were french kissing while embracing, fully making out for over a minute until Ino was the one that pulled back, catching her breath.

That was her first real kiss if you don't count all the quick pecks she has shared with Minato previously. Also if pecks were counted, then Naruto would have been the first one Ino kissed, since when they were younger, she used to chase him around and give him pecks on the mouth all the time. She loved doing that. Naruto? Not so much though. She loved frenching Minato even more, however. It was even better than what she always imagined it would be. She might get addicted to this.

"What about Kushina-sama?" Ino asked as she stared intently at Minato, with a hint of red adoring her cheeks.

"What about her?" Minato responded as he smiled at her with that sexy confident smile of his that Ino loved. He didn't even want to think about that prude right now, that prude who doesn't even like tongue kisses.

Ino stared at him with wide eyes, she couldn't believe what she just heard "W-what?" she stuttered in disbelief.

Minato gave her a quick kiss "Let's not think about all that, all that matters now is that I want you, Ino-chan!" he declared, causing Ino's whole body to heat up.

Even though they both knew that they shouldn't be doing this, both of them couldn't be happier with what they are doing. Ino especially as they began kissing again, their tongues danced around inside their mouths and they swapped saliva. After another minute of swapping saliva, they took a break to catch their breaths, as Minato gently hugged her while Ino rested her head against his chest. "What's changed? Why now?" Ino asked, smiling as she stared up at him.

Minato stared at her with a gentle smile "I can't lie to myself anymore, every single day since that night, I have been regretting sending you away.." he said as he brushed his thumb against her lip.

Ino licked the tip of his thumb suggestively, which had Minato chuckle "Does that mean that you like me?" Ino asked teasingly "Do you love me?" she added with a giggle.

Minato didn't answer that as he just smiled at her confidently, before going for another kiss.

After another minute of making out they stopped to stare at each other with their noses touching, Ino giggling as Minato smiled at her "So what now? Are we really doing this?" Ino asked in a cheerful, giddy tone.

"I'm game if you are" Minato said with a confident smirk.

"You know it" Ino responded with a confident smirk of her own, before eye winking at him.

Minato gave her a quick peck on the mouth and a light tap on the bum "That's great, Ino-chan. But, it's probably best that you leave now before someone walks in on us".

Ino nodded as she got off of him "How about a date tomorrow?" Ino asked.

Minato scratched the back of his head in thought "That sounds fun, I just don't know when I would find time for it with these mountains of paperwork waiting for me".

"I can come visit you in your office again tomorrow, I'll bring something for us to eat" Ino said with a flirty smile.

"Okay, it's a date" Minato said, smiling warmly back at her.

Ino then headed out of the office, waving at him "See you tomorrow, Minato-kun".

"Bye, Ino-chan" Minato said watching her leave the office with a smile on his face. His smile remained once Ino had closed the door behind her, as this time he had no regrets. This is what wants, a sexy lover who wants him just as much as he wants her. His rock hard cock, which had formed a rather large tent in his pants, most likely agreed with him.

Ino on the other hand was running back home, smiling the whole way. Once at home, she ran upstairs to to her bedroom and got into her bed. She hugged a pillow as she squirmed around in her bed in joy. She couldn't believe what just happened. It felt too good to be true. Her hunk had just told her he likes her and they are going on a date tomorrow. This couldn't have happened at a better time, since she has been so damn horny every single day, for the past year. Now she might finally be able to sate her lust a little bit, if she plays her cards right.

Even though she is overjoyed, she couldn't help but feel bad for Kushina. Kushina has been like a second mother to her, would she be able to look her in the eyes if she and Minato goes further than they already have? What would Minato do about it? He couldn't possibly be thinking about divorcing her? Or does he want a secret relationship? Those were some of the things that Ino thought about and was hoping to get some answers to tomorrow.

Naruto and Kurenai

During these months that has passed, Naruto had once again focused mostly on training. Sometimes he would be joined by Anko, which would certainly make the training experience more interesting. If he wasn't training, he was getting up to no good with Konohamaru and Jiraiya. Sometimes he even joined in when Kushina played ninja with the Konohamaru corps. But for the most part, he just trained alone, while wishing that Kurenai would return.

While not much had changed in Naruto's daily life, he has had a lot of time to think about things. What he thought on the most was of course his so called relationship with Kurenai. He didn't even know if he could call it a relationship since on the day she left on her mission, which she has yet to return from, his parents reminded him at dinner that same day that she is Asuma's girlfriend. During the months that has passed, he has been reminded of that a lot. Even Asuma has stated how much he misses his “sweet princess” at a dinner Naruto and his parents had been invited to over at the Sarutobi's.

That night when they confessed their love for each other and made out for the first time, Naruto had forgotten all about Asuma and Kurenai. He didn't even think about that. That's why he never brought it up. Now that several months has passed, and whenever Kurenai is mentioned he is reminded of her and Asuma's relationship, he really didn't know what to make of his own relationship with her. Were they together? Was she cheating on Asuma? Was she playing him? Naruto didn't know what the hell was going on. But that's the first thing he is going to confront her about when she gets back.

After school ended, Naruto along with Moegi and Udon, laughed at Konohamaru's expense. He was heading home, hanging his head in a sulking manner, muttering about having to take dance lessons with a fat old bitch. In recent years, Hiruzen has forced Konohamaru to take dancing lessons with an old female friend of his. She is like Konohamaru described her, a bit on the large side. Almost three decades ago, when Hiruzen got to know her, she was quite the opposite. She used to be a very beautiful young woman, who was one of Hiruzen's former lovers. Her name is Miss Choo Choo. Even though Konohamaru hates taking his dance lessons, he has gotten quite good at dancing together with a partner, due to taking them.

This is exactly what Hiruzen wanted, as he wanted to help improve Konohamaru's chances to become something of a ladies man. Unlike that son of his, who Hiruzen sees as an utter disappointment. Hiruzen even thinks Asuma's relationship with Kurenai is off. Without knowing the truth, that Kurenai is just using him, he sees that something isn't right, due to the way that they act around each other. Asuma seems almost nervous to even talk to her, while Kurenai seems more interested in conversing with anyone other than Asuma. Even Hiruzen himself, even though Hiruzen is fully aware that Kurenai doesn't hold him in very high regards, due to him asking her to have sex with him constantly.

In fact, Hiruzen would describe the way she looks at him, is the way that regular women looks at disgusting things such as cockroaches or rats. Even so, she prefers to converse with him over Asuma, if the two of them visits him and Konohamaru for dinner, or something like that. If more people are around, especially if its Naruto or Anko, she will not converse with anyone other than them. Except for maybe Naruto's parents. Then there is the fact that Hiruzen down right thinks that Kurenai is way out of Asuma's league.

Hiruzen knows better than anyone what an utter disappointment he is. He is a stuttering fool, who gets overly nervous around pretty women, often blushing and becoming that stuttering fool. Their relationship just doesn't make sense. He wouldn't be thinking this if Kurenai showed any sign of actually liking to be around him, or any affection towards him. But that has never happened, as far as Hiruzen is aware, anyway.

Now, Hiruzen isn't a hundred percent sure that something is wrong about the relationship, it's just his intuition that tells him that something is wrong. He also doesn't see any reason to interfere between them in any way, or confront either one of them about it. He has thought that he could maybe help his son in a way. It would be something that could help boost his confidence in himself, and be more relaxed around women. He would do so by getting Asuma laid, by letting him sleep with one of his lovers. But knowing Asuma, he would probably refuse such an offer, before running away while screaming out a declaration of love for Kurenai.

Hiruzen doesn't want Konohamaru to end up anything like Asuma. So far he has no reason to believe that he would, because he is honestly nothing like Asuma. In fact, Hiruzen has nothing to complain about when it comes to the way that Konohamaru acts around women, and he has even noticed that he is actually quite popular. Except for one thing. That thing is something that teachers will tell Hiruzen about every single week. And that is Konohamaru's obsession with a certain pink haired girl's buttocks. While Hiruzen is glad that Konohamaru is showing interest in girls, and is confident and bold enough to do something like that, he doesn't like the way that Konohamaru goes about it. That's no way to treat a young lady. You should always ask before touching, Hiruzen thinks, just like he always does before he jumps into bed with anyone.

“Have fun dancing with your old lady, Kon!” Naruto yelled as he laughed like a maniac outside the gates to the school yard.

“Don't forget to get her flowers, Konohamaru-chan!” Moegi added, as she laughed along with Naruto, being close to tears even.

Udon laughed as well, but didn't say anything as he kind of felt bad for Konohamaru. Konohamaru glared back at them, barking out “Fuck you all! You will pay for this, kore!” he threatened.

They didn't take his threat seriously, as all three of them fell back, laughing loudly as they laid on the ground. After making fun of Konohamaru, Naruto headed home to start his daily training routine. Once he found himself at his usual training spot, at the edge of his parent's backyard, he had another reason to smile. He found Kurenai, sitting on that large rock, reading a book. This is the first time he has seen her after she left on that mission, back in August.

“Kurenai-chan!” Naruto said in an excited tone as he walked up to her. He couldn't help but be happy to see her even though he had some worries about their relationship.

Kurenai smiled as she pocketed her book, then she ran straight at Naruto and threw her arms around him before frenching him. Kurenai just kept kissing him, with minimal breaks, without saying anything for over five minutes. Eventually they stopped, as Kurenai smiled at him “I have missed you so much, Naruto-kun” she said as she stared into his eyes.

Naruto grinned “Same here, Kurenai-chan” he started, before asking “When did you get back?”.

“Earlier this morning, I have been waiting for you because I wanted to see you and let you be the first one to know that I am back” Kurenai said. She just wanted to see him again as soon as possible, even though she was exhausted. She and her teammates returned from their incredibly long mission at 4 AM in the morning. While she had been focused on her mission these months, she had been thinking about this reunion with Naruto every day she had been out there. Finally they got to be together again, and this time it would be as a couple.

“Did you sleep yet?” Naruto asked in a concerned tone.

Kurenai shook her head “I can sleep later. For now I just want to make up for lost time” she said as she went in for another kiss.

While the two of them started making out again, a make out session would that would last for another ten minutes, Naruto lost some of his earlier worries. His and Kurenai's relationship was real and she was not playing him. She wouldn't be out here in the middle of the night waiting for him if her feelings weren't real. The only worry he had left was the obvious elephant in the room, Sarutobi Asuma.

As they broke apart from the kiss, Naruto noticed just how tired Kurenai really was. Her eye whites were almost as red as her beautiful red eyes, and she had bags below her eyes.

“Go get some rest, Kurenai-chan, I will come see you tonight” Naruto said as he caressed her cheek.

Kurenai smiled warmly as she nodded “You better” she then yawned as she turned around “Good night then, or afternoon rather.” she said with a chuckle.

“Sweet dreams beautiful” Naruto said with a smirk which had Kurenai turn and blow him an air kiss.

Naruto was then able to train alone which was the reason he came out here. Seeing Kurenai had been a very unexpected and welcomed surprise. After she left, Naruto spent the rest of the day training like usual. At 8 PM, he headed home to get dinner, which was when he ran into Jiraiya who was going to his place for the same reason. During dinner, Naruto couldn't help but notice that his parents were in very good moods. His father was smiling the whole time, and seem like he has had a really good day. Kushina was also all smiles and laughs. And that's even though the Konohamaru corps had not come over to play ninja today.

No her great mood had to do with something else, something that will hopefully make sure that she gets to be around Konohamaru even more often. She has decided that she is going to ask him out on a date, with just the two of them. If they have a good time, there is no reason why they can't do that more often afterwards. Even though she is now ready to ask him out on a date, she is still, funnily enough, in complete denial about her romantic feelings for him. Now she just have to muster up the courage to ask him out.

Jiraiya was not in a good mood at dinner though. He was constantly complaining about Ino and how she is “out of control” and that Naruto and Anko has been a bad influence on her. All three members of Naruto's family was very amused by his predicament, as they just laughed at his complaints.

After a very pleasant dinner with his family, Naruto took a shower before getting dressed again. When he was about to leave through the front door, Kushina called out to him from the living room.

“Where are you going dressed like that?” Kushina asked. Had he been wearing his usual training clothes, then she wouldn't have even asked. But now he was dressed in more casual civilian dark blue clothes instead.

“I'm going over to a friends house for a while” Naruto responded.

“What friend?” Kushina asked suspiciously.

“A lady friend obviously!” Jiraiya roared from the kitchen, where he and Minato sat and drank sake “I hope you got condoms with you, because we don't need any more retarded brats in this world!”.

“Be quiet, pervert!” Kushina yelled at Jiraiya, as Naruto chuckled “Mom, just let Ero-sennin have his fun. I'm just going over to Shikamaru's place for a while. I'll be back in a few hours”.

“Okay” Kushina said with a warm smile, which lasted for about two seconds as her expression turned into something more scary “If you aren't back before midnight, then I'll come looking for you. Don't make me do that, okay?” she said in a rather threatening tone.

“Yeah yeah, whatever” Naruto said with a shrug “Don't get your panties in a bunch, you old hag!” he added with a smug grin, before disappearing in a flash of yellow. Kushina glared at the spot he had disappeared from, making note to kick his ass tomorrow. If you ever wondered where Konohamaru got his pet names for Kushina, and antics from, then here is the answer. Naruto is the source of it all, the one who Konohamaru copies.

A few minutes later, Kurenai heard someone knock on her door, she smiled as she ran towards the door to open it. She had been awake for a few hours and even had time to give the hokage a mission report before she returned to get ready for her date with Naruto. She wore a very skimpy black dress again, although very different from last time. It really showed off her sexy figure. (1).

Her smile remained as she opened the door, where she found Naruto, who was smiling back at her.

“Good evening, Naruto-kun” Kurenai said, biting her lip. She couldn't wait to get back to making out.

“Yo, Kurenai-chan” Naruto said in a confident tone, grinning from ear to ear.

“How do I look?” Kurenai asked, as she spun around to give him a complete look of her dress.

“You look amazing as always, Kurenai-chan” Naruto said with an eye wink. He was trying to play it cool, even though he was thinking more along the lines of "Holy shit, she looks so damn sexy-dattebayo!"

“Please come in” Kurenai said, smiling at the compliment as Naruto stepped inside. She then lead him to her living room where the two of them ended up sitting down on her couch. The two stared at each other with what could only be described as thirsty or lusty expressions.

“Want to watch a movie, or would you rather just make out?” Kurenai asked with a sexy smile. That smile turned into an annoyed frown when Naruto said “How about we talk about you and Asuma-san first?”.

“Oh..” Kurenai said with a disgusted expression “I was wondering when you were going to ask about that thing” she continued. It was impossible for Naruto not to notice how her whole mood had changed as soon as he mentioned Asuma, or "that thing" as she called him. It seemed to him, almost like she hates him.

“Obviously I'm going to ask. After that night when we first kissed, I thought you and I were together, but as far as I know, everyone still thinks that you are together with Asuma-san. What is going on Kurenai-chan?” Naruto asked with a serious expression. Kurenai gulped, realizing that Naruto was not going to let something like that stand. He is a real man, who wants to know what his woman does and doesn't do, unlike Asuma who she could play and fool as she saw fit.

“You have nothing to worry about, Naruto-kun, I am not really together with Asuma-san.” Kurenai explained with an awkward smile. She would have preferred if they never had this conversation, since her plan sounded so much better in her head, than it would when told to someone else. She is actually a bit worried that Naruto might think she is a bit crazy or wicked, if she tells him about it.

“Not really together? Are you just fuck buddies or something then?” Naruto asked with a raised eyebrow.

“Eww, God no!” Kurenai shrieked with a disgusted expression “Don't say things like that, you're gonna make me throw up”.

Naruto just stared at her with a confused expression, wondering what to make of this. It honestly didn't make sense. Since she seems to hate him so much, then why the fuck is she going out with him? Naruto wondered about that, as a frowning Kurenai stated “Besides, I'm still a virgin, I'm saving myself for you”.

Naruto snorted in disbelief at that “Now that has to be a lie, there is no way a hot babe like you has never had sex before, dattebayo!”.

Kurenai smiled at the compliment “It's true, I have never even felt any sort of attraction to another person before I fell in love with you.”.

Naruto nursed his temple, as he was still confused about this whole mess “I guess I should consider myself lucky then, but I just can't help but wonder, why are you together with Asuma-san if you are in love with me?”.

Kurenai sighed again “I have been together with Asuma-san for.. Two or three years? I don't remember exactly, it's been a long time, long enough that everyone thinks that we are in serious relationship” she said. She knew exactly how long they had been together, since it happened on Naruto's birthday, about two and a half years ago. It wouldn't be a very thought out plan, if she couldn't remember such a vital part of said plan.

Naruto nodded “That's what everyone says, that you've been dating for two or three years, while I thought you were my girlfriend, even though you've been gone all these months”.

“And you were right to think that, I am your girlfriend, nothing else” Kurenai said with a sweet smile “When I haven't been out on missions, where have I been during these two or three years that I have supposedly been dating Asuma-san?” she asked.

“I don't know” Naruto said with a shrug” I mostly see you and your sexy legs in my backyard whenever I train, dattebayo!”.

Kurenai's smile grew even wider due to receiving another compliment “That's right, that's where I have been almost every single day during those years. I was there with you, because I wanted to spend time with you, to get to know you and eventually muster up the courage to ask you out” she ended with a faint blush.

Naruto scratched the back of his head, while asking “I understand that much, but how does Asuma-san fit into this whole thing? You still haven't told me that”.

Kurenai bit her lip as she stayed quiet for a moment. She really wanted to avoid telling him about this part of the plan. But she knew she has to tell him. “You're gonna think that I'm an awful person” she said with a frown.

“Why?” Naruto asked with a raised eyebrow.

Kurenai then went on to tell him everything, including how her not so very kind thoughts of Asuma. She went into detail on how she wishes to humiliate that “insect” with Naruto's help. She also brought up the reason for that fake relationship, being that she wanted all the “obstacles”, which was mainly Naruto's parents and Anko, to think that she wasn't someone gunning for Naruto. Naruto knew everything about her “evil plan” now, and her pet names for other people. Those pet names were often insects, cockroaches or vermin.

Naruto stared wide eyed at her in pure disbelief, while Kurenai nervously stared back at him. He honestly didn't believe what he had just heard, considering how Kurenai acts otherwise. It was as if she was a different person.

“Like I said, you think that I'm an awful person now, don't you?” Kurenai asked in a sad tone.

“I think that you are a mean bitch” Naruto said nodding, feeling that summarized her pretty well “I still don't understand why you didn't just tell me that you like me. You didn't need some messed up plan for that, especially since I have had a crush on you for as long as I can remember”.

“It's not that easy, Naruto-kun. If everyone weren't convinced that I was together with that stuttering fool of a cockroach, your mother and Anko-chan would never let me get this close to you” Kurenai said in a worried tone.

“You like me that much?” Naruto asked with a raised eyebrow. He was both impressed and a bit disturbed by the fact that she was willing to go so far, just for the chance of dating him.

Kurenai nodded, smiling for the first time in a while “More than you can imagine”. Since Naruto had not barged out of her apartment yet, she had a feeling she might still have a shot with the young ninja prodigy, the man of her dreams.

Naruto grinned “You are not just using me in another one of your evil schemes to get to closer to my father or Ero-sennin or something?” he said jokingly, as he couldn't help but mess with her a little bit. Kurenai's disgusted expression, which quickly turned into a frown, made him believe that she wasn't a big fan of that joke.

“Don't be ridiculous, I have no interest in those insects. Not to mention that I would rather die than to hurt you, my beloved” Kurenai said staring intently at him.

“I see..” Naruto hummed in thought “Well here's the thing Kurenai-chan”.

“Y-yes?” Kurenai answered nervously, fearing that he was going to reject her after having heard all of this. Maybe he didn't like the real Kurenai, she thought.

“While I don't like what you are doing to Asuma-san, that doesn't change anything for us. As long as I don't have to hear any more about that crap, then I'll just pretend that we never had this conversation” Naruto said with a grin. Naruto have to admit that she might be a little bit crazy. But who cares, when she looks like she does. There is no finer babe in all of Konoha. There is no way he isn't gonna go for it.

“Uh!” Kurenai exclaimed in surprise “Then, you will still be with me?” Kurenai she asked in a hopeful tone.

Naruto moved closer to her, staring into her beautiful red eyes while grinning “Yeah, how can I say no to tits like these?” Naruto said as he started grabbing a feel with both hands. Oh how nice they felt. He had been right, there is no finer lady in all of Konoha. Even her tits are the best, Naruto thought before he proceeded to french kiss her, while Kurenai closed her eyes and kissed him back. Naruto felt her up good, playing with her tits outside that dress as the two of them made out for what had to be twenty minutes non stop. After that Naruto started kissing her neck as his hands traveled downwards, groping her ass instead. Kurenai couldn't stop smiling as she closed her eyes and let out quiet moans due to Naruto's touch and his kisses. His hands was roaming her whole body, feeling up anything he wanted, and Kurenai had no problem with that. In fact she loved it, and wanted it to go further.

She hugged her legs around him as Naruto got on top of her and started frenching her again. “Oh God, he's gonna fuck me” Kurenai thought in delight. That was mostly wishful thinking, perhaps, because they never got that far. Their make out session continued for another two hours, where Naruto got really familiar with her big titties and her perfect ass. Naruto played with her ass and tits as much as he wanted, and he never got enough. After another heated make out session at Kurenai's front door, where Naruto's hands were once again feeling up her perfect tight ass, Naruto finally went home. They had agreed to meet up at Naruto's usual training spot tomorrow again, after he gets out of school.

That left a dazed, smirking Kurenai in her apartment. She went to get a glass of wine before going back to the couch. She couldn't stop smiling ever since Naruto told her that they were still going to be together even after she had told him all that. She had her man now, and now all that was left was to make him a man, and make sure she claims him for real, before any other woman gets a chance to.

Hinata

During the months that has passed, not much had changed when it came to Hinata's daily life. She still took every opportunity she could to avoid being at home or anywhere near the Hyuuga clan compound, during the days. Often she would do so by going over to Sakura or Ino's place, or train together with the two of them at Jiraiya's place. The reason is the same as it was back in August. Her father still treats her like a piece of crap, and alot of their clan members does the same. But it's not her father or the other clan members belittling her or making fun of her that makes her want to avoid their clan compound. No, it's still Nagi, who is the main reason why she hates being there.

While the Hyuuga elder may not have put his hands on her again after that first time, he still takes every chance he gets to threaten her or harass her. She has lost counts on how many times that man has told her that she is going to be his wife soon, and that he would let all of his friends have their way with her. Some other days he didn't even mention anything about her becoming his wife, instead she would become a sex slave for him and his friends. This harassment is something Hinata has to deal with on almost a daily basis. It seems almost as if he is taking every chance he gets to either threaten her, harass her, or just leer at her while making suggestive and gross gestures.

He does it so often that her cousin, Neji, has even seen it for himself. Just last week, he saw Nagi tell Hinata about how he was going to tie her up and let every single Hyuuga man that wants her, fuck her, after they had taken the clan from her father. When Hinata ran towards her house in fear, Neji had stopped the terrified girl. He looked her into the eyes with a serious expression, then told her that she had nothing to worry about as Hiashi would never let something like that happen. He also told her that if he did try anything, Neji would personally kill Nagi. That was how Neji showed that he cared for her, even though he was acting like a rude stuck up prick most of the time. But It was reassuring to know that he had her back. She also thanked the ninja Gods that her younger sister, Hanabi, had been left out of it all. It seemed she had no idea what was going on.

About half a year ago, when Sakura brought Hinata and Ino over to Jiraiya's place to train for the first time, Hinata found herself with newfound motivation to train. She wanted to become strong, strong enough to prove her father wrong and to be able to defend herself against Nagi if he was to try anything. Nagi, being one of the village elders, was a powerful ninja back in his day when he was active. He is not someone Hinata could hope to defeat in a fair fight. If something were to happen to her father or Neji, Hinata would have no chance to fight him off if he tried to make one of those threats into reality. For those reasons, along with wanting to protect Hanabi, she wanted to become strong enough to stand on her own feet.

Today was one of those rare days where Hinata did not go with Ino or Sakura to hang out with them after school. Instead she went straight home, intending to do some solo training in her family's own dojo. It seemed her esteemed father had other plans for her, though, because Hinata found her father waiting for her at the gate to the clan compound.

“Hinata, go to your room and put on the clothes that Natsu-san has prepared for you” Hiashi ordered before turning his back to her. Natsu is a female Hyuuga part of the Hyuuga's branch family, who has works as their family maid for a long time.

“Y-yes, father” Hinata said respectfully, before she followed him into the house.

After Hinata entered the house, Hiashi watched his daughter as she nervously walked towards her room. That shy girl was not suited to be his heir, he thought. She would still be useful for his clan in some way though. He would made sure of that, as he had even made some plans to make that happen. This was a plan he came up with after being told by Neji that the elder Nagi, had started threatening and harassing Hinata. Back when Hinata told her about that, Hiashi thought she was just making things up. But when Neji told him about it, his nephew who almost stopped talking to him when Hizashi died, Hiashi started taking that a bit more seriously.

Hiashi is fully aware of the fact that most of the elders are upset with Hinata, due to her being nowhere near the skill level that his heir should be at her age. She is not a prodigy worthy to become the next clan leader. She is a shy and weak girl, whose only good quality is her good looks. Good looks that she got from her beautiful mother, Hitomi, who Hinata looks so much like. Especially now that she has gotten older.

While Hiashi is far from happy with Hinata's progress as a ninja, he is not going to let Nagi or any of the other elders get their way. He is fully aware of some of them plotting against him, and he even suspects that his own father is among them. He is going to crush their dreams of taking over the clan from him. If Hiashi hears that Nagi lays so much as a finger on either one of his daughters, he is going to kill him. The problem is, what if they succeed with their coup? Hiashi would be dead then, because he wouldn't go down without a fight. That would mean that an awful future awaited both of his daughters, especially Hinata.

That's why he is going to take advantage of this little power struggle within his clan. He is going to do that by making an offer to one of the most powerful ninja in this village, Sarutobi Hiruzen. It would be an offer he knows that Hiruzen wouldn't be able to refuse. The offer is to let Hiruzen marry Hinata, in return, Hiruzen would have to promise the Sarutobi clan's help against the elders. Knowing how much Hiruzen likes to court young virgin kunoichi, and knowing about Hiruzen's past with Hitomi, who Hinata looks so much like, Hiashi had a feeling that Hiruzen wouldn't be able to refuse that offer. Other than getting Hiruzen's help in the power struggle, he also wants him to help him buy up the unused land where the Uchiha clan used to live. Hiruzen could easily talk Minato and Mikoto into allowing the Hyuuga clan to buy it.

Hiashi would need Hiruzen's help since he suspects that the elders part of this plot to overthrow him, has most of the branch members and a few of the main families under their support. If this actually turns into a civil war within the clan, he would need outside help. He needs to do this because he wants to keep all the problems within the clan away from the public. He is too proud to let the other clans know that the Hyuuga was having all these troubles. That's why he couldn't just go to the hokage and have him deal with the problem. It would hurt his pride and it would hurt his reputation as the clan leader.

In Hiashi's twisted mind, a marriage between Hiruzen and Hinata, would be the best for all parties involved. Hinata would get the protection of the Sarutobi clan and would never have to worry about Hyuuga clan elders again. She also didn't have to worry about her ninja career since just being the wife to such a powerful man would mean that she would be set both financially and have a place to live for the rest of her life. This way he would secure a good future for his “failure” of a daughter. In turn, Hiruzen would get a young beautiful wife who looks almost exactly like his former lover, who he even fell in love with. Hiashi is convinced that Hiruzen would be just as happy about this arrangement. Hiashi in turn, wouldn't have to worry about Hinata any more after that, knowing that she wo uld be safe with Hiruzen.

While Hiashi was thinking over his arranged marriage plans, Hinata was standing next to her bed, holding up a tiny purple skirt in her hands. On her bed, was a tiny white tank top. If she wore that it would leave her stomach exposed and it would be impossible for her to hide her sizable bust, only wearing that. Even if she kept the bandages that she always wear underneath her shirt and jacket as bindings, to help hide her chest, as to not draw any attention to herself in school, she wouldn't be able to hide it wearing that tight, tiny tank top. In fact, the bandages would show, which would just make it look weird. Meaning that she wouldn't be able to wear bandages at all.

But her father had ordered her to wear it, so she had no choice but to put it on before heading out of her room to go find him. She found him in the kitchen, drinking some kind of alcohol, which happened to be a very strong whiskey. Hiashi has been drinking quite a bit of whiskey lately. She walked into the kitchen, as Hiashi stared at her while scowling as he always does.

“Lord f-father” Hinata stuttered “Is this what you wanted me to wear?”.

Hiashi nodded, taking a sip of his drink, which was a strong, smokey whiskey “That will suffice. Now go take a shower. When you are done, Natsu-san will help you do your hair and make up. We have an important guest coming over tonight”.

“Y-yes f-father” Hinata stuttered as she gave him a respectful, yet nervous bow, before leaving the kitchen. She had no idea what was going on, who their guest would be, or why she was going to wear something like that. Her father usually have her dress up in expensive, old fashioned kimono's or yukata's, whenever they had guests or if they had been invited over as guests to someone else. When she was younger, when Hiashi was still a nice to her and more of a good guy in general, he always told her that those old fashioned kimono's and yukata's were the clothes most suited for a “Hyuuga princess”. Hyuuga princess was her former nickname that Hiashi always used to call her back then.

Albeit a little bit confused, Hinata did as her father asked. She took a shower, then spent half an hour in front of the mirror in her room, fixing her hair and putting on make up with the help of Natsu. When she was done, she once again presented herself before her father in the kitchen. She couldn't help but notice that the whiskey bottle on the table in front of him, which was almost full earlier before she showered, was now half full.

“A-all d-done f-father” she stuttered, sounding even more nervous than usual. Earlier when she looked at herself in the mirror, before going out to talk with Hiashi again, she thought she looked pretty good. She just hoped this would please her father.

“Hmm?” Hiashi hummed, then glanced at her. Hinata thought his eyes widened there for a second, when he stared at her, but his expression turned back to his usual frown soon after. For a second there, he thought he was staring at his wife, being dressed up for a long night of swingers fun with Hiruzen and one of his lovers.

Hiashi collected himself, as he nodded. He then took another sip of his whiskey, before saying “Our guest should be here in about an hour. You can do what you want until then, as long as you don't mess up your hair and make up, or dirty your clothes”.

“Y-yes father” Hinata said once again as she bowed respectfully. She then left the kitchen, knowing exactly where she wanted to spend this hour before their mystery guest arrives. The Hyuuga clan compound is one of the larger compounds in the village. The house belonging to Hiashi, as the head of the clan, is the biggest and most luxurious one, by far. They also had the largest plot of land as their backyard and garden.

Their backyard, where their large garden is also located, is in the shape of a rectangle. The longer sides of that rectangle is about a kilometer long, while the shorter sides is about half that, at around five hundred meters long. It's pretty big for being a backyard for just one family, but it is nowhere near as big as the backyard belonging to Naruto's parents house. Their backyard is larger than some training grounds, and about ten times larger than Hinata's backyard.

Hinata went out to their garden, which is located pretty far away from their home, close to the end of their backyard. The reason it was located so far away from their house, was because Hiashi wanted the rest of the garden to be used as a sparring grounds or training grounds. Hinata's mom is the one that has planted every single flower, plant and herb that is part of that garden. It's a beautiful and large garden, full of many different kinds of colorful and beautiful flowers.

Her mom also planted a lot of herbs, some of which can be turned into ingredients for food, or even medicinal ointments. The latter is something Hinata has started experimenting a little bit with, as she thinks having some medical ointment with her on missions with her future team, wouldn't hurt. It's also something she wants to give to Naruto as a present. Hitomi really cared for her garden. Other than her daughters, it was her pride and joy. After she had passed away, Hinata took it upon herself to take care of that garden, with a little help of their maids. Hanabi, her tomboy younger sister, wasn't much for gardening, though.

For forty minutes, Hinata watered the flowers and plants, before sitting down in front of her favorite flowers. She just looked at them, smiling as she remembered sitting at this spot, together with her mom and sister, enjoying the same sight and smell of these beautiful flowers. She spent another ten minutes there, just looking at the flower and enjoying the peace and quiet. She wouldn't have minded staying her much longer, so that she could avoid going home to see her father and find out whatever it is that is going to happen tonight.

Who knows what he has planned for her, by having her dress up like this. This was the kind of clothes that Ino or Anko would wear to impress Naruto. Hinata has never really worn clothes like this before. And why was he drinking? While he has started drinking more often lately, he usually doesn't do that during the middle of the day. Especially not if they are expecting a guest. Hinata couldn't help but have a bad feeling about this.Hinata was about to get up and head back to her her house, when she almost jumped in fright due to hearing the voice of someone, standing close behind her. It was Nagi, whose disgusting old voice, made Hinata shiver in disgust and fright.

“Hi Hinata-chan, what are you doing all alone out here?” he asked while leering at her chest.

About ten minutes earlier, the former hokage, Sarutobi Hiruzen, had made his way out of the Sarutobi clan compound. He started heading towards the Hyuuga clan compound, as he was going to join Hiashi and his daughters for dinner. He didn't have to worry about Konohamaru since he was going to be busy with his dance lesson with Miss Choo Choo. Hiruzen is not all too happy about this dinner. In fact, he has kinda avoided it for several months. He has ran into Hiashi here and there, and even had Hiashi come visit him. Hiashi would invite him for dinner every single time, with Hiruzen coming up with any excuse he could think of not to go over there.

Had it been the old Hiashi, the person who Hiruzen thought of as his best friend, then he wouldn't decline those dinner invitations. It's just that he can't stand the man that Hiashi has become today. He has basically become the boring stuck up excuse of a man that the old Hiashi hated. Going over there, Hiruzen had no knowledge about the troubles within the Hyuuga clan, or any of Hiashi's plans. He has his own clan to take care of, the Sarutobi clan, which he is still the clan leader of. Hiruzen doesn't meddle much with official ninja business any more, unless Minato asks for his help. At most, he is is something of an adviser to Minato.

Hiruzen eventually arrived at the gates to the Hyuuga clan compound, about ten minutes before Hiashi told him to come over. At the gates, he found a young male Hyuuga genin waiting for him. Hiruzen recognized him because Minato had talked about him and shown him his picture. The genin in question was none other than the rookie of the year, of last years graduating class. He is currently a genin part of Maito Gai's team, together with two other very promising genin. One of those is a cute girl by the name of Tenten, who harshly rejected Hiruzen's invitation to have sex, last summer. The other beauty of that class, Sara, was someone Hiruzen didn't even ask. Not because he didn't want to, but because he just didn't want to make things weird between him and Mikoto.

“Lord Third” Neji said while bowing “I've been instructed to escort you to Hiashi-sama's home”.

Hiruzen shook his head “No need for that respectful nonsense, raise your head boy” Hiruzen said, then walked into the Hyuuga clan compound, walking down the road that lead to Hiashi's house. He had been here so many times before, he didn't need some damn escort to take him there.

“I must insist, Hiashi-sama ordered me to do so” Neji said, as he walked next to Hiruzen, who frowned at the young Hyuuga.

“Suit yourself..” Hiruzen said shaking his head. Good lord, he is acting like the new Hiashi. Just what has happened to the Hyuuga clan since Hitomi died. Did they all become these serious, boring assholes?

That was around the same time that Nagi had approached Hinata. After Nagi had made his presence known, Hinata didn't answer him in favor of hurriedly getting up, then attempting to walk past him, as she wanted to get away from him as soon as possible. Nagi grabbed her hard by her arm and held her back “Oh my, you look so very beautiful today, Hinata-chan. Did you dress up expecting to see me here?” he said, leering at her.

“L-let me go” Hinata stuttered, trying to get free from his hold, without any luck. He was much stronger than her.

Nagi's face hardened, before he said “Shut up, you little whore!”. He then pulled even harder at her arm, as he started dragging her with him, while Hinata struggled to get loose from his grip, and kept pleading to him to let her go, with her usual stutter. Nagi was pulling her through the garden, walking over flowers that Hinata's mom had planted when she was still alive, in the process. He was laughing as he pulled her, all the way towards a large set of bushes at end of the backyard. He didn't stop until they were behind that large bush. Now they wouldn't be seen by anyone, which was exactly what Nagi wanted,. He still held her arm with a firm grip as he started licking Hinata's cheeks.

“N-no! S-stop” Hinata whimpered out, being more scared than she had ever been in her life. Nagi put his free hand under her tank top and started groping her breasts, while he continued to lick her cheeks.

“Come on give me a kiss” Nagi said with disgusting, perverted expression.

“No!” Hinata whimpered “Why are you doing this?” she cried out.

“You did this to yourself by tempting me like this” Nagi said, as he stopped licking her. Instead he put both of his arms around her, with her hands holding onto her ass. He pressed her tightly against himself, while grabbing her ass hard. Hinata cried as she really tried to get out of his hold, but with the same result as earlier. He was just too strong for her, even at his old age.

“Come on, we can do this the hard way or the easy way.” He said with a disgusting pervert laugh "Either way, I'm going to fuck you now, Hinata-chan!" He then stuck out his tongue, pressing it against her lips, trying to force it inside her mouth. Hinata continued to struggle, as she kept moving her head to from side to side to get his tongue away from her lips. After a while, Nagi lost his patience as he put his body weight over her, causing her to fall down on the grassy ground, laying on her back with him on top of her. He ripped Hinata's tank top apart, before he started groping her chest again with both hands, while Hinata sobbed.

“Help me, please someone!” she cried out meekly.

“These tits are the best, Hinata-chan. I bet they are gonna be just as big as Hitomi-sama's were soon. Hitomi-sama's titties were the best!” Nagi said with a loud laugh “Oh, how we enjoyed fucking that slut every day behind your fathers back, back then”.

Hinata's face hardened when she heard that, as she somehow garnered some courage, which she didn't know she had. She spat in his face and yelled “Take that back! Don't you dare speak about my mother that way!”.

Nagi wiped off the spit from his face, then slapped Hinata's cheek, hard. The slap was so hard that she started bleeding from her lip.

“I told you to shut up, you little whore! What the fuck do you know about that anyway? All you are good for is being my future sex slave!” Nagi told her in angry tone. He then started roaming Hinata's lower body, as she kept crying and silently begging someone to come help her. Nagi's hand traveled under her skirt, pulling down her panties down to her thigh. He then lifted her skirt and drooled as he looked at her shaved virgin pussy. Even though she wasn't expecting any man to see her vagina any time soon, she always shaves. It's something that every academy student does, almost as if it's fashion. Hinata just didn't want to stand out in any way, so she did the same.

“I can't believe I get to be the first one to fuck this prime virgin cunt” he said with a perverted leer. Hinata's sobbing intensified as Nagi stood up and started pulling down his pants. She then closed her eyes, not wanting to see anything of that man naked, nor did she want to remember this experience as he was sure to get on top of her again, before raping her. After ten seconds of having her eyes closed, Nagi had yet to do anything as she couldn't feel his disgusting body on top of her. Nor was he standing close to her, laughing perversely as he leered at her. The only thing she heard, was this strange sound which sounded almost as if someone was struggling to breath. Then she felt a weight on top of her, but I wasn't Nagi. It was much lighter than that, as it felt like a large piece of clothing had been placed on her, covering up her privates.

About a minute earlier, Hiruzen and Negi had reached Hiashi's house.

“Here we are, Lord Third” Neji said respectfully, as he bowed to him once again.

“Yeah, I've been here hundreds of times..” Hiruzen said with a sweat drop. He then turned to take a look at Hiashi's backyard. He remembered Hitomi's garden and how beautiful it was. He wanted to see if it still looked the same, or if they had changed it. When he stared towards the garden, he didn't really get a good look of it, because something else had caught his attention. It made him disappear in a blur, as he used a shunshin to teleport himself over to the garden.

Hyuuga Nagi is a man who Hiruzen personally removed from the ninja forces due to suspicions of him being the type of guy that Hiruzen despises. There were stories of him always raping any enemy kunoichi, female bandits and other enemies that he defeated. There are also rumors that he has forced himself on innocent civilians. Hiruzen is also pretty damn sure he has forced himself upon his female teammates as well. None of his teammates has said anything, but a look and the way they act around someone, can say a lot more than words sometimes.

The reason no one said anything, is because there is an unwritten rule for Konoha ninja. What happens on a mission, stays on a mission. If you report any kind of sexual activities to the hokage, your other colleagues could give you a hard time for that. If most of your colleagues are lowlifes, that is. Unfortunately, most of them probably are. Today Nagi is one of the Hyuuga elders, which is something that baffles Hiruzen. How could they let him be in any kind of leader position? Especially after he told Hiashi and all the elders of all of these accusations and rumors against him.

Hiruzen was sure that he did the right thing by removing him from the ninja force, by taking his headband. He wished he could throw him in prison as well, but he didn't have any evidence to go on. But now he got him, because what he saw earlier, was Nagi, dragging a young Hyuuga girl by her arm, behind a bush, which was located behind the garden. When Hiruzen arrived, his blood started to boil. That wasn't just any Hyuuga girl that he had dragged behind that bush. The girl in question, was none other than Hyuuga Hinata, Hitomi's daughter.

When he got there, Nagi was in the middle of pulling down Hinata's panties to her thighs. He could hear how Hinata sobbed and quietly begged for someone to help her, while Hiruzen sneakily got closer to them. Hiruzen was so damn happy that he got here in time, before Nagi would be able to fully complete his rape attempt. Although this experience will probably haunt Hinata for the rest of her life anyway. But at least now, he was going to get rid of Nagi once and for all.

“I can't believe I get to be the first one to fuck this prime virgin cunt” He heard Nagi say while Hinata's sobbing intensified. Nagi then stood up and started pulling down his pants, at the same time Hiruzen threw his white and red robe over Hinata, covering her up. A split second later, he had sneaked up on Nagi, standing right behind him. He saw that Hinata had closed her eyes. Maybe she did so due to fear, maybe because she doesn't want to see the ugly face of this disgusting human being. Either way, she wouldn't have to suffer anymore, he thought as he put his arm around Nagi's neck and started choking him. He was choking him with all of his might and he was not going to let go until he heard his neck snap.

“Finally caught you, you scum of Konoha” Hiruzen said, in a tone that was not usual for him, as he sounded terrifying right now. A pissed off Hiruzen was a rare sight to see, but when you did, you were either going to die, or see someone getting killed. Hiruzen is not someone you want as your enemy. A few seconds later, Hiruzen heard the mans neck snap, and so did Hinata. It was the sound of Nagi's neck snapping that made her open her eyes, to see what was happening.

Hinata gasped at what she saw. Standing in front of her was none other than Sarutobi Hiruzen, towering over the lifeless body of her worst tormentor. That scummy lowlife finally got what he deserved, she thought, as she stared at her savior. Hiruzen glanced back at her, as his expression changed from that terrifying glare, to his usual, warm and friendly smile “Sorry, I didn't mean to scare you, little Hyuuga princess”

The nickname was something he always called her when he used to visit their home back when he and Hiashi were still good friends. It's the same nickname Hiashi had for her, except Hiruzen liked to add “little” to tease the young Hyuuga heiress a bit.

Hinata shook her head “No, thank you Lord Third. I don't know how I will ever be able to repay you for saving me from that man” she said with a very distinct lack of a stutter, as her smile remained. She smiled because Hiruzen used that old nickname. Often when Hiruzen visited, he would also bring along an “onee-chan”, a female friend of his, who Hinata would refer to as an onee-chan. From what Hinata remembers, Hiruzen had a lot female friends who he brought with him to visit them, that meant that Hinata got to know a ton of “onee-chans” back then.

Hiruzen shook his head “No need to thank me, I just wish I could have intervened sooner. I'm afraid my shunshin is no longer as fast as it used to be”.

“If it w-weren't for you h-he would have..” Hinata started with her stutter returning in full force.

Hiruzen held up his hand, which interrupted her. Then he said “Let's not think about what could have happened. Instead, why don't you make sure your clothes are back where they should be, before your cousin arrives”

Hinata blushed as she heard Neji's shouts of “Lord Third, what happened!?” from the distance. She reached down to pull up her panties. Her actions were covered up by Hiruzen's robe, but that didn't matter as Hiruzen had turned around to look at the incoming Neji, instead of staring at Hinata. When Hinata was done, while using his robe to cover her upper body. At this point she couldn't hold back her emotions anymore as tears started spilling out of her mouth “T-Thank you so m-much for saving me, Lord Third”

Hiruzen didn't say anything as he stared at Hinata's face, he noticed that she had a small cut on her lip and was bleeding a little bit from it. Hiruzen grabbed a handkerchief from his pocket, then gently wiped the blood away from Hinata's cheek “Do you wish to see a doctor? I could get one of Konoha's best doctors to take a look at you”.

“N-No, I'm f-fine” Hinata stuttered “I j-just want to go home”.

Hiruzen nodded, just as Neji arrived. Neji stared at Hinata with a worried expression as it was impossible for him not to notice that something must have happened. Her white tank top was laying in two pieces in the grass, her lip was still a bit bloody and the arm which Nagi had grabbed earlier when he pulled her across the garden, was red due to his hard grip. He then stared at Hiruzen and when he did, he saw Nagi's dead body behind him, laying down in the mud, face first.

“Lord Third, what happened!?” he yelled in a worried tone. Before Hiruzen could answer, Neji asked another question “Did Nagi-sama do something to Hinata-sama again?”.

“Nagi-sama?” Hiruzen said with a raised eyebrow, as he didn't think that scum deserved to be referred to with such a respectful suffix.

Neji frowned, as he spoke with hatred “I have to call him that, since I'm of the branch family. I have no reason to show any kind of respect for that disgrace”.

“And neither should you” Hiruzen said glancing back at Neji “That man might have been one of the most disgusting men to have ever belonged to this village. I'm happy that he died by my hands”.

“Is he dead then?” Neji asked. While their conversation went on, Hinata was lowering her head in shame. Thinking that she had caused this trouble, that she was to blame for what happened. She just knew her father would blame her for all of this.

“Dead as one can be. Just forget about that trash, I will send word to Minato and let one of his masked cronies clean it up” Hiruzen said with a chuckle, referring to the Hokage's personal anbu.

“Now if you would please bring Hinata-chan here back to her house, she has just experienced something awful..” Hiruzen said in a sad tone.

Neji saluted the former Hokage, then turned to Hinata “Hinata-sama” Neji said as he stared at Hinata with a worried expression “Are you okay?”.

Hinata managed to show her cousin a kind smile, since she was happy that Neji was once again caring for her well being “Y-yes, all thanks to Lord Third”.

Hiruzen chuckled “No need for such formalities with me, young lady. Just call me old man, gramps or something like that. Anything is fine as long as you don't take after my stupid grandson and that stupid Uzumaki brat, by calling me what they do” Hiruzen ended with a laugh. He was trying to cheer up Hinata a little bit. Hiruzen was referring to how they always call him “Old pervert”, which Hinata understood.

“We couldn't possibly call you by such a friendly..” Neji began when Hinata turned to Hiruzen and smiled “U-understood, t-thanks for saving me, old man!” in a cheerful tone.

“H-hinata-sama!?” Neji yelled comically, not believing his ears. For Hinata of all people to call the mighty third hokage old man of all things.

Hiruzen then laughed out loud as the three of them made their way back to Hiashi's house. He let Hinata and Neji get a head start as he summoned a small monkey, to deliver a message to Minato, telling him what happened here, and ask him to clean it up. The mood had improved a bit, but Hinata was still very shook up by what had just happened. When they arrived at the house, they found Hiashi standing at the front door, looking out of it with searching eyes, while scowling. When he saw them coming, his face hardened. He noticed that Hinata was wearing Hiruzen's robe around her, while her skirt was dirty and was full of green grass marks.

“Don't tell me you dirtied your clothes, Hinata!! I can't even keep my eyes off of you for an hour without you doing something to humiliate me! How can you show yourself to our guest looking like that!?” He shouted at Hinata, while slurring his words. “Is that Hiruzen's robe you are wearing!? What did you do with your shirt!?”.

Neji glared at Hiashi, in a way which he had never done before, as he hugged Hinata's face into his chest, due the girl now bawling her eyes out, crying. She knew her father was going to react like this, but it still hurt her whenever he did.

“Neji-kun, please take Hinata-chan to her room. I need to have a chat with Hiashi” Hiruzen said with a serious expression.

“Yes, Lord Third” Neji said as he walked Hinata up to the front door. They walked passed Hiashi as he continued to yell “What are you crying about!? You are not acting like a Hyuuga!! It's beneath you to act like..” by now Neji was walking with Hinata down the hallway, towards her bedroom. And the reason Hiashi's yell was interrupted was because he had just had his face smashed in, courtesy of one of Hiruzen's hard punches. Hiruzen's punch broke his nose and sent Hiashi falling down on the floor.

Neji and Hinata was walking faster now, neither of them wanted to see Hiashi in his current state. If anything, the way he acted, and the way he slurred when he talked due to having drank too much, was beneath a Hyuuga, Neji thought.

“Hiruzen!!” Hiashi yelled, glaring up at him “How dare you attack me? You are a guest in my home!”

“If you talk to Hitomi's daughter like that within my presence again, then I will send you to the after life together with that lowlife who I sent to the afterlife a few minutes ago. He is currently laying dead in your garden” Hiruzen said, his serious, hardened expression returning. He really stared Hiashi down as he sat on his butt on the floor of his porch.

“What are you talking about?” Hiashi asked in confusion, while holding his nose. The answer he got from his old friend, was Hiruzen grabbing him by the collar of his shirt, lifting him up from the floor as he yelled at him “I warned you about him! And I told you to stop wallowing in self pity! I told you to get your act together, to act like a man. Look at you, look at what you have become. You are a spoiled and selfish little cunt, who treats everyone like crap. Even your own family!”.

Hiashi was completely silent as Hiruzen yelled at him. A tear drop had spilled out from the old man's eyes. Even in his drunken state, Hiashi knew that something serious had happened for Hiruzen to act this way.

“Hiruzen, what happened?” Hiashi asked in a low tone.

Hiruzen let go off Hiashi, then turned around and walked down the porch “Hiashi.. Nagi tried to rape your daughter”.

Hiashi lost his balance when he heard that, as he ended up sitting on his porch again, staring at Hiruzen with an empty expression.

“You stink of alcohol, and you are acting like a total baboon. Why don't you sleep it off. I will take a rain check on that dinner and we can continue this lovely conversation another time. Make sure you apologize to Hinata-chan. That poor girl must be frightened and sad.” Hiruzen said as he started walking away. He had no intentions of staying to have dinner with a drunk Hiashi who treated Hinata like that.

“Where is he!?” Hiashi yelled as he activated his byakugan eyes, looking as if he was ready for a fight.

“Anbu has most likely cleaned up the trash already, like I told you, I sent him to the after life. In his case, that's a one way ticket to hell.” Hiruzen said as he walked further down the road in the Hyuuga clan compound, leaving a very sad and angry Hiashi on that porch. As Hiruzen walked down the road, he walked towards three familiar faces. They weren't walking in a group as one of them was much closer to Hiruzen, while the other two, walked further down the road, keeping their distance.

The person closest to Hiruzen is an old man, who is maybe a decade younger than Hiruzen. This is one of Hinata's grandfathers, her grandfather on her mother's side of the family. Hyuuga Hiroshi is his name. He is a man who Hiruzen doesn't personally know. He knows that he is part of the main branch of the Hyuuga clan, that he is a widower and that he is the father to Hitomi and her younger sister, Hinako. While he is a decade younger than Hiruzen, that would be hard to tell at first glance if you didn't know their actual ages, since he appears as if he has aged a lot more than Hiruzen.

“Lord Third” The man said, respectfully as he stopped in front of him “Did something happen? I heard yells coming from Hiashi's home”.

“Yes, we had an argument. You may need to find him a doctor to heal his broken nose, and someone needs to put that disgraceful drunkard to bed as well. The man is very drunk” Hiruzen said with a frown.

The other two people were standing about five meters behind Hiroshi. The two people in question is none other than Hiruzen's old classmates, Hyuuga Hanabi and Hyuuga Neji. Those are Hinata's grandparents on her father's side, who her sister and her cousin are named after.

The reason Hiruzen was paying attention to them, even though he was talking to someone else, was because of Neji's expression. The man who looked very much like an older version of Hiashi, was gripping his cane hard as he glared at the other elder. If looks could kill, then the way he was currently staring at the man in front of Hiruzen, would definitely be lethal. Maybe there was a man here who Neji disliked even more than himself, Hiruzen thought. Although, since the man was using a cane to help keep his balance as he walked, he didn't appear very threatening to the old Hokage.

Hiruzen himself doesn't have any contempt for the former Hyuuga clan head. It's quite the opposite instead, as he respects the man for his professionalism, and for everything he accomplished both as a ninja and a clan head. Neji on the other hand, is angry with Hiruzen due to his involvement with the Hizashi and Kumo incident.

“What?” Hiroshi asked with wide eyes “If that's true, then I better hurry up and see what's going on. Good evening to you, Lord Third”.

Hiruzen nodded as he walked passed him. He thought that man seemed in a hurry to get away from him, or maybe it was Neji's angry glare, that made him want to get away from them. The other two grandparents, seemed to have stopped and was waiting for Hiroshi to walk off, before they approached Hiruzen.

“Lord Third” Hanabi said with a respectful bow.

“My old classmates, Hanabi and Neji, always together” Hiruzen said with a chuckle. Hanabi smiled, while Neji stared at him with a serious expression “You have my thanks, Hiruzen”.

“Hmm?” Hiruzen responded, confused as to why he of all people were suddenly being polite.

“For protecting my granddaughter” he said with a frown.

“How do you know about that?” Hiruzen asked.

Neji started coughing, which Hiruzen thought didn't sound good at all, while his wife answered for him “We always watch our grandchil-*dren from afar, when they are outdoors within this compound belonging to this disgrace of a clan” Hanabi said.

“Where were you then? Why didn't you act sooner?!” Hiruzen yelled in anger. They weren't doing a very good job of watching over her, if they let a man like Nagi do that to her, he thought.

Neji looked down at the ground in shame as he spoke “If my body wasn't so weak, I would have been there the moment he grabbed her arm. I have grown old and weak, Hiruzen, we both have” he said referring to his wife next to him.

“Still, even with my weak body, I was heading out there to kill that disgrace. The only reason I didn't show myself, was because you got there before me. That's why you have my thanks” Neji said, bowing respectfully.

“You should know me better than that by now, you don't need to thank me for doing what is right. Besides, that man should have been dead long ago. And he definitely should have never been given the position of a Hyuuga elder” Hiruzen said with a sigh “I warned you of him, you and Hiashi both”.

“You are right in everything you say, Hiruzen. I couldn't agree more with not letting that disgrace becoming an elder. It was not my decision to make, however. Hiashi and I have barely spoken since Hizashi passed. It was him and and the other elders who made that decision to let Nagi have a leader position within our clan” Neji said with a hand on his forehead “I have my reasons for staying away from clan matters.. But after this, I don't know if I can stay silent any longer”.

“You usually do what is right. Just do what you need to do, I will support you all the way” Hiruzen said, offering his hand for a handshake. The two old men then shook hands, before Hiruzen asked “That other guy I talked to, isn't he Hitomi-chan's father?”.

Neji just grunted in response as his frown returned. Hiruzen got the feeling that he wasn't the biggest fan of Hiroshi.

“Yes” Hanabi said scratching the back of her head “Neji can't tolerate that man”.

“I have good reasons not to” Neji said with a serious expression. He then started walking, slowly as a weak, frail old man would “Maybe I will tell you all about that some day.. I have come to learn that the people I can trust are few and far in between. For now though, I just want to see how my granddaughter is doing”

Hiruzen nodded with a smile “I will take my leave then, always a pleasure Hanabi”.

Hanabi chuckled, thinking that Hiruzen never changes, as he can't help but to be a bit flirty even at their old age “Good evening, Lord Third”.

While Hiruzen was talking to Hinata's grandparents, Hinata was laying in her bed, being comforted by one of her family's maids, Natsu. Neji, the younger, was standing outside her room, in front of her door, as if he was guarding it. Meanwhile Hanabi, the younger, had just gotten home and was now struggling to get her father to his bedroom, so that he could get some rest. Hiroshi ended up helping her, once he had arrived. Hiashi then fell asleep, pretty much instantly after they had thrown him onto his bed.

Hiroshi then made his way to Hinata's room, where he found the guarding Neji standing outside of said room.

“Guarding your superiors?” Hiroshi asked Neji with a smug smile. Neji frowned as he stepped aside to let the man go inside to see his granddaughter. Neji wasn't a big fan of Hiroshi either. He was always kind and loving when interacting with Hinata and Hanabi. But whenever he interacted with him, he always insulted him and reminded him that he was a branch family member, someone who is worth less than a Hyuuga member. Neji didn't say a word to the man as he entered Hinata's room.

When Natsu saw Hiroshi, she got up and bowed to him “Hiroshi-sama” she said respectfully.

“Hey there, Natsu-san. May I talk to my granddaughter alone for a while?” Hiroshi asked with a kind smile.

“Of course” Natsu said, before taking her leave.

Hinata stopped crying whens she saw Hiroshi, as the old man sat down on the edge of her bed. She then hugged him, resting her head against his chest as the man patted her back, comforting her. Hinata loved all her grandparents, but Hiroshi had to be her favorite. He was always very kind to her and would often comfort her like this when she was sad. Her other grandparents are also kind, especially Hanabi, who is just as kind as Hiroshi. Her other grandfather, Neji, on the other hand, doesn't exactly comfort Hinata, hug her or compliment her. It wasn't that he hated her or anything, he just wasn't the kind of person to give hugs. Hinata knows that he cares for her though. He is the only one who has spoken up when Hiashi or anyone else has belittled or insulted her in front of him.

There is just one problem with her other two grandparents. Her father has told Hinata and Hanabi that he suspects that his father, Neji, is among the group that is trying to overthrow him. It is well known to everyone within their clan that Hiashi and Neji are not on good terms and they barely talk to each other anymore. Their fight has never affected Hinata and Hanabi though, their grandparents treat them exactly the way they did before. Although the elder Neji, can scare her a bit sometimes, when he gets into a heated stare down with Hiashi.

If anything, the only thing that has changed since Hizashi and Hitomi died, is that her other grandfather, Hiroshi, became more friendly and would visit them more often. Hinata figured that her kind grandpa did that since he was worried about them and Hiashi. That's why he is her favorite.

Hinata started crying again, even more than before as Hiroshi spoke “There there, calm down Hinata-chan. Why are you crying, did your father say something stupid again?” he asked in a worried tone. She stared up at him “No, it was Nagi-san.. He tried to.. He tried to..” Hinata stuttered, as her tears continued to fall.

“Don't tell me that vile man threatened you again” Hiroshi said with an angry frown “I think I need to have a talk with him again, if that is the case”.

Hinata shook her head “It's too late for that, because he is dead. Lord Third saved me, he killed Nagi after he tried to force himself on me..” she stuttered out while sniffling, before hugging Hiroshi again, burying her face into his chest.

“My poor girl!” Hiroshi said concerned as he hugged her back “I wish I would have been there to protect you. Nagi would have wished he never had been born then!”.

Hinata continued to sob into his chest “He s-said.. That he and others.. w-with mom” she whined out.

“What did he say about my Hitomi?” Hiroshi asked in a calm tone. Then they heard the loud sound of a throat being cleared.

“Excuse me” The old Neji said, standing next to his wife “I would like to have a word with Hinata”.

“I see” Hiroshi said, letting go of Hinata. He then stood up and patted her on the head “I'm glad you are okay Hinata-chan, we will talk more another time”.

Hinata nodded as she continued to sob. Her grandmother, Hanabi, then rushed over to the bed and hugged her, while Hiroshi left the room. Neji followed him, as they walked passed his grandson, the younger Neji, down the hallway. Hiroshi wore a smug grin the whole time and was letting out quiet chuckles, while the elder Neji glared at his back. He wanted that man out of the house before he talked to Hinata. When Hiroshi was out of the door, Neji walked back to Hinata's room, but stopped outside of it to talk with the young man named after him, his grandson.

He stared at Neji with a tired smile “You're a good kid, Neji. I am glad you were named after me”.

“Thanks, Lord Grandfather” Neji said with a bow.

“My boy, fate may not have given you the best opportunities in your young life. Just remember that your fate is not written in stone. Just because you have had a hard time in the past, doesn't mean that you must have a hard time in the future. You have talent, you take your training and your ninja work seriously, yet you have a kind and gentle heart, which makes you want to protect what is most important, your family. You would have been perfect as the next clan leader of this clan, if fate didn't have you and Hizashi be born in the branch family” The elder Neji said in a tired tone, while smiling gently at the younger Neji.

“I am undeserving of this high praise, Lord Grandfather. But your words honor me greatly” Neji said, still bowing.

“Mhm” The elder Neji responded, placing his hand gently on Neji's chin to raise his head “My advice to you would be to forget about this clan. Forget about everyone except your closest family members. Instead focus on trying to climb the ranks within the village. You can reach higher than the position of clan leader, you could become a legendary ninja like the sannin and maybe even the Hokage. As long as you keep working hard, you have the potential to be truly great” The elder Neji said, then gently ruffled his hair “Now go home, you don't need to protect your cousin any longer tonight”.

“Yes, good night, Lord Grandfather!” Neji said, walking towards the door in haste, to hide his tears. That was probably the kindest and best encouragement he had ever heard in his life. Having lost both of his parents at a young age, he had lived on his own as a part of the branch family. He couldn't even remember the last time someone tried to cheer him up or compliment him like this. Unless you count his very energetic jounin teacher's daily encouragement of “You're very youthful today my prodigy student! Good job!” ending his yell with the usual “nice guy” pose.

After the younger Neji went home, the elder Neji asked his wife, who had been hugging and comforting Hinata this whole time, if he could speak alone with Hinata. Neji found himself a small chair, which he placed in front of her bed, before sitting down on it. Hinata's crying had calmed down a bit, she was still sobbing a little but she was able to keep the tears back. Truth be told, she was a little bit nervous. She had never talked alone in a room with her serious, no nonsense grandfather before.

Neji chuckled at Hinata's curious expression as she stared at him, with her big beautiful purple eyes “You are getting bigger every time I see you, you are the spitting image of Hitomi-san, Hinata” he said in a kind tone, which almost startled Hinata a bit. He didn't usually sound so kind and gentle.

“I've been told that a lot lately” Hinata stuttered, while smiling back at him.

Neji moved his chair closer to the bed, as he stared at Hinata with a more serious expression “Hinata” he said in a low tone “What were you going to tell Hiroshi earlier when we arrived? What did that scum, Nagi, tell you about Hitomi-san?” he asked in a low tone.

It was obvious to Hinata that he didn't want anyone to hear him, as he was making sure to whispers, just in case someone were listening in on them. Hinata had never seen him look this weak before, he looked as if he was having a hard time just keeping himself sitting on that chair. She had also never seem him this worried about her before. The conflict between him and her father was not something that had anything to do with her, and to be perfectly honest, if she had to choose sides, she would pick his over her father's. Especially after what happened today. Hinata told him what Nagi had said earlier, about what he and “the others” had allegedly done with her mother. In Nagi's words that was that he and the others had fucked that “slut” every night back then.

Neji shook his head and sighed, he then stood up by using his cane for support to get up. He walked over to Hinata's window and stared out of it. “There is some truth to what he told you” Neji said in a tired and sad tone.

“No” Hinata said as the tears started falling from her eyes again “My mom wouldn't do something like that” she stuttered.

Neji nodded “Of course not, Hitomi-san was a respectable young woman who was very loyal to Hiashi, who she loved so much. It's only because Hiashi married her, that I let him succeed me as our clan leader. I knew she would be able to keep that scoundrel in line”.

Neji walked back to the chair and sat down again. Hinata stared at him with a confused expression, since Neji was kind of telling her two different things about what happened.

“I said there were some truth to it, I didn't say that it happened” Neji said with a sad expression “Hitomi-san made me promise to never to tell anyone about what happened that night. But I don't think I can keep this from you, not after what happened today, and not as long as those men are still alive, while I'm getting weaker and weaker by every day that passes” Neji continued in a dejected tone.

“What happened, grandfather?” Hinata asked firmly. She wanted to know the truth, no matter how bad it was.

“I will tell you everything, let me start from the beginning...” Neji said in a low tone, then he activated his byakugan eyes to look around inside the house and outside the house, just to make sure no one was eavesdropping on them. He kept his eyes active the whole time he talked, as Hinata listened without interrupting, for the most part.

First, her grandfather told him how grateful he was of Hitomi and how happy he was to have her become his daughter-in-law. Before Hiashi met her, he was what Neji referred to as a “scoundrel” which got a chuckle out of Hinata. Apparently her father had been quite the wannabe womanizer when he was younger. He would often be out late, partying, drinking and flirting with women. Although he never really had any success wooing them women, hence why he was referred to as a wannabe womanizer. Neji who was still the clan leader back then, didn't want to let Hiashi inherit his position until he got his act together. That didn't happen for several years after Hiashi started his ninja career, but then he met Hitomi.

Neji doesn't know all the details of how the two of them got together or how they met. What he knew of Hitomi back then, was that she was a part of the Hyuuga clan and was a member of the main family. Hiashi introduced Hitomi to his parents, very early after the two of them started dating. He fell in love with her right from the get go and wanted her to meet his parents early. The two of them also got engaged early on in their relationship and married a year after. When Hiashi started dating Hitomi, he became less of a scoundrel, even though he was still something of a scoundrel in Neji's opinion, mainly due to his friendship with the village's chief scoundrel, Hiruzen. He got his act together enough that Neji allowed him to become the new clan leader, a year after Hiashi married Hitomi.

Neji was sure that Hitomi was the one that changed Hiashi for the better. He was very grateful to her for all she did for Hiashi and she thought she was the perfect wife for him. He also couldn't ask for a better daughter-in-law, as she was so kind and caring, yet very professional when it came to clan matters and her ninja career.

The Hyuuga clan has always had bad apples like Nagi, even back when he was the clan leader and before that. As soon as Neji became the clan leader of the Hyuuga clan, he started scanning the whole Hyuuga clan compound with his byakugan eyes, every evening, to make sure nothing criminal was happening within his clan compound. He continued that when he met his wife, making sure no scum like Nagi was going to put their hands on her when she is walking home in the evenings. Later on, he also did that whenever he knew that Hitomi was out, watching over her as well.

“Then about two weeks before your mother passed, came that day which was the worst day of my life. I was scanning the village, as I always did when I knew either Hitomi-san or my beloved wife was out. Your mother arrived back at the clan compounds, pretty late in the evening as the sun had started setting. As she was making her way down the road, towards your home, I noticed that she was being followed by a large group of Hyuuga men. The next thing I see is none other than Nagi, grabbing her arm similarly to what he did to you, dragging her away from the road. “ Neji said, which had Hinata gasp. She was starting to think that maybe she shouldn't hear what happened after all, considering how the story started.

Neji was telling the story with an expression of pure rage. He had held in this secret for almost five years. The night that he is talking about, is the very same night when Hitomi came home late, and never told Hiashi about what happened.

“I immediately body flickered (shunshin) over there, only to see all those disgusting lowlifes behind some trees and bushes, ripping off her clothes, as they laughed at her and taunted her, saying they were all gonna have their turn.”

Neji choose to leave out some details such as two of the men having their dicks in Hitomi's face, trying to get them inside her mouth, which she kept shut, by biting down hard. Nagi was in between her legs, pulling down her panties, similarly to what he had done to Hinata earlier today. The rest of the men either watched or helped keeping her down. They weren't able to do more than that to her, before Neji arrived.

“Luckily I was able to stop them before they could go any further. When I got there, I activated my byakugan and got into a fighting stance. When they saw me, they all regretted being born, and they knew that they were dead men. Every single one of them looked like they were going to piss their pants. Those cowardly scum!!” He said angrily

“Your mother also knew that I was going to kill them. Then, I don't know if it was because of her kindness, her forgiving nature, or if she said it to somehow protect her family, what ever it was, she begged me to spare them. It sounds crazy, but what she did may be the reason why the Hyuuga clan is still considered the strongest clan in Konoha, because if I killed all those men that night, we would have lost a lot of strong and powerful Hyuuga men. There weren't exactly fresh genin among that group of rapists, it was experienced jounins, elders and other men with powerful positions within our clan. If I had fought them there and killed them, we might have had a civil war within the clan, starting that night.

I think that may be why she begged me to spare them, she didn't want to destroy our clan. So I did spare them, out of respect to her. But the main reason why she asked me to spare them, probably has to do with one of the men that was with them. Both you and Hitomi knows that man very well, and it was someone that Hitomi didn't want to see killed.".

That confused Hinata, as she couldn't think of anyone who her mother cared about, that was capable of doing something like that. It certainly wasn't her father, even though he is an asshole now, he was a completely different person back then.

Neji continued as Hinata was stuck in her thoughts "I let them live, and I walked Hitomi back to your house. The next day I hear that your mother had gotten sick and has been staying in her bed the whole day. She wouldn't leave her bed for the next two weeks until she eventually passed. I visited her sometimes, even though Hiashi tried to stop me. When we spoke, she made me promise not to tell what happened that night to anyone. She wanted me to take that secret with me to my grave, all just so that the clan can keep it's position in the village as the most powerful clan. She wanted to secure a good future for you and your sister. In hindsight, I think should have never listened to her, I should've killed them all that night. That was my biggest mistake in my life." Neji said in a solemn tone, while he gripped his cane hard in anger.

Back then, when she was sick and didn't leave her bedroom, Hiashi had heard Hitomi scream at Neji, when he was alone with her. Neji had been crying, telling Hitomi that he was going to kill them all. That had caused the Hyuuga matriach to scream out “Don't! Please, Neji-sama!”, as she didn't want their whole clan to get destroyed just because of what happened that night.

"Don't yell, save your energy. You got my word, I won't tell anyone, Hitomi.." he said in a gentle tone as he took her hand in his own. That was when Hiashi entered the room, and demanded to know what that yell was about. That caused another fight with Hiashi and Neji, as Hiashi had gotten the wrong idea about it all. He thought Neji had done something to Hitomi. (2).

Neji continued to tell his story of the events to Hinata "I don't know what caused her illness. I wouldn't be surprised if Hiashi would prove to be right about her being poisoned. He even accused me of doing it. I thought he knew me better than that. Poison is a woman's weapon, it's not something I would use to hurt anyone, especially not someone I love as my own daughter. While she was bedridden, she had many female friends, family, maids, nurses and doctors visiting her. To actually find a possible real culprit, would be like trying to find a needle in a haystack.

Even so, I tried to find the real culprit, I really did try. Unfortunately I never found out if someone poisoned her or who did it. So you see, what Nagi said was not true at all, but they did try..” Nagi ended, sounding very tired and weak as he spoke the last sentence. He then reached for his shirt pocket, taking out a very small piece of paper of it. He then gave it to Hinata. On the small piece of paper, Neji had written over a dozen names, all of which were male members of the Hyuuga clan.

“Read the name at the bottom” Neji said, before standing up.

Hinata gasped. She couldn't believe it. Her other grandfather, her mother's own father, Hyuuga Hiroshi, was on the list.

“That man is sick. He is a twisted pervert and a very evil and dangerous man. He was letting those men force themselves on his own daughter. He was even laughing as it happened” Neji said with a dark expression “And he is most likely the reason those men aren't dead today, as Hitomi showed mercy to her good for nothing father. Remember when you were talking to him earlier, crying into his chest?”

Hinata nodded as tears started falling from her eyes again. Hearing the story of what her mother had gone through made it to hard to keep the tears away.

“He was leering at you the whole time, with that twisted evil smile of his.. I think he and those men might be targetting you next. Nagi's actions is proof of that. Don't let your guard down around him or the others” Neji said as he slowly walked towards the bedroom door. His cane knocking against the floor with every step.

“Whether you believe me or not is up to you. All I ask is that you honor Hitomi-san's wish to keep this secret. Maybe this will motivate you a little, to get revenge on those that has caused our family nothing but pain and suffering. Nothing would make this dying old man happier to see them get what they deserve, and if you were the one to dish out the revenge, that would make everything so much sweeter” Neji opened the door “Good night, Hinata” was the last thing he said before stepping out of her room, closing the door behind him. He also revealed that he was dying, which was the first time he had done so to anyone that isn't his wife. Afterwards, Hinata cried herself to sleep. Even though her younger sister came into her bedroom to sleep next to her in an attempt to calm her down, she continued to cry uncontrolably the whole night.

When she woke up the next day, she and Hanabi found their father in the kitchen. He was staring into a wall, with a dead empty expression. His shirt was still bloody from yesterday as he had slept in his clothes. He had an uneven nose, which made it very obvious that it was broken. Every time he breathed, his nose made this quiet, strange sound.

“He died in his sleep last night. A doctor ninja was able to confirm that it was due to a terminal illness that he has been hiding for us” Hiashi said, his expression unchanged.

“Who died, daddy?” Hanabi asked nervously while tears started falling from Hinata's eyes again. She already knew who had died. He told her that secret just a few hours before he passed. He must have known that he was going to die soon.

“My father” Hiashi choked out, as his daughters saw the man crying, for the first time since Hitomi died.

Footnotes:

1: Kurenai's dress: https://cdn.acidcow.com/pics/20191107/1573148496_89lzsps1r7.jpg

2: The moment that Neji is remembering is one of the scenes from Hinata's backstory in Chapter 3 of this story.

Authors Note: That's the end of another huge chapter, using mostly old scenes from the earlier versions of this story. Initially I planned for this chapter to be the last one before some of the main characters leaves on a certain trip to find Tsunade. It's a trip to the Tanzaki Quarters, which you would be familiar with if you have read any of my other stories, which this story is based on. That didn't happen as you can see, due to this chapter becoming way too long, even though it just covered one day. Then again, the next chapter could have that Tanzaki Quarters trip in it as well, depending on how long that chapter gets before they actually head out.

By now you have probably started to figure out some of the main couples of this story. I have also added more couple tags into the story description. I think those couples are the most obvious ones so far. There might still be a few surprises waiting for you though. Especially in regards to a certain Hyuuga. And I haven't even started writing about some characters who will also find new lovers.

Anyway, hope you enjoyed the new chapter! Please leave a comment or review to let me know what you thought about it!

Chapter Text